[Federal Register Volume 60, Number 246 (Friday, December 22, 1995)]
[Proposed Rules]
[Pages 66582-66703]
From the Federal Register Online via the Government Publishing Office [www.gpo.gov]
[FR Doc No: 95-31040]
[[Page 66581]]
_______________________________________________________________________
Part II
Postal Service
_______________________________________________________________________
39 CFR Part 111
Classification Reform; Implementation Standards; Proposed Rule
Federal Register / Vol. 60, No. 246 / Friday, December 22, 1995 /
Proposed Rules
[[Page 66582]]
POSTAL SERVICE
39 CFR Part 111
Classification Reform; Implementation Standards
AGENCY: Postal Service.
ACTION: Proposed rule.
-----------------------------------------------------------------------
SUMMARY: This represents the third notice concerning Classification
Reform published by the Postal Service for public comment. On June 29
and August 30, 1995, the Postal Service published advance notices of
proposed rulemaking (60 FR 34056-34069 and 60 FR 45298-45323,
respectively). Each provided information about current Postal Service
proposals and decisions regarding prospective rate eligibility and mail
preparation standards, and opportunities for public comment on those
and other important issues related to the Postal Service's pending
MC95-1 Classification Reform proposals. This notice reviews the
preceding months' activity in this regard, presents extensive
discussion of comments received on the second notice, detailed
descriptions of proposals that are new or revised and estimates of
their affect on the mailing community, overview charts to assist
commenters in understanding the implementing standards set forth in the
proposed rule, and the full text of the Domestic Mail Manual standards
the Postal Service proposes to adopt to implement its Classification
Reform proposals.
DATES: Comments on the implementation process or proposed standards
must be received on or before January 22, 1996.
ADDRESSES: Mail or deliver written comments to the Manager, Customer
Mail Preparation, USPS Headquarters, 475 L'Enfant Plaza SW, Room 6830,
Washington DC 20260-2405. Copies of all written comments will be
available at the above address for inspection and photocopying between
9 a.m. and 4 p.m., Monday through Friday.
FOR FURTHER INFORMATION CONTACT: Leo F. Raymond, (202) 268-5199.
SUPPLEMENTARY INFORMATION: On March 24, 1995, pursuant to its authority
under 39 U.S.C. 3621, et seq., the Postal Service filed with the Postal
Rate Commission (PRC) a request for a recommended decision on a number
of mail classification reform proposals. The PRC designated the filing
as Docket No. MC95-1 and proceedings are currently under way before the
PRC in accordance with 39 U.S.C. 3624 and the PRC's rules of practice
under 39 CFR 3001. A notice of the filing, with a description of the
Postal Service's proposals, was published on April 3, 1995, in the
Federal Register by the PRC (60 FR 16888-16893).
On June 29, 1995, the Postal Service published for public comment
in the Federal Register an advance notice of proposed rulemaking (60 FR
34056-34069). That notice included an overview of the Postal Service's
proposals in MC95-1, the process that was used in developing them, and
the instant process being used to prepare for implementation of
classification reform and to begin development of the implementing
standards for future use in the Domestic Mail Manual (DMM). The notice
also contained detailed information about issues that had been
developed for consideration as part of the implementation process,
prepared in a format that paralleled the listing of requirements in the
Domestic Mail Classification Schedule (DMCS) portion of the MC95-1
filing. Among the purposes for publishing the advance notice was the
elicitation of comments on the proposed criteria under consideration
for inclusion in DMM implementing standards, many of which had been
developed with the advice of the Classification Reform Implementation
Advisory Groups (IAGs) convened by the Postal Service as part of the
process described in the notice. Readers who are unfamiliar with the
content of the Postal Service's MC95-1 filing, or the process that is
under way for implementation of MC95-1, should review the June 29
notice.
On August 30, 1995, the Postal Service published for public comment
in the Federal Register a second advance notice of proposed rulemaking
(60 FR 45298-45323). The second notice reported a summary of the
comments received from the earlier notice and invited further comment
from interested parties on updated proposed implementing standards and
on the implementation process generally. Readers were advised that,
following review of comments received for that notice, the Postal
Service would revise its proposed implementation criteria as
appropriate and use them as the basis for the DMM standards it would
propose for adoption if the Classification Reform proposals requested
by the Postal Service in PRC Docket No. MC95-1 are adopted. Those
proposed DMM standards are set forth after the discussion of comments
from the second notice.
Pursuant to 39 U.S.C. 3624, the PRC will issue a recommended
decision on the Postal Service's Request to the Governors of the Postal
Service. This recommendation is expected in January 1996. Pursuant to
39 U.S.C. 3625, the Governors will act on the PRC's recommendations. If
the Governors determine to place the PRC's recommendations into effect,
the Board of Governors will set an implementation date for the rate and
classification changes to take effect. Publication of a notice
announcing the Governors' decision and the issuance of final Domestic
Mail Classification Schedule and Rate Schedule changes will be made
immediately following the Governors' decision. After reviewing the
comments received on this proposed rule in light of the PRC's
recommendations and of the Governors' decision, a final rule will be
published adopting appropriate DMM implementing standards for the rate
and classification changes. Publication of this final rule will be
either concurrent with publication of the Governors' decision or as
soon thereafter as possible.
Part A of this notice summarizes major changes that have been made
to or added to the proposed implementation standards since the second
advance notice of proposed rulemaking. Part B provides an analysis of
comments received on the second notice and the Postal Service
responses. Part C provides a presort summary guide with charts for each
proposed rate. Part D contains a table showing ZIP Codes ineligible for
Automation Carrier Route rates. Part E summarizes proposed changes to
the DMM, followed by the proposed revisions to DMM standards.
A. Major Changes and Additions Since August 30 Notice
This section identifies proposed additions and changes to the DMM
mailing standards that were not specifically indicated in the summary
of preparation standards presented in the August 30 advance notice of
proposed rulemaking. To aid readers in identifying changes which might
affect them, this information is provided in the following subject
matter groups: (1) Changes to the proposed mailing standards described
in the August 30 notice; (2) additional changes for the reformed
subclasses of mail not included in the August 30 notice; (3) changes
generally affecting all classes of mail; (4) changes reflecting planned
adjustments in postal operations; (5) changes affecting address
matching for all classes of mail; (6) changes affecting all third-class
mail; (7) changes affecting nonprofit third-class mail; (8) changes
affecting all second-class mail; (9) changes affecting preferred rate
second-
[[Page 66583]]
class mail; and (10) changes affecting all fourth-class mail. Unless
otherwise stated, the Postal Service proposes to make these changes
effective at the same time as the Classification Reform changes are
implemented.
1. Changes to Mailings Standards Contained in August 30 Notice
a. The proposed requirement to use uniform placement of address
elements within Retail Presort First-Class, Regular and Enchanted
Carrier Route Standard Mail, and nonautomation-compatible Publications
Service Periodicals mailings has been withdrawn.
b. The proposed minimum quantity for a package of automation-
compatible Publications Service letters to qualify for carrier route
rates has been revised from 10 pieces to 6 pieces. This would establish
a standard 6-piece package size for all Publications Service
Periodicals.
c. New sortation criteria have been added for nonautomation-
compatible letters for Publications Service and Regular Periodicals.
The new Publications Service sortation proposal would require
preparation of packages since this mail cannot be processed on
automation. The new sortation criteria for Regular Periodicals
nonbarcoded letters also would require package preparation, and allows
Regular Periodicals to qualify for presort rates in the same manner as
today.
d. Separate sortation criteria have been added for Regular
Periodicals barcoded letters and Regular Periodicals barcoded flats. As
discussed in the section concerning comments on the Periodicals
proposals, Publications Service does not have a separate barcoded rate
and carrier route mail may be counted toward the 85% ZIP+4 or delivery
point barcoded requirement. However, the Regular subclass has separate
3/5 and Basic Barcoded rates. For Postal Service processing efficiency,
Regular Periodicals mailers wishing to qualify for the separate
Barcoded letter and flat rates must prepare separate Barcoded rate
mailings meeting a separate 85% barcoding requirement that does not
include the carrier route portion of the mailing, and that does not
include firm packages. These pieces are excluded because they are not
processed on automation. These new Regular barcoded letter preparation
proposals reflect the new tray sortation levels that will be
implemented with Classification Reform. The current 10-piece 5-digit
package, 50-piece 3-digit package, and 10-piece AADC package standards
are retained to maintain eligibility for the 3/5 Barcoded rates. Since
the proposed Regular Barcoded letter rates do not provide for a
separate 5-digit Barcoded rate and a separate 3-digit Barcoded rate,
but rather a combined 3/5 Barcoded rate, the preparation of all
possible 5-digit packages before preparing 3-digit packages will be
required.
e. Automation-compatible Publications Service letter-size mailings
also have only one rate for noncarrier route sorted mail. Because there
is no separate 5-digit Barcoded rate for this mail, preparation of all
possible 5-digit trays will be required.
f. The presort requirements for Regular Standard Mail letters have
been revised to incorporate a minimum of 150 pieces of mail for a 3-
digit destination to qualify for 3/5 presort rates and to prepare 5-
digit and 3-digit tray levels. This reflects a consistent application
of a 150-piece criterion to qualify for 5-digit and 3-digit rates for
letter mail (with the exception of barcoded Regular Periodicals). This
proposal would also keep qualification levels for 3/5 rates at levels
somewhat equivalent to current preparation standards.
g. Within First-Class and Standard Automation Mail, and automation-
compatible Publications Service letters, a proposed requirement for a
minimum of 150 pieces of mail to an AADC destination before mailers may
prepare an AADC tray has been added. This proposal also reflects the
Postal Service's desire to maintain a consistent 150-piece tray
preparation criteria for barcoded letter mail.
h. A requirement has been added to the proposal that all letter
mail be prepared in trays under the reformed subclasses, including
Enhanced Carrier Route Standard Mail, and Regular and Publications
Service Periodicals. This requirement is discussed in more detail below
in the section on letters.
i. With certain exceptions for local mailings and some pallet
levels, all letter and flat trays containing mail in the reformed
subclasses would have to be sleeved and strapped. This is discussed in
more detail below in the section on letters.
j. The proposed standards have been revised concerning the
preparation of pieces that meet the standards for both letter-size and
automation-compatible flat-size mail, and that are prepared as packages
placed directly on pallets. The revision would limit the amount of
Regular Standard Mail that can be palletized in this manner to 10% of
the total pieces in the mailing job. This is discussed in more detail
below in the section on flats.
k. Because of the differences in presort and rate eligibility
criteria, the proposed option to combine letter-size mailings of
Regular and Publications Service Periodicals has been removed.
l. The provision for local approval to prepare First-Class Mail in
pouches has been removed from the DMM. This provision was primarily to
allow pouching of flat-size pieces and parcels. Because DMM provisions
have been proposed for traying flat-size pieces and sacking First-Class
parcels, the provision for local approval of pouching is no longer
needed.
m. The qualification criteria for Destination Delivery Unit
discounts for Standard Mail and Publications Service Periodicals have
been revised to require that mailers to take carrier route sorted mail
to the postal facility where sequencing of the mail takes place. For
Automation Standard Mail and for automation-compatible carrier route
letter-size Publications Service Periodicals, this could be the
facility where the carrier sequence barcode sorter (CSBCS) that
sequences this mail is located, rather than the facility were the
carrier is located.
n. The proposal to require that addresses in Retail Presort and
Automation First-Class mailings be updated for moves within 6 months of
the mailing has been clarified to indicate that it would become
effective as a rate eligibility requirement beginning 6 months after
Classification Reform implementation, or January 1, 1997, whichever is
sooner.
2. Additional Proposed Changes for Reformed Subclasses Not Specified in
August 30 Notice
a. New sack sortation standards for First-Class parcels have been
added. Because, the preparation of parcels in flats trays is generally
inappropriate, sack preparation criteria have been added for this
processing category of First-Class Mail.
b. Clarification has been added that Publications Service mailings
may include in-county pieces even though such pieces do not count
toward the eligibility requirements for the Publications Service rates.
c. For all mailings under the reformed subclasses, provisions have
been added requiring the preparation of a less-than-full 3-digit tray
for each 3-digit ZIP Code of the SCF that serves the entry post office.
This would allow small quantities of local mail to avoid being
transported to and processed at an ADC or AADC, resulting in better
service and expanding the opportunity for Standard Mail and Periodicals
to obtain destination SCF rates.
d. The rules in this notice reflect the Postal Service's intent to
allow mailers
[[Page 66584]]
to include only pieces with postage affixed at an Automation First-
Class or Standard rate in mailings presented under the value added
refund (VAR) procedures in DMM P014.4. That the relationship between
mailers participating in the VAR process, such as presort bureaus, and
their customers is that letter-size pieces coming into their operations
are intended to be incorporated into the automation mailstream.
Requiring postage to be affixed at an automation rate will simplify the
documentation and verification process for mailers, their customers,
and the Postal Service by reducing the number of different rates for
which value added computations must be made.
3. Proposed Changes That Generally Affect All Classes
a. Marking requirements that reflect the proposed new class and
subclass names have been added throughout the DMM. In order to make it
easier to apply the rate/subclass markings that are planned under
Classification Reform, an option has also been added to allow placement
of these markings on the optional endorsement line, in front of the
package label information. Furthermore, the current required walk-
sequence markings for Regular and Publications Service Periodicals, and
for Automation, Enhanced Carrier Route, and Regular Standard Mail have
been changed from ``WS'' to ``WSH'' or ``WSS'' to facilitate obtaining
separate cost information for pieces mailed at the High Density and
Saturation rates, respectively.
b. Appropriate labeling list information has been added for trays,
sacks, and pallets. The ADC labeling list, DMM L101, proposed in this
notice to apply more generally and not to First-Class Mail only, has
been redesignated accordingly as DMM L004.
c. Provisions have been added to the DMM that require mailings of
different subclasses to be prepared as separate mailings, to meet
separate minimum quantity requirements, and to bear appropriate rate/
subclass markings and appropriate postage.
d. Specific standards have been included in proposed DMM M020 and
M033 about how to place mail in trays, when to package, and what
packaging material is permitted.
e. Pallet preparation rules are also included in this proposal.
These pallet rules reflect the standards contained in a separate,
recently published final rule on pallet preparation that adopts changes
pertaining to the physical characteristics of pallet loads, such as
minimum/maximum height and weight limits, and provisions for triple-
stacking. That final rule is expected to appear in the Federal Register
on December 20, 1995. It adopts changes proposed on July 31, 1995 (60
FR 39080-39088). Although those changes are not affected by the Postal
Service's Classification Reform proposal, they are included in this
proposed rule for providing the entire set of rules on pallets as they
would look like after Classification Reform. The pallet rules in this
proposal also contain proposed DMM standards on levels of pallet
sortation and requirements to prepare pallets of Standard Mail and
Periodicals sorted to the finest levels, which are affected by
Classification Reform. These proposals are open to further comment.
4. Proposed Changes That Reflect Adjustments in Postal Operations
The Postal Service plans to make changes in its processing networks
to reflect changes that have occurred over time, and to implement
improvements to the way it processes and transports mail. One change is
the elimination of the current state distribution center (SDC) network
for non-First-Class letters, flats, and irregular parcels. The Postal
Service plans to eliminate this network and merge the mail currently
processed (SDC, state, and mixed states sorted mail) into the area
distribution center (ADC) network currently used for First-Class Mail.
This change should enhance service for SDC and state mail, provide a
finer breakdown of this mail for more precise sortation and
transportation (the ADC network has more processing centers than the
SDC network), and reduce the redundancies of two overlapping processing
networks. With this change, all letters, flats, and irregular parcels
will be processed on the same network. As a result, the Postal Service
expects to improve service and reduce the handlings for processing this
mail.
The Postal Service also plans to eliminate the current option for
mailers to prepare mail sorted to specific multi-ZIP Coded post offices
(listed in DMM L001). Due to changes in Postal Service operations, this
level of sortation no longer provides additional value to the Postal
Service because most of this mail is now sorted at a mail processing
plant that serves such post offices. The Postal Service has itself
stopped preparing most such sortations. Moreover, the implementation of
letter and flat automation has reduced the need for these separations
because, for this mail, it is more efficient to process larger
quantities of mail made up to fewer sortation levels.
The Postal Service plans to implement the transition from the SDC
network to the ADC network and to eliminate optional city preparation
when it implements the rate and classification changes that result from
Classification Reform. Making all these changes at the same time will
have less impact on postal operations and on mailers than if they were
made in stages. The Postal Service proposes to apply these changes
systemwide to all affected subclasses of mail, both reformed and not,
in order to obtain the maximum benefit. Preferred Rate Periodicals,
however, will retain the option of being prepared in optional city
packages and sacks, because eliminating them could affect qualification
for the Level H rates.
A less-than-systemwide implementation of the ADC network would
compel the Postal Service to maintain SDC, states, and mixed states
processing and optional city preparation for only a portion of the
letter, flat, and irregular parcel mailstreams. This dual system would
complicate processing and would impose unwarranted costs for separate
facilities, equipment, and personnel for a greatly reduced volume of
SDC network mail.
Therefore, the Postal Service proposes to eliminate the optional
city package and sack sortation level and to eliminate the SDC, state,
and mixed states package and sack sortation levels for all current
second- and third-class letters and flats and all current third- and
fourth-class irregular parcels, except Preferred Rate Periodicals,
which will retain the option of being prepared in optional city
packages and sacks. The SDC, state, and mixed states package and sack
sortation levels will be replaced by ADC and mixed ADC package and sack
sortation.
Customers should note that because alignment of the Postal
Service's processing and distribution networks is an ongoing process,
the facilities listed as ADC/AADC destinations at the time that
Classification Reform is implemented might differ from those shown in
the DMM labeling lists contained in this proposal. Some ZIP ranges
might change, and some facilities currently identified as ADC or AADC
destinations might be realigned. The same range of ZIP Codes also might
be assigned to different ADC facilities, depending on the class of
mail.
5. Proposed Changes Affecting Address Matching for All Mail
The Postal Service has also been developing improvements in the
product cycle and the update schedule for its Address Information
System (AIS) products. In conjunction with the
[[Page 66585]]
Classification Reform case, the Postal Service proposed adopting a
bimonthly update frequency for its AIS products. It also proposed
requiring that carrier route information used in qualifying for all
carrier route rates be obtained through a match to a current Carrier
Route Information System (CRIS) scheme or other AIS product that
contains carrier route coding information no more than 90 days before
the date of the mailing. This change is necessary due to the proposed
increase in the issuance cycle of AIS products and the need to
standardize the time frames applicable to the use of those products. A
more detailed discussion of this change is set forth below in the
section on the addressing proposals in the August 30 notice. The Postal
Service proposes to apply these AIS changes to carrier route mailings
of all classes and subclasses. Given the frequency of route adjustments
that will occur over the next few years, maintaining the old matching
schedule for some carrier route mail while changing it for other mail
would be confusing, costly and irrational because of overlapping
required updates.
Mailers at ZIP+4 and Barcoded rates will also be required to use a
current database as defined under new release date schedules when
matching addresses to the ZIP+4 database. Mailings prepared under
subclasses not included under the current proposals for Classification
Reform would need to have their addresses matched to the ZIP+4 database
using CASS- or MASS-certified address matching software once a year,
whereas mailings prepared under the reformed subclasses would need to
have this match performed at least once every 6 months. The frequency
at which address matching software must obtain CASS/MASS certification
also will not change.
6. Changes Affecting All Third-Class Mail
a. Due to the proposed adoption of the name Standard Mail as part
of Classification Reform for all mail currently in third- and fourth-
class mail, the Postal Service proposes to change the class
abbreviations from 3C to STD for sack, tray, and pallet labels for
current third-class mail (which will be known as Standard Mail (A)).
b. To make it easier to apply the rate/subclass markings that are
proposed under Classification Reform, this proposal would allow
Standard mailers the option of placing these markings on the optional
endorsement line, in front of the package label information.
7. Proposed Changes Affecting Nonprofit Third-Class Mail
As a convenience to Nonprofit Standard mailers, the Postal Service
proposes to allow an optional preparation of Nonprofit Standard Mail
under the rate eligibility, presort rules, PAVE-certified presort
software or standardized documentation requirements, and address
quality and accuracy standards for the reformed subclasses. The current
third-class nonprofit rates would apply to such mailings. For example,
mailers could choose to prepare a letter-size Nonprofit 3/5 and Basic
mailing under the preparation rules for the Regular Standard Mail
subclass. This would mean that the addresses would have to be matched
to the correct 5-digit ZIP Code no more than 1 year before the date of
mailing; PAVE-certified software would have to be used to presort the
mailing or standardized documentation would have to be submitted with
the mailing; the pieces would have to be in groups of 150 pieces to a
3-digit area trayed to 5-digit and 3-digit destinations, with the trays
sleeved and strapped. The current nonprofit third-class 3/5 rates would
apply to groups of 150 pieces for a 3-digit area properly presorted
under the Regular Standard Mail standards. Preparation of Nonprofit
Standard Mail under the rules for Regular, Automation, or Enhanced
Carrier Route Standard Mail would also enable it to be combined
(comailed) with mailings of those subclasses.
8. Proposed Changes Affecting All Current Second-Class Mail
a. Due to the change in the name of second-class mail that is
proposed with implementation of Classification Reform, the Postal
Service proposes to change the class abbreviations from 2C or NEWS to
PERIOD or NEWS, as applicable, for sack, tray, and pallet labels for
all Periodicals, including Preferred Rate Periodicals. In addition, the
mail processing category of the mail will be required to follow the
class abbreviation on the second line of the sack or tray label, making
those standards for Periodicals consistent with other classes of mail,
and assist Postal Service mail processing personnel in directing
containers of Periodicals to the proper operation.
b. The Periodicals imprints required as part of the identification
statement would be changed from ``Second-Class Postage Paid at * * *''
and ``Application to Mail at Second-Class Postage Rates is Pending at *
* *'' to ``Periodicals Postage Paid at * * *'' and ``Application to
Mail at Periodicals Postage Rates is Pending at * * *.''
9. Proposed Changes Affecting Preferred Rate Second-Class Mail
As a convenience to Preferred Rate Periodicals mailers, the Postal
Service proposes to allow the optional preparation of Preferred Rate
Periodicals under the presort and eligibility rules for Regular
Periodicals (including addressing and PAVE-certified or standardized
documentation standards). The current second-class preferred rates
would apply to such mailings. For example, if a mailer chose to prepare
a letter-size Nonprofit Level G and H mailing under the preparation
rules for the Regular Periodicals 3/5 and Basic rates, the pieces would
have to be trayed, sleeved, and strapped, and optional city and
optional SCF sortations could not be performed. The Level H rates would
apply only to 5-digit and unique 3-digit packages properly sorted to 5-
digit and 3-digit trays.
10. Proposed Changes Affecting All Current Fourth-Class Mail
Due to the change in the name of fourth-class mail that is proposed
with implementation of Classification Reform, the Postal Service
proposes to change the class abbreviations from 4C to STD 4C for sack
labels for fourth-class mail (which will be known as Standard Mail
(B)), and to change the rate markings ``Special Fourth-Class'' and
``Presorted Special Fourth-Class'' to ``Special Standard Mail'' and
``Presorted Special Standard Mail'' to agree with the revised names for
these types of mail.
B. Summary of Comments From Second Notice
The Postal Service received 49 pieces of correspondence offering a
total of 207 comments on the August 30 notice. Respondents included
major mailer associations, individual publishers, printers, presort
bureaus, mailers, and private citizens. As with the first notice, the
comments do not lend themselves to easy categorization or direct
association with specific provisions in the second notice. Rather,
commenters tended to speak to general areas of concern, such as
automation, or to common aspects of several proposed criteria, such as
tray volumes for several different presort levels. Although the
proposals were replicated in the second notice in the same format as in
the first, comments tended to aggregate these into a single response.
The largest single area to which comments were directed in general
was
[[Page 66586]]
the preparation of automation mail (First-Class Mail and Standard
Mail); approximately 70 comments discussed issues in that area.
Addressing issues were the focus of 28 comments, although other
comments mentioned addressing issues to a degree. Publications Service
was the subject of 13 comments. Nonautomation First-Class (Retail
subclass) and Standard Mail (Regular and Enhanced Carrier Route
subclasses) received a total of 2 and 27 comments, respectively.
Another 26 comments discussed general issues, including some (like the
wisdom of classification reform) that are beyond the scope of this
rulemaking. The specific points raised in the comments are presented
below, organized by subject areas represented by the Implementation
Advisory Groups (IAGs): letters, flats, addressing, and publications.
Miscellaneous issues are reported thereafter. Readers are invited to
comment on the proposed DMM provisions and to identify additional
proposals or issues that warrant inclusion in Classification Reform
implementation plans.
1. General Comments
a. Minimum Quantity Requirements
One commenter asked whether separate 200-piece minimums will be
required for each Standard Mail subclass when the mailings are
commingled on pallets. Each subclass of Standard Mail (Automation,
Enhanced Carrier Route, and Regular) will be required to meet a
separate 200-piece minimum quantity requirement, and each subclass of
First-Class Mail (Automation and Retail) will have to meet a separate
500-piece minimum quantity requirement.
b. Definitions of Mailing and Mailing Job
One commenter requested clarification of what a mailing and a
mailing job will be under Classification Reform. This commenter noted
that because the Postal Service indicated that it will allow mailings
of different subclasses to be claimed on the same mailing statement,
that the current axiom that ``a mailing statement equals a mailing''
cannot be used. This commenter also requested a definition of a mailing
job as used in the description of when pieces meeting the standards for
both letter-size and barcoded flat-size pieces may be prepared as
packages on pallets. He specifically asked whether there will be time
limits such as a day, week, or month for a mailing job.
A mailing may include only one subclass and only one mail
processing category (e.g., letter, flat) and is reported on a mailing
statement. A mailing job, defined by the mailer and agreed to by the
local business mail entry unit, contains the total pieces meant to be
mailed to a defined set of addresses. A mailing job may contain more
than one mailing (e.g. more than one subclass).
c. Presort Accuracy Validation and Evaluation (PAVE)
The Postal Service has proposed to require use of PAVE-certified
software or standardized documentation when preparing mailings under
any of the reformed subclasses. Nine comments were received regarding
this proposal, five of which included requests for clarification of
standards.
Two commenters wanted a definition of ``standardized
documentation'' and examples of any required documentation along with
more clearly defined requirements. One asked whether PAVE certification
will be available before the implementation of Classification Reform. A
commenter that uses software developed in-house asked how the
requirement for PAVE certification affects in-house software developers
and requested further clarification of PAVE. Another commenter
expressed concerns about documenting overflow trays and requested
clarification of content documentation for allowed overflow trays.
A utility company said that it would like uniform requirements for
mailing documentation and a single computerized mailer file, possibly
accessible by permit number, that would document Postal Service
certification of software and mailing processes. A second utility
company believed that CASS, which focuses on address quality, and PAVE
are duplicative in nature and suggested that public utility mailers who
use CASS-certified software and update customer moves within the
prescribed time frame should be exempt from the requirement to use PAVE
software.
PAVE and CASS are not duplicative. CASS tests the ability of
address matching software to match addresses correctly to the Postal
Service ZIP+4 database and to apply proper barcodes. PAVE tests the
ability of presort software to sort addresses correctly according to
Postal Service sortation requirements and to produce accurate presort
and postage documentation and accurate mailing statement facsimiles.
The Postal Service plans to have PAVE testing available for all
reformed subclasses prior to implementation of Classification Reform.
PAVE certification does not remove the requirement to submit
documentation with each mailing where documentation is required. This
is because PAVE tests the ability of the software program to sort
properly, but does not test the mailer's proper use of it or
application of proper mailing parameters to each mailing. PAVE also
tests the ability to prepare properly formatted mailing statement
facsimiles. The Postal Service also plans to make production of
standard documentation a requirement for PAVE certification. Software
that is developed in-house may be PAVE-certified. Requests for PAVE
certification information and tests should be directed to: PAVE
Program, National Customer Support Center, United States Postal
Service, 6060 Primacy Pky Ste 101, Memphis TN 38188-0001
Mailers will have the choice of using either PAVE-certified
software or standardized documentation, regardless of whether they use
presort software. Therefore, mailers not using software to sort their
mail will not need to meet the PAVE requirements. However, such mailers
must be able to present standardized documentation for those mailings
that require documentation. Standardized documentation requirements are
still being developed and will be published for comment in a separate
proposed rule. The Postal Service expects to publish this proposal in
the Federal Register by early February 1996. Questions concerning
whether overflow trays will need to be documented also will be
addressed in that notice.
The request for a single computerized mailer file, possibly
accessible by permit number, that would document Postal Service
certification of software and mailing processes is more related to a
system certification approach to mail acceptance. Although this is an
idea that will be considered for the future, it will not be developed
and deployed by the time of Classification Reform implementation.
2. Automation Subclasses
a. 100% Barcoding
The Postal Service has proposed that First-Class and Standard Mail
Automation subclasses be composed of 100% delivery point barcoded
pieces for letters and 100% ZIP+4 barcoded or delivery point barcoded
pieces for flats. Fifteen commenters responded to the proposal for 100%
barcoding.
Three commenters supported this proposal because it promotes higher
quality addresses. Four commenters
[[Page 66587]]
indicated that they cannot obtain 100% barcoding of their mailing
lists. Six commenters expressed doubts that the goal could be achieved
because current matching software is too restricted from making matches
to the ZIP+4 file and because data missing from the file prevents a
match.
Mailers with good quality addresses can obtain delivery point
barcodes on their mailpieces. If they cannot, those pieces can be
mailed at the appropriate subclass rates for nonbarcoded mail. Having
identified a need for accurate barcodes to ensure proper automated
sortation, the Postal Service tests and certifies address matching
software to ensure that the software is producing correct barcodes.
Because only correct barcodes are acceptable, software is controlled to
help ensure that a barcode will not be applied if an incomplete or
otherwise poor quality address inhibits reliable coding. The Postal
Service is proposing reduced postage rates for mail with correct
barcodes. Those rates were not designed to apply to nonbarcoded mail or
to mail with incorrect barcodes. Incorrect barcodes cause misdirected
mailpieces, in turn causing increased costs and reducing the Postal
Service's ability to provide timely, consistent delivery service. To
aid mailers with barcoding, the Postal Service already has a variety of
tools for improving address quality. If the mailer cannot use CASS- or
MASS-certified software to successfully barcode some of its mail (with
a delivery point barcode or, for flats, a correct ZIP+4 barcode), the
mailer will be required to mail those pieces at the Retail First-Class
or Regular Standard rates.
One commenter wanted Address Element Correction extended to small
mailers. The current limit is 10,000 address records. However, smaller
lists may be acceptable. Interested mailers should call the National
Customer Support Center at (800) 238-3150. The National Customer
Support Center can also provide information on a variety of other
address quality improvement products and services.
Four commenters indicated that improvements in address correction
service are needed, one of whom stated that carriers often do not
provide address corrections if they can deliver the mailpiece. Although
changes to address correction service are beyond the scope of this
rulemaking, the Postal Service is mindful of the need for quality
address corrections, especially to addresses beyond those corrections
generated by a change of address order.
One commenter wanted confirmation that the 100% delivery point
barcoding requirement applies to bulk outgoing mailings and not
courtesy reply, business reply, and Business Reply Mail Accounting
System (BRMAS) mail. The 100% delivery point barcoding requirement for
letters applies only to letter-size mailings entered as Automation
First-Class Mail or Standard Mail. Under Classification Reform, BRMAS
mail will continue to be required to bear a ZIP+4 barcode assigned by
the Postal Service. However, as part of Classification Reform, the
Postal Service does plan to implement a requirement that, by January 1,
1997, all reply letters and cards included as enclosures to Automation
subclass mailings must bear a proper facing identification mark (FIM)
and correct barcode. This would apply to courtesy reply mail and
current non-BRMAS business reply mail. A further discussion of this
requirement is in a later section of these comments.
One commenter requested that 5-digit and unique ZIP+4 codes be
permitted to qualify as a delivery point barcode so as not to limit
internal sorting opportunities. Another commenter wanted continued
acceptance of unique 5-digit and ZIP+4 barcodes at barcoded rates,
stating that software can recognize and count these barcodes as
delivery point barcodes.
Currently, barcodes must be 11-digit delivery point barcodes in
order to qualify for letter-size barcoded rates. Although unique 5-
digit and certain ZIP+4 codes may represent the final delivery point
for some mailpieces, it would not be possible to determine at the time
of acceptance whether a 5-digit or ZIP+4 barcode was a unique barcode
or a coding error if they were permitted in mailings. Furthermore,
CASS- or MASS-certified software is capable of returning 11-digit
delivery point barcodes for unique ZIP Codes and ZIP+4 codes.
Accordingly, the Postal Service plans to retain the requirement that
only 11-digit delivery point barcodes may qualify for Automation
subclass rates for letter-size pieces. Mailers wishing to utilize
internal sortation abilities by assigning their own 4-digit add-on
codes to unique 5-digit ZIP Codes may do so if they have the ZIP+4
codes added to the Postal Service ZIP+4 database. To have internal
ZIP+4 codes added to the ZIP+4 database, the mailer must develop
rational internal addresses to be matched to a particular ZIP+4 add-on
in a rational manner, and have the address configuration and +4 codes
approved by the district address management office. There will be one
exception to the 11-digit delivery point barcode rule: courtesy reply
mail bearing a FIM and a preapplied unique 5-digit or unique ZIP+4
barcode will be considered to have a proper delivery point barcode and
will not be counted as an error at acceptance. Because of the FIM, this
mail can be easily identified at acceptance.
Four commenters indicated that splitting their mail lists into two
separate mailstreams, one with delivery point barcodes and one without,
will increase their mail preparation expenses. One of these commenters
was concerned that the separate mailstreams will slow their processes,
resulting in some mail having to be remetered. This commenter requested
that an extra day on meter dates be given so that mailers can use
encoding systems to barcode mail initially rejected from multiline
optical character readers (MLOCRs). DMM P030.4.12 currently contains
procedures to allow mailers to correct meter dates. This may be done
either by remetering the mail with a ``.00'' meter impression in
authorized locations or by using an ink jet printer to apply the
correct meter date, city, state, and 3-digit ZIP Code of the office of
mailing, preceded by two asterisks, above the address and below the
meter impression. Because meter dates are used to measure Postal
Service service performance and because mail recipients rely on them to
indicate the date of mailing, an option of submitting mail with a stale
meter date will not be provided.
One commenter stated that the 100% delivery point barcoding
requirement should be deleted to prevent nonqualifying mail from
flooding post offices at the single-piece rates. Two commenters
indicated that this requirement will result in more residual mail being
processed at origin. One commenter stated that the cost-effectiveness
of point-of-origin MLOCR processing of nondelivery point barcoded mail
is overstated because the Postal Service is still using multiposition
letter sorting machines (MPLSMs). One commenter indicated that this
requirement should not be implemented until the Postal Service is in a
``full-up'' environment for equipment deployment. One commenter stated
that this requirement might have the effect of third-class mailers
removing uncodable names from their advertising lists, resulting in
decreased revenue for the mailer and the Postal Service. Two commenters
requested that the 100% barcoding requirement be phased in. One
commenter indicated that 90% barcoding would be a more realistic
requirement and would be more in keeping with the concept of lowest
combined cost.
As indicated in the comment response section of the August 30
notice, when
[[Page 66588]]
mailers mix delivery point barcoded mail and nondelivery point barcoded
mail within the 3-digit and residual portions of their barcoded rate
mailings, as is currently permitted, the nondelivery point barcoded
mail is rejected from barcode sorters and must be rerun on MLOCRs or
MPLSMs. (Mail presorted to 5-digit packages and trays must currently be
100% delivery point barcoded.) Requiring mailers to prepare a separate
mailing for nondelivery point barcoded mail eliminates these extra
handlings and allows this mail to be directed properly from the start,
resulting in more efficient Postal Service processing. These
efficiencies are recognized in the lower Automation subclass rates
proposed under Classification Reform. Furthermore, the Postal Service
put mailers on notice several years ago that, in the near future, the
Postal Service would require a 100% barcoded mailstream. Accordingly,
the Postal Service does not believe that phasing in this requirement is
appropriate.
If the 100% barcoding requirement results in more nonbarcoded mail
presented for OCR processing at the origin post office, the Postal
Service believes that it has the operational capacity to process this
mail. Furthermore, because the origin post office will not have to OCR-
process the current volume of mailer-prepared pieces without delivery
point barcodes (that are rejected from that plant's barcode sorters),
there should be an offsetting lessening of mail volume presented to a
plant's OCRs for processing. The fact that the Postal Service is still
using MPLSMs and has not deployed all its planned barcode sorting
equipment does not negate the operational advantages for the majority
of plants where MLOCRs and barcode sorters are in place. The processing
efficiencies that the Postal Service will gain from a 100% barcoded
mailstream are reflected in the lower rates proposed for the Automation
subclasses. In return for the lower rates proposed for Automation
subclass mail, mailers will have to perform the additional work of
separating nondelivery point barcoded mail and presenting it as a
separate mailing under different subclass requirements. If mailers
remove uncodable names from their address lists, it is not certain that
net revenue will be lost by either the mailers or the Postal Service.
It is probable that many addresses for which delivery point barcodes
cannot be obtained would be undeliverable. If sent as Standard Mail,
these pieces would not be delivered. If sent as First-Class Mail, these
pieces would add costs to the Postal Service to determine the delivery
point and forward the mail to that point or return the pieces as
undeliverable-as-addressed mail.
One commenter wanted to know whether 98% barcoding would be the
actual requirement when tolerances for mailer errors are taken into
consideration, and another commenter wanted to know the error tolerance
level. In terms of tolerance for mailer error, at least initially, it
is planned that Automation subclass letter mail will be subject to the
current business mail entry unit acceptance procedures. If pieces in
the sample selected during verification of Automation subclass mailings
are found not to bear a delivery point barcode, these pieces will be
counted as errors. When the acceptable tolerance for all presort errors
is surpassed, the mailer will be given the same two choices currently
available: (1) Take the mailing back, correct it, and resubmit it to
the Postal Service; or (2) pay additional postage at the appropriate
rate for the proportion of the mailing found to be in error during the
verification process.
One commenter requested that the Postal Service provide delivery
performance data to all mailers so that they can measure process
changes. This comment is beyond the scope of this proposed rule and
will not be addressed here.
b. Courtesy and BRM Barcoded Envelopes
Seven commenters had questions or cited concerns about the proposed
requirement that courtesy and business reply letters or cards included
in an Automation First-Class or Standard mailing must be automation-
compatible and bear a FIM and a correct barcode for the address to
which the piece is returned.
One commenter said that this new requirement was unneeded,
reasoning that business reply mail does not pose a major problem
because the Postal Service provides automation-compatible, camera-ready
addresses for mailpieces and also places restrictions on how reply mail
can be used. Four commenters questioned the relationship of enclosed
pieces to host pieces. One questioned whether requirements for an
enclosed First-Class piece are relevant to an outgoing third-class
piece because the processing costs are independent. A second commenter
asked why a barcoded return piece could disqualify an outgoing piece
and also questioned the Postal Service's ability to administer the
rule. This commenter and one other said that they were confused about
the requirements concerning barcodes that appear through a window.
Another felt that the requirement is content-based in nature.
Other concerns were also raised. For example, one commenter was of
the opinion that the proposal penalizes the wrong party when a client
has a mailing that contains ``partner'' reply pieces for which printing
and return postage is paid by a third party. An owner of a lettershop
said that his customers should have a choice whether to barcode reply
pieces. A state agency said that it is not possible for government
agencies using courtesy reply mail to stock and insert the number of
different preprinted envelopes that would be required by this rule. The
commenter went on to say that software would have to be developed and,
if the proposal were adopted, the lead time needed before
implementation would have to be long. Two commenters whose concerns
pertained to the timing of the requirement agreed with the Postal
Service's proposal for a phased implementation. One commenter urged the
Postal Service to remove the requirement that the barcode ``match'' the
address on the reply piece because the printed address plays no role in
the delivery of an automation-compatible reply piece. This commenter
indicated that flexibility is needed when business growth requires more
than one fulfillment location for the same business entity.
The Postal Service is retaining its proposal that reply letters and
cards that are included within either letter-size or flat-size
mailpieces entered as Automation First-Class and Standard mailings must
be automation-compatible and bear a FIM and a correct barcode for the
reply address. In addition to the customer convenience of a reply
vehicle, increasing the use of barcoded reply vehicles is expected to
keep postage rates down by making this mail more efficient to process.
Moreover, because Automation mailers have the demonstrated ability to
prepare automation-compatible barcoded mailpieces, they should be able
to prepare barcoded reply pieces with ease.
The Postal Service recognizes that mailers will need to work with
their customers, and possibly modify their contracts with advertisers
and others to ensure that this requirement is met. To allow time for
this and for utilization of existing reply mail stock, the Postal
Service is proposing an implementation date for this requirement of
January 1, 1997. At that time, mailers of Automation First-Class and
Standard
[[Page 66589]]
Mail will be required to certify that enclosed reply pieces are
properly prepared when the mailing is presented to the post office. For
this purpose, the mailer is defined as the party who presents the mail
to the post office.
The barcode on reply mail must match the address. A piece with a
nonconforming address could be mistakenly forwarded to the printed
address rather than delivered to the address represented by the
barcode. Accordingly, the mail could be misdelivered or incur
additional processing and transportation costs if the barcode and
address do not match.
The Postal Service will provide free of charge camera-ready
positives of appropriate FIMs and correct barcodes for the production
of reply mail pieces. Mailers should contact their local Postal Service
account representatives or postal business centers to obtain the
positives and additional information on preparation standards.
Obtaining the correct barcode for mailpieces is extremely important.
The Postal Service assigns ZIP+4 barcodes to BRMAS reply pieces.
Publication 353, Designing Reply Mail, contains information on
correctly preparing barcoded courtesy reply mail and business reply
mail. DMM S922 contains additional information on business reply mail.
c. Barcoded Tray Labels
The Postal Service proposes that Automation First-Class and
Standard Mail and Publications Service Periodicals must be prepared
with barcoded tray or sack labels. Nine comments were received
concerning this proposal.
One of the commenters expressed outright support and another said
that if the Postal Service plans to provide preprinted barcoded tray
labels, they have no problem with the proposal but would like to have
this expressly confirmed. Five commenters wanted the requirement to use
barcoded labels phased in or made optional. Two commenters indicated
that they would have to buy new equipment to produce the labels.
The Postal Service plans to require the use of barcoded tray and
sack labels on barcoded mailings with implementation of Classification
Reform. Use of barcoded tray labels speeds the processing of First-
Class Mail at the ``scan where you band'' step of the presort breakdown
operation. Barcoded labels will also be used to sort trays of Standard
Mail at BMCs. Finally, barcoded tray labels will be an integral part of
the planned tray management system. Barcoded tray labels are currently
being scanned on existing tray management systems at several plants.
The Postal Service will supply barcoded tray and sack labels.
Customers must complete Form 1578-B and submit it to the business mail
entry unit to order barcoded labels from the Postal Service. The labels
will be delivered in approximately 6 weeks. Alternatively, mailers
having a personal computer and modem can obtain free Passport software
from the Postal Service to order labels directly. In addition, the
Passport system allows mailers to print barcoded labels on demand if
they use a Monarch 9425, Monarch 9445, or Intermac 3000 printer. The
Passport system also includes free updates to the DMM labeling lists.
Passport software or further information about Passport may be obtained
from the National Customer Support Center at (800) 238-3150.
3. Letter Mail
a. Automation (Barcoded) Carrier Route Rates
The Postal Service is proposing to limit Carrier Route Automation
rates to ZIP Codes where mail will be sequenced either manually or by a
carrier sequence barcode sorter (CSBCS). Four commenters opposed the
limits on eligibility for Carrier Route Automation rates. Two of these
commenters believed that this requirement should be removed because it
seemed to represent the inability of the Postal Service to provide
necessary equipment on a national basis. One commenter was concerned
that the Postal Service is penalizing mailers based on the geography of
the mailings lists, something the mailer cannot change.
The limits on the availability of Carrier Route Automation letter
rates are necessary for efficient Postal Service processing. For an
increasing number of 5-digit ZIP Code areas, the Postal Service sorts
mail to delivery point sequence (DPS), the sequence in which carriers
deliver the mail, using two passes on delivery barcode sorters (DBCSs).
Where this takes place, the carrier does not have to sort this mail
manually into delivery or walk sequence, which saves carrier in-office
time. At postal facilities where DPS processing is being performed, it
is to the Postal Service's advantage to have as much mail as possible
DPS processed on the automated equipment. Currently, at 5-digit ZIP
Code areas for which DPS processing on DBCSs has been implemented, all
mailer-prepared carrier route and walk-sequence presorted letter mail
received with barcodes is processed on DBCSs rather than directed to
carriers for manual sequencing. Carrier route and walk-sequence sorted
letter mail without barcodes is directed to MLOCRs for application of
barcodes and subsequent DPS processing. In many cases, this process
results in the Postal Service backflowing mail from a delivery unit to
the place where the DBCS or MLOCR is located. Thus, there is no
additional value provided to the Postal Service by mailer presortation
to carrier route or walk-sequence versus a 5-digit presortation for
automation-compatible letter mail at destinating DBCS sites.
Carrier route discounts are based in part on steps avoided by the
Postal Service during processing. Carrier route presorted mail needs
only the final step of sortation into the sequence of carrier delivery.
When the Postal Service sequences mail using DBCSs at general mail
facilities (GMFs), presortation by the mailer to carrier route groups
is not needed. Therefore, for those 5-digit ZIP Code areas sequenced on
DBCSs, presortation to carrier routes by the mailer saves no processing
steps for the Postal Service and is no longer going to be either
permitted or encouraged by a discount. Accordingly, even though this
process means that Automation Barcoded rates will be based in part on
geography, the Postal Service will not give reduced rates for mail
preparation that provides the Postal Service no value. Therefore, under
Classification Reform, Carrier Route Automation rates will not be
provided to barcoded carrier route mail at those 5-digit ZIP Code areas
where DPS sequencing is performed on DBCSs. This is not a matter of the
inability of the Postal Service to provide necessary equipment on a
national basis. Rather, it is at those places where the Postal Service
has deployed DBCS equipment and has implemented DPS processing that
carrier route rates will be restricted.
CSBCSs are smaller barcode sorting machines that also sequence mail
to delivery point. However, mail must already be sorted to the carrier
route level before it can be processed on a CSBCS. Therefore, it will
still be useful for the Postal Service to offer carrier route discounts
for barcoded mail that it sorts on CSBCSs and for mail on carrier
routes that are sequenced manually.
One of the commenters indicated that matching mail to a list of
places where Carrier Route Automation rates can and cannot be obtained
is an additional processing step and therefore a financial burden to
mailers, particularly when the Postal Service plans to revise the list
periodically. Matching mailing lists with a list of ZIP Codes where
Carrier Route Automation rates are not
[[Page 66590]]
available should not be a significant burden to mailers. This list will
be provided to software vendors and mailers as part of the City/State
file provided with the CRIS and ZIP+4 database updates. It will be up
to each mailer to make the decision whether the level of discount is
worth the expense of preparing the mail in this manner.
Two commenters asked for the expected list. One requested that the
list be broken down by 3-digit ZIP Code areas and the relative volume
of addresses for each ZIP Code. The preliminary list available at this
time, printed as part of this notice, is grouped by 3-digit ZIP Code
and then in ascending numeric order by 5-digit ZIP Code. This list of
ZIP Codes where the Carrier Route Automation rates are not available
has also been placed on the Postal Service Rapid Information Bulletin
Board System (RIBBS). Mailers will need to match their address lists
against the list of ineligible ZIP Codes to determine their own levels
of qualification. When doing so, however, mailers should also keep in
mind that this preliminary list does not represent the list of
ineligible ZIP Codes that will be in effect at the time of
implementation. The list will change as barcode sorting equipment is
deployed to the field and DPS processing is implemented. Information
about the City/State file that contains the eligible/ineligible ZIP
Code information and a printed list of these ZIP Codes will be provided
in the final rule.
Two commenters were concerned with the update frequency. One
commenter opposed updates as frequent as monthly and suggested that the
list of 5-digit areas for which Carrier Route Automation rates are
available should be provided on the CRIS files. One commenter simply
wanted information on how frequent the updates will be and how the
information will be provided. As indicated above, information on the
ZIP Codes where these rates will/will not apply will be identified in
the Postal Service City/State product. Updates to the ZIP Codes where
carrier route rates are available for letters will occur with the same
frequency that CRIS and ZIP+4 databases are updated. Mailers will be
required to incorporate this information into their mailings no more
than 90 days before the date of mailing using a current City/State
file.
b. 150-Piece/Full Tray Requirement
Fourteen commenters voiced concern over the proposal to require 150
pieces per 5-digit or 3-digit ZIP Code destination to qualify for 5-
digit or 3-digit Automation barcoded rates for letters.
The proposed mailing standards in this notice reflect the Postal
Service's desire to maintain a consistent standard of 150 pieces per
rate qualification level for 5-digit and 3-digit Automation subclass
letter rates. However, the Postal Service recognizes that this might be
an issue for some Standard mailers. As noted below, several commenters
pointed out that some Standard mailers may experience a rate increase
as a result of Classification Reform because of the higher 150-piece
qualification standard and the fact that not all 5-digit ZIP Codes may
qualify for carrier route rates. Other commenters have argued that
pieces in a physically full tray should qualify for the rate. Although
the rules in this notice reflect retention of the 150-piece
qualification standard, based on the mailer comments discussed below,
the Postal Service is seeking additional information on the impact of
allowing a physically full tray to qualify for rates as an alternative
to the 150-piece standard. The Postal Service is asking that affected
mailers provide information on the thickness of various mailings that
they produce and might wish to qualify under a physically full tray
eligibility standard. Because of the desire not to reduce the number of
pieces to a destination more than necessary, mailers would likely have
to physically fill a 2-foot tray to qualify for a rate if a physically
full tray rule were implemented. Also, in the interest of making it
easy to verify such mailings, documentation listing each tray in the
mailing along with the number of pieces contained in each tray would
likely be required if such a rule were implemented. The Postal Service
is asking that mailers who want a rate eligibility standard based on
physically full trays provide additional information indicating how
they will be affected as part of their comments to this notice.
Particularly, information is sought about the usual thickness of
pieces, how many can be put in a tray, whether the mailer has the
ability to prepare full 2-foot trays, whether the mailer can or cannot
provide overflow trays, and what type of documentation can be provided.
A discussion of all the comments follows.
Nine commenters requested that the requirement be changed from 150
pieces to 150 pieces or a physically full tray. One commenter indicated
that different qualification levels are needed for First-Class Mail and
Standard Mail because Standard Mail is inherently thicker than First-
Class Mail. One commenter indicated that accommodating MLOCR users by
imposing the 150-piece rule unfairly penalized Standard mailings that
can meet full tray requirements with fewer than 150 pieces. Another
commenter argued that because 150 average-weight Standard Mail pieces
cannot fit into a 1-foot tray, the Postal Service should adopt a ``full
tray'' requirement instead of its proposed 150-piece qualification.
However, this commenter did not recognize that this thicker mail does
not need to be prepared in 1-foot trays because both 1- and 2-foot
trays may be used to prepare letter mailings and overflow trays are
permitted.
The 150-piece minimum represents the average number of letter-size
pieces that can fill \3/4\ of a 1-foot tray. Under the proposal, the
150-piece average is applied uniformly to determine both the rate
qualification and the particular sortation level of tray for presort.
The requirement applies rates to tray levels and eliminates the
preparation of packages within full trays. The Postal Service also
desires to apply rates on an equal basis to all mailers. Accordingly,
the application of the 150-piece standard allows card-size or other
thin pieces to qualify for rates in the same way that thicker pieces
can qualify. The application of a 150-piece standard with the use of
overflow trays also makes it easier for mailers whose mailings are made
up of pieces having different thicknesses, such as MLOCR users, to
determine when a rate qualification level has been met, and assists
such mailers to complete a mailing statement.
The 150-piece standard also facilitates acceptance and verification
by applying a single standard and method of documentation to all
mailings within the subclass. The Postal Service also expects to
achieve efficiencies by having only one method of preparing mailings
for Automation subclass letter rates for both First-Class and Standard
Mail. Currently, there are three separate methods for presorting
barcoded letter mail, which lead to 17 different possible tray
configurations for barcoded letter mail. Having a single method of
preparation that requires only four tray levels for the noncarrier
route portion will simplify postal operations as well as mailer
preparation requirements.
One third-class mailer association stated that the restrictions on
Carrier Route Automation rate availability will cause more mail to
default to the 5-digit and 3-digit sortation levels. This association
further commented that because of the 150-piece minimum for the 5-digit
Barcoded rate, most of this previously carrier route sorted mail will
fall to 3-digit Barcoded rates, significantly increasing postage for
Automation Standard mailers. This commenter was further concerned that
this move from carrier route sortation to
[[Page 66591]]
3-digit sortation would affect the service for Standard Mail.
The rate structure for Automation subclass letters would provide
significantly reduced rates for barcoded mailings. Those rates are
based, in part, on more stringent preparation standards that allow more
efficient Postal Service processing of that mail. Under the proposed
Automation Standard Mail (A) letter rates, certain mailers could
experience a minor increase in postage over what they pay today,
assuming that all mail not eligible for a carrier route rate moves to
the 3-digit Barcoded rate level and that there are neither Basic rate
pieces in the mailing nor pieces currently qualifying for 3-digit
Barcoded rates that would continue to qualify for 3-digit rates under
the new standards. However, any such potential increase would be offset
by savings from pieces in the mailing that could qualify for 5-digit
Barcoded rates and pieces that now qualify for 3-digit Barcoded rates
and would continue to do so under Classification Reform. This
theoretical postage increase would also be offset by pieces that the
mailer now qualifies for basic rates, because of a significant decrease
in the Basic Automation rates under Classification Reform. A mailer's
cost to prepare Automation mail is also expected to decline because of
the elimination of package preparation in full trays.
With reference to the concern over degradation of service for
pieces moving from carrier route sortation to 3-digit sortation,
established postal operating plans are designed to achieve stated
service commitments, regardless of the level of sortation of the mail.
Two commenters who mail both First- and third-class mail indicated
that 95% of their letter mail that now qualifies for 5-digit Barcoded
rates will move to 3-digit Barcoded rates. One commenter indicated that
70% of his mail now qualifying for 5-digit Barcoded rates will move to
the 3-digit qualification level. One commenter indicated that the loss
of presort and associated discounts could cause his company to stop
offering credit cards to their customers due to the anticipated
increase in postage for the credit card bills. One commenter stated the
belief that if his mail could not be sorted to qualify for the 5-digit
or 3-digit Barcoded rates, the 30-cent Retail Presort rate would apply
to the remaining pieces.
Under the Postal Service's proposal, delivery point barcoded First-
Class and Standard Mail that cannot be sorted into a group of at least
150 pieces to a 5-digit or 3-digit ZIP Code destination must be sorted
to AADC and mixed AADC trays. This mail will qualify for a Basic
Automation presort rate. For First-Class Mail, the rate proposed by the
Postal Service for this Basic rate mail is 3.5 cents below the rate
(30.5 cents) currently applied to barcoded residual pieces in a
barcoded rate mailing. The proposed carrier route, 5-digit, and 3-digit
rates are also significantly lower than the current corresponding
rates. Thus, First-Class Mail under the scenarios presented above
should receive a reduction in postage. Standard mailers having 95% of
their mail move from a 5-digit qualification to a 3-digit qualification
could experience a very minor increase in postage for that portion of
the mailing, under the rates proposed by the Postal Service. However,
that increase would be offset by savings from the lower rate applicable
to Basic Automation Standard letters. Standard mailers experiencing a
70% shift in mail from 5-digit Barcoded rates to 3-digit Barcoded rates
will experience a reduction in postage for this portion of the mailing,
and can expect an additional reduction for the Basic rate portion.
One commenter indicated that 90% of his mail now qualifies for a
presort rate but after Classification Reform only 75% will qualify, and
another indicated that his presort qualification would drop from 90% to
40%. It is not clear what these mailers mean by presort. As indicated
above, all pieces in Automation First-Class and Standard mailings will
qualify for a reduced rate. To the extent that these mailers are
describing an expected degradation from one presort level to another,
the above analysis would apply to them.
Overall, the Postal Service believes that the Automation letter
discount levels and preparation standards will lower postage and
preparation costs for barcoded mailings for most mailers. Under current
Barcoded rate mailing standards, a large percentage of mail qualifying
for 5-digit and 3-digit rates is already prepared in full trays without
packages. Because the proposed 150-piece requirement is based on a 1-
foot tray, these mailers should be able to place even more mail in full
5-digit and 3-digit trays.
One commenter believed that if mail is barcoded and all mixed
together on machines, there are no cost differences between 10 sorted
pieces and 150 sorted pieces. This view is incorrect. When packages for
different levels of sort are mixed together in a tray, these trays must
be emptied and the packages sorted and retrayed before they can be
directed to the proper barcode sorting machine. This process is not as
efficient as being able to direct an entire tray without package
handling. In return for the lower rates being proposed, the Postal
Service expects to gain efficiencies in its operations by eliminating
package sortation and retraying of mail prior to directing it to the
proper barcode sorting scheme. Currently, when trays contain presort
packages, the packages are often not sorted by postal personnel because
it is deemed more efficient to remove the packaging material and run
the pieces in the tray through the appropriate barcode sorting scheme.
It is for this reason that the Postal Service proposed to eliminate
rate discounts that are based on package preparation and to base
Automation rates instead on the sortation level of a tray.
One commenter requested clarification as to whether 150 pieces to a
tray level may still be trayed to that level even if they do not fill a
1-foot tray. Under the proposed standards published below, 150 pieces
to a sortation level must be placed in that level of tray. One less-
than-full tray is permitted for tray levels where the 150-piece
minimums are applied. Such pieces must be prepared in rubber-banded
packages to maintain their orientation in the tray during transit and
handling.
One commenter requested that the definition of a full tray
currently used in PAVE testing be added to the DMM language of the next
proposed rule. PAVE testing currently indicates that 15\3/4\ inches of
mail (i.e., \3/4\ of the bottom inside length of a 2-foot tray) is the
minimum amount of mail for a full tray, and that, where possible, 2-
foot trays should be further filled to contain 21 inches of mail. Upon
implementation of Classification Reform, PAVE testing instructions
would indicate that, for 1-foot trays, 7\9/10\ inches of mail would be
considered the minimum amount of mail for a full tray and, where
possible, trays should be further filled to contain 10\1/2\ inches of
mail. Definitions of standard tray sizes are provided in the DMM
language proposed in this notice and will be included in the PAVE
instructions that mailers receive with PAVE testing material. It should
be noted, however, that these definitions do not relate to rate
qualification standards under the proposed rule.
c. Scheme Sortation
Ten commenters responded to the proposal to allow or require scheme
sortation for Automation subclass (barcoded) letters. Five of these
commenters had basic misunderstandings of what this scheme sortation
list represents. One stated that it was not very different from the
[[Page 66592]]
current SCF sortation and asked what it will do for his mailings.
Another stated that this list looks like the DMM L802 labeling list (an
SCF list used for certain ZIP+4 rate mailings) which means that 80% of
his mail would end up in mixed AADC trays. Accordingly, this commenter
wanted to use the current DMM L803 labeling list (an AADC list used for
certain ZIP+4 rate mailings) to obtain full trays to qualify for 3-
digit Barcoded rates. Two commenters indicated that there must be at
least three different 3-digit ZIP Codes per scheme for mailers to be
able to qualify as much mail for 3-digit rates under the 150-piece
minimums as they can qualify using the current 50-piece per 3-digit
package rules. These two commenters indicated that the 150-piece
minimum rules should be held in abeyance until the scheme sorts are
workable in this manner. One of the commenters believed that the
purpose of scheme sort was to reduce the number of MLOCR or barcode
sorter pockets used by the Postal Service to sort mail, and suggested
that a better way to achieve this would be to scheme-sort to ADCs or
AADCs.
The 3-digit scheme list is made up of 3-digit ZIP Codes that are
processed on the same barcode sorter incoming primary sort plan
(scheme) used to sort 3-digit mail to 5-digit ZIP Codes. The
determination of which, if any, combination of 3-digit ZIP Codes can be
sorted on the same barcode sort plan is based on the number of 5-digit
ZIP Codes served by each 3-digit ZIP Code and the physical limitation
of the number of bins on barcode sorters. Therefore, it is not possible
for the Postal Service to adjust the scheme list to cause each scheme
to contain at least three different 3-digit ZIP Codes. It is also not
possible for the Postal Service to substitute the published 3-digit
scheme list with any of the labeling lists suggested by commenters. The
purpose of this scheme sortation was not to arbitrarily find a way to
allow mailers to qualify as much mail for 3-digit rates under
Classification Reform as they do based on the current 50-piece package
minimums for 3-digit barcoded letter rates. The purpose is to allow
mailers to prepare mail for processing in the same manner that the
Postal Service processes it on barcode sorters (not MLOCRs) and thereby
increase their potential for qualifying mail for a 3-digit automation
discount. As published, the scheme sort list will allow mailers to use
the total number of pieces for any or all of the 3-digit ZIP Codes that
are combined on the list to qualify for 3-digit Barcoded rates. For
example, ZIP Codes 068 and 069 are combined on the 3-digit scheme list
and labeled to STAMFORD CT 068. This means a mailer having 75 pieces
for ZIP Code 068 and 75 pieces for ZIP Code 069 could combine these
pieces into a single tray to meet the 150-piece minimum. Without the
scheme sort option, those pieces would not be eligible for the 3-digit
Barcoded rate.
One commenter believed that the 3-digit scheme sort should be
mandatory. Two commenters indicated that scheme sort should be
optional. One of these indicated that use of the 3-digit scheme sort
could be an insurmountable barrier to participation by Federal
government mailers, and the other indicated that it should be a
business decision because many mailers have a lot of volume to
individual 3-digit areas or may not want to upgrade software to do
these mailings. Another commenter indicated that making scheme sort
mandatory for Automation subclass mailings means that the same presort
software could not be used for the upgradable Retail Presort portion of
the mailing since scheme sorts are not permitted for Retail Presort
mailings. One commenter indicated that it only made a 1.5% difference
in the qualification levels of his mailings. Another commenter
indicated that it would help presort qualification. One commenter asked
whether Publications Service mailers would use the same schemes as
other classes of letter mail. One commenter stated that he needed the
final tables for 5-digit and 3-digit sort schemes with the next notice,
or at least before the implementation date, to test the software that
incorporates these schemes.
Based on these comments, the Postal Service has proposed that 3-
digit scheme sort be optional. Mailers may use scheme sort for only
those schemes they select prior to preparing individual 3-digit trays
for the remainder of the mailing. Mailers expressing concern over
needing different software if they add scheme sortation are advised
that they will not be able to use existing software to sort letter mail
under Classification Reform anyway, because the tray levels are
different from current standards, packaging is allowed only in less-
than-full trays, a residual portion of the mailing is not allowed, and
both 1-foot and 2-foot trays must be used. Furthermore, the sortation
standards for Retail Presort First-Class and Regular Standard mailings
are significantly different from the Automation subclass standards set
forth in this notice. Therefore, mailers will not be able to use the
same software to sort to these two subclasses.
As information, the Postal Service is currently investigating the
future provision of 5-digit scheme sorts for barcoded letter mailings.
However, because of the volatility of 5-digit schemes while the Postal
Service is deploying new equipment over the next 3 years, 5-digit
scheme sorts will not be available until some time after Classification
Reform is implemented. The Postal Service is also investigating the
feasibility of providing a 3-digit scheme sort for barcoded flat-size
mailings. If there appears to be a benefit to scheme sort for flats, it
also would not be made available until after implementation of the
current Classification Reform proposals.
d. Use of Trays
Eight commenters had concerns over the standards for the use of
trays for Standard letter mail. Two commenters wanted to use trays for
letter-size Enhanced Carrier Route Standard Mail. One commenter wanted
the option to sack nonupgradable mail to assist noncomputerized
customers. This commenter also indicated that for nonautomation-
compatible mail, traying makes it impossible to achieve package testing
results. Five commenters expressed a desire to allow sacking for all
mail except Automation subclass letters. Three of these commenters did
not want to tray nonautomation subclass mail because they believe that
trayed Standard Mail must be palletized. Five commenters were concerned
that traying mail can cause a loss of cube in trailers with a resulting
impact on their qualifying for destination entry discounts.
The August 30 notice erroneously implied that mailers could not
tray letter-size Enhanced Carrier Route Standard Mail. It had been
previously agreed that Enhanced Carrier Route mailers would have the
option to tray letter mail. Since that time, the Postal Service has
reconsidered this position. Because the Postal Service prepares letter
mail in trays, it is important that all mailer-prepared letter mail be
trayed. Accordingly, the proposed DMM standards set forth in this
notice would require that all letter mail, including Enhanced Carrier
Route and Periodicals letters, be prepared in trays. It should also be
noted that, although encouraged, it is not required that Standard
letters prepared in trays be palletized. Mailers will be permitted to
bedload trays of letter mail. However, if a mailer wants to palletize
Standard letter mail, the mail must be prepared in trays on pallets,
with one exception. If, as described in the section on flat-size mail,
the letter-size piece also meets the definition of an automation-
compatible flat, and a portion of the mailing job is
[[Page 66593]]
mailed at the Automation subclass rate for flats, all the pieces in the
mailing job may be prepared in packages placed directly on pallets if
all pieces pay the applicable rates as flats. However, the amount of
Regular Standard Mail meeting the size standards for both letters and
flats that can be prepared as packages on pallets is limited to 10% of
the mailing job for reasons described in the section on flats. The
Postal Service acknowledges that trayed mail can sometimes fill
trailers more quickly than the same amount of mail prepared in sacks,
and that the number of pieces that can be placed in a trailer might
affect a mailer's decision whether to prepare mail for destination
entry discounts. However, trays are the most efficient method of
containerizing letter mail for the Postal Service. Because the Postal
Service now uses trays for letter-size mail in its internal operations,
it is proposing to require that mailers submit all letter-size mailings
in trays for consistency and efficiency. The requirement to use both 1-
foot and 2-foot trays will ensure the most efficient use of trailer
space under the traying environment. The Postal Service does not
understand the comment that traying would affect the ability to monitor
package testing results.
e. Use of Both 1-Foot and 2-Foot Trays
The Postal Service is proposing that for all trayed letter-size
mailings, a combination of full 2-foot and 1-foot trays must be used in
a manner that results in the fewest possible trays. Eleven comments
were received concerning this proposed requirement. Four commenters
stated that this requirement will increase their handlings or cause
problems in their production lines. One of these commenters indicated
that this will create another mailstream, which, added to the 100%
barcoding requirement for the Automation subclass, would result in four
separate mailstreams. One commenter stated that he hoped this
requirement could be canceled if it did not work. Another commenter
stated that he did not want to handle two sizes of trays. Two
commenters indicated that this requirement is not supported by current
software, including software for MLOCRs. Two commenters were concerned
about the availability of the appropriate size trays. One of these
commenters requested clarification, for software writing purposes, of
what to do if tray sizes are not available. The other commenter
indicated that shortages of any type of tray will complicate processing
when the mailer has software programmed to handle two sizes. One
commenter indicated that he did not understand the need for this
requirement. Three commenters asked how a stable pallet can be built
when there is a mix of two different size trays. One commenter asked
whether a 1-foot tray could be placed upside down on a pallet next to a
right-side up 1-foot tray to allow the two trays to take up the same
amount of space as a 2-foot tray.
The 150-piece minimum quantity to qualify for Automation subclass
letter rates is based on the preparation of a 1-foot tray so that
mailers may more easily qualify for those rates. That quantity per tray
also is intended to yield more full trays to direct destinations, thus
lessening any loss of presort to the Postal Service. In order to
increase the number of direct trays to sortation destinations for all
letter mailings, the proposed DMM language would require use of both 1-
foot and 2-foot trays for all mailings of letter-size pieces in all
reformed subclasses. However, the Postal Service does not want to
increase its potential number of tray handlings by allowing a mailing
to be prepared entirely in 1-foot trays, nor to increase transportation
costs by shipping in more less-than-full 2-foot trays. Accordingly, the
requirement to use both 1-foot and 2-foot trays where appropriate is
considered necessary by the Postal Service. Under the proposed rule,
mailers would be required first to fill as many 2-foot trays as
possible before filling 1-foot trays.
The Postal Service recognizes that this requirement will cause
mailers to make major changes to their production lines and to maintain
a supply of both 1-foot and 2-foot trays. It is believed that presort
software developed to accommodate the Classification Reform presort
structure will include mail documentation that provides information
about the tray size to be used and where tray breaks occur. If this
type of software is used, it may not be necessary to create two
separate production lines for the different tray sizes. The Postal
Service anticipates an increased need for both sizes of trays and has
purchased additional supplies while continuing to review the need to
purchase still more. If local shortages develop for a particular size
tray, mailers will have to use the trays provided the Postal Service.
This may require working out individual mailing solutions locally.
Mailers must use their own judgment when building pallets of trays
containing both sizes of trays. The elimination of the proposal to
require separate layers of trays on pallets for the different
subclasses should facilitate building stable pallets. The requirement
to place destination delivery unit trays on the top of the pallet has
also been eliminated. Accordingly, mailers may build pallets of trays
solely by the weight of the trays (heavier trays must be on the bottom)
and the pallet destination. Mailers will not, however, be permitted to
place a 1-foot tray upside down on a pallet next to a right-side-up 1-
foot tray because this could damage the mail.
f. Banding Material
(1) Automation Compatible Mailings. One commenter asked whether
mail in overflow and less-than-full trays must be prepared with rubber
bands. The use of rubber bands will be required for automation-
compatible pieces, i.e., for Automation First-Class or Automation
Standard Mail, upgradable Retail Presort First-Class and upgradable
Regular Standard Mail, automation-compatible Publications Service
Periodicals, and barcoded Regular Periodicals. Letter mail placed in
less-than-full trays must be prepared with rubber bands or elastic
strapping. In addition, because of their small size and their likely
becoming unfaced even in full trays, card-size pieces in the previously
named automation-compatible mailings must be prepared with rubber bands
or elastic strapping in all trays. For barcoded carrier route rate
mailings, separator tabs must be used to separate the carrier route
groups within 5-digit carrier routes trays. If a 5-digit carrier routes
tray is less-than-full, rubber bands or elastic strapping must be used.
For Regular Periodicals barcoded letter mailings, separator cards must
be used to delineate presort groups in all full trays. Pieces in less-
than-full mixed AADC trays in any mailing must be prepared with rubber
bands or elastic strapping. Plastic strapping and string will not be
permitted for these automation-compatible mailings. When prepared,
packages should be between 4 and 6 inches thick.
(2) Other Mailings. For Enhanced Carrier Route letter mailings,
mailers may use separator cards or rubber bands or other permissible
banding material to delineate carrier route groups within full 5-digit
carrier routes trays. In less-than-full 5-digit carrier routes trays,
separator cards will not be permitted and banding material must be
used. For nonupgradable mailings, separator cards are not permitted;
banding material must be used for packages in these mailings.
g. Overflow Trays
One commenter asked whether overflow trays will be required to
[[Page 66594]]
contain a minimum number of pieces; they will not.
One commenter noted that overflow trays are allowed for AADC trays
in the Automation letters subclass but not in Retail Presort mailings
and asked whether this inconsistency was an error. This difference is
not an error. Within the Automation subclass, AADC trays are prepared
based on the 150-piece minimum standard. The Postal Service wants to
apply this standard consistently for all trays of barcoded mail except
the last level of tray. Allowing an overflow tray when the 150-piece
standard is applied makes presort simpler and facilitates documentation
and acceptance of that mail. For Retail Presort First-Class Mail, there
is just one rate, and pieces at all tray levels are trayed based on
filling 2-foot and 1-foot trays without regard to the 150-piece
standard. To make Regular Standard Mail traying more consistent with
First-Class Retail Presort preparation, the Postal Service has
determined that pieces at the ADC and AADC (upgradable) tray level will
also be trayed based on filling 2-foot and 1-foot trays without regard
to the 150-piece standard and the need for overflow trays.
h. Request for Elimination of AADC Trays
One commenter requested that, for Automation subclass letters, the
less-than-full AADC tray be replaced with mixed AADC trays. Another
commenter indicated that sorting to AADC or mixed AADC destinations is
difficult to do in a manual operation.
Overflow trays are provided for certain tray levels to permit
mailers to qualify all mail to a sortation level, once the 150-piece
minimum has been met, when rates are based on the level of tray in
which a piece is placed. Overflow trays are also provided to ensure
that the mail is presorted to the finest level possible. For this
reason, when overflow trays are allowed at required levels of
sortation, such as the 3-digit and AADC sortation levels of Automation
subclass mailings, preparation of overflow trays will be required. The
Postal Service recognizes that preparation of ADC packages and trays
and preparation of AADC trays may be more difficult to do in a manual
operation than in an automated one. However, ADCs and AADCs are the
next stop for transportation and in-plant processing of pieces that are
not sorted to the 3-digit destination plant level. The Postal Service
believes that preparing mail to this level of sortation is necessary
and appropriate to qualify for the basic presorting rates. It should
also be noted that, with the exception of current Presorted First-Class
and Carrier Route sorted mail, today's bulk mailings require
preparation of AADC, ADC, SDC or state trays and, in some instances,
corresponding packages.
i. Request for Elimination of Required Tray Sortation Levels
One commenter indicated that tray sortation levels should not be
required and that the size of the mailing should determine the
breakdown levels.
The proposed presort rates requested in the Classification Reform
case are based on presorting mail to the finest extent possible.
Accordingly, mailers will be required to prepare 3-digit trays any time
there are at least 150 pieces for a 3-digit ZIP Code before preparing
AADC and mixed AADC trays. It is not permissible to begin sortation at
the AADC level and qualify for the proposed rates.
j. Grouping of Pieces in AADC and Mixed AADC Trays
One commenter stated that for ``piece sequencing'' requirements the
Postal Service needs to have a minimum mailing in mind, such as 10,000
pieces nationwide, before it insists that the mailer breakdown a
mailing, and that the cost to prepare this mail is not worth the
discount. Another commenter wanted clarification as to why 3-digit
groupings within AADC trays need not be in numeric order. This
commenter anticipated acceptance problems.
Presort discounts are based on mailers performing presort to the
finest level. For automation letter mail, presort to 3-digit level is
required before preparing mail to the AADC level. In order to determine
whether a 3-digit tray should be made, the mailer must first group
pieces by 3-digit levels. Therefore, it should not be a burden for
mailers to maintain those groupings when placing that mail in AADC
trays. This grouping also helps the Postal Service verify that mail has
been sorted correctly (although it is still possible to verify mail
that is not grouped in numeric order). Therefore, Postal Service is not
requiring that 3-digit groups be placed in ascending numeric order,
although it is encouraging mailers to do so. It should also be noted
that, within mixed AADC trays, in addition to grouping by 3-digit or 3-
digit scheme, as applicable, the 3-digit/scheme groups must be further
grouped by AADC area. Few acceptance problems are anticipated because
acceptance personnel will receive training on the new sortation and
acceptance procedures. The Postal Service believes that the Basic rates
proposed for First-Class and Standard Mail should encourage mailers to
prepare the mail in this manner. However, it is the mailer's decision
to determine whether this preparation would be less expensive than
mailing such pieces at single-piece rates.
k. Pallet Preparation
Four commenters requested clarification as to whether letter mail
prepared on pallets for different subclasses could be combined on the
same pallets with a single mailing statement and corresponding
documentation as allowed for flats on pallets. It is proposed that
letter mail of different subclasses prepared in trays may be presorted
to the same pallets, excluding 5-digit pallets. Trays of automation-
compatible letter mail (Automation Standard and upgradable Regular
Standard Mail, barcoded Regular Periodicals, and automation-compatible
Publications Service Periodicals) must be placed on 5-digit pallets
separate from nonautomation mail in the same mailing job because it is
more efficient for the Postal Service to move whole pallets directly to
where the mail is processed. Pallets of automation-compatible mail may
be processed at postal facilities different from facilities that
process pallets of nonautomation-compatible letters. In many cases,
pallets of automation-compatible mail are broken down at different
locations in the same plant, or if barcoded carrier route mail, the
pallets are sent directly to the postal facility where a CSBCS or DBCS
is located. When trays are palletized in this manner, they may be
reported on a single mailing statement with the same corresponding
documentation as allowed for palletized packages of flats.
l. Carrier Route Rate Eligibility
One commenter agreed with the Postal Service's promise to consider
allowing carrier route rates for routes that have fewer than 10
delivery stops. The Postal Service has decided to propose that such
mail may be prepared to qualify for the Saturation Enhanced Carrier
Route rates if it meets the applicable density and documentation
standards.
m. Enhanced Carrier Route Traying Requirements
One commenter asked, in response to the June 29 notice, whether
letter-size Enhanced Carrier Route mail would require packaging in full
direct trays. The Postal Service deferred an answer to this question
until completion of the DMM standards. Under the presort standards set
forth in the proposed rule, Enhanced Carrier Route letter mail is
[[Page 66595]]
prepared in full 2-foot and/or 1-foot carrier route trays. Mail that
cannot be placed in full carrier route trays must be placed in 5-digit
carrier routes trays, which may be less than full when necessary.
n. Machinable Addressing/Upgradable
The Postal Service has proposed optional presort requirements for
Retail Presort First-Class and Regular Standard Mail that meets the
Postal Service criteria of ``upgradable'' mail. (Upgradable mail is
mail that can be processed on Postal Service MLOCRs.) Four commenters
voiced concerns about the requirement for a machine-printed address on
a mailpiece before it could be considered upgradable.
One commenter opposed the proposal, arguing that presort bureaus
will have to separate their automation reject mail on the basis of
physical characteristics and then prepare it under two sets of rules.
This commenter requested that mailers be given an extra day to attempt
to barcode the automation rejects, without redating metered mail, in
order to increase the barcoded volume. By adopting this approach,
according to the commenter, mailers will be positioned to benefit from
soon-to-be-available technology that will make it possible to barcode
more rejected mailpieces. In much the same vein, a government agency
said that the requirement is too restrictive and that several federal
agencies have purchased encoding systems in order to place barcodes on
typewritten and handwritten mail.
The proposed DMM standards specify that preparation of mail under
the provisions for upgradable mail is optional. Accordingly, First-
Class and Standard mailers may prepare all their mail not qualifying
for the Automation subclass under the basic preparation standards for
the corresponding Retail Presort or Regular rates. Naturally, mailers
are encouraged to apply delivery point barcodes to such pieces using
CASS-certified encoding systems and thereby enter as many pieces as
possible as Automation First-Class or Standard Mail. However, for the
reasons set forth in the preceding discussion of 100% barcoding, the
Postal Service cannot allow mail to be presented with stale meter
dates. The current procedures for allowing mailers to print a new meter
date will remain in effect for all mail, including upgradable and
automation-reject pieces. The proper subclass marking must also appear
on these pieces.
o. Machinability
One commenter asserted that the Postal Service will not achieve its
objective of encouraging more automation-compatible mail unless it
relaxes machinability standards to allow more mailers to prepare
automation-compatible mail.
The Postal Service cannot spontaneously relax machinability
standards. Such standards are based on the capabilities of automated
mail processing systems and the type of mail that automation equipment
is able to process.
p. Tray Sleeving and Strapping
The Postal Service proposed that mailings of Automation letter mail
be both sleeved and strapped by the mailer, and that trayed letter mail
in other reformed subclasses be sleeved by the mailer. Five commenters
responded to this proposal. One commenter expressed wholehearted
support on the condition that the mailer, not postal employees, perform
the associated tasks. One commenter strongly recommended that where all
pieces in a mailing originate and destinate in the delivery area,
sleeving and banding of trayed letter mail should not be required. This
commenter wants continuation of the existing provision in DMM M033.3.7
(that allows local exception to the sleeving requirement when all
pieces in a mailing originate and destinate in the delivery area of the
same SCF). Another commenter contended that local post offices should
be able to determine when sleeving and strapping are required based on
mailing destinations. A third commenter wanted a phased implementation
to have time to order and install equipment needed for sleeving and
strapping. A federal government agency voiced concern about
requirements for stocking, storing, and using many different types of
equipment.
The Postal Service plans to require sleeving and strapping of all
bedloaded trayed mail under all reformed subclasses, with the exception
of mail entered at a postal facility that destinates within the service
area of that facility. Mail transported without first being sleeved is
susceptible to spillage and damage during transportation and handling.
A strap around the tray is also necessary to maintain the integrity of
the tray and its contents during transportation and handling. For
example, because trays of Periodicals and Standard Mail sorted in a BMC
move on belts and down chutes during mechanized distribution, sleeves
that are not strapped to trays could slide off and the contents of the
tray could spill. Trays transported by air are handled in many
different ways and also need to be strapped to maintain their
integrity. Because local mail is not subject to the same type or amount
of transportation as other mail, an exception may be made for the
strapping and sleeving of this mail. Local mail that destinates within
the service area of the postal facility where it is entered may be
prepared without sleeving and strapping, if prior written approval is
obtained from that facility's manager.
For palletized mailings, sleeving will be required but strapping
will be optional for mail on 5-digit, 3-digit, and SCF pallets, if
those pallets are wrapped with stretchable or shrinkable plastic wrap
to maintain their integrity during transportation and handling, because
these pallets remain intact until reaching the destination plant or
destination 5-digit delivery unit. Trays on other levels of pallet will
be required to be both strapped and sleeved.
q. ACT Tagging
The Postal Service proposed that mailers apply ACT tags to trays of
Automation First-Class letters. Six commenters responded to this
proposal. Of these, one supported the proposal as long as mailers, not
postal employees, did the work of preparing the tags. The remaining
five commenters either had serious reservations or were strongly
opposed to this proposal if it applied to trays of nonlocal letter- and
flat-size mail. One of the five strongly opposed tagging nonlocal mail,
stating that it was burdensome and difficult to comply with due to
time-sensitive airline flight schedules, and that the rates proposed
for the Automation subclass do not reflect this added worksharing
requirement. Another commenter expressed the view that requiring ACT-
tagging of all Automation subclass letter mail trays adds little value
and should not be required at this time. The commenters believed that
the proposal should be optional until a method can be developed and
implemented so that mailers could access a database of accurate postal
air contract transportation and flight data for ACT tags.
Based upon the comments, the Postal Service has determined to
remove the proposed requirement for ACT-tagging of mailings. The Postal
Service is also in the process of revising its internal systems to
replace the ACT tags with the ``Scan-Where-You-Band'' process.
[[Page 66596]]
4. Flat-Size Pieces
a. General
Under Classification Reform, the large majority of flat-size pieces
will be mailed as either Standard Mail or Periodicals. The discussion
of comments dealing with Periodicals is contained in a separate section
of this notice. Preparation of packages on pallets under the rules in
DMM M040 is the preferred method of preparing flat-size pieces. The
nonpalletized preparation requirements for Standard Mail flats under
Classification Reform will continue to require preparation of packages
placed in sacks. The package and sack levels will be 5-digit, 3-digit,
ADC, and mixed ADC, except for Enhanced Carrier Route flats which will
be prepared in carrier route packages of 10 or more pieces placed in
carrier route or 5-digit carrier routes sacks. The current 125-piece/
15-pound minimum sacking criterion will apply to flats under
Classification Reform where minimum sack volumes are prescribed. The
sortation for Automation flats differs from current preparation
requirements in that SCF packages and sacks are eliminated, and there
is no separate preparation of residual mail. For Automation flats, ADC
and mixed ADC packages will be combined with 5-digit and 3-digit
packages within ADC and mixed ADC sacks. The sortation for First-Class
flats will require 5-digit, 3-digit, ADC, and mixed ADC sortation in
both packages and flats trays.
b. Mail Meeting Standards for Both Letters and Automation-Compatible
Flats
Of the 49 commenters who responded to the August 30 notice, four
commented on issues related to flats. With only one exception, those
commenters had questions or comments focusing on pieces whose size
dimensions meet the size standards for both letters and automation-
compatible flats. This type of mail is often referred to by mailers as
``fletters.'' These comments were of essentially the same nature as
those submitted in response to the June 29 notice.
Two commenters wanted the Postal Service to develop options to
allow mailers to prepare mailpieces that meet both the letter-size
standards and the automation-compatible flats standards either in trays
or in packages on pallets.
As indicated in the section on letter mail, the Postal Service
handles letter mail in trays and, for operational efficiency, wants all
mailer-prepared letter mail placed in trays. Therefore, mailers of such
pieces always have the option of preparing them as letter-size mailings
in trays or, for Standard Mail, in trays on pallets. Mailers of such
pieces may choose to prepare one portion of their mailing job as letter
mail and another portion of their mailing job as Automation flat mail.
The Postal Service also recognizes that many mailers having pieces that
meet the dimensions for both letters and automation-compatible flats,
and who prepare a portion of their mailing jobs for the Automation
rates for flats, would have more efficient mail preparation operations
if allowed to prepare an entire mailing job in the same manner,
particularly when preparing that mail as packages on pallets.
Therefore, when mailers of these so-called ``fletters'' mail part of a
mailing job at the Automation rates for flats and prepare that mail as
packages on pallets, the Postal Service will allow the entire mailing
job, which may also include Enhanced Carrier Route mail and Regular
mail, to be prepared as packages on pallets if no more than 10% of the
total number of pieces in the mailing job are claimed at Regular rates
and if those pieces are claimed at Regular rates for nonletters, since
the mailing is prepared in a manner applicable to flat-size pieces.
This 10% limit on the number of Regular pieces in such a mailing is
designed to permit a small part of a mailing job to be prepared in this
manner while minimizing the amount of these letter-size pieces on
pallets; as stated earlier, letter-size pieces are more efficiently
handled by the Postal Service as trayed letter mail. If the percentage
of such letters-size pieces exceeds 10% of a mailing job, it must be
prepared and presented as a separate mailing under the standards for
letter mail. Mailers who prepare mail in sacks or trays must prepare
that mail in the manner appropriate to its processing category, as
defined in DMM C050, i.e., mail meeting both letter-size and
automation-compatible flats dimensions may be sacked and otherwise
prepared as a flat only if mailed as part of a mailing at an Automation
rate for flats.
c. Revisions to Automation-Compatible Flats Criteria
One commenter stated that the Postal Service should allow pieces
that can be processed on FMS 1000 flat-sorting equipment to be eligible
for barcoded rates when that equipment is retrofitted with barcode
readers. This commenter further indicated that the Postal Service
should allow letter-size catalogs that can be processed on FSM 1000s to
be eligible for Automation rates for flats, thereby allowing mailers to
avoid the tabbing requirements associated with the Automation rates for
letters.
The FSM 1000 machines were not intended to replace the FSM 881s but
to handle pieces that cannot be processed on them. Therefore, the FSM
881 machinability requirements, reflected in the current standards in
DMM C820 for barcoded rates for flats, will continue to be the basis
for barcoded rates for flats for some time, including when
Classification Reform is implemented. Letter-size pieces that do not
meet the current criteria for Automation-Compatible flats will be
considered letters under Classification Reform and will have to be
prepared under the standards for letters in DMM C810 and DMM C840 to
obtain Automation letter rates.
d. Dimensions of Trays
One commenter requested that the dimensions of flat trays be
provided so mailers can program how much mail can be placed in these
trays. The inside bottom dimensions are 14\3/4\ inches long by 10\3/4\
inches wide. Their depth is 8 inches to the handhold and 11\1/4\ inches
to the top. This information will be included in both the DMM and in
the instructions provided with PAVE testing material.
e. Copalletization and Commingling
No comments were received regarding this issue. The Postal Service
is retaining the position set forth in the August 30 notice that, for
packages prepared on pallets, packages from different Standard Mail
subclasses (Automation, Enhanced Carrier Route, and Regular) may be
placed on the same pallets, and no physical separation of the packages
on the pallets by rate category will be required. At the pallet
breakdown operation, the Postal Service will sort the packages to
containers for the proper transportation or in-plant processing
operation.
The Postal Service also erroneously indicated in the August 30
notice, that it would allow mailers to combine packages from different
mailings in the same sack. Combining packages of different mailings in
the same sack does not make operational sense for the Postal Service.
Sack labels identify the type of mail contained in the sack so that the
Postal Service can direct it to the proper in-plant operation. Enhanced
Carrier Route sacks may be sent directly to the 5-digit ZIP Code for
carrier casing, whereas barcoded flats will be sent to a barcoded flats
sorting machine. Regular mail may be sent to manual distribution
operations. Because combining this mail together in sacks would not
allow the Postal Service to direct the mail to the proper operation,
combining packages
[[Page 66597]]
from different mailings in the same sack will not be permitted.
f. Flats Mail in Trays
No comments were received regarding this issue. The Postal Service
is retaining the position set forth in the August 30 notice that First-
Class flats will be prepared in flat trays and Standard Mail flats will
be prepared in sacks. A commenter to the June 29 notice questioned the
rationale for this policy. The Postal Service plans to initially limit
the use of trays to First-Class flats to allow for a more gradual
change to a future operating environment in which all nonpalletized
flat mail will be prepared in trays. Currently, the Postal Service
processes First-Class flats in trays. Generally, flat trays are better
handled at GMFs and airmail facilities (AMFs) (where the Postal Service
has tray handling systems) than sacks, which are more amenable to
processing at bulk mail centers (BMCs). When barcoded flat mail is
distributed on flat sorting machines using the barcode, there are
instances where the flat mail is dispatched in flat trays to the next
handling or destination regardless of class. Therefore, as part of the
transition of all classes of flats mail to tray preparation, allowing
automation-compatible (barcoded) flat mail in trays would be the likely
next step, but this will not take place until after implementation of
the current Classification Reform proposals.
g. Last Package Rule
A question concerning how to label a mixed ADC sack containing only
a 5-digit package was asked in response to the June 29 notice. The
Postal Service deferred an answer to this question until completion of
the DMM standards. Under the presort standards set forth in this
proposed rule, a 5-digit package left over after filling all possible
5-digit, 3-digit, and ADC sacks will be placed in a sack bearing a
mixed ADC sack label.
h. 3-Digit Schemes
No comments were received regarding this issue in response to the
August 30 notice. The Postal Service is retaining the position that,
while a 3-digit scheme sort for flats may be investigated at a later
date, it will not be implemented with Classification Reform.
5. Addressing
a. AIS Product Cycle
Concurrent with Classification Reform, the Postal Service is
proposing to increase the frequency at which it updates all of its AIS
Products, such as ZIP+4 and CRIS. This change would increase the
frequency of required mailer updates to address matching systems.
Because this change will affect all AIS products and must be applied
universally, it will impact all mailers using AIS products for
preparing mailings, not just those mailing in the reformed subclasses.
The proposal to increase the frequency of AIS product updates is
designed to improve the currency of the data that is used during the
matching process and reflects the significant advancements in list
management technology that have been made since the original product
cycle was developed. Now that the Postal Service is experiencing more
rapid change in address information and carrier route codes, it has
become critical that mailers update their data files more frequently.
Under this proposal, the frequency of AIS product releases would
increase from quarterly to bimonthly. The Postal Service also proposes
to eliminate inconsistencies in the implementation dates of new product
releases. These currently range from 45 days with ZIP+4 products to 75
days for some CRIS products. Under this proposal, all products would
have to be put into use within 45 days of the release date of the
product update. There are no plans to increase the frequency with which
ZIP+4 code or delivery point code matches must be reprocessed from the
current ``within 12 months of the mailing date'' standard for any of
the unreformed subclasses.
Because these changes are systemic and because it would be costly
and confusing to maintain two different sets of product update
frequencies, the Postal Service proposes to apply these changes to all
affected mailings, regardless of whether that mail will also be
affected by Classification Reform. For example, carrier route codes
would be updated more quickly with the initiation of bimonthly CRIS
releases and with the reduction in the permissible implementation
period from 75 to 45 days. This would apply to both reformed and
unreformed subclass mailings.
Although these changes in AIS product frequency were previously
planned and could have been proposed independently, the Postal Service
has chosen to propose to implement them with the implementation of
Classification Reform to consolidate changes to mail preparation
standards.
b. Carrier Route Updates
Eight comments were received about the Postal Service's proposal
that mailings at carrier route rates incorporate carrier route codes
updated within 90 days prior to the date of mailing using certified
software. One commenter suggested that the Postal Service eliminate the
requirement for certified software, indicating that it limited the
creativity of mailers in applying the carrier route codes to their
mail. The Postal Service requires the use of certified software to
verify the accuracy of the matches and to provide documentation of the
time and age of the information being used to apply carrier route
codes. The certification process verifies the results of address
matching, not the means by which it was achieved. Thus, there are no
limits to the creativity that may be applied to the matching process if
the result represents the correct carrier route code for the address.
Four commenters suggested that the coding date should be increased
to 120 days, whereas two other commenters approved the proposal to
increase the frequency of ZIP+4 matching to 90 days. The Postal Service
has no plans to increase the frequency of ZIP+4 matching at this time.
Carrier route assignments are more frequently changed to accommodate
the operational needs of the Postal Service to balance carriers'
workload. Thus, the Postal Service believes that the 90-day coding
standard is reasonable. However, it is not the Postal Service's intent
to require mailers to update their carrier route codes if no more
current source of information is available. The Postal Service believes
that the most current data available should be used in assigning
carrier route codes. If new data files are not available, mailers
should continue to use the existing route assignments until new AIS
products have been released by the Postal Service.
c. Move Updates
Seventeen comments were received concerning the proposal to require
First-Class bulk mailers to update the addresses of their customers who
have moved within 6 months prior to the mailing date. Several mailers
seemed confused about the exact class of mail to which this standard
applies; it would apply only to Retail Presort and Automation First-
Class mailings.
The Postal Service believes that the methods currently available to
provide customers with updated address information offer a wide range
of options that can meet the needs of mailers at a reasonable cost. For
example:
(1) Use of the endorsement ``Address Correction Requested'' means
that the mailpiece will be returned to sender with the new address
information
[[Page 66598]]
affixed. This service is provided at no additional charge to the
mailer. The mailer can then update the address information and, if it
so desires, use a new envelope to mail the piece to the new address.
(2) Use of the endorsement ``Forwarding and Address Correction
Requested'' means that the mailpiece is forwarded to the new location
and the Postal Service sends a hard copy notice to the mailer with the
new address information. Each such notice costs $0.50 and can be used
to update the mailer's addresses.
(3) Use of Address Change Service (ACS) provides the mailer with an
electronic notice of new address information instead of hard copy. ACS
can also be used on mailings other than First-Class to qualify those
addresses in the mailing list that were used for Retail Presort and
Automation First-Class mailings. Electronic notices cost $0.20 each and
can be obtained on a variety of electronic media. Mailers may determine
the frequency with which they use the ACS endorsement and participant
code if the mailer can certify that each address in a First-Class
mailing has been updated for customer moves within 6 months prior to
the mailing.
(4) Use of National Change of Address (NCOA) processing service can
update mailers' address lists with corrected address information prior
to a mailing. Mailers determine how frequently they process their
address lists.
Two commenters stated that they are unable to use the current
methods, and two other commenters said that the services were too
costly. None of these commenters provided specifics in support of their
statements. The Postal Service incurs both costs to rehandle
undeliverable-as-addressed mail and service delays when mail must be
redirected to a new location. It is in the best interests of the Postal
Service and mailers to improve deliverability and reduce costs. The
options cited above, including the ``no fee'' Address Correction
Requested endorsement, provide flexibility to mailers in meeting the
proposed standard.
Six commenters asked that implementation of the requirement be
postponed to allow time to adjust and obtain move updates. The Postal
Service recognizes that many mailers will need to revise their
addressing systems to accommodate move updating. Thus, the Postal
Service will begin the move update address qualification process at the
time of Classification Reform implementation, but will not condition
the eligibility of First-Class bulk mailings on complete move update
qualification until 6 months after Classification Reform
implementation, or January 1, 1997, whichever is earlier. The Postal
Service also wants to avoid creating a semiannual ``crunch'' of demand
for NCOA and ACS services that might occur if move update was
implemented at the same time as Classification Reform. Some mailers may
need to experiment with several options for move updating, such as the
impact of the two different endorsements, to determine which option
makes the best business sense for their operations. Some will have to
learn to use electronic update systems, and others will need to use up
stocks of envelopes that do not bear an endorsement. The ``ramp-up''
period should give all concerned customers sufficient time to decide
which update method to use, obtain NCOA matching services, if
appropriate, implement internal system changes to accept electronic
move update information, and work with their internal customers or
presort customers to obtain full compliance.
Several commenters also asked that implementation of the proposed
move update standard be postponed indefinitely until other methods have
been approved to do move updating, such as the Multiline Forwarding
System (MFS). The Postal Service does not believe that such an open-
ended delay is warranted, given the wide range of current options.
However, the Postal Service is encouraged by the progress currently
being made toward implementation of MFS. The Postal Service has been
working with vendors of commercial MLOCRs on the MFS project since June
1995. Test mail has been successfully processed by several vendors to
determine the accuracy of the matching processes. The next step is
testing ``live'' mail in a production environment. The project plan for
MFS is on track, with operational issues now under review. As a result,
the Postal Service expects that MFS will be available before the end of
1996, but that outcome is not certain at this time. The Postal Service
plans to continue working on the development of MFS with MLOCR users
through the Mailers Technical Advisory Committee and the Multiline
Users Group. Moreover, as marketplace demands create a need, the Postal
Service will also consider expanding the range of options in the
existing services, for example, by additional notification options in
ACS beyond those currently available.
Five commenters asked whether their in-house address correction
centers, to which they have devoted significant resources, might be
certified as meeting the move update standard. For those mailers who
believe that their lists are up to date, the use of the ``Address
Correction Requested'' endorsement should have little or no impact on
their business practices because they are mailing to the most current
address of their customers. The simple and straightforward use of the
endorsement would meet the proposed standard with no difficulty, would
need be applied to all addresses on the list only within 6 months prior
to mailing, and expenditures would be limited to the costs associated
with preprinting the endorsement on mailing envelopes. The current
endorsement options would be an effective approach to meeting the
proposed standard for lists that are well maintained by a mailer's move
correction processes. In the future, the Postal Service may consider
the establishment of ``move update certification'' processes for
specific types of lists or businesses. The Postal Service is interested
in evaluating other options that mailers suggest to meet the move
update standard if unique situations exist that preclude the use of the
current solutions.
Three other commenters asked whether a mailer was required to use
the information provided from postal address correction processes and
apply it immediately to their address lists. They asked whether the
notification could serve as a trigger to the company to initiate an
inquiry with the customer about correcting address information. Four
commenters indicated that various state and federal government agencies
believe that they are prohibited from using corrections provided by the
Postal Service. In most cases, mailers are expected to update their
mailing addresses promptly. However, the Postal Service recognizes
that, in some industries, there are legally-mandated limits on the
address that may be used in certain customer communication. For
example, one commenter noted that, in a number of states, notices of
shareholder meetings must be sent to the address ``in the corporation
records.'' Given the concerns expressed by these mailers, the Postal
Service has decided that in circumstances where clearly demonstrated
legal constraints limit a mailer from using address changes provided by
the Postal Service, an individually-approved alternative process will
be acceptable to meet the move update standard. Alternative process
approval would be granted on a case-by-case basis, and the legal
limitation would need to be clearly identified. In this process,
mailers would receive address change
[[Page 66599]]
information from the Postal Service in any of the currently prescribed
manners. This would be followed by a prompt mailer-initiated direct
mail contact with the customer, requesting a signed verification of the
address change. For example, the mailer could provide a preprinted
barcoded business reply card that the customer signs and returns.
Address information could then be updated in the mailer's records prior
to the next mailing cycle.
d. Uniform Placement of Address Elements
During the comment period, the Postal Service decided to remove
uniform placement of address elements from consideration as a proposed
address quality standard. The Postal Service took this action in
response to extensive mailer concerns regarding the details of the
proposal and its potential adverse impact on rate eligibility.
e. Line of Travel
One commenter asked whether the line-of-travel (LOT) sequencing
requirement applied only to flat-size pieces. Because LOT sequencing
can be beneficial for casing of all carrier route mail, the proposed
standard will apply to letters, flats, and merchandise samples prepared
with detached address labels in Basic Enhanced Carrier Route mailings,
and to all Publications Service pieces except for those pieces that are
presented in a mailing of automation-compatible Publications Service
barcoded letters.
One commenter stated that the requirement would be easy to meet,
whereas two other commenters stated that it would be difficult to
maintain and would be an unnecessary burden. The Postal Service has had
assurance from the mailer and vendor communities that this requirement
is not an onerous burden. The update of sequence information could be
done through any of the established sequencing methods or through use
of the newly-developed Line-of-Travel product, which has been available
to the mailing industry since June 1995. Mailers who are interested in
obtaining the Line-of-Travel product should contact the National
Customer Support Center at (800) 238-3150 for subscription information.
Continuing update of sequence information will occur with the same
frequency that carrier route codes are updated.
Four commenters stated that there were many operational variables
in their production lines and questioned whether exact delivery order
or reverse order would be equally effective. The Postal Service will
identify mailers whose mailings are frequently in the reverse order and
deal with them on an exception basis.
Three other commenters asked whether LOT could apply to High
Density mail. Although the Postal Service believes that LOT sequencing
would accomplish most of what walk sequencing will do for High Density
mail, the Classification Reform proposal specifies walk sequencing for
High Density mail. Therefore, LOT is not an acceptable sequencing
option to qualify for High Density rates.
f. 5-Digit ZIP Code Verification
The Postal Service proposed to require a certification by the
mailer that the 5-digit ZIP Codes on addresses in a Retail Presort
First-Class, Regular Standard, or nonautomation-compatible Publications
Service Periodicals mailing have been checked for accuracy within 12
months prior to mailing. One commenter stated that because ZIP Code
verification was quick and easy, out-of-date ZIP Codes should not be
allowed access to presort rates. Another called the proposed
verification costly and intrusive on business activity. The Postal
Service believes that accurate ZIP Codes are vital to ensuring
consistent, timely delivery service. Moreover, the use of a correct ZIP
Code is currently a requirement for the affected groups of mail. Those
mailers who are unwilling to verify the correctness of the ZIP Codes
they apply to mailpieces will not be allowed access to postage rates
that require ZIP Code presortation.
Two commenters asked what some of the approved methods of
verification might be. The Postal Service has previously stated, ``A
recommended checklist of possible ZIP Code verification options for
address lists that are not computerized could be signed as a part of
the verification process. Items to appear on the list might include
manual verification using the most recent Postal Service ZIP Code
directory, a survey of the addressees currently in the address list to
inquire about changes to ZIP Code information, participation in the
current manual list correction service (DMM A910), use of a service
provider to verify ZIP Code information, and use of approved
software.''
Other options might include the use of electronic look-up services
such as those available on the Postal Service home page on the World
Wide Web and other bulletin board look-up services using certified
address matching software. Mailers will be expected to identify the
method used to verify the ZIP Code information and sign a certification
of verification. Mailers will have 3 months from the date of
Classification Reform implementation to verify the accuracy of their 5-
digit ZIP Code information. In addition, as new techniques for ZIP Code
verification are developed, they will be added to the list of
acceptable methods for verification.
6. Periodicals
a. Overview
Periodicals, like today's second-class mail, is designed for
newspapers and other periodical publications. Under Classification
Reform, all current categories of authorization would remain (general,
requester, institutions and societies, foreign, and state departments
of agriculture). Current subclasses would also be retained and
Publications Service, a new low-cost subclass, would be added.
No substantive change to Preferred Rates Periodicals (In-County,
Classroom, Nonprofit, Science-of-Agriculture zones 1-2) is proposed in
the current Classification Reform case. The provision will also be
retained that prescribes payment of Regular rates for advertising that
exceeds the 10% limitation.
Publishers may mail at only one subclass of outside-county rates
for each publication: Preferred (when applicable), Regular, or
Publications Service. The publication must follow the same basic
standards as today, i.e., it must be formed of printed sheets and
published from a known office of publication at a regular frequency of
at least four times per year. Current requirements by authorization
category continue to apply. General publications must have a minimum of
50% paid circulation and contain no more than 75% advertising in one-
half the issues published during a 12-month period. The publisher must
maintain a list of subscribers. Likewise, requester publications must
have a list of requesters/subscribers, with a minimum 50% of the
circulated copies either requested or paid for by the recipient.
Advertising in requester publications may not exceed 75% in any issue.
A notable change proposed for the Regular subclass pertains to the
presort levels: Basic, 3/5, and Carrier Route would replace current
levels A, B, and C, making the presort structure for Regular
Periodicals more consistent with other classes. The new 3/5 rate
replaces the current Level B3 and B5 rates. Mail presorted to all 3-
digit destinations (not just to unique 3-digit destinations) will
qualify for the 3/5 rates. Another minor change renames the current 125
walk-sequence rate as High Density.
[[Page 66600]]
Three primary criteria must be met to qualify for Publications
Service: (1) at least 75% of the mailed volume must be paid (for
general publications) or paid or requested (for requester circulation);
(2) at least 30% of the content in each issue must be nonadvertising
matter; and (3) at least 90% of each issue must be presorted in
prescribed volumes to carrier route, 5-digit, or 3-digit destinations.
An outside circulation audit is also required.
Each issue of a Publications Service periodical must have at least
30% nonadvertising content and at least 75% of the mailed circulation
(excluding copies claimed at in-county, foreign, First-Class, Priority
Mail, or Express Mail rates) must be sent to paid subscribers (or
requesters, depending on the category of authorization). Publications
that fail to meet the nonadvertising content requirement are assessed a
40% surcharge of the applicable postage for that issue. If a
publication fails to meet the 75% paid/requester standard, its
authorization to mail at Publications Service will be revoked.
The Postal Service has determined that the outside circulation
audit will be used only to validate compliance with the proposed 75%
paid/requested circulation requirement. The outside auditor will not be
responsible for confirming the advertising/editorial ratio. To ensure
compliance and reduce the amount of material reviewed before mail
acceptance, the Postal Service will include on the mailing statement a
certification block for the publisher's signature, validating that the
publication meets the 30% nonadvertising requirement. If the Postal
Service determines that an issue exceeds 70% advertising, the publisher
will be given ample opportunity to demonstrate compliance with the
requirement before any penalty is assessed.
At least 90% of each issue must be presorted to 3-digit, 5-digit,
or carrier route destinations. Copies count toward the 90% criterion if
they are part of a minimum of 24 addressed pieces for a 3-digit
destination, all properly presorted to carrier route, 3-digit, or 5-
digit destinations in packages of six or more addressed pieces each.
Any combination of six-piece or larger packages to these destinations
is acceptable (e.g., 18 pieces to a carrier route and six copies to a
5-digit, both in the same 3-digit area). Publications that fail to meet
the 90% standard are assessed a 40% surcharge of the applicable postage
for that issue.
For the purposes of the 90% criterion, an ``issue'' will be
considered to consist of all copies in the mailed volume that are
mailed within that ``window'' of time during which the main file and
most supplemental mailings for a particular title are deposited with
the Postal Service. The mailing ``window'' includes all copies,
regardless of cover date, mailed during that period. To ensure that the
entire mailed volume of a publication is considered, all mailings,
including ``supplementals,'' will be counted.
Publications may be better able to meet this density requirement by
comailing, including the comailing of Publications Service flats with
Regular Periodicals. To administer the 90% criterion in a comailing
situation, the Postal Service proposes to look at the sortation of the
individual title within the comailing. The copies reported on a single
mailing statement will not have to meet the 90% criterion. The
qualifying pieces in the comailing are added to the qualifying pieces
in the main file and any qualifying pieces in supplemental runs that
were not comailed. The final qualifying percentage is derived by
dividing the total number of qualifying pieces by the total number of
mailed pieces.
In a comailing, the 40% penalty would apply to the publication that
fails to meet the density requirements, not to all other comailed
publications. While firm packages are considered a single addressed
piece for presort and postage purposes, each copy in a firm package
counts individually toward the 90% standard.
Carrier route, nonbarcoded, and barcoded mail may be mixed on the
same pallet, and 5-digit and ZIP+4 barcoded Publications Service flats
may be combined in the same package. This is discussed further in the
analysis of comments on Periodicals.
In addition to the requirements for nonadvertising content,
circulation to paid/requester addresses, and density, all automation-
compatible Publications Service mail (except carrier route rate flats)
must bear a barcode. All pieces must bear at least a 5-digit barcode
and no less than 85% of the pieces must bear a ZIP+4 or delivery point
barcode. If the piece is not machinable, barcoding is not required.
Although the carrier route portion of the mailing will count toward the
85% criterion, it will not have to be barcoded. The 85% criterion
optimizes the proportion of pieces that can be given automated
processing. To the extent firm packages are amenable to such handling,
it would not be relevant to the objectives of the 85% criterion if the
component copies inside the firm package were barcoded. Therefore, the
85% criterion will be applied to consider the number of addressed
pieces in the mailing, not the total number of copies.
Compliance with the 85% criterion will be based on the entire
mailed volume of the issue, encompassing all editions from all sources.
Publishers will be responsible for providing the supporting information
if requested by the Postal Service.
Additional ``bundled'' requirements pertaining to such issues as
addressing, sortation, and containerization are detailed in the
proposed DMM standards in this notice.
To mail at Publications Service rates, a periodical must first be
authorized Periodicals mailing privileges in one of the existing
categories of authorization. To apply for Publications Service, the
publisher must submit a separate application (and pay an additional
$305 fee) and initiate an outside circulation audit. Once authorized,
all outside-county copies of the publication, which are not sent as
Express Mail, Priority Mail, or First-Class Mail, must be mailed at
Publications Service rates exclusively, unless the publication
voluntarily abandons its authorization. If the publication abandons the
authorization or the Postal Service revokes it, the publisher must wait
1 year to reapply. Authorization to mail at Publications Service rates
does not affect eligibility for in-county rates.
Publications currently authorized to mail at second-class rates
will not be required to mail in a pending status if it can be shown to
meet the 75% paid or requested criterion and an application to mail at
Publications Service rates is filed. Mailings will be accepted at
Publications Service rates subsequent to the application being filed.
If the Postal Service denies the application or the publisher abandons
it, a revenue deficiency will be assessed for the difference between
the amount paid at Publications Service rates and the amount due at
Regular rates.
Publications not authorized second-class mail privileges may also
apply for Publications Service rates. A publisher would be required to
file an application for a Periodicals authorization and pay a fee of
$305. A separate application for Publication Service rates must also be
filed and the publisher must pay an additional $305 fee. These
applications may be filed simultaneously or separately as desired by
the publisher. Under these circumstances, the publisher will be
required to mail under established pending procedures (i.e., the
publisher must deposit funds at the applicable third- or fourth-class
rates). When the applications are approved, the
[[Page 66601]]
publisher will be entitled to an appropriate refund.
b. Comment Analysis
A total of nine comments were received concerning the
implementation standards for Periodicals described in the August 30
notice. Of that number, five comments expressed general disapproval of
Classification Reform as it pertains to Periodicals and three were
generally favorable; such comments are beyond the scope of this
rulemaking and are not addressed here. Two of the three commenters who
expressed general satisfaction with Classification Reform as it
pertains to Periodicals, and two other commenters, offered specific
comments concerning various issues. These comments are discussed below.
(1) Automated Processing of Flats. One commenter reiterated that
the widespread availability of automation equipment capable of handling
all types of second-class flats is crucial to second-class mailers. The
commenter recommended that the Postal Service immediately undertake to
develop a nationwide plan to increase automation capacity for flat-size
mail. As explained above in the discussion on flats, although the
Postal Service would like to be able to process all types of flats on
automated equipment, new machines will not be purchased until the
current ones have been properly positioned for optimum utilization.
(2) 75% Paid Subscriber/Requester and 30% Nonadvertising
Requirements for Publications Service. Regarding the requirement that
75% of all mailed copies of Periodicals authorized to mail at
Publications Service rates must be sent to paid subscribers/requesters
(as appropriate), two commenters requested that all mailed newsstand
copies (regardless of the number returned or destroyed) be considered
paid circulation. This request has been given full consideration.
Although the Postal Service believes that it is appropriate to account
for newsstand copies sent through the mails, it is both inaccurate and
inconsistent with past postal policy to consider all such copies paid.
Rather, the Postal Service will continue to require publishers to
maintain records to distinguish between sold and unsold newsstand
copies. Those copies mailed to newsstands that are eventually sold will
count toward the 75% paid subscriber/requester requirement.
One commenter addressed the proposal to require an outside auditor
to review the proportion of mailed copies of a Publications Service
periodical that are sent to paid subscribers/requesters to verify
compliance with the 75% paid subscriber/requester requirement. This
commenter supported the Postal Service decision not to require that an
outside auditor confirm that the 30% nonadvertising minimum per issue
has been met, but instead to accept a written certification by the
publisher (included as part of the mailing statement prepared for each
issue).
(3) Commingling of 5-Digit and ZIP+4 Barcoded Publications Service
Periodicals. One commenter supported the Postal Service's decision to
allow the commingling on pallets of all types of packages of both
Regular and Publications Service Periodicals. Two commenters believed
that the volume of 5-digit barcoded pieces is relatively small in
second-class today and, therefore, warrants allowing mailers to combine
5-digit and ZIP+4 barcoded pieces in the same package.
Once a publication is authorized to be mailed at Publications
Service rates, all mailed copies (except those mailed at in-county
rates or as Express Mail, Priority Mail, or First-Class Mail) must be
prepared according to the required sortation for this subclass. Unlike
First-Class and Standard Mail where pieces not qualifying for one
subclass may be mailed in another, no copies of an authorized
Publications Service periodical may be mailed as Regular or outside-
county Preferred Periodicals. For this reason, the Postal Service
decided that setting a 100% ZIP+4 or delivery point barcoding standard
for automation-compatible Publications Service periodicals would be
difficult for publishers to achieve; therefore, the current ``85-15''
barcoding standard is retained.
Under today's second-class standards, which allow 15% of a
nominally ZIP+4 barcoded mailing to bear a 5-digit barcode, publishers
may combine ZIP+4 and 5-digit barcoded pieces in packages. The Postal
Service believes that combining such mail in packages continues to be
appropriate and will allow this preparation for Publications Service
periodicals. However, the Postal Service will continue to study the
issue and may require other packaging standards at a later date if
combining ZIP+4 barcoded and 5-digit barcoded pieces in the same
package has a negative operational impact as the barcoded flats
mailstream expands.
(4) Presort and Comailing. The Postal Service will allow the
comailing of Regular and Publications Service flat-size Periodicals. To
enable publishers to comail efficiently, the Postal Service has
determined (and has so stated in earlier notices) that it will align
the sortation standards for Regular and Publications Service flats.
This decision is reflected in the proposed DMM standards presented
below. For flats, the only difference between Regular and Publications
Service sortation requirements is that mail entered at a Regular
Barcoded rate must be prepared as a separate mailing meeting a separate
85% barcoding standard as discussed in section A of this proposal.
Although the majority of Periodicals is flat-size mail, many
publications are produced in letter-size format. The preparation
standards proposed for automation-compatible letter-size Publications
Service mail will mirror the proposed standards for Automation First-
Class and Standard Mail letter-size pieces, with the exception that a
6-piece package minimum will be applied to Publications Service carrier
route sortation rather than the 10-piece minimum applied in First-Class
and Standard Mail. In addition, new sortation criteria for
nonautomation-compatible letters have been added for Publications
Service to require packaging and traying of pieces. Preparation of
presorted packages is necessary for nonautomation-compatible mail for
efficient Postal Service processing.
These two Publications Service letter-size sortations are
significantly different from current letter sortation requirements for
second-class mail. Because these sortation requirements affect rate
eligibility, the Postal Service will not propose the alignment of
standards for Regular and Publications Service letter-size mail.
Consequently, comailing will not be allowed for Regular and
Publications Service letter-size pieces.
New sortation criteria have been developed for barcoded letters and
for nonbarcoded letters at Regular rates. These new sortation criteria
reflect the new standards for preparation of all letter-size mail in
trays and for tray sortation levels that will be implemented with
Classification reform, while allowing such mail to continue to qualify
for presort and barcoding rates under the same qualification criteria
as today.
C. Presort Summary Guide
The following charts summarize the presort requirements for
reformed subclasses. They do not reflect every presort requirement but
are a guide to the major presort points contained in the DMM standards
presented in the latter part of this notice.
BILLING CODE 7710-12-P
[[Page 66602]]
[GRAPHIC][TIFF OMITTED]TP22DE95.000
[[Page 66603]]
[GRAPHIC][TIFF OMITTED]TP22DE95.001
[[Page 66604]]
[GRAPHIC][TIFF OMITTED]TP22DE95.002
[[Page 66605]]
[GRAPHIC][TIFF OMITTED]TP22DE95.003
[[Page 66606]]
[GRAPHIC][TIFF OMITTED]TP22DE95.004
[[Page 66607]]
[GRAPHIC][TIFF OMITTED]TP22DE95.005
[[Page 66608]]
[GRAPHIC][TIFF OMITTED]TP22DE95.005
[[Page 66609]]
[GRAPHIC][TIFF OMITTED]TP22DE95.006
[[Page 66610]]
[GRAPHIC][TIFF OMITTED]TP22DE95.007
[[Page 66611]]
[GRAPHIC][TIFF OMITTED]TP22DE95.008
[[Page 66612]]
[GRAPHIC][TIFF OMITTED]TP22DE95.009
[[Page 66613]]
[GRAPHIC][TIFF OMITTED]TP22DE95.010
[[Page 66614]]
[GRAPHIC][TIFF OMITTED]TP22DE95.011
[[Page 66615]]
[GRAPHIC][TIFF OMITTED]TP22DE95.012
[[Page 66616]]
[GRAPHIC][TIFF OMITTED]TP22DE95.013
BILLING CODE 7710-12-C
[[Page 66617]]
D. Automation Carrier Route Rates--Ineligible Zip Codes
First-Class and Standard Mail (A) Automation Carrier Route and
Publications Service Carrier Route lettersize mail may not be prepared
to the 5-digit ZIP Code destinations listed below. This list will not
appear in the DMM but this information will be available in the City/
State file. Printed information may be published periodically in the
Postal Bulletin.
[GRAPHIC][TIFF OMITTED]TP22DE95.014
[[Page 66618]]
[GRAPHIC][TIFF OMITTED]TP22DE95.015
[[Page 66619]]
[GRAPHIC][TIFF OMITTED]TP22DE95.016
[[Page 66620]]
[GRAPHIC][TIFF OMITTED]TP22DE95.017
[[Page 66621]]
[GRAPHIC][TIFF OMITTED]TP22DE95.018
[[Page 66622]]
[GRAPHIC][TIFF OMITTED]TP22DE95.019
[[Page 66623]]
[GRAPHIC][TIFF OMITTED]TP22DE95.020
[[Page 66624]]
[GRAPHIC][TIFF OMITTED]TP22DE95.021
[[Page 66625]]
[GRAPHIC][TIFF OMITTED]TP22DE95.022
[[Page 66626]]
[GRAPHIC][TIFF OMITTED]TP22DE95.023
[[Page 66627]]
[GRAPHIC][TIFF OMITTED]TP22DE95.024
[[Page 66628]]
[GRAPHIC][TIFF OMITTED]TP22DE95.025
[[Page 66629]]
[GRAPHIC][TIFF OMITTED]TP22DE95.026
[[Page 66630]]
[GRAPHIC][TIFF OMITTED]TP22DE95.027
[[Page 66631]]
[GRAPHIC][TIFF OMITTED]TP22DE95.028
BILLING CODE 7710-12-C
[[Page 66632]]
E. Summary of DMM Changes
The DMM revisions shown below are based on the general proposals
described in the two advance notices of proposed rulemaking published
earlier this year by the Postal Service, on which comments have been
received and considered accordingly. Revisions are described by module,
based on the organization and content of DMM Issue 49 (September 1,
1995). This list is intended as an overview only, and should not be
viewed by commenters as defining every revision that they may need to
examine.
A (Addressing). Revisions in nomenclature are made throughout. A930
is revised to update the list of available AIS products, and A950 is
revised to show the more frequent product cycle for address coding
products.
C (Characteristics and Content). Revisions in nomenclature are made
throughout. C100 is amended to reflect the proposed new size limits for
pieces eligible for card rates. C300 and C400 are revised and merged
into new C600 to recognize the merger of third- and fourth-class into
Standard Mail. Terms used in various standards are defined in new
sections added to C810, C820, and C840.
D (Deposit, Collection, and Delivery). Revisions in nomenclature
are made throughout. D300 and D400 are revised and merged into new D600
to recognize the merger of third- and fourth-class into Standard Mail.
E (Eligibility). Revisions in nomenclature are made throughout.
E100 is amended to reflect the reorganization of First-Class Mail
(excluding Priority Mail) into the Retail and Automation subclasses
(whose specific standards are detailed in E130 and E140, respectively).
E200 is renamed to recognize the renaming of second-class mail as
Periodicals. E210, E250, and E270 are revised minimally. E220 is added
to present the standards for Publications Service. E230 is reorganized
to present the presort standards for Regular and Publications Service
in E231 and E232, respectively, and the standards retained for
Preferred Periodicals in E239. E240 is similarly revised to present the
automation standards for Regular publications in E241 and those brought
forward from existing rules for Preferred publications in E249.
(Standards for automation-compatible Publications Service mail are
included in the basic eligibility criteria in E220; there is no
separate automation rate for Publications Service.) E300 and E400 are
revised and merged into new E600 to recognize the merger of third- and
fourth-class into Standard Mail. E610 presents basic standards for all
Standard Mail in E611, for former third-class mail, now called Standard
Mail (A) in E612, and for former fourth-class mail, now called Standard
Mail (B) in E613. E620 contains standards for single-piece rates:
single-piece Standard Mail (A) (E621), parcel post (E622), bound
printed matter (E623), Special Standard Mail (currently special fourth-
class mail) (E624), and Library Mail (E625). E630 presents standards
for bulk rates: Regular Basic and 3/5 (E631); Enhanced Carrier Route
Basic, High Density, and Saturation (E632); basic and carrier route
bulk bound printed matter (E633); 5-Digit and BMC Presorted Special
Standard Mail (E634); and, consolidated but without substantive change
from current standards, for all existing Nonprofit rates (E639). E640
contains standards for automation-based rates: Automation Carrier
Route, 5-Digit, 3-Digit, 3/5 (for flats), and Basic (E641); and, also
consolidated but essentially unchanged from current standards, for all
existing Nonprofit rates (E649). E650 and E670 are revised minimally.
To avoid an anomalous and confusing situation in which current weight
limits for ``heavy letter'' barcoded mail would be applied in the
context of proposed rules (under which different weights would actually
apply), current DMM standards that are in place for the ``heavy
letter'' test (59 FR 65967-71, December 22, 1994), have been revised
for this rulemaking to reflect the DMM provisions that would become
effective if the test changes are made permanent in the future. Use of
these standards in this proposed rule does not constitute an explicit
or implicit decision on the test or the acceptability of heavy letter
mail under any circumstance; any announcement in that regard will be
made separately.
F (Forwarding and Related Services). Revisions are confined to
changes in nomenclature.
G (General Information) and I (Index Information). No revisions are
made.
L (Labeling Lists). Revisions in nomenclature are made throughout.
L003 is added to list 3-digit ZIP Code areas that are combined for
scheme sortation (only to listed destinations) under specific new
preparation standards. To reflect the wider use of the ADC network,
current L101 is relocated and renumbered as L004. To reflect other
revisions to distribution networks that have eliminated SDC, state, and
mixed states preparation, L201-203, L701-704, L706, and L707 are
deleted.
M (Mail Preparation and Sortation). Revisions in nomenclature are
made throughout. Current M011 is renumbered as M012, and new M011 is
added to consolidate basic definitions of terms used throughout other
mail preparation instructions. M012 and M013 are also updated to
include revised formats for optional endorsement lines and carrier
route information lines and to allow the inclusion of rate markings in
both. M020 is amended to provide more consistent package preparation
standards for other-than-Nonprofit mail. M033 is revised to add
consistent standards for tray preparation for letter- and flat-size
mail and to offer enhanced information about sack and tray preparation.
M040 is amended to incorporate revisions to pallet preparation
standards set forth in a final rule expected to be published on
December 20, 1995. M041 is revised to present general standards for
pallets and their use. M045 reorganizes the standards in current M042,
M043, and M044 as amended by the cited rulemaking, to present the
revised and consolidated standards for palletized mail preparation.
M050 is revised to include information about line-of-travel sequencing.
M100 is reorganized, with the standards for Retail Presort located in
new M130. Preparation standards for nonautomation Regular and
Publications Service Periodicals are in new M210; existing standards
for nonautomation Preferred Rate Periodicals are consolidated in M290.
M300 and M400 are revised and merged into new M600 to recognize the
merger of third- and fourth-class into Standard Mail. Regular Standard
Mail (A) preparation is detailed in M610, Enhanced Carrier Route
standards are in M620, and existing standards for Standard Mail (B)
(current fourth-class mail) and for Nonprofit Standard Mail are
contained in M630 and M690, respectively. Revised preparation standards
for Automation First-Class, automation-compatible Publications Service
and Barcoded rate Regular Periodicals, and Automation Standard Mail are
contained in M810 (letter-size pieces) and M820 (flat-size pieces).
M890 brings forward existing standards for Preferred Periodicals and
Nonprofit Standard Mail. Throughout, the optional city preparation
level has been eliminated (except for Preferred Periodicals); the SDC,
state, and mixed states preparation levels have been replaced with ADC
and mixed ADC levels; and increased citation to P012 has been made as
that section is being developed as the definitive standard for basic
documentation.
[[Page 66633]]
P (Postage and Payment Methods). Revisions in nomenclature are made
throughout. P012 is amended to improve the definition of
``standardized'' documentation. P300 and P400 are revised and merged
into new P600 to recognize the merger of third- and fourth-class into
Standard Mail. P710 is amended to contain new abbreviations for use
with manifest mailings.
R (Rates and Fees). Revisions in nomenclature are made throughout.
R000 contains updated stamp and stamped stationery information. R100
and R200 are amended to reflect revised rates and rate structures. R300
and R400 are revised and merged into new R600 to recognize the merger
of third- and fourth-class into Standard Mail and to show revised rates
and rate structures.
S (Special Services). Revisions in nomenclature are made throughout
with no other substantive changes.
Although exempt from the notice and comment requirements of the
Administrative Procedure Act (5 U.S.C. 553(b), (c)) regarding proposed
rulemaking by 39 U.S.C. 410(a), the Postal Service invites comments on
the following proposed revisions of the DMM, incorporated by reference
in the Code of Federal Regulations. See 39 CFR Part 111.
List of Subjects in 39 CFR Part 111
Postal Service.
PART 111--[AMENDED]
1. The authority citation for 39 CFR part 111 continues to read as
follows:
Authority: 5 U.S.C. 552(a); 39 U.S.C. 101, 401, 403, 404, 3001-
3011, 3201-3219, 3403-3406, 3621, 3626, 5001.
2. Revise the following sections of the Domestic Mail Manual as
noted below:
* * * * *
An appropriate amendment to 39 CFR 111.3 to reflect these changes
will be published if the proposal is adopted.
Stanley F. Mires,
Chief Counsel, Legislative.
A Addressing
A000 Basic Addressing
A010 General Information
[In 1.2d, replace ``Presorted First-Class,'' ``second-class,'' and
``bulk third-class mail; fourth-class mail'' with ``Retail Presort
First-Class,'' ``Periodicals,'' and ``bulk rate Standard Mail (A);
Standard Mail (B),'' respectively; delete the last sentence in 1.3; in
1.6 and 7.1, replace ``First-, third-, and fourth-class mail'' with
``First-Class and Standard Mail''; in 1.6, replace ``second-class''
with ``Periodicals''; in 4.3f and 7.0 (heading), replace ``Second-
[c]lass'' with ``Periodicals''; and in 4.3g, replace ``Fourth-class
mail'' with ``Standard Mail (B).'']
A040 Alternative Addressing Formats
[In 1.7, 2.2, 3.1, and 3.4, replace ``second-class'' with
``Periodicals.'']
A060 Detached Address Labels
[In 1.2, replace ``[S]econd- or [T]hird-[c]lass'' with ``Periodicals or
Standard Mail (A)''; in 1.3, replace ``[T]hird-[C]lass'' with
``Standard Mail (A)''; in 1.4 (heading) and 5.2b, delete ``[F]ourth-
[C]lass''; in 5.2a, replace ``Second-class'' with ``Periodicals''; in
5.2b, replace ``[T]hird-class'' with ``Standard Mail (A)''; in 5.3,
replace ``third- or fourth-class'' with ``Standard Mail.'']
* * * * *
A930 Other Services
* * * * *
2.0 AIS PRODUCTS
Customers should use USPS Address Information System (AIS) products
to obtain correct 5-digit ZIP Codes for the addresses on their mailing
lists. These products generally are more economical than mailing list
services. Customers with computerized address lists may obtain the
City/State file, Five-Digit ZIP Code file, Line-of-Travel (LOT)
information, Z4CHANGE file, ZIP Move file, Carrier Route Information
System (CRIS), and ZIP+4 tapes. Customers may also use USPS directories
and microfiche products to find correct 5-digit ZIP Codes for single
and multi-ZIP Coded offices. Information about ordering and using these
products is available by calling 1-800-238-3150.
* * * * *
[In 3.1a, 4.2, 4.3, 4.4, and 4.6, replace ``[Q]uarterly'' with
``[B]imonthly.'']
* * * * *
A950 Coding Accuracy Support System (CASS)
* * * * *
3.0 DATE OF ADDRESS MATCHING AND CODING
3.1 Updating Standards
Unless using Z4CHANGE, all automation and carrier route mailings
bearing addresses coded by any AIS product must have been coded with
current CASS-certified software and the current USPS database. Coding
must have been performed within 90 days of the mailing date for all
carrier route mailings; within 6 months for other Automation First-
Class, Automation Standard Mail, and Publications Service mailings;
within 1 year for other Nonprofit Standard Mail ZIP+4 and Barcoded rate
and Regular Periodicals Barcoded rate mailings. All AIS products can be
used immediately upon release. New product releases must be included in
address matching systems no later than 45 days following the release
date. The overlap in the product use dates allows mailers adequate time
to install the new data files and test their systems. Mailers are
expected to update their systems with the latest data files as soon as
practical and need not wait until the ``last permissible use'' date to
include the new information in their address matching systems. The
``current USPS database'' product cycle is defined by this matrix:
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
File release Required use Last permissible use
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Use of the file released on Must begin no later than: And must end no later than:
February 15..................... April 1......................... May 31.
April 15........................ June 1.......................... July 31.
June 15......................... August 1........................ September 30.
August 15....................... October 1....................... November 30
October 15...................... December 1...................... January 31.
December 15..................... February 1...................... March 31.
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
[[Page 66634]]
* * * * *
5.0 DOCUMENTATION
* * * * *
5.4 Providing Required Data
* * * * *
b. Name of the list processor using the CASS-certified software to
match and code the address list, the date the address list was
processed, the date of the USPS database used to code the address list,
the address list name or identification number, the total number of
address records on the list submitted for coding, the total number of
address records successfully coded to the appropriate depth of code,
and the percentage of total addresses submitted for coding that were
successfully coded.
* * * * *
6.0 OBTAINING CASS CERTIFICATION
6.1 Testing Arrangements
[Replace ``ZIP+4 or delivery point'' with ``carrier route, ZIP+4, or
delivery point.'']
* * * * *
C Characteristics and Content
C000 General Information
C010 General Mailability Characteristics
[In 1.1, replace ``third-class'' with ``Standard Mail (A)''; in 1.7,
replace ``third-class mail'' with ``Standard Mail (A)''; in 3.8,
replace ``third-class'' with ``Standard Mail (A)''; no other change in
text.]
* * * * *
C024 Other Restricted or Nonmailable Matter
[In 12.1, replace ``First-, third-, or fourth-class'' with ``First-
Class or Standard Mail''; no other change in text.]
* * * * *
C050 Mail Processing Categories
1.0 BASIC INFORMATION
[Replace current 1.1 and 1.2 with the following:]
All mail is assigned to one of the mail processing categories
listed below, based on the physical dimensions of the mailpiece,
regardless of the placement (orientation) of the delivery address on
the mailpiece. Unless permitted by standard, any mailing at other than
the single-piece First-Class or Standard Mail rates may not contain
pieces from more than one processing category.
* * * * *
3.0 FLAT-SIZE MAIL
* * * * *
3.2 Barcoded Flats
Automation-compatible flat-size mail is all mail meeting the
dimensional criteria in C820.
* * * * *
C100 First-Class Mail
1.0 DIMENSIONS
[In 1.2, delete the parenthetical reference.]
* * * * *
2.0 CARDS CLAIMED AT CARD RATES
2.1 Postcard Dimensions
Each card (i.e., each postal card or postcard or each half of a
double postal card or postcard) claimed at a card rate must be:
a. Rectangular.
b. Not less than 3\1/2\ inches high, 5 inches long, or 0.007 inch
thick.
c. Not larger than 4-1/4 inches high, 6 inches long, or 0.016 inch
thick.
* * * * *
2.8 Special Rules for Cards
Cards not mailed as Retail Presort First-Class Mail but with the
characteristics noted in 2.6 or 2.7 must:
a. Be prepared in mailings of not less than 200 cards of identical
size and weight.
b. Have an address that includes the correct ZIP Code or ZIP+4
code.
c. Have postage paid with permit imprints, meter stamps, or
precanceled stamps.
d. Be presorted to the finest extent possible and trayed as
required for Regular Basic and 3/5 rate Standard Mail.
* * * * *
C200 Periodicals
[In 1.1, 1.2, 1.3, 1.4, 1.4a, 1.4b, 1.4c, 1.6, 1.9, 1.10a, 1.10c, 2.1,
2.2, 2.3, 2.4, 2.5, 3.3, 3.7, 4.2, and 4.4, replace ``[S]econd-
[C]lass'' with ``Periodicals''; in 1.3, 1.3b, 1.3c, 1.3d, and 1.10c,
replace ``First- or [any] third-class'' with ``First-Class or [any]
Standard Mail (A)''; in 1.3a, 1.3c, 1.3d, 1.8b, and 1.10c, replace
``[T]hird-[C]lass'' with ``Standard Mail (A)''; in 2.2c, replace
``First-, third-, or fourth-class'' with ``First-Class or Standard
Mail''; in 2.4, replace ``Fourth-[C]lass'' with ``Standard Mail (B)'';
no other change in text.] [Delete current C300 and C400; no change to
current C500.]
* * * * *
C600 Standard Mail
1.0 DIMENSIONS
1.1 Standard Mail (A)
These dimensional standards apply to Standard Mail (A):
a. Each piece must weigh less than 16 ounces. Lower limits apply to
mail claimed at certain rates.
b. Within the standards for mailability in C010, there is no
maximum size for Regular single-piece, Basic, and 3/5 rate Standard
Mail (A).
c. Except for merchandise samples mailed with detached address
labels (DALs), the maximum size for Enhanced Carrier Route Standard
Mail is 11-3/4 inches high, 14 inches long, and 3/4 inch thick (see
Exhibit 1.1c). Merchandise samples whose dimensions exceed these
maximums may be sent at the carrier route rate if mailed using DALs,
provided that the samples meet all other applicable standards and the
DALs meet the standards in A060.
d. Minimum and maximum standards for size and weight might be
different for pieces claimed at certain rates.
1.2 Standard Mail (B)
These dimensional standards apply to Standard Mail (B):
a. Each piece may not exceed 70 pounds, except matter at bound
printed matter rates may not exceed 10 pounds.
b. The combined length and girth of a piece (i.e., the length of
its longest side plus the distance around its thickest part) may not
exceed 108 inches (see Exhibit 1.2b).
c. Two or more packages may be mailed as a single parcel, if they
are about the same size or shape or if they are parts of one article,
if they are securely wrapped or fastened together, and if they do not
together exceed the weight or size limits.
d. Lower size or weight standards apply to mail claimed at certain
rates, addressed to certain APOs and FPOs, and sent by the Department
of State to U.S. Government personnel abroad.
e. Pieces might be subject to minimum weight or dimensions based on
the standards for specific rates.
[Redesignate current Exhibits [C300.]1.3 and [C400.]1.2 as Exhibits
[C600.]1.1c and 1.2b, respectively.]
2.0 SURCHARGES
2.1 Nonstandard Mail
Single-piece rate Standard Mail (A) (other than a key or
identification device) weighing 1 ounce or less is nonstandard and
subject to the applicable surcharge if its thickness exceeds \1/4\ inch
or if, based on the
[[Page 66635]]
placement (orientation) of the address, its length exceeds 11-\1/2\
inches, its height exceeds 6-\1/8\ inches, or its length divided by its
height is less than 1.3 or more than 2.5.
2.2 Nonmachinable Mail
Specific items mailed at the inter-BMC/ASF parcel post rates might
be subject to a nonmachinable surcharge (as described in E600) unless
the mailer paid the special delivery or special handling fee.
3.0 SEALING
Standard Mail is not sealed against postal inspection. Standard
Mail may be prepared for automated processing but must allow easy
examination.
C800 Automation-Compatible Mail
C810 Letters and Cards
1.0 BASIC STANDARDS
1.1 Standards
All pieces must meet the general and specific standards for
mailability and their respective mail class. Pieces claimed at a card
rate must also meet the standards in C100.
1.2 Definitions
Terms used in these standards are defined as follows:
a. A ``barcoded mailing'' is one at the Automation First-Class,
Barcoded Regular and Preferred Periodicals, Publications Service
Periodicals (for automation-compatible pieces only), Automation
Standard Mail, or a barcoded Nonprofit Standard Mail rates.
b. An ``automation rate mailing'' or ``mailing at an automation-
based rate'' is one at any of the rates in 1.2a or the ZIP+4 rates for
Preferred Periodicals and Nonprofit Standard Mail.
c. ``Barcoded [cards/letters/pieces]'' refers to pieces in a
barcoded mailing.
2.0 DIMENSIONS
[Renumber current 2.0 through 10.0 as 3.0 through 11.0, respectively;
renumber current 1.2 and 1.3 as 2.1 and 2.2, respectively; consolidate
current 1.4 and 1.5 into new 2.3; revise other text as follows:]
* * * * *
2.3 Weight
These weight limits apply to automation-compatible mail:
a. Pieces of upgradable Retail First-Class, preferred ZIP+4 rate
Periodicals, upgradable Regular Standard Mail, or Nonprofit ZIP+4 rate
Standard Mail must not exceed 2.5 ounces.
b. Pieces of Automation First-Class and Standard Mail, automation-
compatible Publications Service and Barcoded rate Regular Periodicals
mail, and Barcoded rate Nonprofit Standard Mail must not exceed 3
ounces, except that the maximum weight for pieces that meet additional
barcoding standards in C840, are prepared in an envelope, and are part
of a 100% delivery point barcoded mailing is 3.4383 ounces for
Automation First-Class, Barcoded Regular or automation-compatible
Publications Service Periodicals, and Nonprofit Standard Mail; and
3.2941 ounces for Automation Standard Mail.
3.0 PROHIBITIONS
3.1 Wraps and Closures
An automation-compatible mailpiece may not be polywrapped,
polybagged, or shrinkwrapped; have clasps, string, buttons, or like
materials as a closure device; or have protrusions that might impede or
damage the mail or mail processing equipment.
* * * * *
[In 5.5, replace ``second-class'' with ``Periodicals.'']
* * * * *
C820 Flats
[Renumber current 2.0 through 6.0 as 3.0 through 7.0, respectively;
renumber current 1.2 through 1.5 as 2.1 through 2.4, respectively; in
renumbered 2.5b, 6.2, and 7.5, replace ``second-class'' with
``Periodicals''; in renumbered 2.5c, replace ``third-class'' with
``Standard Mail (A)''; revise other text as follows:]
1.0 BASIC STANDARDS
1.1 Standards
All pieces must meet the general and specific standards for
mailability and the class of mail and rate claimed.
1.2 Definitions
Terms used in these standards are defined as follows:
a. A ``barcoded mailing'' is one at the Automation First-Class,
Barcoded Regular and Preferred Periodicals, Publications Service
Periodicals (for automation-compatible pieces only), Automation
Standard Mail, or a barcoded Nonprofit Standard Mail rates.
b. An ``automation rate mailing'' or ``mailing at an automation-
based rate'' is one at any of the rates in 1.2a or the ZIP+4 rates for
Preferred Periodicals and Nonprofit Standard Mail.
c. ``Barcoded [flats/pieces]'' refers to pieces in a barcoded
mailing.
* * * * *
C840 Barcoded Mailpieces
[Retitle 1.0, renumber current 1.1 through 1.5 as 1.2 through 1.6, and
add new 1.1 as follows:]
1.0 DEFINITIONS OF TERMS AND BARCODE FORMATS
1.1 Terms
Terms used in these standards are defined as follows:
a. A ``barcoded mailing'' is one at the Automation First-Class,
Barcoded Regular and Preferred Periodicals, Publications Service
Periodicals (for automation-compatible pieces only), Automation
Standard Mail, or a barcoded Nonprofit Standard Mail rates.
b. An ``automation rate mailing'' or ``mailing at an automation-
based rate'' is one at any of the rates in 1.1a or the ZIP+4 rates for
Preferred Periodicals and Nonprofit Standard Mail.
c. ``Barcoded [cards/letters/flats/pieces]'' refers to pieces in a
barcoded mailing.
* * * * *
2.0 BARCODE LOCATION--LETTER-SIZE PIECES
2.1 Barcode Clear Zone
Unless it bears a DPBC in the address block, each automation-
compatible Publications Service piece and each piece in a mailing at an
automation-based rate must have a barcode clear zone. The barcode clear
zone and all printing and material in it must meet the reflectance
standards in 5.0. The barcode clear zone is a rectangular area in the
lower right corner of the address side of cards and letter-size
mailpieces defined by these boundaries:
a. Right: Right edge of the mailpiece.
b. Left: 4\3/4\ inches from the right edge of the mailpiece.
c. Bottom: Bottom edge of the mailpiece.
d. Top: \5/8\ inch from the bottom edge of the mailpiece.
2.2 General Standards
Barcode location is subject to these general standards:
a. ZIP+4 rate pieces may bear a DPBC within either the address
block or the barcode clear zone in the lower right corner of the
address side. Pieces may not bear a ZIP+4 barcode in the lower right
corner. Subject to rate eligibility standards, pieces may bear a ZIP+4
barcode in the address block or a 5-digit barcode within either the
address block or the barcode clear zone in the lower right corner of
the address side.
b. Pieces in barcoded mailings, except those subject to 2.2c, may
bear a DPBC (or, when allowed by standard, a 5-digit barcode) in either
the address block or the barcode clear zone. Pieces may bear a ZIP+4
barcode (subject to rate eligibility standards) only in the address
block unless the DPBC pieces in the
[[Page 66636]]
mailing are barcoded in the barcode clear zone.
c. Pieces weighing more than 3 ounces, up to the maximum weight for
barcoded pieces permitted by C810, must bear a DPBC in the address
block.
2.3 Printed on Mailpiece
Except as noted in 8.2 for 5-digit barcodes, if the barcode is
printed directly on the lower right corner of the piece, the entire
barcode must be inside the barcode read area defined by these limits:
a. Horizontally, the leftmost bar must be between 3\1/2\ inches and
4\1/4\ inches from the right edge of the mailpiece.
b. Vertically, the barcode must be positioned in the area between
\3/16\ inch and \7/16\ inch from the bottom edge of the mailpiece; the
bottom of the bars must be \1/4\ inch \1/16\ inch from the
bottom edge of the mailpiece.
2.4 Printed on Inserts
If the barcode is printed on an insert to appear through a window
in the lower right corner of an envelope:
a. The envelope and window must meet the physical standards in 7.0.
b. The entire barcode must be inside the barcode clear zone (but
need not be completely inside the barcode read area).
c. When the insert showing through the window is moved to any of
its limits within the envelope, the entire barcode must remain in the
barcode clear zone, and a clear space must be maintained that is at
least \1/8\ inch between the barcode and the left and right edges of
the window, at least \1/25\ inch between the barcode and the top edge
of the window, and at least \3/16\ inch between the barcode and the
bottom edge of the mailpiece.
2.5 Printed in Address Block
When the barcode is placed in the address block:
a. The barcode must be placed above the address line containing the
recipient''s name; below the city, state, and ZIP Code line; above or
below the keyline information; or above or below the optional
endorsement line.
b. The printing of the barcode anywhere between the address line
containing the recipient''s name and the city, state, and ZIP Code line
is prohibited.
c. The minimum clearance between the barcode and any information
line above or below it within the address block must be at least \1/25\
inch, and the separation between the barcode and top line or bottom
line of the address block must not exceed \5/8\ inch.
d. If a window envelope is used, the clearance between the leftmost
and rightmost bars and any printing or window edge must be at least \1/
8\ inch, and the clearance between the barcode and the top and bottom
window edges must be at least \1/25\ inch. These clearances must be
maintained during the insert''s range of movement in the envelope.
Address block windows on heavy letter mail (as defined in 2.2c) must be
covered; such windows may be covered on other mail. Covers for address
block windows are subject to 7.3.
e. If an address label is used, a clear space of at least \1/8\
inch must be left between the barcode and the left and right edges of
the address label, and the clearance between the barcode and the top
and bottom edges of the address label must be at least \1/25\ inch.
f. The rightmost bar must be at least \1/2\ inch from the right
edge of the mailpiece, and the leftmost bar must be less than 10\1/2\
inches from the right edge of the mailpiece and at least \1/2\ inch
from the left edge of the mailpiece; the top of each bar must be less
than 4 inches from the bottom edge of the mailpiece; and the bottom
line of the address block, including the barcode, must be at least \5/
8\ inch from the bottom of the mailpiece.
[Add new 3.0; renumber current 3.0 through 9.0 as 4.0 through 10.0,
respectively, and revise as follows:]
3.0 BARCODE LOCATION--FLAT-SIZE MAIL
The barcode may be anywhere on the address side that is at least 1/
8 inch from any edge of the mailpiece. That portion of the surface of
the piece on which the barcode is printed must meet the reflectance
standards in 5.0. The address side may bear only one POSTNET-format
barcode (i.e., the correct barcode for the delivery address on the
mailpiece). Other mailer-applied non-POSTNET barcodes may appear on the
address side if their format is not intelligible or not confusing to
automated postal equipment. Address block barcodes are subject to the
standards in 2.5a through 2.5f.
* * * * *
5.0 REFLECTANCE
* * * * *
5.4 Dark Fibers, Background Patterns
* * * * *
c. The barcode clear zone on all nonbarcoded pieces in a letter-
size barcoded mailing.
* * * * *
8.0 USE OF ZIP+4 OR 5-DIGIT BARCODES
8.1 Automation Pieces
Subject to the eligibility standards for the rate claimed, pieces
may bear ZIP+4 or 5-digit barcodes if they meet the standards in 3.0
through 7.0, except that:
a. ZIP+4 barcodes may not appear in the lower right corner on
pieces in Nonprofit Standard Mail or Preferred Periodicals ZIP+4 rate
mailings or Nonprofit Standard Mail or Preferred Periodicals Barcoded
rate mailings of pieces with address block barcodes.
b. Five-digit or ZIP+4 barcodes may not appear on Automation First-
Class or Automation Standard Mail letter-size pieces, or, except as
permitted by the 85% rule, on Barcoded rate or automation-compatible
Publications Service Periodicals letter-size pieces.
c. Five-digit barcodes may not appear either on Automation First-
Class or Automation Standard Mail flat-size pieces or on Barcoded rate
or automation-compatible Publications Service Periodicals flat-size
pieces except as permitted by the 85% rule.
* * * * *
D Deposit, Collection, and Delivery
D000 Basic Information
* * * * *
D020 Plant Loads
[In 3.1, replace ``second-, third-, and fourth-class mail'' with
``Periodicals and Standard Mail''; in 5.0, replace ``Second-Class''
with ``Periodicals.'']
* * * * *
D041 Customer Mail Receptacles
[In 2.10, replace ``second-class'' with ``Periodicals.'']
* * * * *
D072 Drop Shipment of Metered Mail
* * * * *
4.0 OPTION 2: DEPOSIT AT ANOTHER POST OFFICE
* * * * *
4.4 Markings
The drop shipment endorsement placed in the ad plate area may
include the marking required by the standards for the rate claimed if
that marking is placed directly below the drop ship endorsement. The
marking may also be provided separately, not necessarily by meter ad
plate, directly below the meter stamp or imprint, if it meets the
relevant size and legibility standards.
* * * * *
[[Page 66637]]
D100 First-Class Mail
[In 2.5, replace ``carrier route First-Class, Presorted First-Class,
ZIP+4, and Barcoded'' with ``First-Class Retail Presort or
Automation''; in 3.4, replace ``Presorted First-Class'' with ``First-
Class Retail Presort rate.'']
D200 Periodicals
D210 Basic Information
[In 1.0, 2.1, 2.2, 3.1, 3.4, 4.0, 4.1, 4.2, and 4.4a, replace
``[S]econd-[C]lass'' with ``Periodicals''; in 2.1, replace ``third- or
fourth-class'' with ``Standard Mail.'']
D230 Additional Entry
[In 1.1, replace ``second-class'' with ``Periodicals''; in 4.5, replace
``second- and third-class'' and ``third-class'' with ``Periodicals and
Standard Mail (A)'' and ``Standard Mail (A),'' respectively.]
[Delete current D300 and D400; no change to D500.]
* * * * *
D600 Standard Mail
1.0 SERVICE OBJECTIVES
The USPS does not guarantee the delivery of Standard Mail within a
specified time. Standard Mail might receive deferred service. Local
postmasters can provide more information.
2.0 MAIL DEPOSIT
2.1 Single-Piece Rates
Single-piece rate parcel post, bound printed matter, Special
Standard Mail, or Library mailpieces must be deposited at a time and
place specified by the postmaster at the post office of mailing.
Single-piece rate Standard Mail (A) bearing regular adhesive stamps may
be placed into collection boxes, mailchutes, receiving boxes, or other
places where mail is accepted. Mail with meter postage must be
deposited in a location under the jurisdiction of the licensing post
office, except as permitted in D072. Mail with permit imprints must be
presented at the post office as specified in P040 or P700. Mail with
precanceled stamps must be presented at the post office as specified in
P023.
2.2 Bulk Rates
Bulk (presort) rate Standard Mail must be presented at a business
mail entry unit of the post office where the postage permit or license
is held and the annual bulk mailing fee is paid. Mailings must be
deposited at the locations and times specified by the postmaster.
Plant-loaded mailings must be presented as specified by the applicable
standards and the plant load agreement. Metered bulk Standard Mail may
be deposited at other than the licensing post office only as permitted
under D072. Nonprofit Standard Mail must be deposited only at post
offices where the USPS has approved a nonprofit authorization under the
relevant standards.
2.3 Zoned Rates
Unless excepted by other standards, pieces paid at zoned rates must
be presented for acceptance at the post office from which the
applicable zoned rate postage is computed.
2.4 Separation of Mailings
Mailings are separated according to these conditions:
a. The same mailing may include pieces mailed at an Automation,
Enhanced Carrier Route, Regular, or Nonprofit rate if permitted by
standard.
b. Separate mailings at Automation, Enhanced Carrier Route, and
Regular rates may be reported on the same mailing statement if:
(1) All pieces from each mailing reported on the statement are
presented at the same time and are part of the same mailing job.
(2) Only qualifying carrier route pieces bear the applicable
endorsement.
(3) If palletized, the mixed rate level standards in M045 are met.
c. Multiple, separate Nonprofit rate mailings may be reported on
the same mailing statement under the conditions in 2.4b.
d. Nonprofit 3/5 rate and Nonprofit carrier route rate pieces may
not be part of the same mailing, unless the mailer is authorized to
combine mixed rate level mailings under M045.
* * * * *
E Eligibility
E000 Special Eligibility Standards
E010 Overseas Military Mail
[In 1.3, replace ``Third- or fourth-class mail'' with ``Standard
Mail''; in 1.4, replace ``Second-[C]lass'' with ``Periodicals''; in
1.5, replace ``fourth-class'' with ``Standard Mail (B)''; in 3.1,
replace ``second-, third-, or fourth-class'' with ``Periodicals or
Standard Mail''; and in 3.3, replace ``second-, third-, or fourth-class
mail'' with ``Periodicals or Standard Mail''; no other change in text.]
* * * * *
E060 Official Mail (Penalty)
[Renumber Exhibit 13.4 as Exhibit 13.3; in 4.3, 5.4a, 6.1, 13.0
(heading), 13.1, 13.2, 13.3, renumbered Exhibit 13.3, 13.5, and 15.2b,
replace ``[S]econd-[c]lass'' with ``Periodicals''; delete the last
sentence in 7.3; delete 9.6 and renumber 9.7 through 9.9 as 9.6 through
9.8, respectively; in 12.1, replace ``single-piece third-class, and
single-piece fourth-class (parcel post, special-fourth-class, and bound
printed matter)'' with ``and single-piece rate Standard Mail (single-
piece rate Standard Mail (A), parcel post, Special Standard Mail, or
bound printed matter)''; in 12.8 and 12.9, replace ``Third- or fourth-
class'' with ``Standard Mail''; in 15.2a, replace ``First-, third-, and
fourth-class'' with ``First-Class and Standard Mail''; and in 15.2b,
replace ``second-class'' with ``Periodicals''; no other change in
text.]
E070 Mixed Classes
[In 2.1, 2.2, 2.3, 3.3, and 3.4, replace ``First- or [T]hird-class''
with ``First-Class or Standard Mail (A)''; in 2.1, replace ``second-,
third-, or fourth-class'' with ``Periodicals or Standard Mail (A) or
(B)''; in 2.4, 2.5, 3.1, 3.2b, 3.5, 3.6, 4.2, and 5.0, replace ``third-
class'' with ``Standard Mail (A)''; in 3.0, 3.1, 3.2, 3.2a, 3.2c, and
3.2e, replace ``second-class'' with ``Periodicals''; in 4.1, replace
``with third- or fourth-class mail'' with ``in pieces of Standard
Mail''; in 4.2, replace ``fourth-class'' with ``Standard Mail (B)''; in
6.1, replace ``special fourth-class'' with ``Special Standard Mail'';
no other change in text.]
E100 First-Class Mail
E110 Basic Standards
1.0 CLASSIFICATION AND DESCRIPTION
* * * * *
1.2 Written or Typewritten Matter
Matter wholly or partially in writing or typewriting must be mailed
as First-Class Mail or Express Mail, except authorized additions to
Periodicals or Standard Mail and written or typewritten matter in
Library Mail and Special Standard Mail, as permitted by the
corresponding standards.
* * * * *
[Delete current 4.0 and 5.0; renumber 6.0 and 7.0 as 4.0 and 5.0,
respectively, and revise as follows:]
4.0 FEES
4.1 Presort Mailing Fee
A First-Class presort mailing fee must be paid once each 12-month
period at each office of mailing by any person or organization entering
mailings at Retail Presort First-Class, Automation First-Class, and/or
Presorted Priority Mail rates. Payment of one fee allows a mailer to
enter mail at all those rates.
[[Page 66638]]
Persons or organizations paying this fee may enter mail of their
clients as well as their own mail.
* * * * *
5.0 DOCUMENTATION
A mailing statement, completed and signed by the mailer, using the
correct USPS form or an approved facsimile, must be submitted with each
mailing except for single-piece Retail First-Class or single-piece
Priority Mail mailings in which the correct postage is affixed to each
piece. Supporting documentation might be required by the standards for
the rate claimed or the postage payment method used.
* * * * *
[Replace current E131 and E132 with new E130 as follows:]
E130 Retail Rates
1.0 BASIC STANDARDS
1.1 All Pieces
All pieces of Retail First-Class Mail must:
a. Meet the basic standards for First-Class Mail in E110.
b. Weigh 11 ounces or less.
c. Bear a delivery address.
d. Meet the postage payment standards in P013 and P100.
1.2 Barcodes
Any POSTNET barcode on a mailpiece in a Retail First-Class mailing
must meet the standards in C840 and A950 and must be the correct
barcode for the delivery address.
1.3 Nonstandard Surcharge
A nonstandard surcharge is assessed on each single-piece or Retail
Presort First-Class rate piece weighing 1 ounce or less that exceeds
the size limits in C100.
2.0 SINGLE-PIECE RATES
The single-piece Retail rates apply to any First-Class Mail
weighing 11 ounces or less and not eligible for and claimed at the
single-piece Retail card rate or at a Retail Presort or Automation
First-Class rate. The single-piece Retail card rate applies to cards
not eligible for and claimed at a Retail Presort or Automation First-
Class rate.
3.0 PRESORT RATES
3.1 Standards
In addition to the standards in 1.0, all pieces in a Presort First-
Class rate mailing must:
a. Be part of a single mailing of at least 500 pieces of Retail
Presort First-Class Mail.
b. Be in the same processing category.
c. Bear a delivery address that includes the correct numeric ZIP
Code or ZIP+4 code and that meets the standards for accuracy and
maintenance in 3.2 and 3.3.
d. Be marked, presorted, and documented as specified in M130.
3.2 Address Quality
Effective 6 months from the date on which Classification Reform is
implemented, or on January 1, 1997, whichever is sooner, addresses
appearing on all pieces claimed at Retail Presort rates must have been
updated within 6 months of the date of mailing by a USPS-approved
address update tool (e.g., the ``Address Correction Endorsement,'' ACS,
or NCOA). Mailers must certify that this standard has been met when the
corresponding mail is presented to the USPS. This standard applies to
each address individually, not to a specific list or mailing. An
address meeting this standard may be used in mailings at any other rate
to which the standard applies throughout the 6-month period following
its most recent update.
3.3 ZIP Code Accuracy
Effective 3 months from the date on which Classification Reform is
implemented, 5-digit ZIP Codes included in addresses appearing on
pieces claimed at Retail Presort rates must have been verified and
corrected within 12 months of the date of mailing by a USPS-approved
method. Mailers must certify that this standard has been met when the
corresponding mail is presented to the USPS. This standard applies to
each address individually, not to a specific list or mailing. An
address meeting this standard may be used in mailings at any other rate
to which the standard applies throughout the 12-month period following
its most recent update.
[Replace current E142, E144, E145, and E147 through E149 with new E140
as follows:]
E140 Automation Rates
1.0 BASIC STANDARDS
1.1 All Pieces
All pieces in an Automation First-Class mailing must:
a. Meet all the basic standards for First-Class Mail in E110.
b. Be part of a single mailing of at least 500 pieces of Automation
First-Class Mail.
c. Be in the same processing category and meet the applicable
physical standards in C810 or C820.
d. Bear a delivery address that includes the correct numeric 5-
digit ZIP Code or ZIP+4 code, or the correct numeric equivalent to the
delivery point barcode (DPBC).
e. Meet the address quality and coding standards in 1.2, 1.3 (if
applicable), A800, and A950.
f. Be marked, presorted, and documented as specified in M810 or
M820, as applicable.
g. Meet the postage payment standards in P013 and P100.
h. Bear an accurate barcode meeting the standards in C840, either
the correct DPBC if a card or letter (on the piece or on an insert
showing through a barcode window) or the correct ZIP+4 barcode or DPBC
if a flat.
1.2 Address Quality
Effective 6 months from the date on which Classification Reform is
implemented, or on January 1, 1997, whichever is sooner, addresses
appearing on all pieces claimed at Automation rates must have been
updated within 6 months of the date of mailing by a USPS-approved
address update tool (e.g., the ``Address Correction Endorsement,'' ACS,
or NCOA). Mailers must certify that this standard has been met when the
corresponding mail is presented to the USPS. This standard applies to
each address individually, not to a specific list or mailing. An
address meeting this standard may be used in mailings at any other rate
to which the standard applies throughout the 6-month period following
its most recent update.
1.3 Carrier Route Presort
Mailers must apply carrier route codes to mailings using CASS-
certified software and the current USPS Carrier Route Information
System (CRIS) scheme or another AIS product containing carrier route
information (see A930). Mailers must have updated carrier route
information within 90 days of the mailing date. Carrier route rates for
letter-size mail are available only for those 5-digit ZIP Code areas
identified in the USPS AIS products used for address coding.
1.4 Enclosed Reply Envelopes and Cards
Effective January 1, 1997, all courtesy reply and business reply
envelopes and cards provided to addressees as enclosures in Automation
First-Class Mail must bear the correct facing identification mark (FIM)
and delivery point barcode for the delivery address of the reply piece
and must meet the automation compatibility standards in C810 or C820,
as appropriate. Mailers must certify that this standard has been
[[Page 66639]]
met when the corresponding mail is presented to the USPS.
2.0 RATE APPLICATION
2.1 Letters and Cards
Automation First-Class rates apply to each piece that is correctly
presorted under M810 into the corresponding qualifying groups:
a. Pieces in full carrier route trays, or in carrier route packages
of 10 or more pieces each placed in 5-digit carrier routes trays,
qualify for the Automation Carrier Route rate. (Preparation to qualify
for the Carrier Route rate is optional and need not be performed for
all carrier routes in a 5-digit area.)
b. Groups of 150 or more pieces in full or overflow 5-digit trays
qualify for the Automation 5-Digit rate. (Preparation to qualify for
the 5-Digit rate is optional.)
c. Groups of 150 or more pieces in full or overflow 3-digit or 3-
digit scheme trays qualify for the Automation 3-Digit rate.
d. Pieces in full or overflow AADC trays and in all mixed AADC
trays qualify for the Automation Basic rate.
2.2 Flats
Automation First-Class rates apply to each piece that is correctly
presorted under M820 into the corresponding qualifying groups:
a. Pieces in 5-digit or 3-digit packages of 10 or more pieces each
qualify for the Automation 3/5 rate.
b. Pieces in ADC or mixed ADC packages qualify for the Automation
Basic rate.
E200 Periodicals
E210 Basic Standards
E211 Standards Applicable to All Periodicals Publications
[In 1.1, 1.2, 2.1, 3.0, 4.1, 5.1, 6.1, 6.2, 7.2, 7.3, 7.4, 7.5, 8.1,
8.2, 9.0, 11.1, and 12.0, replace ``second-class'' with
``Periodicals.'' In 1.1, 4.1, 5.3, 7.4, 7.5, 10.2, and 13.1a, replace
``second-class mail privileges'' with ``Periodicals mailing
privileges.'' In 6.1 and 9.0, replace ``First-, third-, or fourth-class
rates'' with ``First-Class or Standard Mail rates.'' Revise other text
as follows:]
* * * * *
10.0 IDENTIFICATION
* * * * *
10.4 Bound Publication
In a bound publication (one securely bound by two or more staples,
spiral binding, glue, stitching, or other permanent fastening), the
identification statement must be shown conspicuously as described in
10.3 or on one of the last three editorial pages inside the back cover.
If the publication is mailed with a permissible nonincidental enclosure
paid with permit imprint, the identification statement must be located
as specified in 10.3.
10.5 Identification Statement Content
The identification statement must contain:
* * * * *
g. The imprint ``Periodicals Postage Paid at . . .'' or, if mailed
at two or more offices, ``Periodicals Postage Paid at . . . and at
additional mailing offices.'' A notice of pending application is shown
instead if copies are mailed while an application is pending:
``Application to Mail at Periodicals Postage Rates is Pending at. . .
.''
* * * * *
13.0 FEES
13.1 Fee Required
* * * * *
e. Publications Service.
* * * * *
14.0 BASIC RATE ELIGIBILITY
14.1 Regular Rates
Regular rates apply to all copies of an authorized Periodicals
publication mailed by a publisher or news agent, except nonrequester
and nonsubscriber copies under E215, unless the publication is
separately authorized Publications Service rates or a preferred rate.
Mailings are also subject to the standards that apply to rates or
discounts claimed. Regular rates include a per piece charge, a zone-
based charge for the weight of the advertising portion of the
publication, and an unzoned charge for the weight of the nonadvertising
portion. Each piece rate requires specific preparation.
14.2 Preferred Rates
Preferred rates include the in-county and special (nonprofit,
classroom, and science-of-agriculture) rates. Requester publications
are not eligible for preferred rates. Publications Service publications
may qualify only for in-county rates, subject to E270. Copies of
authorized Periodicals publications mailed at any preferred rate must
meet the corresponding eligibility standards. Nonsubscriber copies
mailed at preferred rates are subject to the standards in E215 and E270
and those applicable to other rates or discounts claimed. Preferred
rates include a per piece charge, a zone-based charge for the weight of
the advertising portion of the publication, and an unzoned charge for
the weight of the nonadvertising portion, except that in-county rates
apply without differentiation to both the advertising and
nonadvertising portions. Each piece rate requires specific preparation.
14.3 Publications Service Rates
Publications Service rates are applicable to pieces eligible under
E220. Publications Service rates include a per piece charge and a zone-
based charge applied to the entire weight of the publication. The
Publications Service rate requires specific preparation.
14.4 Discounts and Adjustments
Postage for Periodicals publications is reduced by any applicable
discounts:
a. The nonadvertising adjustment applies to the outside-county
piece rate charges for Regular and Preferred Periodicals publications
and is computed as described in P013.
b. Presort discounts are available for Publications Service
Periodicals, subject to E220, and for Regular and Preferred
Periodicals, subject to E230.
c. Automation-based discounts are available for Regular and
Preferred Periodicals, subject to E240.
d. Destination entry discounts are available for copies of any
Periodicals publication entered by the publisher at specific USPS
facilities, subject to E250.
14.5 Copies Mailed by Public
The applicable single-piece First-Class or Standard Mail rate is
charged on copies of publications mailed by the general public (i.e.,
other than publishers or registered news agents) and on copies returned
to publishers.
E212 Additional Standards for Qualification Categories
[In 1.1, 5.1, 6.1, and 6.2, replace ``second-class'' with
``Periodicals.'' In 1.3, 2.1, 2.2, 2.3, 3.1, 5.1, and 5.2, replace
``second-class mail privileges'' with ``Periodicals mailing
privileges.'' In 6.5, replace ``third- or fourth-class rates'' with
``Standard Mail rates.'']
* * * * *
7.0 PUBLICATIONS SERVICE
Publications Service is available only to those publications
authorized Periodicals mailing privileges as general or requester
publications that meet the additional standards in E220.
E213 Periodicals Mailing Privileges
[In 2.1, 3.5, and 3.6, replace ``second-class'' with ``Periodicals.''
In 1.1, 1.2, 1.3, 1.4, 1.5, 1.9, 2.1, 3.1, 3.4, 3.5, 4.0 (heading),
4.1, 4.2, and 4.3, replace ``second-class mail privileges'' with
``Periodicals mailing privileges.'' In 2.1, replace ``First-, third-,
or fourth-class
[[Page 66640]]
rates'' with ``First-Class or Standard Mail rates.'' In 2.2, replace
``third- or fourth-class rates'' with ``Standard Mail rates.'' Do not
revise the title of 39 CFR 954 shown in 3.7 and 4.3.]
1.0 ORIGINAL ENTRY APPLICATIONS
* * * * *
1.11 Publications Service
Application for Publications Service is in addition to an
application for original entry and is subject to E220. Although a
publication must be authorized original entry as a Periodicals
publication to be eligible for Publications Service, application for
both may be made concurrently.
2.0 MAILING WHILE APPLICATION PENDING
2.1 Before Approval
[Add to the end of the section:]
Pending Publications Service publications are charged the
applicable Periodicals rate if previously authorized.
* * * * *
E214 Reentry
[In 1.1, 1.2, 1.3, 2.2, 3.1, 3.3, 3.6, and 3.10, replace ``second-
class'' with ``Periodicals.'' In 2.1, replace ``second-class mail
privileges'' with ``Periodicals mailing privileges.'' In 3.10, replace
``third- or fourth-class postage'' with ``Standard Mail postage.'' Do
not revise the title of 39 CFR 954 shown in 3.12.]
* * * * *
3.0 APPLICATIONS FOR REENTRY
* * * * *
3.9 During Appeal
During the appeal:
a. Copies of any issue of a publication denied reentry under 1.0
and found unqualified for Periodicals mailing privileges are accepted
in a pending status at the applicable Standard Mail rates. For this
standard, ``pending status'' begins when the appeal is filed and
continues until the end of the appeal process.
b. Copies of a publication denied reentry under 2.0 are accepted at
the currently applicable Periodicals rate.
c. The publisher must submit the applicable Periodicals and
Standard Mail mailing statements with each mailing of the publication
in a pending status. Failure to submit these statements is sufficient
grounds to deny a postage refund under 3.12.
* * * * *
E215 Copies Not Paid or Requested by Addressee
[In 1.8, 2.1, 2.2, and 2.6, replace ``second-class'' with
``Periodicals.'' In 1.6, replace ``second-class mail privileges'' with
``Periodicals mailing privileges.'' In 2.6 and 2.7, replace ``First-,
third-, or fourth-class rate[s]'' with ``First-Class or Standard Mail
rate[s].'' In 2.7, replace ``third- or fourth-class rates'' with
``Standard Mail rates.'']
E216 Publisher Records
[Relocate current 3.0 to E231 and revise as shown below; renumber
current 4.0 and 5.0 as 3.0 and 4.0, respectively; as renumbered, in
1.1, 2.1, 3.1, 3.4, 4.1, and 4.2, replace ``second-class'' with
``Periodicals,'' and in 1.1, 2.2, 3.2, and 3.3, replace ``second-class
mail privileges'' with ``Periodicals mailing privileges.'']
E217 Authorization for Special Rates
[In 1.3, 2.1, 2.2, 3.4, and 3.5, replace ``second-class'' with
``Periodicals.'' In 1.2, 2.1, 2.2, replace ``second-class mail
privileges'' with ``Periodicals mailing privileges.'' In 2.2, replace
``First-, third-, or fourth-class rates'' with ``First-Class or
Standard Mail rates.'' In 2.2, replace ``third- or fourth-class
postage'' with ``Standard Mail postage.'' In 3.4, replace ``third- or
fourth-class rates'' with ``Standard Mail rates.'']
1.0 APPLICATION
1.1 Basic Information
[Add to the end of the section:]
* * * Preferred rates (except in-county rates) are not available to
Publications Service publications.
* * * * *
E220 Publications Service
1.0 BASIC INFORMATION
1.1 Availability
Publications Service is available to authorized Periodicals
publications that meet the applicable standards in E211 through E216
(unless specifically excepted) and the additional standards in 2.0,
regardless of the category of the publication's authorization for
Periodicals mailing privileges. Only the Publications Service rates in
R200 are available to Publications Service publications, except that
in-county rates may be claimed for qualifying copies. The eligibility
standards for Publications Service consider only copies mailed at
Publications Service rates and exclude copies claimed at in-county
rates, copies mailed to addressees at Express Mail, Priority Mail,
First-Class Mail, or Standard Mail rates, and copies distributed
outside the mail.
1.2 Application
Publishers must apply for Publications Service in addition to the
category of authorization in which Periodicals mailing privileges are
sought under E213. A separate application is required for Publications
Service although it may be submitted at the same time as an application
for Periodicals mailing privileges. Data on the application for
original entry or reentry may be used to establish compliance with the
further criteria prescribed for Publications Service; additional
supporting documentation must be provided as necessary. Decisions on
applications for Publications Service are made by the RCSC manager in
whose service area the publication is authorized original entry.
Appeals of adverse decisions may be made under G020. A publication
whose application to mail at Publications Service rates is withdrawn by
the publisher or denied by the USPS is ineligible to reapply for
authorization for 1 year from the date of the publisher's letter of
withdrawal or final denial notice from the USPS.
2.0 ELIGIBILITY
2.1 Standards
Each Publications Service publication must:
a. Contain at least 30% nonadvertising in each issue (advertising
is defined in E211).
b. Have a minimum of 75% circulation to a legitimate list of
requesters (for requester publications) or subscribers (for other
publications). A legitimate list of subscribers meeting the standards
applicable to general publications is required for all but requester
publications, regardless of whether such a list is otherwise required
by the standards applicable to the publication's category of
authorization.
c. Have at least 90% of the copies of each issue presorted to 3-
digit ZIP Code areas, subject to 2.3 and 2.4.
d. Bear a delivery address that includes the correct numeric ZIP+4
or 5-digit ZIP Code (or, only if prepared with a delivery point barcode
(DPBC), the numeric equivalent to the DPBC).
e. Be marked, presorted, and documented as specified in M200, M810
or M820, as applicable, and P012.
f. Meet the postage payment standards in P013 and P200.
g. Be audited by a certified public accountant or national
circulation audit service approved by the USPS to verify
[[Page 66641]]
accurate postage calculation and compliance with the applicable paid or
requester circulation standards in E212 and 2.1b.
h. Use Address Change Service.
2.2 Automation-Compatible Mailpieces
Letter-size mailpieces meeting the automation compatibility
standards in C810 must also meet the standards in 3.0. Flat-size
mailpieces meeting the automation compatibility standards in C820 must
also meet the standards in 4.0.
2.3 90% Standard
To count toward the 90% 3-digit presort standard in 2.1c, a copy
must be one of 24 or more copies for the same 3-digit ZIP Code area
that are prepared in firm, carrier route, 5-digit, or 3-digit packages
of six or more copies each. Copies in firm packages count individually
toward the 90% standard, but the firm package is considered a single
piece for other presort and postage payment purposes. Firm packages may
not be included in mailings of automation-compatible letter-size
mailpieces.
2.4 Issue ``Window''
At the time application for Publications Service is made, the
publisher must define a time period or ``window'' that begins and ends
at the same relative point in the production/distribution cycle of each
issue. For administering the 90% standard in 2.1c and 2.3, all copies
of any issue or edition of the publication mailed during a ``window''
are considered part of the distribution of the issue whose primary
distribution is then occurring, and are included in the determination
of its compliance with the 90% standard.
2.5 ZIP Code Accuracy
Except for automation-compatible pieces, effective 3 months from
the date on which Classification Reform is implemented, 5-digit ZIP
Codes included in addresses appearing on pieces claimed at Publications
Service rates must have been verified and corrected within 12 months of
the date of mailing by a USPS-approved method. Mailers must certify
that this standard has been met when the corresponding mail is
presented to the USPS. This standard applies to each address
individually, not to a specific list or mailing. An address meeting
this standard may be used in mailings at any other rate to which the
standard applies throughout the 12-month period following its most
recent update.
3.0 ADDITIONAL STANDARDS FOR AUTOMATION-COMPATIBLE LETTER-SIZE PIECES
3.1 All Letter-Size Mailpieces
All letter-size Publications Service mailpieces that meet the
physical standards in C810 must:
a. Meet the address quality and coding standards of A800 and A950.
b. Be presorted and documented as specified in M810.
c. Bear the correct DPBC meeting the barcode standards in C840,
subject to 3.2.
3.2 85% Rule
The correct DPBC for the delivery address, as defined by the
standards for address quality and coding accuracy in A800 and A950,
must appear on each piece in any mailing containing heavy letters (as
defined in C810) and on at least 85% of all pieces in other letter-size
mailings. Remaining pieces must have a barcode clear zone in the lower
right corner meeting the reflectance standards in C840, meet the 5-
digit barcode standards in C840 (if applicable), and not have a window
in the lower right corner. Compliance with the 85% standard is based on
all copies mailed during the production/mailing ``window'' defined in
2.4.
4.0 ADDITIONAL STANDARDS FOR AUTOMATION-COMPATIBLE FLAT-SIZE PIECES
4.1 All Flat-Size Mailpieces
All flat-size Publications Service mailpieces that meet the
applicable standards in C820 must:
a. Meet the address quality and coding standards of A800 and A950.
b. Be presorted and documented as specified in M820.
c. Be presorted to carrier routes, or bear the correct DPBC, ZIP+4
barcode, or 5-digit barcode meeting the barcode standards in C840,
subject to 4.2.
4.2 85% Rule
At least 85% of all pieces must either be presorted to carrier
routes or bear the correct ZIP+4 barcode or DPBC for the delivery
address, as defined by the standards for address quality and coding
accuracy in A800 and A950. Remaining pieces must bear the correct 5-
digit barcode meeting the applicable standards in C840. Compliance with
the 85% standard is based on all copies mailed during the production/
mailing ``window'' defined in 2.4.
5.0 NONCOMPLIANCE
A Publications Service publication is subject to the revocation or
suspension provisions of E213 if it fails to meet the applicable basic
standards for Periodicals mailing privileges in E211 through E216. A
Publications Service publication that fails to meet the advertising
standard in 2.1a or the density standard in 2.1c is subject to a
surcharge of 40% of the total postage otherwise payable for the issue
(as defined in 2.4). A Publications Service publication that fails to
meet the circulation standards in 2.1b is subject to revocation of
authorization to mail at Publications Service rates, as determined by
the RCSC manager in whose service area the publication is authorized
original entry. Appeals of surcharge assessments or revocation notices
may be made under G020. A publication whose authorization to mail at
Publications Service rates is ended, either voluntarily by the
publisher or by the USPS through a final revocation, is ineligible to
reapply for authorization for 1 year from the termination date of the
previous authorization.
E230 Presort Rates
E231 Regular Periodicals
1.0 GENERAL INFORMATION
1.1 Standards
The standards for presort rates are in addition to the general
standards for Periodicals in E210, the standards for other rates or
discounts claimed, and the applicable preparation standards in M210,
M810, or M820. Not all combinations of presort level, automation, and
destination entry discounts are allowed.
1.2 Palletized Mail
A correctly prepared package is the equivalent of a sack when
palletized under M045. Individual pieces qualify for the presort level
rate appropriate to the palletized package in which they are placed,
regardless of the destination of the pallet. Eligibility for
destination entry or other zoned rates remains dependent on the point
of entry.
2.0 CARRIER ROUTE RATES
2.1 Carrier Route Information
Mailers must presort mail to carrier routes using the latest USPS
Carrier Route Information System (CRIS) scheme (see A930). Mailers must
have incorporated the CRIS changes in their mailings within 90 days
before the date of mailing.
2.2 Eligibility
Preparation to qualify eligible pieces for carrier route rates is
optional and is subject to M210. Pieces may not claim both a carrier
route presort rate and a barcode discount. Carrier route presort
[[Page 66642]]
need not be performed for all carrier routes in a 5-digit area.
Specific rate eligibility is subject to these standards:
a. The basic carrier route rate applies to pieces in carrier route
packages of six or more pieces each that are correctly sorted to
carrier route or carrier routes trays (letter-size pieces) or sacks
(flat-size pieces).
b. The high density and saturation rates apply to pieces that are
eligible for the basic carrier route rate, are prepared in carrier walk
sequence, and meet the applicable density standards in 5.0 for the rate
claimed.
3.0 3/5 RATES
Subject to M210, 3/5 rates apply to:
a. Letter-size pieces in 5-digit or 3-digit packages of six or more
pieces each, either correctly placed in 5-digit or 3-digit trays
containing at least 24 pieces or in an overflow 3-digit tray.
b. Flat-size pieces in 5-digit or 3-digit packages of six or more
pieces each, either correctly placed in 5-digit or 3-digit sacks or
palletized under M045.
4.0 BASIC RATES
Basic rates apply to pieces not eligible for or claimed at either
the carrier route or 3/5 rates.
5.0 WALK-SEQUENCE DISCOUNTS--REGULAR PERIODICALS
[Insert text of current E230.7.0 and 8.0, renumbered as 5.0 and 6.0,
respectively; in renumbered 5.4b and 5.4d, replace ``125-piece walk-
sequence rate'' with ``high density/125-piece walk-sequence rate'';
revise other text as follows:]
5.1 Eligibility
The 125-piece or saturation walk-sequence rates apply to each walk-
sequenced piece in a carrier route mailing, eligible under 2.2 and
prepared under M210, that also meets the corresponding addressing and
density standards in 5.4. (For this standard, ``carrier route''
includes city carrier routes, rural routes, highway contract routes,
and general delivery and post office box sections.)
* * * * *
E232 Publications Service Periodicals
1.0 GENERAL INFORMATION
1.1 Standards
The standards for presort rates are in addition to the general
standards for Periodicals in E210, for Publications Service in E220,
the standards for other rates or discounts claimed, and the applicable
preparation standards in M210, M810, or M820. Not all combinations of
presort level, automation, and destination entry discounts are allowed.
1.2 Palletized Mail
A correctly prepared package is the equivalent of a sack when
palletized under M045. Individual pieces qualify for the presort level
rate appropriate to the palletized package in which they are placed,
regardless of the destination of the pallet. Eligibility for
destination entry or other zoned rates remains dependent on the point
of entry.
2.0 CARRIER ROUTE RATES
2.1 Carrier Route Information
Mailers must apply carrier route codes to mailings using CASS-
certified software and the current USPS Carrier Route Information
System (CRIS) scheme or another AIS product containing carrier route
information (see A930). Mailers must have updated the carrier route
information within 90 days before the mailing date. Carrier route rates
for automation-compatible letter-size mail are available only for those
5-digit ZIP Code areas identified in the USPS AIS products used for
address coding.
2.2 Automation-Compatible Letter-Size Pieces
Where available, Carrier Route rates apply to pieces in carrier
route packages of six or more pieces each that are correctly sorted to
full carrier route or any 5-digit carrier routes trays. Preparation to
qualify eligible pieces for carrier route rates is optional and is
subject to M210 and M810. Carrier route presort need not be performed
for all carrier routes in a 5-digit area.
2.3 Other Letter-Size Pieces
Carrier Route rates apply to pieces in carrier route packages of
six or more pieces each that are correctly sorted to full carrier route
or any 5-digit carrier routes trays. Preparation to qualify eligible
pieces for carrier route rates is optional and is subject to M210.
Carrier route presort need not be performed for all carrier routes in a
5-digit area. Carrier Route rate mail must be prepared in carrier line-
of-travel (LOT) sequence, using official LOT schemes prescribed by the
USPS (see M050).
2.4 Flat-Size Pieces
Carrier Route rates apply to pieces in carrier route packages of
six or more pieces each that are correctly sorted to carrier route
sacks containing at least 24 pieces, or to any 5-digit carrier routes
sacks. Preparation to qualify eligible pieces for Carrier Route rates
is optional and is subject to the applicable standards in M210 or M820.
Carrier route presort need not be performed for all carrier routes in a
5-digit area. Carrier Route rate mail must be prepared in carrier walk
sequence or line-of-travel (LOT) sequence, using official LOT schemes
prescribed by the USPS (see M050).
3.0 BASIC RATES
Basic rates apply to pieces correctly prepared under M210 and not
claimed at Carrier Route rates.
E239 Preferred Periodicals
[Copy text of current E230; renumber current 6.0 as 1.4; renumber 7.0
as 6.0; delete current 8.0; revise the remainder as follows:]
1.0 GENERAL INFORMATION
1.1 Standards
The standards for presort rates are in addition to the general
standards for Periodicals in E210, the standards for other rates or
discounts claimed, and the applicable preparation standards in M290 or
M890. Not all combinations of presort level, automation, and
destination entry discounts are allowed.
1.2 Optional Preparation
At the mailer's option, Preferred Periodicals may be prepared under
the standards for Regular Periodicals in M210, including presort. Under
this option, Preferred Periodicals can claim Level I/K, Level H, or
Level G/J rates, and may be combined (comailed) with Regular
Periodicals in the same mailing, if all corresponding eligibility
standards in E231 for Carrier Route, 3/5, and Basic, respectively, are
met, except that pieces in 3-digit packages can earn the Level H rate
only when prepared for the unique 3-digit ZIP Code destinations
identified in L002, Column A. Presort of the combined mailing is based
on the total combined volume of pieces.
1.3 Palletized Mail
A correctly prepared package is the equivalent of a sack when
palletized under M045. Individual pieces qualify for the presort level
rate appropriate to the palletized package in which they are placed,
regardless of the destination of the pallet. Eligibility for
destination entry or other zoned rates remains dependent on the point
of entry.
1.4 Reporting Presort Level
Publishers must separately report copies at Levels G3 and G5, and
Levels J1, J3, and J5, only when claiming a ZIP+4 or ZIP+4 Barcoded
rate.
[[Page 66643]]
2.0 CARRIER ROUTE (LEVEL I/K) RATES
2.1 Rate Application
Level I/K rates apply as follows:
a. Level I1 or K1 rates apply to pieces in carrier route packages
of six or more pieces each that are correctly sorted to carrier route
or carrier routes trays or sacks.
b. Level I2 or K2 rates apply to pieces eligible for the Level I1
or K1 rates that are further prepared in carrier delivery walk sequence
and in the density necessary to meet the additional standards in 6.0
for the 125-piece walk-sequence rate.
c. Level I3 or K3 rates apply to pieces eligible for the Level I1
or K1 rates that are further prepared in carrier delivery walk sequence
and in the density necessary to meet the additional standards in 6.0
for the saturation walk-sequence rate.
2.2 Carrier Route Information
Mailers must presort mail to carrier routes using the latest USPS
Carrier Route Information System (CRIS) scheme. Mailers must have
incorporated the CRIS changes in their mailings within 90 days before
the date of mailing (see A930).
3.0 3- AND 5-DIGIT (LEVEL H) RATES
3.1 H Rates
Level H rates apply to pieces in 5-digit, optional city, and unique
3-digit packages of six or more pieces each that are correctly sorted
to 5-digit, optional city, or unique 3-digit sacks.
3.2 H5 Rates
Level H5 rates apply:
a. In tray-based automation-rate letter-size mailings, to pieces in
5-digit trays.
b. In package-based automation-rate letter-size mailings, to pieces
in 5-digit packages of 10 or more pieces each placed in 5-digit,
optional city, 3-digit, SCF, or AADC trays.
c. In ZIP+4 Barcoded rate flat-size mailings, to pieces in 5-digit
packages of six or more pieces each placed in 5-digit, optional city,
3-digit, SCF, or ADC sacks or palletized under M045.
d. In other mailings, to pieces in 5-digit packages of six or more
pieces each placed in 5-digit, optional city, or unique 3-digit sacks.
3.3 H3 Rates
Level H3 rates apply:
a. In tray-based automation-rate letter-size mailings, to pieces in
optional city and unique 3-digit trays.
b. In package-based automation-rate letter-size mailings, to pieces
in optional city and unique 3-digit packages of 50 or more pieces each
placed in optional city, 3-digit, SCF, or AADC trays.
c. In ZIP+4 Barcoded rate flat-size mailings, to pieces in optional
city and unique 3-digit packages of six or more pieces each placed in
optional city, 3-digit, SCF, or ADC sacks or palletized under M045.
d. In other mailings, to pieces in optional city or unique 3-digit
packages of six or more pieces each placed in optional city or unique
3-digit sacks.
4.0 BASIC (LEVEL G) RATES
Level G rates apply to pieces not eligible for or claimed at the
rates in 2.0 or 3.0.
5.0 IN-COUNTY (LEVEL J) RATES
[In 5.2c and 5.3c, replace ``SDC'' with ``ADC.'']
6.0 WALK-SEQUENCE DISCOUNTS
[Insert text of current E230.7.0.]
E240 Automation Rates
E241 Regular Periodicals
1.0 BASIC STANDARDS FOR LETTER-SIZE PIECES
1.1 All Pieces
All pieces in a Barcoded rate letter-size mailing must:
a. Meet the basic standards for Periodicals and for the category of
authorization.
b. Meet the physical standards in C810.
c. Bear a delivery address that includes the correct numeric ZIP+4
or 5-digit ZIP Code (or, only if prepared with a delivery point barcode
(DPBC), the numeric equivalent to the DPBC).
d. Meet the address quality and coding standards of A800 and A950.
e. Be presorted and documented as specified in M810.
f. Meet the postage payment standards in P013 and P200.
g. Bear the correct DPBC meeting the barcode standards in C840,
subject to 1.4.
1.2 Rate Application
Barcoded rates apply to each piece that meets the applicable
standards in 1.3 and 1.4 and bears the correct DPBC meeting the barcode
standards in C840. Subject to M810, 3/5 Barcoded rates apply to letter-
size pieces in 5-digit packages of 10 or more pieces each, and in 3-
digit packages of 50 or more pieces each, correctly placed in 5-digit,
3-digit, AADC, or mixed AADC trays. Basic Barcoded rates apply to other
pieces correctly prepared under M810.
1.3 Barcode Window
A mailpiece weighing 3 ounces or less, meeting the standards in 1.1
and 1.2 but with a barcode window in the lower right corner, may be
eligible for the Barcoded rate only if the correct DPBC appears through
the window.
1.4 85% Rule
The correct DPBC for the delivery address, as defined by the
standards for address quality and coding accuracy in A800 and A950,
must appear on each piece in any mailing containing heavy letters (as
defined in C810) and on at least 85% of all pieces in other letter-size
mailings. Remaining pieces must have a barcode clear zone in the lower
right corner meeting the reflectance standards in C840, meet the
applicable 5-digit or ZIP+4 barcode standards in C840, and not have a
window in the lower right corner. Compliance with the 85% standard is
based on each mailing.
1.5 Exclusions
Barcoded rate mailings may not include firm packages or pieces
claimed at carrier route rates.
2.0 BASIC STANDARDS FOR FLAT-SIZE PIECES
2.1 All Pieces
All pieces in a Barcoded rate flat-size mailing must:
a. Meet the basic standards for Periodicals and for the category of
authorization.
b. Meet the physical standards in C820.
c. Bear a delivery address that includes the correct numeric ZIP+4
or 5-digit ZIP Code (or, only if prepared with a delivery point barcode
(DPBC), the numeric equivalent to the DPBC).
d. Meet the address quality and coding standards of A800 and A950.
e. Bear the correct 5-digit, ZIP+4, or DPBC, subject to C840.
f. Be marked, presorted, and documented as specified in M820.
g. Meet the postage payment standards in P013 and P200.
2.2 Rate Application
Barcoded rates apply to each piece that also bears the correct
ZIP+4 or DPBC. Subject to M820, 3/5 Barcoded rates apply to flat-size
pieces in 5-digit or 3-digit packages of six or more pieces each,
either correctly placed in 5-digit, 3-digit, ADC, or mixed ADC sacks or
palletized under M045. Basic Barcoded rates apply to other pieces
correctly prepared under M820.
2.3 85% Rule
At least 85% of all pieces in a Barcoded rate mailing (regardless
of presort or rate) must bear the correct ZIP+4 or DPBC for the
delivery address, as defined by the standards for address
[[Page 66644]]
quality and coding accuracy in A800 and A950. Remaining pieces must
bear the correct 5-digit barcode meeting the applicable standards in
C840. Compliance with the 85% standard is based on all mailed copies of
an issue, excluding those claimed at carrier route rates.
E249 Discounts for Preferred Periodicals
[Text of current E242, E244, and E245, renumber as E249.1.0, 2.0, and
3.0, respectively, with subsections redesignated accordingly; no change
in text except to replace ``second-class'' with ``Periodicals.'']
1.0 ZIP+4 DISCOUNTS
1.1 All Pieces
All pieces in a ZIP+4 rate mailing must:
a. Meet the basic standards for Periodicals and for the category of
authorization in E211 and E212, respectively.
b. Meet the physical standards in C810.
c. Bear a delivery address that includes the correct numeric ZIP+4
or 5-digit ZIP Code (or, only if prepared with a delivery point barcode
(DPBC), the numeric equivalent to the DPBC).
d. Meet the address quality and coding standards of A800 and A950.
e. Meet the standards in C830 or, for pieces with the correct DPBC,
the barcode standards in C840.
f. Be marked, presorted, and documented as specified in M891 or
M892.
g. Meet the postage payment standards in P013 and P200.
1.2 Rate Application
ZIP+4 rates apply to each piece that also:
a. Is correctly presorted under M810 into the qualifying groups
described in 1.7 and 1.8.
b. Has an address with the correct numeric ZIP+4 code or bears the
correct DPBC.
1.3 Barcode Window
A mailpiece meeting the standards in 1.1 and 1.2, but with a
barcode window in the lower right corner, may be eligible for any
automation rate only if the correct DPBC appears through the window.
1.4 5-Digit Barcodes
ZIP+4 rate mailings may include pieces with correct 5-digit
barcodes if those pieces meet the standards in 1.1 and 1.2 and the
standards for 5-digit barcodes in C840. Such pieces qualify for ZIP+4
rates only if the barcode is printed on the piece and the address
contains the correct numeric ZIP+4 code.
1.5 ZIP+4 Barcodes
ZIP+4 rate mailings may include pieces with correct ZIP+4 barcodes
if the barcode is located in the address block and those pieces meet
the standards in 1.1 and 1.2 and the standards for ZIP+4 barcodes in
C840. Such pieces qualify for ZIP+4 rates only if, additionally, the
address contains the correct numeric ZIP+4 code. Pieces that bear a
ZIP+4 barcode in the lower right corner may not be included in a ZIP+4
rate mailing.
1.6 85% Rule
At least 85% of all pieces in a ZIP+4 rate mailing (regardless of
presort or rate) must bear the correct numeric ZIP+4 code or DPBC for
the delivery address, as defined by the standards for address quality
and coding accuracy in A800 and A950. The 85% requirement applies to
each mailing unless excepted by other standards.
1.7 Qualifying Tray-Based Presort
In tray-based presort mailings under M891:
a. In full or overflow 5-digit trays, ZIP+4 coded or DPBC pieces
qualify for the Level H5/J5 ZIP+4 rates; other pieces qualify for the
Level H5/J5 presort rates.
b. In full or overflow optional city and unique 3-digit trays,
ZIP+4 coded or DPBC pieces qualify for the Level H3/J3 ZIP+4 rates;
other pieces qualify for the Level H3/J3 presort rates.
c. In full or overflow nonunique 3-digit and SCF trays, ZIP+4 coded
or DPBC pieces qualify for the Level G/J1 ZIP+4 rates; other pieces
qualify for the Level G/J1 presort rates. One less-than-full SCF tray
for the SCF serving the post office where the mailing is entered is
permitted.
d. In AADC, mixed AADC, and working trays, ZIP+4 coded or DPBC
pieces qualify for the Level G/J1 ZIP+4 rates; other pieces qualify for
the Level G/J1 presort rates.
1.8 Qualifying Package-Based Presort
In package-based presort mailings under M892:
a. In 5-digit packages of 10 or more pieces each, ZIP+4 coded or
DPBC pieces qualify for the Level H5/J5 ZIP+4 rates; other pieces
qualify for the Level H5/J5 presort rates.
b. In optional city and unique 3-digit packages of 50 or more
pieces each, ZIP+4 coded or DPBC pieces qualify for the Level H3/J3
ZIP+4 rates; other pieces qualify for the Level H3/J3 presort rates.
c. In nonunique 3-digit packages of 50 or more pieces each, ZIP+4
coded or DPBC pieces qualify for the Level G/J1 ZIP+4 rates; other
pieces qualify for the Level G/J1 presort rates.
d. In the residual portion of the mailing, ZIP+4 coded or DPBC
pieces qualify for the Level G/J1 ZIP+4 rates; other pieces qualify for
the Level G/J1 presort rates.
2.0 BARCODED DISCOUNTS (LETTER-SIZE PIECES)
2.1 All Pieces
All pieces in a Barcoded rate letter-size mailing must:
a. Meet the basic standards for Periodicals and for the category of
authorization in E211 and E212, respectively.
b. Meet the physical standards in C810.
c. Bear a delivery address that includes the correct numeric ZIP+4
or 5-digit ZIP Code (or, only if prepared with a delivery point barcode
(DPBC), the numeric equivalent to the DPBC).
d. Meet the address quality and coding standards of A800 and A950.
e. Be marked, presorted, and documented as specified in M893, M894,
or M895.
f. Meet the postage payment standards in P013 and P200.
g. Either bear the correct DPBC meeting the barcode standards in
C840 or meet the applicable standards in 2.5.
2.2 Rate Application
Barcoded rates apply to each piece that also:
a. Is correctly presorted under M893, M894, or M895 into the
qualifying groups described in 2.8, 2.9, and 2.10.
b. Bears the correct DPBC that meets the barcode standards in C840.
c. Meets the applicable standards in 2.3 through 2.7.
2.3 Optional Preparation
At the mailer's option, barcoded Preferred Periodicals may be
prepared under the standards for Regular Periodicals in M810, including
presort. Under this option, Preferred Periodicals can claim Level H or
Level G/J rates, and may be combined (comailed) with Regular
Periodicals in the same mailing, if all corresponding eligibility
standards in E231 and E241 for 3/5 and Basic, respectively, are met,
except that pieces in 3-digit packages could earn the Level H rate only
when prepared for the unique 3-digit ZIP Code destinations identified
in L002, Column A. Presort of the combined mailing is based on the
total combined volume of pieces.
[[Page 66645]]
2.4 Barcode Window
A mailpiece weighing 3 ounces or less, meeting the standards in 2.1
through 2.3 but with a barcode window in the lower right corner, may be
eligible for an automation rate only if the correct DPBC appears
through the window.
2.5 Pieces Without DPBCs
Subject to 1.5 and 1.6, Barcoded rate mailings may also include
nonbarcoded, 5-digit barcoded, or ZIP+4 barcoded pieces if each such
piece (regardless of rate) meets the standards in 2.1, has a barcode
clear zone in the lower right corner meeting the reflectance standards
in C840, meets the applicable 5-digit or ZIP+4 barcode standards in
C840, and does not have a window in the lower right corner.
Additionally, to qualify for a ZIP+4 rate, subject to 2.8, 2.9, and
2.10:
a. Nonbarcoded and 5-digit barcoded pieces must bear an address
with the correct ZIP+4 code and meet the standards in C830.
b. ZIP+4 barcoded pieces must have the barcode in the address
block, meet the standards in C830, and bear an address with the correct
ZIP+4 code.
2.6 85% Rule
Subject to 2.7, at least 85% of all pieces in a Barcoded rate
mailing (regardless of presort or rate) must bear the correct DPBC for
the delivery address, as defined by the standards for address quality
and coding accuracy in A800 and A950. The 85% requirement applies to
each mailing unless excepted by other standards.
2.7 100% Barcoding
Each piece must bear the correct delivery point barcode:
a. In 5-digit trays in a tray-based mailing under M893.
b. In 5-digit packages in a package-based mailing under M894 or
M895.
c. In any mailing containing heavy letters (as defined in C810).
2.8 Qualifying Tray-Based Presort
In tray-based presort mailings under M893:
a. Pieces in full or overflow 5-digit trays qualify for the Level
H5/J5 Barcoded rates.
b. In full or overflow optional city and unique 3-digit trays, DPBC
pieces qualify for the Level H3/J3 Barcoded rates; subject to 2.5,
ZIP+4 coded non-DPBC pieces qualify for the Level H3/J3 ZIP+4 rate;
other pieces qualify for the Level H3/J3 presort rates.
c. In full or overflow nonunique 3-digit and SCF trays, DPBC pieces
qualify for the Level G/J1 Barcoded rates; subject to 2.5, ZIP+4 coded
non-DPBC pieces qualify for the Level G/J1 ZIP+4 rates; other pieces
qualify for the Level G/J1 presort rates. One less-than-full SCF tray
for the SCF serving the post office where the mailing is entered is
permitted.
d. In AADC, mixed AADC, and working trays, DPBC pieces qualify for
the Level G/J1 Barcoded rates; subject to 2.5, ZIP+4 coded non-DPBC
pieces qualify for the Level G/J1 ZIP+4 rates; other pieces qualify for
the Level G/J1 presort rates.
2.9 Qualifying Two-Tier Package-Based Presort
In two-tier package-based presort mailings under M894:
a. Pieces in 5-digit packages of 10 or more pieces each qualify for
the Level H5/J5 Barcoded rates.
b. In optional city and unique 3-digit packages of 50 or more
pieces each, DPBC pieces qualify for the Level H3/J3 Barcoded rates;
subject to 2.5, ZIP+4 coded non-DPBC pieces qualify for the Level H3/J3
ZIP+4 rates; other pieces qualify for the Level H3/J3 presort rates.
c. In nonunique 3-digit packages of 50 or more pieces each, DPBC
pieces qualify for the Level G/J1 Barcoded rates; subject to 2.5, ZIP+4
coded non-DPBC pieces qualify for the Level G/J1 ZIP+4 rates; other
pieces qualify for the Level G/J1 presort rates.
d. In residual trays, DPBC pieces qualify for the Level G/J1
Barcoded rates; subject to 2.5, ZIP+4 coded non-DPBC pieces qualify for
the Level G/J1 ZIP+4 rates; other pieces qualify for the Level G/J1
presort rates.
2.10 Qualifying Three-Tier Package-Based Presort
In three-tier package-based presort mailings under M895:
a. Pieces in 5-digit packages of 10 or more pieces each in the 5-
digit presort tier qualify for the Level H5/J5 Barcoded rates.
b. In optional city and unique 3-digit packages of 50 or more
pieces each in the 3-digit tier, DPBC pieces qualify for the Level H3/
J3 Barcoded rates; subject to 2.5, ZIP+4 coded non-DPBC pieces qualify
for the Level H3/J3 ZIP+4 rates; other pieces qualify for the Level H3/
J3 presort rates.
c. In nonunique 3-digit packages of 50 or more pieces each in the
3-digit presort tier, DPBC pieces qualify for the Level G/J1 Barcoded
rate; subject to 2.5, ZIP+4 coded non-DPBC pieces qualify for the Level
G/J1 ZIP+4 rates; other pieces qualify for the Level G/J1 presort
rates.
d. In the residual presort tier, DPBC pieces qualify for the Level
G/J1 Barcoded rates; subject to 2.5, ZIP+4 coded non-DPBC pieces
qualify for the Level G/J1 ZIP+4 rates; other pieces qualify for the
Level G/J1 presort rates.
3.0 BARCODED DISCOUNTS (FLAT-SIZE PIECES)
3.1 All Pieces
All pieces in a Barcoded rate flat-size mailing must:
a. Meet the basic standards for Periodicals and for the category of
authorization in E211 and E212, respectively.
b. Meet the physical standards in C820.
c. Bear a delivery address that includes the correct numeric ZIP+4
code, numeric 5-digit ZIP Code, or numeric equivalent to the delivery
point barcode (DPBC).
d. Meet the address quality and coding standards of A800 and A950.
e. Have the correct 5-digit, ZIP+4, or DPBC, subject to C840,
except for pieces in specific portions of mailings prepared under M897.
f. Be presorted and documented as specified in M897.
g. Meet the postage payment standards in P013 and P200.
3.2 Rate Application
Barcoded rates apply to each piece that also:
a. Is correctly presorted under M897 into the qualifying groups
described in 3.6.
b. Bears the correct ZIP+4 or DPBC.
3.3 Optional Preparation
At the mailer's option, barcoded Preferred Periodicals may be
prepared under the standards for Regular Periodicals in M820, including
presort. Under this option, Preferred Periodicals can claim Level H or
Level G/J rates, and may be combined (comailed) with Regular
Periodicals in the same mailing, if all corresponding eligibility
standards in E231 and E241 for 3/5 and Basic, respectively, are met,
except that pieces in 3-digit packages could earn the Level H rate only
when prepared for the unique 3-digit ZIP Code destinations identified
in L002, Column A. Presort of the combined mailing is based on the
total combined volume of pieces.
3.4 5-Digit Barcodes
Barcoded rate mailings may include pieces with correct 5-digit
barcodes if those pieces meet the standards in 3.1 through 3.3 and the
standards for 5-digit barcodes in C840. Pieces with a 5-digit barcode
could be eligible for a presort rate under 3.6.
[[Page 66646]]
3.5 85% Rule
At least 85% of all pieces in a Barcoded rate mailing (regardless
of presort or rate) must bear the correct ZIP+4 or DPBC for the
delivery address, as defined by the standards for address quality and
coding accuracy in A800 and A950. The 85% requirement applies to each
mailing unless excepted by other standards. Barcoded rate mailings not
meeting the 85% rule must be prepared under corresponding standards in
M897.
3.6 Qualifying Presort
Barcoded and presort rates apply as follows:
a. In 5-digit packages of six or more pieces each, ZIP+4 or DPBC
pieces qualify for the Level H5/J5 Barcoded rates; 5-digit barcoded
pieces (and nonbarcoded pieces where permitted) qualify for the Level
H5/J5 presort rates.
b. In optional city or unique 3-digit packages of six or more
pieces each, ZIP+4 or DPBC pieces qualify for the Level H3/J3 Barcoded
rates; 5-digit barcoded pieces qualify for the Level H3/J3 presort
rates.
c. In nonunique 3-digit and SCF packages, or in 5-digit, optional
city, or unique 3-digit packages of fewer than six pieces, or in
residual packages, ZIP+4 or DPBC pieces qualify for the Level G/J1
Barcoded rates; 5-digit barcoded pieces qualify for the Level G/J1
presort rates.
E250 Destination Entry
1.0 DSCF
1.1 Eligibility
Copies not eligible for in-county rates qualify for the destination
SCF (DSCF) rates if:
a. For Publications Service publications, the copies are addressed
for delivery in the service area of the SCF at which they are entered,
and prepared in a 3-digit or finer sack or tray, or an SCF or finer
pallet.
b. For other Periodicals publications, the copies are addressed for
delivery in the same SCF service area as the entry post office,
regardless of the type of package, pallet, sack, or tray in which they
are prepared.
1.2 Rates
DSCF rates include a pound rate and a discount per piece. Pieces
claimed at DSCF rates must also meet the standards for any automation
or presort rate claimed and for the postage payment method used.
1.3 Authorized Entry
Publications must have an authorized entry at each post office
where mail is deposited at DSCF rates. Only copies deposited according
to the distribution plan authorized for that entry may be claimed at
these rates. DSCF rate mail must be deposited at locations and times
specified by the entry office postmaster.
1.4 Documentation
Subject to P012, the publisher must be able to show compliance with
1.1 through 1.3, e.g., by package, bundle, sack, tray, or pallet
destination (as appropriate), and the number of pieces by presort level
for each 5-digit ZIP Code destination eligible for DSCF rates.
2.0 DDU
2.1 Eligibility
The destination delivery unit (DDU) rate applies to pieces entered
at the facility designated by the USPS where sequencing is performed
for the carrier route (city carrier route, rural route, highway
contract route, post office box section, or general delivery unit)
serving the delivery address on the mailpiece. Copies claimed at DDU
rates must be part of a carrier route package placed in a carrier route
or 5-digit carrier routes sack or tray under M210, or correctly
palletized under M045, and otherwise eligible for and claimed at a
carrier route or Level I or K rate. Except for the standards applicable
to preparing carrier route or walk-sequence rate mail, there is no
additional minimum volume required for a DDU rate mailing.
2.2 Rates
DDU rates include a pound rate and a discount per piece. Pieces
claimed at DDU rates must also meet the standards for any discount or
rate claimed and postage payment method used. A mailing may contain
copies claimed at DDU rates and other copies claimed at other rates if
permitted by standard. No separation by rate is required.
2.3 Maximum Volume
Except under 2.4, the same mailer may not present for verification
and acceptance more than four DDU rate mailings at the same destination
postal facility (or another acting as its agent) in any 24-hour period.
This limit may be waived if local conditions permit. A mailer may ask
for such a waiver when scheduling deposit of the mailings. There is no
maximum for plant-verified drop shipments. This standard does not apply
to mailings presented to either the publication's authorized original
entry post office or an authorized additional entry serving the place
where the copies were prepared for mailing, if that entry post office
is the destination postal facility at which the DDU rate copies must be
deposited.
2.4 Authorized Entry
Publications must have an authorized entry at each post office
where mail is entered at DDU rates. Only copies entered according to
the distribution plan authorized for that entry may be claimed at these
rates. DDU rate mail must be deposited at locations and times specified
by the entry office postmaster.
2.5 Scheduling
Mailers may schedule deposit of DDU rate mailings at least 24 hours
in advance by contacting the district office in whose service area the
destination facility is located. Mailers must follow the scheduled
deposit time provided. Mailers may request standing appointments for
renewable 6-month periods by written application to the district office
in whose service area the destination facility is located. Mixed loads
of Periodicals and Standard Mail require advanced appointments for
deposit.
2.6 Documentation
Subject to P012, the publisher must be able to show compliance with
2.1 through 2.5. If a carrier route rate is claimed, the publisher must
show the number of copies and pieces for each carrier route. If a walk-
sequence rate is claimed, the publisher must provide the documentation
required by the corresponding standards.
E270 Preferred Rates
[In 1.1, 1.2c, 2.1, 5.1, 6.1, and 6.2, replace ``second-class'' with
``Periodicals''; in 1.3, replace ``second-class mailing privileges''
with ``Periodicals mailing privileges.'']
1.0 IN-COUNTY RATES
* * * * *
1.6 DDU Rate
Subject to E250, the DDU piece rate applies to each piece claimed
in the pound rate portion at the DDU rate.
2.0 NONPROFIT RATES--1BASIC INFORMATION
* * * * *
2.4 Destination Entry Rates
Subject to E250, the DDU or DSCF piece rate applies to each piece
claimed in the pound rate portion at the corresponding rate.
[Delete current 2.5.]
* * * * *
[[Page 66647]]
5.0 CLASSROOM RATES
* * * * *
5.5 Destination Entry Rates
Subject to E250, the DDU or DSCF piece rate applies to each piece
claimed in the pound rate portion at the corresponding rate.
[Delete current 5.6.]
6.0 SCIENCE-OF-AGRICULTURE RATES
* * * * *
6.5 Destination Entry Rates
Subject to E250, the DDU or DSCF piece rate applies to each piece
claimed in the pound rate portion at the corresponding rate.
[Delete current 6.6.]
[Delete current E300 and E400; no change to E500.]
* * * * *
E600 Standard Mail
E610 Basic Standards
E611 Standards Applicable to All Standard Mail
1.0 GENERAL INFORMATION
1.1 Definition
Standard Mail consists of mailable matter that is neither mailed or
required to be mailed as First-Class Mail nor entered as Periodicals
mail (except as permitted or required by standard). Standard Mail
includes matter formerly classified as third-class and fourth-class
mail. Though combined in Standard Mail, matter from each former class
remains subject to separate and specific classification, eligibility,
and preparation standards. Matter formerly classified as third-class
mail is referred to as Standard Mail (A); matter formerly classified as
fourth-class mail is referred to as Standard Mail (B). Use of the
unmodified term ``Standard Mail'' indicates that the reference applies
to both former third-class and former fourth-class matter.
1.2 Not Sealed
Standard Mail is not sealed against postal inspection. Regardless
of physical closure, the mailing of articles at Standard Mail rates is
consent by the mailer to postal inspection of the contents.
1.3 Written Additions
Markings that have the character of personal correspondence
require, with certain exceptions, additional postage at the First-Class
rates. These written additions and enclosures do not require additional
First-Class postage and may be placed on the wrapper, on a tag or label
attached to the outside of a parcel, or inside a parcel, either loose
or attached to an article:
a. Marks, numbers, names, or letters describing the contents.
b. Words or phrases such as ``Please Do Not Open Until Christmas,''
``Happy Birthday, Mother.''
c. Instructions and directions for the use of the item mailed.
d. A manuscript dedication or inscription not having the nature of
personal correspondence.
e. Marks to call attention to words or passages in the text.
f. Corrections of typographical errors in printed matter.
g. Manuscripts accompanying related proof sheets and corrections of
proof sheets including corrections of typographical and other errors,
changes in the text, insertions of new text, marginal instructions to
the printer, and corrective rewrites of parts.
h. Handstamped imprints, unless the added material is in itself
personal or converts the original matter to a personal communication.
i. Matter mailable separately as Standard Mail (A) printed on the
wrapper, envelope, tag, or label.
1.4 Invoice
An invoice, whether it also serves as a bill, may be enclosed or
placed in an envelope (marked ``Invoice Enclosed'') attached to the
outside of a Standard Mail mailpiece if it relates solely to the matter
with which it is mailed. The invoice may show:
a. Names and addresses of the sender and addressee.
b. Names and quantities of the articles enclosed, descriptions of
each (e.g., price, tax, style, stock number, size, and quality, and, if
defective, nature of defects).
c. Order or file number, date of order, date and manner of
shipment, shipping weight, postage paid, and initials or name of packer
or checker.
1.5 Incidental First-Class Attachments and Enclosures
Incidental First-Class matter may be enclosed in or attached to
Standard Mail (A) merchandise (including books but excluding
merchandise samples) or any Standard Mail (B) mailpiece without payment
of First-Class postage. An incidental First-Class attachment or
enclosure must be matter that, if mailed separately, would require
First-Class postage, is closely associated with but secondary to the
host piece, and is prepared not to encumber postal processing. An
incidental First-Class attachment or enclosure may be a bill for the
product or publication, a statement of account for past products or
publications, or a personal message or greeting included with a
product, publication, or parcel. Postage at the Standard Mail rate
applicable to the host piece is based on the combined weight of the
host piece and the incidental First-Class attachment or enclosure.
1.6 Fees
The fee for manual or automated address correction service is
charged per notice issued.
1.7 Addressing
Each piece of Standard Mail must bear a delivery address.
Alternative address formats or detached address labels may be used,
subject to A040 or A060, respectively.
1.8 Documentation
A mailing statement, completed and signed by the mailer, using the
correct USPS form or an approved facsimile, must be submitted with each
mailing except for single-piece rate mailings in which the correct
postage is affixed to each piece. Supporting documentation might be
required by the standards for the rate claimed or postage payment
method used.
E612 Additional Standards Applicable to Standard Mail (A)
1.0 WEIGHT
Standard Mail (A) must weigh less than 16 ounces.
2.0 CONTENT
2.1 Circulars
Circulars, including printed letters that, according to internal
evidence, are being sent in identical terms to more than one person,
are Standard Mail (A). A circular does not lose its character as such
when a date and the names of the addressee and sender are written
therein, nor by the correction in writing of typographical errors.
2.2 Printed Matter
Printed matter weighing less than 16 ounces may be sent as Standard
Mail (A). For this standard, printed matter means paper on which words,
letters, characters, figures, or images, or any combination of them,
not having the character of a bill or statement of account or of actual
or personal correspondence, are reproduced by any process other than
handwriting or typewriting.
2.3 Computer-Prepared Material
Computer-prepared material is considered printed matter. It is not
[[Page 66648]]
considered to have the character of actual or personal correspondence
merely because it contains:
a. Specific information about a product offered for sale or lease
(e.g., size, color, price) or a service being offered (e.g., the name,
address, and telephone number of a company representative).
b. Information relating the addressee directly to an advertised
product or service.
c. Information such as the amount paid for a previous purchase,
pledge, or donation, when associated with a sales promotion or
solicitation for donations.
3.0 ENCLOSURES AND ATTACHMENTS
3.1 Nonincidental First-Class Enclosures
Letters or other pieces of nonincidental First-Class Mail, subject
to postage at First-Class rates, may be enclosed with Standard Mail
(A). Postage for the First-Class enclosure must be placed on the
outside of the mailpiece. It may be affixed separately or added to the
postage for the host piece. The mailer must place the endorsement
``First-Class Mail Enclosed'' on the mailpiece, below the postage and
above the address.
3.2 Nonincidental First-Class Attachments
Letters or other pieces of nonincidental First-Class Mail may be
placed in an envelope and securely attached to the address side of a
Standard Mail (A) mailpiece or of the principal mailpiece, as
applicable. Combination envelopes or containers with separate parts for
the two classes of mail may be used. The names and addresses of the
sender and addressee must be placed on both the principal mailpiece and
the attachment. Alternatively, the sender's name and address must be
placed on one part and the addressee's name and address on the other.
If the mailpiece is a combination container with inseparable parts or
compartments, the names and addresses may appear on only one part. The
applicable Standard Mail (A) postage for the Standard Mail (A) matter
must be prepaid and placed in the upper right corner of the address
space. Postage at the applicable First-Class rate must be paid for and
affixed to the First-Class attachment, unless other payment methods are
permitted by standard.
3.3 Attachment of Other Standard Mail (A) Matter
The front cover page or the back cover page of a Standard Mail (A)
mailpiece may bear an attachment that is other Standard Mail (A) matter
if:
a. Each piece in the mailing bears the same attachment.
b. The material qualifies for and is mailed at bulk rates.
c. The pieces bearing the attachment are larger than 6 by 11
inches.
d. The attachment is secured so as not to interfere with processing
or delivery. Folded or multipage attachments must be secured to prevent
opening during handling.
e. The mailing is presorted to carrier routes.
3.4 Protective Covers
A protective cover (outsert) on a catalog or book must fully cover
(to within 3/4 inch of each edge) the main body of the catalog or book,
front and back, or the entire piece must be enclosed in a wrapper (a
full sleeve or envelope).
4.0 BULK RATES
4.1 General Information
Bulk rates apply to mailings meeting the basic standards in E611
and the standards for presort, automation, and destination entry in
E630, E640, and E650, respectively, as appropriate for the rate
claimed. Nonprofit rates may be used only by organizations authorized
by the USPS under E670. Bulk rate Standard Mail (A) may not use
registry, insurance, special delivery, special handling, certified,
return receipt for merchandise, and COD services. Not all processing
categories qualify for every bulk rate.
4.2 Minimum Per Piece Rates
The minimum per piece rates (i.e., the minimum postage that must be
paid for each piece) apply to Automation rate and Enhanced Carrier
Route rate pieces weighing 0.2059 pound (3.2941 ounces) or less,
Regular rate pieces weighing 0.2067 pound (3.3067 ounces) or less, and
nonprofit rate pieces weighing 0.2149 pound (3.4383 ounces) or less.
The base postage rate applies to pieces meeting minimum preparation
standards (e.g., basic presort) and may be reduced if additional
standards are met. For the minimum per piece rates, mail is generally
categorized as either ``letters'' or ``other than letters,'' based on
the letter-size standard in C050 that disregards address placement. The
exception is for Automation rates, which are applied to the ``other
than letters'' category, based on the standards in C820. Address
placement is also used to apply the aspect ratio standard for letter-
size automation rates in C810.
4.3 Piece/Pound Rates
Pieces exceeding the weight limits specified in 4.2 are subject to
a two-part piece/pound rate that includes a fixed charge per piece and
a variable pound charge based on weight. The base postage rate applies
to pieces meeting the minimum preparation standards (e.g., basic
presort) and might be reduced if additional standards are met.
4.4 Net Postage
The net postage rate that must be paid is either the minimum per
piece rate or the piece/pound rate, as reduced in either case by one or
more discounts for which the piece might be eligible. The net postage
rate is commonly designated by the name of the primary discount (e.g.,
carrier route rate, Barcoded rate, DBMC rate).
4.5 Minimum Bulk Rate
Postage is computed at the applicable rates on the entire bulk
mailing to be mailed at one time. Except as noted in 4.6, the total
postage paid on any bulk mailing may not be lower than the amount
determined by multiplying the proper minimum per piece rate (less
applicable discounts) by the total number of mailpieces. If the total
postage computed at pound rates, after adding any adjustment for
presort level, is less than the minimum postage charge, postage must be
computed at the minimum per piece rate.
4.6 Exception
When the postage computed at the bulk Standard Mail (A) rates is
higher than a Standard Mail (B) rate for which the matter and the
mailing could qualify except for its weight, the Standard Mail (B) rate
may be paid without adding needless weight. All other standards for
bulk Standard Mail (A) apply.
4.7 Annual Fees
Bulk rate Standard Mail (A) is subject to an annual fee once each
12-month period. The fee may be paid in advance only for the next year
and only during the last 30 days of the current service period. The fee
charged is that in effect on the date of payment. Other standards
apply, based on how postage is paid:
a. When mailings are paid with meter or precanceled stamps, each
mailer who enters mailings at the regular or nonprofit bulk rates must
pay an annual bulk mailing fee at each post office of mailing. Persons
or organizations paying this fee may enter mail of their clients as
well as their own mail.
b. When a mailing is paid with a permit imprint, the mailer whose
permit imprint is on the mailpiece must put that permit number on the
mailing
[[Page 66649]]
statement and must pay the annual bulk mailing fee for that permit.
This fee is separate from the fee that must be paid when applying to
use permit imprints.
4.8 Merging
Generally, mailers may merge similar bulk Standard Mail (A) matter
prepared for mailing at the same time into a single mailing.
Differences in text, address labels, and address lists or list key
numbers do not prohibit the mailer from merging and presorting
mailings. Pieces with different methods of postage payment may be
combined in the same mailing only if authorized by the USPS. Pieces of
nonidentical weight, if merged in the same mailing, must bear the
correct postage when mailed, unless otherwise authorized by the USPS.
Pieces at Nonprofit, Regular, Enhanced Carrier Route, and Automation
rates must be prepared as separate mailings unless specifically
excepted. Only Regular, Enhanced Carrier Route, and Automation may be
reported on the same mailing statement and documentation.
4.9 Preparation
Each Nonprofit, Regular, Enhanced Carrier Route, or Automation rate
mailing must be prepared under these general standards:
a. All pieces in a mailing must be of the same processing category,
except that irregular and machinable parcels may be commingled in 5-
digit sacks or on 5-digit pallets.
b. Each mailing must contain at least 200 pieces or 50 pounds of
pieces. Other volume standards can also apply, based on the rate
claimed.
c. All pieces in a bulk mailing must be marked and presorted
together under the standards in M600 applicable to the rate claimed.
d. Each piece must bear the addressee's name and delivery address,
including the correct ZIP Code or ZIP+4 code, unless an alternative
address format is used subject to A040. Pieces in automation rate
mailings, or pieces prepared with detached address labels, are subject
to additional standards.
e. Postage must be paid under the standards in P600 with
precanceled stamps, postage meter, or permit imprint.
f. Mailings must be documented under P012 and the standards for the
rate claimed.
g. Each piece must meet the standards applicable to any other rate
or discount claimed.
h. Any POSTNET barcode on a mailpiece must meet the standards in
C840 and A950 and be the correct barcode for the delivery address.
i. Mailings must be deposited at a business mail entry unit of the
post office where the postage permit or license is held and the annual
bulk fee paid, unless deposit elsewhere is permitted by standard.
E613 Additional Standards Applicable to Standard Mail (B)
1.0 WEIGHT
Standard Mail (B) consists of mailable matter that (except Special
or Library Mail) weighs 16 ounces or more.
2.0 ZONED RATES
2.1 Required Mailing Office
Zone-rated Standard Mail (i.e., parcel post and bound printed
matter) must be mailed at the post office from which the zone rate
postage was computed, except under 2.2 and 2.3.
2.2 Redirected Mailings
Mailers who present large volumes of zone-rated Standard Mail might
be allowed or directed to deposit such mailings at another postal
facility when processing or logistics make such an alternative
desirable for the USPS, subject to these conditions:
a. Zoned postage need not be recomputed if both the original post
office of mailing and the alternative facility to which the mailing is
redirected use the same zone chart for computing zone-rated postage,
based on the 3-digit prefix of their ZIP Codes.
b. Postage must be recomputed on pieces in mailings redirected to a
postal facility that uses a different zone chart for computing zone-
rated postage.
c. Postage for pieces claimed at the local zone rates must be
recomputed at the applicable zone rate for the post office to which the
mailing was redirected. Postage might also be recomputed for other
pieces that were ineligible for the local zone rates but that could
become eligible at the post office to which the mailing was redirected.
2.3 BMC Acceptance
Mailers may present zone-rated Standard Mail at a BMC for
acceptance if:
a. Metered postage is paid through a postage meter licensed at the
BMC parent post office, or permit imprint postage is paid through an
advance deposit account at the BMC parent post office or another post
office in the BMC service area, unless otherwise permitted by standard.
b. Zoned postage is computed from the BMC parent post office.
c. The BMC is authorized by Form 4410 to act as acceptance agent
for the entry post office.
3.0 ADDRESSING
All Standard Mail (B) must bear the sender's return address and,
except for single-piece rate parcel post, the address on each piece
must include the correct ZIP Code or ZIP+4 code.
E620 Single-Piece and Nonpresort Bulk Standard Mail
E621 Single-Piece Standard Mail (A)
1.0 SINGLE-PIECE RATE
1.1 Rate Application
Single-piece rate Standard Mail (A) is Standard Mail (A) matter not
prepared as required for a bulk rate. The single-piece rates are
applied to each piece (or each item mailed under 1.2) based on its
weight. If the computed single-piece Standard Mail (A) rate is higher
than any Standard Mail (B) rate for which the mail could qualify except
for weight, the lower Standard Mail (B) rate may be paid; all other
standards for single-piece Standard Mail (A) apply.
1.2 Keys and Identification Devices
Keys and identification devices (identification cards or uncovered
identification tags) may be mailed as single-piece Standard Mail (A) if
they bear, contain, or have securely attached instructions to return to
a name and complete address of a person, organization, or concern and a
statement guaranteeing postage payment on delivery.
1.3 Nonstandard Surcharge
A nonstandard surcharge is assessed on each single-piece Standard
Mail (A) mailpiece weighing 1 ounce or less (except for keys and
identification devices) that exceeds the size limits in C600.
1.4 Preparation
Keys and identification devices must be prepared under 1.2. Each
other single-piece rate Standard Mail (A) piece must have a delivery
address and the endorsement ``Standard Mail.'' No minimum quantity is
required unless postage is paid with a permit imprint (in which case
the mailing must contain 200 pieces or 50 pounds of pieces). There are
no presort standards, but five or more metered letter-size pieces and
any permit imprint pieces must be ``faced'' (so that the addresses face
in one direction) and bundled, boxed, or packaged.
1.5 Postage Payment and Documentation
Except for keys and identification devices, full postage must be
either affixed in adhesive stamps, precanceled
[[Page 66650]]
stamps, or meter postage or paid with permit imprint. Documentation of
postage is required for mailings paid with precanceled stamps, meter
postage, or permit imprint if all pieces in the mailing are not of
identical weight. A mailing statement is required only if postage is
paid with a permit imprint.
1.6 Place of Mailing
Pieces paid with adhesive stamps may be deposited into collection
boxes or other places where mail is accepted. Pieces paid with meter
postage, precanceled stamps, or permit imprint must be taken to the
post office where the license or permit is held, unless the USPS
authorizes otherwise.
E622 Parcel Post
1.0 BASIC STANDARDS
1.1 Description
Any Standard Mail (B) matter may be mailed at parcel post rates.
Parcel post rates are based on zones, on whether a parcel is mailed and
delivered within a BMC or ASF service area (as shown below), and on the
weight of the piece.
* * * * *
1.3 Enclosures
Parcel post may contain any printed matter mailable as Standard
Mail (A), in addition to the enclosures and additions listed in E611.
[Delete current E412.1.4; insert text of current E412.2.0 through 4.0
as E622.2.0 through 4.0, respectively; in 3.1, replace ``fourth-class''
with ``Standard Mail (B)''; no other change in text.]
E623 Bound Printed Matter
1.0 BASIC STANDARDS
1.1 Description
Bound printed matter is Standard Mail weighing at least 1 pound but
not more than 10 pounds and meeting the standards in E611 and E613.
Bound printed matter rates are based on zones and the weight of the
piece.
1.2 Characteristics
Bound printed matter must:
a. Consist of advertising, promotional, directory, or editorial
material or any combination of these.
b. Be securely bound by permanent fastenings such as staples,
spiral binding, glue, or stitching. Looseleaf binders and similar
fastenings are not considered permanent.
c. Consist of sheets of which at least 90% are imprinted by any
process other than handwriting or typewriting with letters, characters,
figures, or images, or any combination of these.
d. Not have the nature of personal correspondence.
e. Not be stationery, such as pads of blank printed forms.
1.3 Combining Pieces
A mailpiece containing two or more bound printed matter pieces,
each weighing less than 1 pound but having a total weight of at least 1
pound, is mailable at the bound printed matter rates.
1.4 Enclosures
In addition to the additions and enclosures listed in E611 and
E612, bound printed matter may contain:
a. Any printed matter mailable as Standard Mail (A).
b. A merchandise sample attached to a bound page or to a
permissible loose enclosure, if the sample represents only an
incidental portion of the bound printed matter piece and if the sample
is not provided exclusively or primarily as a premium or an inducement
promoting the sale of the bound printed matter piece. The sample may be
identified as a ``free gift'' where it is clear that the sample is
offered to the addressee to market the gift product or promote the sale
of the bound printed matter.
[Delete current 1.5.]
E624 Special Standard Mail
1.0 BASIC STANDARDS
1.1 Qualification
Special Standard Mail is Standard Mail matter meeting the standards
in E611, E613, and those below. Special Standard Mail rates are based
on the weight of each piece without regard to zone.
1.2 Qualified Items
Only these articles may be mailed at the Special Standard Mail
rates:
a. Books, including books issued to supplement other books of at
least eight printed pages, consisting wholly of reading matter or
scholarly bibliography, or reading matter with incidental blank spaces
for notations and containing no advertising matter other than
incidental announcements of books. Advertising includes paid
advertising and the publishers' own advertising in display, classified,
or editorial style.
b. 16-millimeter or narrower width films, which must be positive
prints in final form for viewing, and catalogs of such films of 24
pages or more (at least 22 of which are printed). Films and film
catalogs sent to or from commercial theaters do not qualify for the
Special Standard Mail rate.
c. Printed music, whether in bound or sheet form.
d. Printed objective test materials and their accessories used by
or in behalf of educational institutions to test ability, aptitude,
achievement, interests, and other mental and personal qualities with or
without answers, test scores, or identifying information recorded
thereon in writing or by mark.
e. Sound recordings and guides or scripts prepared solely for use
with such recordings. Video recordings and player piano rolls are
classified as sound recordings.
f. Playscripts and manuscripts for books, periodicals, and music.
g. Printed educational reference charts designed to instruct or
train individuals for improving or developing their capabilities. Each
chart must be a single printed sheet of information designed for
educational reference. The information on the chart, which may be
printed on one or both sides of the sheet, must be conveyed primarily
by graphs, diagrams, tables, or other nonnarrative matter. An
educational reference chart is normally but not necessarily devoted to
one subject. A chart on which the information is conveyed primarily by
textual matter in a narrative form does not qualify as a printed
educational reference chart for mailing at the Special Standard Mail
rates even if it includes graphs, diagrams, or tables. Examples of
qualifying charts include maps produced primarily for educational
reference, tables of mathematical or scientific equations, noun
declensions or verb conjugations used in the study of languages,
periodic table of elements, botanical or zoological tables, and other
tables used in the study of science.
h. Looseleaf pages and their binders consisting of medical
information for distribution to doctors, hospitals, medical schools,
and medical students.
i. Computer-readable media containing prerecorded information and
guides or scripts prepared solely for use with such media.
1.3 Loose Enclosures
In addition to the enclosures and additions listed in E611, any
printed matter that is mailable as Standard Mail (A) may be included
loose with any qualifying material mailed at the Special Standard Mail
rates.
1.4 Enclosures in Books
Enclosures in books mailed at Special Standard Mail rates are
subject to these additional standards:
a. Either one envelope or one addressed postcard may be bound into
the pages of a book. If also serving as an
[[Page 66651]]
order form, the envelope or card may be in addition to the order form
permitted by 1.4b.
b. One order form may be bound into the pages of a book. If also
serving as an envelope or postcard, the order form may be in addition
to the envelope or card permitted by 1.4a.
c. Books may also contain announcements of books appearing as book
pages. These announcements must be incidental, exclusively devoted to
books and without extraneous advertising of book-related materials or
services. Announcements may fully describe the conditions and methods
of ordering books and may contain ordering instructions for use with a
separate order form. No more than three of these announcements may
contain as part of their format a single order form, which may also
serve as a postcard. The order forms permitted with these announcements
are in addition to, and not in place of, order forms that may be
enclosed under 1.4a or 1.4b.
[Delete current 1.5.]
E625 Library Mail
1.0 BASIC STANDARDS
1.1 Qualification
Library Mail is Standard Mail matter that meets the standards in
E611, E613, and those below. Library Mail rates are based on the weight
of each piece without regard to zone.
1.2 Qualified Sender, Recipient, Content
Each piece must show in the address or return address the name of a
school, college, university, public library, museum, or herbarium or
the name of a nonprofit religious, educational, scientific,
philanthropic (charitable), agricultural, labor, veterans, or fraternal
organization. For Library Mail standards, these nonprofit organizations
are defined in E670. Only the articles described in 1.4 through 1.5 may
be mailed at the Library Mail rate.
1.3 Preparation
When 1,000 or more pieces of identical weight are mailed at the
Library Mail rates during a single day, the pieces must be prepared
under M630.
1.4 Mailable Items Sent Between
The following items may be mailed at the Library Mail rate when
sent between: (1) schools, colleges, universities, public libraries,
museums, and herbariums and nonprofit religious, educational,
scientific, philanthropic (charitable), agricultural, labor, veterans,
and fraternal organizations or associations; (2) any such institution,
organization, or association, and an individual who has no financial
interest in the sale, promotion, or distribution of the materials; or
(3) any such institution, organization, or association and a publisher,
if such institution, organization, or association has placed an order
to buy such materials for delivery to itself:
a. Books, consisting wholly of reading matter, scholarly
bibliography, or reading matter with incidental blank spaces for
notations and containing no advertising except for incidental
announcements of books.
b. Printed music, whether in bound or sheet form.
c. Bound volumes of academic theses, whether in typewritten or
duplicated form.
d. Periodicals, whether bound or unbound.
e. Sound recordings.
f. Other library materials in printed, duplicated, or photographic
form or in the form of unpublished manuscripts.
g. Museum materials, specimens, collections, teaching aids, printed
matter, and interpretive materials for informing and furthering the
educational work and interests of museums and herbariums.
1.5 Mailable Items Sent ``To'' or ``From''
The following specific items may be mailed at the Library Mail rate
when sent to or from schools, colleges, universities, public libraries,
museums, and herbariums and to or from nonprofit religious,
educational, scientific, philanthropic (charitable), agricultural,
labor, veterans, or fraternal organizations:
a. 16-millimeter or narrower width films, filmstrips,
transparencies, slides, and microfilms. All must be positive prints in
final form for viewing.
b. Sound recordings.
c. Museum materials, specimens, collections, teaching aids, printed
matter, and interpretive materials intended for informing and
furthering the educational work and interests of museums and
herbariums.
d. Scientific or mathematical kits, instruments, or other devices.
e. Catalogs of the materials in 1.5a through 1.5d and guides or
scripts prepared solely for use with such materials.
1.6 Enclosures in Books and Sound Recordings
Books and sound recordings mailed at the Library Mail rate may
contain these enclosures as well as the additions and enclosures
permitted under E611:
a. Either one envelope or one addressed postcard. If also serving
as an order form, the envelope or card may be in addition to the order
form permitted by 1.6b.
b. One order form. If also serving as an envelope or postcard, the
order form may be in addition to the envelope or card permitted by
1.6a.
c. With books, announcements of books appearing in book pages or as
loose enclosures. These announcements of books must be incidental and
exclusively devoted to books. They may not contain extraneous
advertising of book-related materials or services. Announcements may
fully describe the conditions and methods of ordering books (such as by
membership in book clubs) and may contain ordering instructions for use
with the single order form permitted in 1.6b.
d. With sound recordings, announcements of sound recordings
appearing on title labels, on protective sleeves, on the carton or
wrapper, or on loose enclosures. These announcements of sound
recordings must be incidental and exclusively devoted to sound
recordings. They may not contain extraneous advertising of recording-
related materials or services. Announcements may fully describe the
conditions and methods of ordering sound recordings (such as by
membership in sound recording clubs) and may contain ordering
instructions for use with the single order form permitted in 1.6b.
1.7 Other Material
Material mailed at the Library Mail rate other than books and sound
recordings may contain only those additions and enclosures permitted
under E611.
[Delete current 1.8.]
E630 Presort Bulk Rates
E631 Regular Standard Mail
1.0 BASIC AND 3/5 RATES
Basic and 3/5 rates apply to Regular Standard Mail letters, flats,
and machinable and irregular parcels, weighing less than 16 ounces,
that are correctly prepared under M610. Basic rates apply to pieces
that do not meet the standards for the 3/5 rates described below. Basic
rate and 3/5 rate pieces may be prepared as part of the same mailing,
subject to a single minimum volume standard. Pieces not presorted to
qualify for the 3/5 rate must be paid at the basic rate and prepared
accordingly. Pieces may qualify for the 3/5 rate if:
a. In quantities of 150 or more letter-size pieces for a single 3-
digit area,
[[Page 66652]]
prepared in 5-digit or 3-digit packages of 10 or more pieces each and
placed in 5-digit or 3-digit trays.
b. In quantities of 150 or more upgradable letter-size pieces (as
defined in M610) for a single 3-digit area and placed in 5-digit or 3-
digit trays.
c. In a 5-digit or 3-digit package of 10 or more flat-size pieces
and placed in a 5-digit or 3-digit sack containing at least 125 pieces
or 15 pounds of pieces.
d. In a 5-digit or 3-digit package of 10 or more flat-size pieces
and sorted to the appropriate level of pallet.
e. In a 5-digit, destination ASF (if required), or destination BMC
sack containing at least 10 pounds of machinable parcels. (The 3/5
rates are available only if all possible 5-digit sacks are prepared.)
f. On a 5-digit, destination ASF (if required), or destination BMC
pallet of machinable parcels. (The 3/5 rates are available only if all
possible 5-digit pallets are prepared.)
g. In a 5-digit or 3-digit sack of irregular parcels.
2.0 ZIP CODE ACCURACY
Effective 3 months from the date on which Classification Reform is
implemented, 5-digit ZIP Codes included in addresses appearing on
pieces claimed at Regular Basic and \3/5\ rates must have been verified
and corrected within 12 months of the date of mailing, using a USPS-
approved method. Mailers must certify that this standard has been met
when the corresponding mail is presented to the USPS. This standard
applies to each address individually, not to a specific list or
mailing. An address meeting this standard may be used in mailings at
any other rates to which the standard applies throughout the 12-month
period following its most recent update.
E632 Enhanced Carrier Route Standard Mail
1.0 BASIC STANDARDS
1.1 General
Enhanced Carrier Route rates apply to Enhanced Carrier Route
Standard Mail letters, flats, and irregular parcels (including
merchandise samples distributed using detached address labels),
weighing less than 16 ounces, that are presented at one post office as
part of a single mailing of at least 200 pieces or 50 pounds of pieces
and correctly prepared under M620 to carrier routes (city carrier
routes, rural routes, highway contract routes, post office box
sections, or general delivery units). Enhanced Carrier Route rate flats
may not be more than 11-3/4 inches wide, 14 inches long, or 3/4 inch
thick. Merchandise samples with detached labels may exceed these
dimensions if the labels meet the standards in A060.
1.2 Pieces at Different Rates
An Enhanced Carrier Route mailing may include pieces at more than
one Enhanced Carrier Route rate, subject to a single minimum volume
standard.
1.3 Carrier Route Information
Mailers must apply carrier route codes to mailings using CASS-
certified software and the current USPS Carrier Route Information
System (CRIS) scheme or another AIS product containing carrier route
information (see A930). Mailers must have updated the carrier route
information within 90 days before the mailing date.
1.4 Sequencing
Basic Carrier Route rate mail must be prepared in carrier walk
sequence or line-of-travel (LOT) sequence, using official LOT schemes
prescribed by the USPS (see M050). High Density and Saturation rate
mailings must be prepared in carrier walk sequence, using official
schemes prescribed by the USPS.
1.5 Eligible Presort
Carrier Route rates apply to pieces as described below that are
correctly presorted under M620. Basic Carrier Route rates apply unless
pieces meet the additional standards in 1.6 and 1.7 to qualify for the
High Density or Saturation rates. Pieces may qualify for the Carrier
Route rates if:
a. In a carrier route package of 10 or more letter-size pieces
placed in a full carrier route or any 5-digit carrier routes tray.
b. In a carrier route package of 10 or more flat-size pieces placed
in a carrier route sack containing at least 125 pieces or 15 pounds of
pieces, or in a 5-digit carrier routes sack.
c. In a carrier route package of 10 or more flat-size pieces
correctly palletized under M045.
d. In a carrier route sack of irregular parcels containing 125
pieces or 15 pounds of pieces, in a carrier route carton(s) of
merchandise samples prepared with detached address labels under A060
containing a total of 125 pieces or 15 pounds of pieces, or in a 5-
digit carrier routes sack or carton. (Pieces must be in packages of 10
or more irregular parcels each if packaging is required under M610.)
1.6 Addressing--High Density and Saturation Mail
High Density and Saturation rate mail may be prepared with detached
address labels, subject to A060, or with an alternative addressing
format, subject to A040. High Density pieces must have a complete
delivery address or an address in occupant or exceptional format.
Saturation pieces addressed for delivery on a city carrier route must
have a complete delivery address or an address in occupant or
exceptional format, except that official mail from certain government
entities may also use the simplified format. Saturation pieces for
delivery on rural or highway contract routes, or through general
delivery or a post office box, must have a complete delivery address or
an alternative address format.
1.7 Density Standards--High Density and Saturation Mail
High Density and Saturation rate mailings are subject to these
density standards:
a. There is no minimum volume per 5-digit ZIP Code delivery area.
Pieces need not be sent to all carrier routes within a 5-digit delivery
area.
b. For the High Density rate, at least 125 pieces must be prepared
for each carrier route for which that discount is claimed, except that
fewer pieces may be prepared and the High Density rate may be claimed
for carrier routes of 124 or fewer possible deliveries if a piece is
addressed to every possible delivery on the route. Multiple pieces per
delivery address can count toward this density standard.
c. For the Saturation rate, pieces must be addressed either to 90%
or more of the active residential addresses or 75% or more of the total
number of active possible delivery addresses, whichever is less, on
each carrier route receiving this mail, except that mail addressed in
the simplified address format must meet the 100% coverage standard in
A040. Multiple pieces per delivery address do not count toward this
delivery standard. Sacks with fewer than 125 pieces and less than 15
pounds of pieces may be prepared to a carrier route when the Saturation
rate is claimed for the contents and the applicable density standard is
met.
E633 Bulk Bound Printed Matter
1.0 BASIC INFORMATION
1.1 Preparation
Bulk bound printed matter must meet the basic standards in E623 and
the applicable preparation standards in M630. Mailings may contain
nonidentical-weight pieces only if the correct postage is affixed to
each piece or if the RCSC serving the office of mailing has authorized
payment of postage by permit imprint. Each mailing
[[Page 66653]]
must contain 300 or more pieces of bound printed matter. Insurance,
special delivery, special handling, and COD services may be used, but
selective use of these services for individual parcels must be approved
by the RCSC.
1.2 Additional Standards for Carrier Route
Carrier route bulk bound printed matter is subject to these
additional standards:
a. Each mailing must contain 300 or more pieces presorted under
M630 into groups of at least 10 pieces, 20 pounds, or 1,000 cubic
inches each for the same carrier route, rural route, highway contract
route, post office box section, or general delivery unit.
b. Residual pieces (not sorted as described in 1.2a) do not count
toward the minimum specified in 1.2a, are ineligible for the carrier
route presort level rate, and must have postage paid at the appropriate
bulk bound printed matter rate. Residual pieces may be included in a
carrier route presort rate mailing and be endorsed ``Carrier Route
Presort'' or ``CAR-RT SORT.'' The number of residual pieces to any
single 5-digit ZIP Code area may not exceed 5% of the total qualifying
presorted carrier route pieces addressed to that 5-digit area. Residual
pieces must be separated from the pieces that qualify for the carrier
route rate and must be correctly prepared under M630.
c. Mailers must apply carrier route codes to mailings using CASS-
certified software and the current USPS Carrier Route Information
System (CRIS) scheme or another AIS product containing carrier route
information (see A930). Mailers must have updated the carrier route
information within 90 days of the mailing date.
E634 Presorted Special Standard Mail
1.0 BASIC INFORMATION
The Presorted Special Standard Mail rates apply to Special Standard
Mail rate matter mailed in minimum quantities at a place and time
designated by the postmaster, subject to the preparation standards in
M630. The size and content of each piece in the mailing does not need
to be identical. Nonidentical pieces may be merged, presorted together,
and presented as a single mailing either with postage paid with a
permit imprint if authorized by the RCSC serving the post office of
mailing, or with the correct postage affixed to each piece in the
mailing.
2.0 PRESORT RATES
2.1 Mailing Fee
A mailing fee must be paid once each 12-month period at each office
of mailing by or for any person who mails at the Presorted Special
Standard Mail rates. The fee may be paid in advance only for the next
year and only during the last 30 days of the current service period.
The fee charged is that in effect on the date of payment.
2.2 One Presort Level
A Presorted Special Standard Mail rate mailing receives only one
level of presort rate. The mailer may, however, divide a mailing into
two or more mailings with separate mailing statements to use both
levels of presort rates. Pieces that do not qualify for a presort rate
must be presented for mailing under a separate mailing statement if
postage is paid with a permit imprint.
2.3 Definitions
For this standard:
a. A ``full sack'' means either at least eight pieces or a quantity
of pieces equaling at least 1,000 cubic inches of volume or weighing
from 20 to 70 pounds.
b. A ``substantially full sack'' means either at least four pieces
or a quantity of pieces equaling at least 1,000 cubic inches of volume
or weighing from 20 to 70 pounds.
2.4 5-Digit Rate
To qualify for the Presorted Special Standard Mail 5-digit rate, a
piece must be in a mailing of at least 500 pieces receiving identical
service, properly prepared and presorted either under M630 to full 5-
digit sacks or under M045 to 5-digit pallets. These conditions also
apply:
a. Mailings of at least 500 nonmachinable outside parcels may
qualify for the Presorted Special Standard Mail 5-digit rate if
prepared to preserve presort by 5-digit ZIP Code as prescribed by the
mailing office postmaster. The postmaster may require up to a 24-hour
notice before the mailing is presented.
b. Mailings prepared as palletized bundles must consist of 5-digit
bundles each containing at least eight pieces, or a quantity of pieces
equaling 1,000 cubic inches of volume or weighing 20 pounds. No bundle
may exceed 40 pounds. If there is more than 20 pounds of mail to a 5-
digit destination, mailers must prepare the minimum number of bundles
that do not exceed 40 pounds each.
2.5 BMC Rate
To qualify for the Presorted Special Standard Mail BMC rate, a
piece must be in a mailing of at least 500 sacked pieces receiving
identical service, properly prepared and presorted either under M630 to
full or substantially full bulk mail center (BMC) sacks or under M045
to BMC pallets. Mailings of at least 500 nonmachinable outside parcels
may qualify for the Presorted Special Standard Mail BMC rate if
prepared to preserve presort by BMC as prescribed by the mailing office
postmaster. The postmaster may require up to a 24-hour notice before
the mailing is presented.
E639 Nonprofit Standard Mail
[Text of current eligibility standards in E331 and E332 is retained and
renumbered for nonprofit rates only as E639.1.0; text of current
eligibility standards in E333 and E334 is retained and renumbered for
nonprofit rates only as E639.2.0 and 3.0, respectively.]
1.0 BASIC AND 3/5 RATES
1.1 Qualifying Pieces
Basic and 3/5 rates apply to Nonprofit Standard Mail letters,
flats, and machinable and irregular parcels, weighing less than 16
ounces, that are correctly prepared under M692. Basic rates apply to
pieces that do not meet the standards for the 3/5 rates described
below. Basic rate and 3/5 rate pieces may be prepared as part of the
same mailing, subject to a single minimum volume standard. Pieces not
presorted to qualify for the 3/5 rate must be paid at the basic rate
and prepared accordingly. Pieces may qualify for the 3/5 rate if
correctly prepared:
a. In 5-digit or 3-digit packages of 10 or more pieces each, placed
in 5-digit or 3-digit sacks that contain at least 125 pieces or 15
pounds of pieces.
b. In 5-digit or 3-digit packages of 10 or more pieces each, placed
in 5-digit or 3-digit trays.
c. In full or overflow 5-digit, 3-digit, or SCF trays, prepared
under the standards for ZIP+4 tray-based mailings in M891.
d. In 5-digit packages of 10 or more pieces each, or 3-digit
packages of 50 or more pieces each, prepared under the standards for
ZIP+4 package-based mailings in M892.
e. In 5-digit, 3-digit, or SCF trays, prepared under the standards
for letter-size ZIP+4 Barcoded tray-based mailings in M893.
f. In 5-digit packages of 10 or more pieces each, or 3-digit
packages of 50 or more pieces each, prepared under the standards for
letter-size ZIP+4 Barcoded
[[Page 66654]]
package-based mailings in M894 and M895.
g. In 5-digit or 3-digit packages of 10 or more pieces each,
prepared under the standards for flat-size 3/5 ZIP+4 Barcoded rate
mailings in M897.
h. In a 5-digit or 3-digit package of 10 or more pieces palletized
under M045.
i. In a 5-digit, destination ASF (if required), or destination BMC
sack containing at least 10 pounds of machinable parcels. (The 3/5
rates are available only if all possible 5-digit sacks are prepared.)
j. On a 5-digit or destination BMC pallet of machinable parcels.
(The 3/5 rates are available only if all possible 5-digit pallets are
prepared.)
k. In a 5-digit or 3-digit sack of irregular parcels.
1.2 Optional Preparation
At the mailer's option, Nonprofit Standard Mail may be prepared
under the standards for Regular Standard Mail in M610, including
presort. Under this option, Nonprofit Standard Mail can claim Nonprofit
Basic or 3/5 rates, and may be combined (comailed) with Regular
Standard Mail in the same mailing, if all corresponding eligibility
standards in E631 for Regular Basic and 3/5 rates, respectively, are
met. Presort of the combined mailing is based on the total combined
volume of pieces.
1.3 Carrier Route Pieces
A 3/5 rate mailing may not include pieces claimed at the carrier
route presort or walk-sequence rates. The 3/5 rate pieces and carrier
route presort or walk-sequence rate pieces may be reported on the same
mailing statement only under D600.
2.0 CARRIER ROUTE RATES
2.1 General
All pieces in a carrier route rate mailing must be presented at one
post office as part of a single mailing of at least 200 pieces or 50
pounds of pieces prepared under M693 to carrier routes (city carrier
routes, rural routes, highway contract routes, post office box
sections, or general delivery units). Pieces may not be more than 11\3/
4\ inches wide, 14 inches long, or \3/4\ inch thick. Merchandise
samples with detached labels may exceed these dimensions if the labels
meet the standards in A060.
2.2 Optional Preparation
At the mailer's option, carrier route Nonprofit Standard Mail may
be prepared under the standards for Enhanced Carrier Route Standard
Mail in M620, including presort. Under this option, Nonprofit Standard
Mail can claim Nonprofit carrier route rates, and may be combined
(comailed) with Enhanced Carrier Route Standard Mail in the same
mailing, if all corresponding eligibility standards in E632 for
Enhanced Carrier Route Basic Carrier Route rate are met. Presort of the
combined mailing is based on the total combined volume of pieces.
2.3 Other Rates
A carrier route rate mailing may include pieces claimed at the
basic rate if the entire mailing meets the standard in 3.1. The basic
rate pieces must be prepared under M692, but they do not have to meet a
separate 200-piece/50-pound minimum. A carrier route rate mailing may
not include pieces claimed at the 3/5 rates. The 3/5 rate and carrier
route rate pieces may be reported on the same mailing statement only
under D600.
2.4 Required Listing
At the time of mailing, the mailer must give the post office a list
of the number of qualifying pieces to each 5-digit ZIP Code area. After
the first mailing, the postmaster may authorize the mailer to keep the
records and submit them on request. The mailer must keep these records
for 90 days after the mailing date, or until any action pending on the
recalculation of postage is resolved to USPS satisfaction.
2.5 Carrier Route Information
Mailers must presort mail to carrier routes using the current USPS
Carrier Route Information System (CRIS) scheme (see A930). Mailers must
have incorporated CRIS changes in their mailings within 90 days before
the date of mailing.
2.6 Qualifying Presort
Each qualifying piece must be correctly prepared under M693 as part
of a group of 10 or more pieces in the same carrier route package that,
in turn, is placed in a carrier route, 5-digit carrier routes, or 3-
digit carrier routes tray or sack. To carrier route and 5-digit carrier
routes destinations, trays must be full and sacks must contain at least
125 pieces or 15 pounds of pieces. Qualifying mail also includes:
a. Carrier route packages in a 5-digit carrier routes tray that is
less than full, or in a 5-digit carrier routes sack that contains fewer
than 125 pieces and less than 15 pounds of pieces if that 5-digit area
does not have enough residential deliveries to meet the applicable full
tray or 125-piece/15-pound sack minimum at a 90% saturation level.
b. The last tray or sack to a 3-digit ZIP Code destination. The
last tray may be less than full and the last sack may contain fewer
than 125 pieces and less than 15 pounds of pieces.
c. Carrier route packages correctly palletized under M045.
2.7 Residual
Residual pieces are those not presorted under M693 to qualify for
carrier route rates. These pieces may be included in a carrier route
rate mailing and may be marked ``Carrier Route Presort,'' subject to
these conditions:
a. Residual pieces do not count toward the minimum quantity for
carrier route rates.
b. The number of residual pieces to any single 5-digit ZIP Code
area may not exceed 5% of the total qualifying carrier route presort
pieces addressed to that 5-digit ZIP Code area.
c. Residual pieces are not eligible for the carrier route rate and
must have postage paid at the basic rate and must be prepared as
specified in M693.
3.0 WALK-SEQUENCE RATES
3.1 General
All pieces in a walk-sequence rate mailing must be presented at one
post office as part of a single mailing of at least 200 pieces or 50
pounds of pieces correctly presorted to carrier routes (city carrier
routes, rural routes, highway contract routes, post office box
sections, or general delivery units). Subject to compliance with these
standards, the saturation walk-sequence rate may be claimed by pieces
in both the ``letters'' and ``other-than-letters'' categories. The 125-
piece walk-sequence rate may be claimed only by pieces in the ``other-
than-letters'' category, as defined in E612.
3.2 Optional Preparation
At the mailer's option, carrier route Nonprofit Standard Mail may
be prepared under the standards for Enhanced Carrier Route Standard
Mail in M620, including presort. Under this option, Nonprofit Standard
Mail can claim Nonprofit 125-piece walk-sequence or saturation walk-
sequence rates, and may be combined (comailed) with Enhanced Carrier
Route Standard Mail in the same mailing, if all corresponding
eligibility standards in E632 for Enhanced Carrier Route High Density
or Saturation rates are met. Presort of the combined mailing is based
on the total combined volume of pieces.
3.3 Other Rates
A walk-sequence rate mailing may include pieces claimed at the
carrier route and basic rates, but only the carrier route pieces count
toward the standard in 3.1. The basic rate pieces
[[Page 66655]]
must be prepared as required for residual pieces under 1.0, but they do
not have to meet a separate 200-piece/50-pound minimum. When presented
to the USPS, the trays or sacks containing the walk-sequence rate
pieces must be separated from other trays or sacks. Any effective
separation method may be used. A walk-sequence rate mailing may not
include pieces claimed at the 3/5 rate. The 3/5 rate and walk-sequence
rate pieces may be reported on the same mailing statement only under
D600.
3.4 Addressing
Walk-sequence rate mail must meet these addressing standards:
a. Mailings may be prepared with detached address labels, subject
to A060.
b. Pieces prepared with an alternative addressing format must meet
the applicable standards in A040.
c. For the 125-piece walk-sequence discount, each piece must have a
complete delivery address or an address in occupant or exceptional
format.
d. For the saturation walk-sequence discount, each piece addressed
for delivery on a city carrier route must have a complete delivery
address or an address in occupant or exceptional format, except that
official mail from certain government entities may also use the
simplified format. Pieces for delivery on rural or highway contract
routes, or through general delivery or a post office box, must have a
complete delivery address or an alternative address format.
3.5 Density Standards
Walk-sequence rate mailings are subject to these density standards:
a. There is no minimum volume per 5-digit ZIP Code delivery area.
Walk-sequence mail need not be sent to all carrier routes within a 5-
digit delivery area.
b. For the 125-piece walk-sequence discount, at least 125 walk-
sequenced pieces must be prepared for each carrier route for which that
discount is claimed, except that for carrier routes of 124 or fewer
possible deliveries, the 125-piece walk-sequence discount may be
claimed if a piece is addressed to every possible delivery on the
route. Multiple pieces per delivery address can count toward this
density standard.
c. For the saturation walk-sequence discount, pieces must be
addressed either to 90% or more of the active residential addresses or
75% or more of the total number of active possible delivery addresses,
whichever is less, on each carrier route receiving this mail, except
that mail addressed in the simplified address format must meet the
coverage standard in A040. Multiple pieces per delivery address do not
count toward this density standard.
d. Sacks with fewer than 125 pieces and less than 15 pounds of
pieces may be prepared to a carrier route when a walk-sequence discount
is claimed for the contents and the applicable density standard in 3.5b
or 3.5c is met.
E640 Automation-Based Rates
E641 Automation Rates
1.0 BASIC STANDARDS
1.1 All Pieces
All pieces in an Automation Standard Mail mailing must:
a. Meet all the basic standards for Standard Mail in E611 and E612.
b. Be part of a single mailing of at least 200 pieces or 50 pounds
of pieces of Standard Mail.
c. Be in the same processing category and meet the physical
standards in C810 (letters and cards) or C820 (flats).
d. Bear an address that includes the correct numeric 5-digit ZIP
Code or ZIP+4 code, or the correct numeric equivalent to the delivery
point barcode (DPBC).
e. Meet the address quality and coding standards in 1.2 (if
applicable), A800, and A950.
f. Be marked, presorted, and documented as specified in M891
(letters and cards) or M892 (flats).
g. Meet the postage payment standards in P013 and P600.
h. Bear an accurate barcode, either the correct DPBC if a card or
letter (on the piece or on an insert showing through a barcode window)
or the correct ZIP+4 barcode or DPBC if a flat, that meets the barcode
standards in C840. A letter-size mailpiece with a barcode window in the
lower right corner must have the correct DPBC appearing through that
window.
1.2 Carrier Route Information
Mailers must apply carrier route codes to mailings using CASS-
certified software and the current USPS Carrier Route Information
System (CRIS) scheme or another AIS product containing carrier route
information (see A930). Mailers must have updated the carrier route
information within 90 days before the mailing date. Carrier route rates
for letter-size mail are available only for those 5-digit ZIP Code
areas identified in the USPS AIS products used for address coding.
1.3 Enclosed Reply Envelopes and Cards
Effective January 1, 1997, all courtesy reply and business reply
envelopes and cards provided to addressees as enclosures in Automation
Standard Mail must bear the correct facing identification mark (FIM)
and delivery point barcode for the delivery address of the reply piece
and must meet the automation compatibility standards in C810 or C820,
as appropriate. Mailers must certify that this standard has been met
when the corresponding mail is presented to the USPS.
2.0 RATE APPLICATION
2.1 Letters and Cards
Automation Standard Mail rates apply to each piece that is
correctly presorted under M810 into the corresponding qualifying
groups:
a. Pieces in full carrier route trays, or in carrier route packages
of 10 or more pieces each placed in 5-digit carrier routes trays,
qualify for the Automation Carrier Route rate. (Preparation to qualify
for the Carrier Route rate is optional and need not be performed for
all carrier routes in a 5-digit area.)
b. Groups of 150 or more pieces in 5-digit trays (and all pieces in
one less-than-full overflow tray) qualify for the Automation 5-Digit
rate. (Preparation to qualify for the 5-Digit rate is optional.)
c. Groups of 150 or more pieces in 3-digit or 3-digit scheme trays
(and all pieces in one less-than-full overflow tray) qualify for the
Automation 3-Digit rate.
d. Pieces in full or overflow AADC trays and in all mixed AADC
trays qualify for the Automation Basic rate.
2.2 Flats
Automation Standard Mail rates apply to each piece that is
correctly presorted under M820 into the corresponding qualifying
groups:
a. Pieces in 5-digit or 3-digit packages of 10 or more pieces each
qualify for the Automation 3/5 rate.
b. Pieces in ADC or mixed ADC packages qualify for the Automation
Basic rate.
E649 Nonprofit Automation Rates
[Text of current eligibility standards in E342, E344, and E345 is
retained and renumbered for nonprofit rates only as E649.1.0, 2.0, and
3.0, respectively.]
1.0 ZIP+4 DISCOUNTS
1.1 All Pieces
All pieces in a Nonprofit Standard Mail ZIP+4 rate mailing must:
a. Meet the standards in E611 and E612.
b. Be presented at one post office as part of a single mailing of
at least 200 pieces or 50 pounds of pieces.
c. Meet the physical standards in C810.
d. Have an delivery address with the correct numeric ZIP+4 code or
the
[[Page 66656]]
correct numeric 5-digit ZIP Code. If prepared with a delivery point
barcode (DPBC), it may also bear the numeric equivalent to the DPBC.
e. Meet the address quality and coding standards of A800 and A950.
f. Meet the standards in C830 or, for pieces with the correct DPBC,
the barcode standards in C840.
g. Be marked, presorted, and documented as specified in M891 or
M892.
h. Meet the postage payment standards in P013 and P600.
i. Separately qualify under the standard for any other discount
claimed.
1.2 Rate Application
Nonprofit ZIP+4 rates apply to each piece that also:
a. Is correctly presorted under M891 or M892 into the corresponding
qualifying groups described in 1.7 and 1.8.
b. Has an address with the correct numeric ZIP+4 code or bears the
correct DPBC.
1.3 Barcode Window
A mailpiece meeting the standards in 1.1 and 1.2, but with a
barcode window in the lower right corner, may be eligible for any
Nonprofit automation rate only if the correct DPBC appears through the
window.
1.4 5-Digit Barcodes
Nonprofit ZIP+4 rate mailings may include pieces with correct 5-
digit barcodes if those pieces meet the standards in 1.1 and 1.2 and
the standards for 5-digit barcodes in C840. Such pieces may qualify for
the Nonprofit ZIP+4 rates only if the barcode is printed on the piece
and the address contains the correct numeric ZIP+4 code.
1.5 ZIP+4 Barcodes
Nonprofit ZIP+4 rate mailings may include pieces with correct ZIP+4
barcodes if the barcode is located in the address block and those
pieces meet the standards in 1.1 and 1.2 and the standards for ZIP+4
barcodes in C840. Such pieces may qualify for Nonprofit ZIP+4 rates
only if, additionally, the address contains the correct numeric ZIP+4
code. Pieces that bear a ZIP+4 barcode in the lower right corner may
not be included in a Nonprofit ZIP+4 rate mailing.
1.6 85% Rule
At least 85% of all pieces in a Nonprofit ZIP+4 rate mailing
(regardless of presort or rate) must bear the correct numeric ZIP+4
code or DPBC for the delivery address, as defined by the address
quality and coding standards in A800 and A950. The 85% requirement
applies to each mailing unless excepted by other standards.
1.7 Qualifying Tray-Based Presort
In tray-based presort mailings under M891, ZIP+4 coded or DPBC
pieces in full or overflow 5-digit, 3-digit, and SCF trays qualify for
the Nonprofit 3/5 ZIP+4 rate; other pieces qualify for the Nonprofit 3/
5 rate. One less-than-full SCF tray for the origin SCF is permitted.
ZIP+4 coded or DPBC pieces in AADC, mixed AADC, or working residual
trays qualify for the Nonprofit Basic ZIP+4 rate; other pieces qualify
for the Nonprofit Basic rate.
1.8 Qualifying Package-Based Presort
In package-based presort mailings under M892, ZIP+4 coded or DPBC
pieces in 5-digit packages of 10 or more pieces each, and 3-digit
packages of 50 or more pieces each, qualify for the Nonprofit 3/5 ZIP+4
rate; other pieces in these packages qualify for the Nonprofit 3/5
rate. Residual ZIP+4 coded or DPBC pieces qualify for the Nonprofit
Basic ZIP+4 rate; other pieces qualify for the Nonprofit Basic rate.
2.0 BARCODED DISCOUNTS (LETTER-SIZE PIECES)
2.1 All Pieces
All pieces in a Nonprofit Standard Mail Barcoded rate letter-size
mailing must:
a. Meet the standards in E611 and E612.
b. Be presented at one post office as part of a single mailing of
at least 200 pieces or 50 pounds of pieces.
c. Meet the physical standards in C810.
d. Bear a delivery address that includes the correct numeric ZIP+4
code or 5-digit ZIP Code (or, only if prepared with a delivery point
barcode (DPBC), the numeric equivalent to the DPBC).
e. Meet the address quality and coding standards of A800 and A950.
f. Be marked, presorted, and documented as specified in M893, M894,
or M895.
g. Meet the postage payment standards in P013 and P600.
h. Separately qualify under the standard for any other discount
claimed.
i. Either bear the correct DPBC meeting the barcode standards in
C840 or meet the applicable standards in 2.5.
2.2 Rate Application
Nonprofit Barcoded rates apply to each piece that also:
a. Is correctly presorted under M893, M894, or M895 into the
corresponding qualifying groups described in 2.8, 2.9, and 2.10.
b. Bears the correct DPBC that meets the barcode standards in C840.
c. Meets the applicable standards in 2.3 through 2.7.
2.3 Optional Preparation
At the mailer's option, barcoded Nonprofit Standard Mail may be
prepared under the standards for Automation Standard Mail in M820,
including presort. Under this option, barcoded Nonprofit Standard Mail
can claim Nonprofit carrier route, 5-Digit Barcoded, 3-Digit Barcoded,
and Basic Barcoded rates, and may be combined (comailed) with
Automation Standard Mail in the same mailing, if all corresponding
eligibility standards in E631 and E641 for Automation Carrier Route, 5-
Digit, 3-Digit, and Basic rates, respectively, are met. Presort of the
combined mailing is based on the total combined volume of pieces.
2.4 Barcode Window
A mailpiece weighing 3 ounces or less, meeting the standards in 2.1
through 2.3 but with a barcode window in the lower right corner, may be
eligible for any Nonprofit automation rate only if the correct DPBC
appears through the window.
2.5 Pieces Without DPBCs
Subject to 2.5 and 2.6, Nonprofit Barcoded rate mailings may also
include nonbarcoded, 5-digit barcoded, or ZIP+4 barcoded pieces if each
such piece (regardless of rate) meets the standards in 2.1, has a
barcode clear zone in the lower right corner meeting the reflectance
standards in C840, meets the applicable 5-digit or ZIP+4 barcode
standards in C840, and does not have a window in the lower right
corner. Additionally, to qualify for a Nonprofit ZIP+4 rate, subject to
2.8, 2.9, and 2.10:
a. Nonbarcoded and 5-digit barcoded pieces must bear an address
with the correct ZIP+4 code and meet the standards in C830.
b. ZIP+4 barcoded pieces must have the barcode in the address
block, meet the standards in C830, and bear an address with the correct
ZIP+4 code.
2.6 85% Rule
Subject to 2.7, at least 85% of all pieces in a Nonprofit Barcoded
rate mailing (regardless of presort or rate) must bear the correct DPBC
for the delivery address, as defined by the standards for address
quality and coding accuracy in A800 and A950. The 85% requirement
applies to each mailing unless excepted by other standards.
[[Page 66657]]
2.7 100% Barcoding
Each piece must bear the correct delivery point barcode:
a. In 5-digit trays in a tray-based mailing under M893.
b. In 5-digit packages in a package-based mailing under M894 or
M895.
c. In any mailing containing heavy letters (as defined in C810).
2.8 Qualifying Tray-Based Presort
In tray-based presort mailings under M893:
a. Pieces in full or overflow 5-digit trays qualify for the 5-digit
Nonprofit Barcoded rate.
b. In full or overflow 3-digit and SCF trays, DPBC pieces qualify
for the 3-digit Nonprofit Barcoded rate; subject to 2.5, ZIP+4 coded
non-DPBC pieces qualify for the Nonprofit 3/5 ZIP+4 rate; other pieces
qualify for the Nonprofit 3/5 rate. One less-than-full SCF tray for the
SCF serving the post office where the mailing is entered is permitted.
c. In AADC, mixed AADC, and working trays, DPBC pieces qualify for
the Nonprofit Basic Barcoded rate; subject to 2.5, ZIP+4 coded non-DPBC
pieces qualify for the Nonprofit Basic ZIP+4 rate; other pieces qualify
for the Nonprofit Basic rates.
2.9 Qualifying Two-Tier Package-Based Presort
In two-tier package-based presort mailings under M894:
a. Pieces in 5-digit packages of 10 or more pieces each qualify for
the Nonprofit 5-digit Barcoded rate.
b. In 3-digit packages of 50 or more pieces each, DPBC pieces
qualify for the Nonprofit 3-digit Barcoded rates; subject to 2.5, ZIP+4
coded non-DPBC pieces qualify for the Nonprofit 3/5 ZIP+4 rate; other
pieces qualify for the Nonprofit 3/5 rate.
c. In the residual portion, DPBC pieces qualify for the Nonprofit
Basic Barcoded rate; subject to 2.5, ZIP+4 coded non-DPBC pieces
qualify for the Nonprofit Basic ZIP+4 rate; other pieces qualify for
Nonprofit Basic rate.
2.10 Qualifying Three-Tier Package-Based Presort
In three-tier package-based presort mailings under M895:
a. Pieces in 5-digit packages of 10 or more pieces each in the 5-
digit presort tier qualify for the Nonprofit 5-digit Barcoded rate.
b. In 3-digit packages of 50 or more pieces each in the 3-digit
presort tier, DPBC pieces qualify for the Nonprofit 3-digit Barcoded
rate; subject to 2.5, ZIP+4 coded non-DPBC pieces qualify for the
Nonprofit 3/5 ZIP+4 rate; other pieces qualify for the Nonprofit 3/5
rate.
c. In the residual presort tier, DPBC pieces qualify for the
Nonprofit Basic Barcoded rate; subject to 2.5, ZIP+4 coded non-DPBC
pieces qualify for the Nonprofit Basic ZIP+4 rate; other pieces qualify
for the Nonprofit Basic rate.
3.0 ZIP+4 BARCODED DISCOUNTS (FLAT-SIZE PIECES)
3.1 All Pieces
All pieces in a Nonprofit Standard Mail ZIP+4 Barcoded rate flat-
size mailing must:
a. Meet the standards in E611 and E612.
b. Be presented at one post office as part of a single mailing of
at least 200 pieces or 50 pounds of pieces.
c. Meet the physical standards in C820.
d. Bear a delivery address that includes the correct numeric ZIP+4
code or 5-digit ZIP Code (or, only if prepared with a delivery point
barcode (DPBC), the numeric equivalent to the DPBC).
e. Meet the address quality and coding standards of A800 and A950.
f. Bear the correct 5-digit, ZIP+4, or DPBC, subject to C840,
except for pieces in specific portions of mailings prepared under M897.
g. Be marked, presorted, and documented as specified in M897.
h. Meet the postage payment standards in P013 and P600.
i. Separately qualify under the standard for any other discount
claimed.
3.2 Rate Application
Nonprofit ZIP+4 Barcoded rates apply to each piece that also:
a. Is correctly presorted under M897 into the qualifying groups
described in 3.6.
b. Bears the correct ZIP+4 or DPBC.
3.3 Optional Preparation
At the mailer's option, barcoded Nonprofit Standard Mail may be
prepared under the standards for Automation Standard Mail in M820,
including presort. Under this option, barcoded Nonprofit Standard Mail
can claim Nonprofit 3/5-Digit Barcoded and Basic Barcoded rates, and
may be combined (comailed) with Automation Standard Mail in the same
mailing, if all corresponding eligibility standards in E631 and E641
for Automation 3/5 and Basic rates, respectively, are met. Presort of
the combined mailing is based on the total combined volume of pieces.
3.4 5-Digit Barcodes
Nonprofit ZIP+4 Barcoded rate mailings may include pieces with
correct 5-digit barcodes if those pieces meet the standards in 3.1
through 3.3 and the standards for 5-digit barcodes in C840. Pieces with
a 5-digit barcode could be eligible for a presort rate under 3.6.
3.5 85% Rule
Generally, at least 85% of all pieces in a Nonprofit ZIP+4 Barcoded
rate mailing (regardless of presort or rate) must bear the correct
ZIP+4 or DPBC for the delivery address, as defined by the standards for
address quality and coding accuracy in A800 and A950. Remaining pieces
must bear the correct 5-digit barcode meeting the applicable standards
in C840. The 85% requirement applies to each mailing unless excepted by
other standards. Nonprofit ZIP+4 Barcoded rate mailings not meeting the
85% rule must be prepared under corresponding standards in M897.
3.6 Presort
In 5-digit or 3-digit packages of 10 or more pieces each, ZIP+4 or
DPBC pieces can qualify for the Nonprofit 3/5 ZIP+4 Barcoded rate; 5-
digit barcoded (and nonbarcoded pieces where permitted) pieces qualify
for the Nonprofit 3/5 rate. In SCF packages of 10 or more pieces each,
or in residual packages, ZIP+4 or DPBC pieces qualify for the Nonprofit
Basic ZIP+4 Barcoded rate for flats; 5-digit barcoded pieces qualify
for the Nonprofit Basic rate.
E650 Destination Entry Discounts
E651 Regular, Nonprofit, Enhanced Carrier Route, and Automation
Standard Mail
[Text of current E350; in 1.4, replace ``bulk third-class mail'' with
``bulk rate Standard Mail (A)''; in 3.9, replace ``third-class mail''
with ``Standard Mail (A)''; revise 1.1 and 7.1 as shown below; in 5.3
and 6.2, delete ``SDC''; no other change in text.]
1.0 BASIC STANDARDS
1.1 Rate Application
Regular, Nonprofit, Enhanced Carrier Route, and Automation Standard
Mail meeting the basic standards in E611 and E612 may qualify for the
destination BMC, SCF, or DDU entry rates if deposited at the correct
destination postal facility, subject to the general standards below and
the specific standards in 5.0, 6.0, and 7.0, respectively. Only one
destination reduction may be claimed for each mailpiece.
* * * * *
[[Page 66658]]
7.0 DELIVERY UNIT DISCOUNT
7.1 Definition
For this standard, ``destination delivery unit (DDU)'' refers to a
facility designated by the USPS where sequencing is performed for the
carrier route (city carrier route, rural route, highway contract route,
post office box section, or general delivery unit) serving the delivery
address on the mailpiece.
* * * * *
[Delete 7.3.]
E652 Parcel Post
[Text of current E450; in 1.4, replace ``fourth-class'' with ``Standard
Mail (B)''; no other change in text.]
E670 Nonprofit (Special) Bulk Rates
[Text of current E370; in 1.1, 1.3, 2.1, 3.1, 3.3, 4.1, 4.2, 5.1, 5.2,
5.3, 5.4, 5.4a, 5.4b, 5.4c, 5.4d(1), 5.6a, 5.6b, 5.6b(1), 5.6b(2),
5.6b(3), 5.6e, 5.8, 5.9, 5.10, 5.11, 5.12, 6.0, 7.1, 7.3, 8.1, 8.3,
9.1, 9.2, 9.3, 9.4, 11.1, and 11.4, replace ``special bulk third-class
rate[s],'' ``special bulk rate[s],'' or ``special rate[s]'' with
``Nonprofit Standard Mail rate[s]''; in 1.3, replace ``for all bulk
third-class mail in E311 and E312'' with ``in E611 and E612''; in 3.3,
5.4d(2), 5.11, 9.2, and 9.3b, replace ``third-class'' with ``Standard
Mail (A)''; in 5.8d, correct the reference from E211.11.0 to E211; in
5.10c, correct the reference from E370.5.0 to 5.0. No other change in
text.]
F FORWARDING AND RELATED SERVICES
F000 Basic Services
F010 Basic Information
[In 3.0d, replace ``fourth-class'' and ``third-class'' with ``Standard
Mail (B)'' and ``Standard Mail (A),'' respectively; in Exhibit 4.2,
5.2, 5.2a, 5.2b, 5.2e, 5.2f, 5.2g, 6.1, and 7.2, replace ``second-
class'' with ``Periodicals''; in 4.6b, 5.2e, the table following 5.2g,
6.1, 7.1, and 8.1e, replace ``third- or fourth-class'' with ``Standard
Mail''; in 4.6d and 6.3, replace ``fourth-class'' with ``Standard Mail
(B)''; in 5.3, 5.3a, 5.3f, 5.3g, the table following 5.3g, 6.2, 8.1a,
8.1b, and 8.1e, replace ``[T]hird-class'' with ``Standard Mail (A)'';
in 5.4, 5.4b, 5.4c, 5.4d, and 5.4e, replace ``[F]ourth-class'' with
``Standard Mail (B)''; in 7.1a and 7.2, replace ``second-, third-, or
fourth-class'' with ``Periodicals or Standard Mail''; in 7.4, replace
``special fourth-class'' with ``Special Standard Mail''; in 8.1e,
replace ``third- and fourth-class'' with ``Standard Mail''; no other
change in text.]
F020 Forwarding
[In 2.3, 2.4, and 2.6, replace ``First-, second-, and fourth-class mail
and all single-piece rate third-class mail'' with ``First-Class,
Periodicals, Standard Mail (B), and single-piece rate Standard Mail
(A)''; in 3.4, replace ``Second-[C]lass'' with ``Periodicals''; in 3.5,
replace ``Third-[C]lass,'' ``fourth-class,'' and ``Special Fourth-
Class'' with ``Standard Mail (A),'' ``Standard Mail (B),'' and
``Special Standard Mail,'' respectively; in 3.6, replace ``[F]ourth-
[C]lass'' with ``Standard Mail (B)''; no other change in text.]
F030 Address Correction, Address Change, and Return Services
[In 1.2 and 2.3, replace ``[S]econd-[C]lass'' with ``Periodicals''; in
1.3, replace ``third- and fourth-class'' and ``First-, third-, or
fourth-class'' with ``Standard Mail'' and ``First-Class and Standard
Mail,'' respectively; in 3.2d, replace ``third-class'' with ``Standard
Mail (A)''; in 3.2e, replace ``fourth-class'' with ``Standard Mail
(B)''; no other change in text.]
G GENERAL INFORMATION
[No change in Module G.]
L Labeling Lists
L000 General Use
L001 Optional Multi-ZIP Coded Post Offices
As permitted by the standards for the rate claimed, Preferred
Periodicals mailings may be sorted to the following multicoded cities.
* * * * *
L002 3-Digit Destinations and SCFs
Instructions
[Revise the fourth paragraph and footnote 1 as follows:]
* * * * *
SCFs for which mailers may claim destination SCF Standard Mail (A)
rates or SCF zone Periodicals rates are the SCFs serving a single 3-
digit ZIP Code area marked with three bullets in Column A, and the SCFs
serving more than one 3-digit ZIP Code area in Column B. Their
respective service areas are listed in Column C. Pieces for ZIP Code
areas not listed in Column C may not be claimed at SCF rates.
* * * * *
\1\=Mail destinating in 3-digit ZIP Code area 008 must be
labeled as shown in L601 for Standard Mail machinable parcels and in
L004 for all other mail.
* * * * *
L003 Combined 3-Digit ZIP Code Prefix Sortation
When permitted by the standards for specific rates, pieces for the
3-digit ZIP Code prefixes shown in column A may be combined in trays
labeled to the corresponding destination shown in column B. Line 2 on
tray labels must include ``SCHEME'' except as shown below.
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Column A 3-Digit ZIP Code Prefix
Combinations Column B Label to
------------------------------------------------------------------------
006-009............................. SAN JUAN PR 006
010, 011, 013....................... SPRINGFIELD MA 010
014, 015, 017....................... WORCESTER MA 015
018, 019, 055....................... MIDDLESEX-ESSEX MA 018
020, 023, 024....................... BROCKTON MA 023
021, 022............................ BOSTON MA 021
025, 026............................ BUZZARDS BAY MA 025
027, 028............................ PROVIDENCE RI 028
035, 036, 051-053, 059.............. WHITE RIVER JCT VT 051 SCHEME B
037, 050............................ WHITE RIVER JCT VT 050 SCHEME C
038, 039............................ PORTSMOUTH NH 038
043, 045............................ PORTLAND ME 043
054, 056............................ BURLINGTON VT 054
057, 058............................ WHITE RIVER JCT VT 057 SCHEME A
068, 069............................ STAMFORD CT 068
074, 076............................ HACKENSACK NJ 076
077, 088............................ KILMER NJ 088
078, 079............................ WEST JERSEY NJ 078
080, 081............................ SOUTH JERSEY NJ 080 SCHEME A
082-084............................. SOUTH JERSEY NJ 082 SCHEME B
085-087............................. TRENTON NJ 085
110, 113, 114, 116.................. QUEENS NY 110
120-123............................. ALBANY NY 120
124, 125, 127....................... MID-HUDSON NY 125
130-132............................. SYRACUSE NY 130
133, 134............................ UTICA NY 133
137-139............................. BINGHAMTON NY 137
140-143............................. BUFFALO NY 140
155, 157............................ JOHNSTOWN PA 155
164, 165............................ ERIE PA 164
169, 177............................ WILLIAMSPORT PA 169
180, 181, 183....................... LEHIGH VALLEY PA 180
191, 192............................ PHILADELPHIA PA 191
193, 194............................ SOUTHEASTERN PA 193
197-199............................. WILMINGTON DE 197
202-205............................. WASHINGTON DC 202
208, 209............................ SUBURBAN MD 208
210, 211, 219....................... BALTIMORE MD 210
240, 241............................ ROANOKE VA 240
250-252............................. CHARLESTON WV 250
280, 281, 297....................... CHARLOTTE NC 280 SCHEME A74
293, 296............................ GREENVILLE SC 296
300, 301............................ NORTH METRO GA 300
[[Page 66659]]
303, 311, 399....................... ATLANTA GA 303
310, 312............................ MACON GA 310
318, 319............................ COLUMBUS GA 318
334, 349............................ W PALM BEACH FL 334
335, 346............................ TAMPA FL 335
369, 393............................ JACKSON MS 393 SCHEME B
377-379............................. KNOXVILLE TN 377
390, 391............................ JACKSON MS 390 SCHEME A
400, 401, 471....................... LOUISVILLE KY 400
410, 470............................ CINCINNATI OH 410 SCHEME A
430, 431, 433....................... COLUMBUS OH 430 SCHEME A
434-436............................. TOLEDO OH 434
437, 438............................ COLUMBUS OH 437 SCHEME B
442, 443............................ AKRON OH 442
444, 445............................ YOUNGSTOWN OH 444
446, 447............................ CANTON OH 446
450, 451............................ CINCINNATI OH 450 SCHEME B
460-462............................. INDIANAPOLIS IN 460
463, 464............................ GARY IN 463
465, 466............................ SOUTH BEND IN 465
467, 468............................ FORT WAYNE IN 467
480, 483............................ ROYAL OAK MI 480
484, 485............................ FLINT MI 484
486, 487............................ SAGINAW MI 486
488, 489............................ LANSING MI 488
490, 491............................ KALAMAZOO MI 490
498, 499............................ IRON MOUNTAIN MI 498
500-502............................. DES MOINES IA 500 SCHEME A
503, 509............................ DES MOINES IA 503 SCHEME B
515, 516, 680....................... OMAHA NE 680
522, 523............................ CEDAR RAPIDS IA 522
527, 528, 612....................... ROCK ISLAND IL 612
535, 538............................ MADISON WI 535
540, 550............................ ST PAUL MN 550
541, 542............................ GREEN BAY WI 541
590-593, 595, 596, 821.............. BILLINGS MT 590
600, 602............................ PALATINE IL 600
601, 603............................ CAROL STREAM IL 601
610, 611............................ ROCKFORD IL 610
615, 616............................ PEORIA IL 615
618, 619............................ CHAMPAIGN IL 618
620, 622, 630, 633.................. ST LOUIS MO 630
654, 655............................ SPRINGFIELD MO 654 SCHEME A
656, 657............................ SPRINGFIELD MO 656 SCHEME B
670, 671............................ WICHITA KS 670
710, 711............................ SHREVEPORT LA 710 SCHEME A
713, 714............................ SHREVEPORT LA 713 SCHEME B
752, 753............................ DALLAS TX 752
786, 789............................ AUSTIN TX 786
808, 809............................ COLORADO SPRINGS CO 808
840-844............................. SALT LAKE UT 840
894, 895, 897....................... RENO NV 894
873, 877, 878, 881, 883, 884........ ALBUQUERQUE NM 873
889-891............................. LAS VEGAS NV 890
902-905............................. INGLEWOOD CA 902
906-908............................. LONG BEACH CA 907
913, 914............................ VAN NUYS CA 913
917, 918............................ INDUSTRY CA 917
919-921............................. SAN DIEGO CA 920
923-925............................. SAN BERNARDINO CA 923
926, 927............................ SANTA ANA CA 926
940, 943, 944....................... SAN FRANCISCO CA 940 SCHEME A
945, 948............................ OAKLAND CA 945 SCHEME A
946, 947............................ OAKLAND CA 946 SCHEME B
952, 953............................ STOCKTON CA 952
956, 957............................ SACRAMENTO CA 956
962-966............................. SAN FRANCISCO CA 962 SCHEME B
967-969............................. HONOLULU HI 967
------------------------------------------------------------------------
L004 Area Distribution Centers (ADCs)
[Text of current L101 with no change except revise footnote 2 as
follows:]
* * * * *
\2\ For Periodicals and Standard Mail (A) mailings of barcoded
flats.
* * * * *
[Delete current L201, L202, L203, L701, L702, L703, L704, L706, and
L707.]
L600 Standard Mail
L601 BMCs--Machinable Parcels
[Insert current L705 with no change in text.]
L602 BMCs--DBMC Rates
[Insert current L708 with no change in text.]
L800 Automation Rate Mailings
* * * * *
L804 AADCs--Letter-Size Mailings
[Text of current L804 with no change except revise footnote 2 as
follows:]
\2\ For Periodicals and Standard Mail (A) mailings.
L805 BMC/ASF Entry--Residual Periodicals and Standard Mail (A)
[Insert current L805 with no change in text.]
L806 Non-BMC/ASF Entry--Residual Periodicals and Standard Mail (A)
[Insert current L806 with no change in text.]
M Mail Preparation and Sortation
M000 General Preparation Standards
M010 Mailpiece Preparation
[Redesignate current M011 as M012, and add new M011 as follows:]
M011 General Preparation Standards
1.0 STANDARD PREPARATION TERMS AND DEFINITIONS
1.1 Presort
Presort is the process by which a mailer prepares mail so that it
is sorted to at least the finest extent required by the standards for
the rate claimed. Generally, presort is performed sequentially, from
the lowest (finest) level to the highest level, to those destinations
specified by standard and is completed at each level before the next
level is prepared. Not all presort levels are applicable in all
situations.
1.2 Presort Levels
Terms used for presort levels are defined as follows:
a. Firm: all pieces for delivery at the address shown on the top
piece.
b. Carrier route: all pieces for delivery to the same city carrier
route, rural route, highway contract route, post office box section, or
general delivery unit.
c. 5-digit: the delivery address on all pieces includes the same 5-
digit ZIP Code.
d. 3-digit: the ZIP Code in the delivery address on all pieces
begins with the same three digits (see L002 (Column A) or L801 as
applicable).
e. 3-digit/Scheme: the ZIP Code on the delivery address on all
pieces begins with one of the 3-digit prefixes processed by the USPS as
a single scheme (see L003) and that, subject to standard, may be
presorted together as a single group.
f. Entry SCF 3-digit(s): regardless of the volume of mail, a
separation is required for each 3-digit area in the SCF service area of
the entry facility.
g. SCF: the separation includes pieces for two or more 3-digit
areas served by the same SCF (see L002 (Column B) or L802 as
applicable), except that, where required or permitted by standard, mail
for only one 3-digit area may be correctly prepared in an SCF
separation when no mail for other 3-digit ZIP Code areas is available.
h. ADC/AADC/SDC: all pieces are addressed for delivery in the
service area of the same ADC, or AADC (see L004, L803, or L804 as
applicable).
i. ASF/BMC: all pieces are addressed for delivery in the service
area of the same ASF or BMC (see L601 or L602 as applicable).
[[Page 66660]]
j. Mixed (BMC, AADC, etc.): the pieces are for more than one
presort destination.
k. Where the terms are used, ``residual'' pieces/packages/sacks
means material left over after completion of a presort sequence.
Residual mail lacks the volume set by standard to require or allow
package or bundle preparation to a particular destination, and usually
does not qualify for a presort rate as a result. Residual mail is also
referred to as ``nonqualifying'' or ``working'' mail.
1.3 Preparation Instructions
For purposes of preparing mail:
a. ``Pieces'' refers to individually addressed mailpieces. This
definition also applies when ``pieces'' is used in eligibility
standards. Quantities indicated for optional or required sortations
always refer to pieces unless specifically excepted.
b. A ``full'' letter tray is one in which faced, upright pieces
fill the tray to its capacity whenever practical, but never less than
at least \3/4\ of its length. Each tray must be filled before filling
of the next tray is begun, with the contents in multiple trays being
relatively balanced. A tray with less mail can be prepared only if
less-than-full or overflow trays are allowed by the standards for the
rate claimed. Tray preparation is described in M033.
c. An ``overflow'' letter tray is one that is allowed by the
standards for the rate claimed to be less than full and contain any
quantity of pieces that could not be placed in full trays for the same
destination.
d. A ``full'' flat tray is one that is physically full. A specific
minimum volume is required (at least a single stack of mail lying flat
on the bottom of the tray and filling the tray to the bottom of the
handholds) before a tray is sufficiently filled to allow or require
preparation to the corresponding presort destination. When standards
require preparation of ``full'' trays, less-than-full trays that
contain more than the minimum volume for preparation must be filled
with additional available pieces, up to the reasonable capacity of the
tray.
e. A ``full'' sack is defined in the standards for the class and
rate claimed.
f. An ``entry [origin] 3-digit'' tray contains all mail (regardless
of quantity) for a 3-digit ZIP Code area within the SCF service area of
the facility at which a mailing is entered. If more than one 3-digit
area is served, as indicated in L002, a separate tray must be prepared
for each.
g. The ``required at (quantity)'' instruction means that the
particular unit must be prepared for the corresponding presort level
whenever the specified quantity of mail is reached or exceeded (e.g.,
required at 10 pieces). Packages, bundles, and containers may contain
more than the minimum quantity up to the applicable maximum physical
size. Subject to applicable rate eligibility standards, smaller
quantities may be prepared only if permitted. In some situations as
specified by standard, required preparation might apply only if the
mailer chooses to qualify for the corresponding rate.
h. The ``optional at (quantity)'' instruction means that the
particular unit may be prepared for the corresponding presort level
whenever the specified quantity of mail is reached or exceeded.
Packages, bundles, or containers may contain more than the minimum
quantity up to the applicable maximum physical size. Smaller quantities
may be prepared only if permitted by applicable rate eligibility
standards. Standards for quantities with which preparation is optional
are often followed standards for larger quantities with which
preparation is required.
i. ``Entry (facility)'' (or ``origin (facility)'') refers to the
USPS mail processing facility (e.g., BMC) that serves the post office
at which the mail is entered by the mailer. If the post office where
the mail is entered is not the one serving the mailer''s location
(e.g., for plant-verified drop shipment), the post office of entry
determines the ``entry'' facility. ``Entry SCF'' includes both single-
and multi-3-digit SCFs. ``Entry BMC'' includes subordinate ASFs unless
otherwise specified.
j. ``Smaller quantities not permitted'' or ``fewer pieces not
permitted'' disallows preparation of quantities of mail smaller than
that stated as the minimum required. However, as a general exception,
the last of more than one package, bundle, sack, or tray for a presort
destination may have less than the otherwise applicable minimum. Other
exceptions to minimum quantity criteria might be provided by the
standards for the rate claimed.
k. A ``package'' is a group of addressed pieces secured together as
a unit. The presort process considers the total number of pieces
available for the particular presort destination and assembles them
into groups meeting applicable volume and size standards. When the
standards applicable to the rate claimed require securing the pieces in
each group together, the result is a package. The term ``package'' does
not correctly apply to unsecured groups of pieces, e.g., those prepared
in trays and identified by separator cards. ``Package'' labels and
other ``package'' identification methods may be used for unsecured
groups of pieces as permitted by standard. Package preparation is
described in M020.
l. A ``bundle'' is a group of packages secured together as a unit
under the standards applicable to the rate claimed.
2.0 PRESORT ACCURACY VALIDATION AND EVALUATION (PAVE)
2.1 Basic Information
The Presort Accuracy, Validation, and Evaluation (PAVE) program is
a process designed in cooperation with the mailing industry to evaluate
presort software and determine its accuracy in sorting address files
according to DMM standards. PAVE is available only to software and
hardware manufacturers (i.e., companies that actually develop presort
software or manufacture presorting equipment). PAVE certification does
not guarantee acceptance of customer mail that was prepared using PAVE-
validated hardware/software.
2.2 Process
PAVE evaluates the accuracy of presort products by providing test
address files to vendors. Vendors process the test file(s) through
their presort software or hardware and return the resulting mailing
statement facsimile(s) and other presort documentation to the USPS
National Customer Support Center (NCSC). The NCSC evaluates the
answers. Each test file is evaluated for its accuracy of presort,
compliance with current DMM standards, accuracy of sack/tray/pallet tag
labels, and general acceptability of computer generated facsimiles of
mailing statements and other presort documentation. If the answers are
accurate the vendor''s presort product is validated for a 12-month
period or until the end of the current annual period.
2.3 Participation
To obtain detailed information on participation in PAVE, presort
product developers may request the PAVE Program Technical Guide from
the NCSC by calling 1-800-331-5746, extension 651 or 454. Participants
may use the PAVE order form, included in that guide, to order PAVE test
files.
M012 Endorsements and Markings
[In 1.1a, replace ``First-, third-, and fourth-class mail'' with
``First-Class or Standard Mail''; in 1.1b, replace ``second-class''
with ``Periodicals''; revise other text as follows:]
* * * * *
[[Page 66661]]
2.0 METHOD
2.1 Required Marking
Unless otherwise directed or allowed by standard, the required
marking must be printed or produced as part of, or immediately below or
to the left of, the permit imprint, meter impression or stamp, or
precanceled or adhesive stamp. Alternatively, the mailer may place
markings in the address area on the line immediately above the address
or, preferably, two lines above the address. If the marking is in the
address area, no other information may appear on the line with the rate
marking except carrier route information. Markings may also be included
in the optional endorsement line (under M013) or carrier route
information line (under M014).
* * * * *
2.3 Precanceled Stamps
If precanceled stamps bearing the words ``Carrier Route Presort''
are used, additional markings must be provided as required by the
standards for the particular rate claimed.
* * * * *
M013 Optional Endorsement Lines
[In 1.1, delete the entries for optional SDC, state, and mixed states
packages; in 1.2 and 2.1, replace ``[T]hird-[C]lass'' with ``Standard
Mail (A)''; in 2.6, delete ``fourth-class''; revise other text as
follows:]
1.0 USE
1.1 Basic Standards
Mailers may prepare mailings without applying pressure-sensitive
package labels to the top piece of packages by using a specific
optional endorsement line (OEL) above the address block or on the
address label on the top piece of a package as shown below. Use of OELs
on bundles is subject to the standards applicable to the rate claimed.
On FIRM PACKAGES use......................................... FIRM
12345
On CARRIER ROUTE PACKAGES
(Nonprofit Standard Mail, Regular and Preferred Periodicals) use
CAR-RT-SORT**C-001
On CARRIER ROUTE PACKAGES
(Enhanced Carrier Route Standard Mail) use................... ECR**C-
001
On CARRIER ROUTE PACKAGES
(Automation First-Class and Automation Standard Mail) use
................. AUTOCRRT**C-001
On 5-DIGIT PACKAGES use................................... 5-DIGIT
12345
On OPTIONAL CITY PACKAGES use.......................... MIXED CITY
12345
(Use lowest 5-digit ZIP Code assigned to that city.)
On 3-DIGIT PACKAGES use..................................... 3-DIGIT
771
On SCF PACKAGES use............................................. SCF
750
(Use correct 3-digit SCF code as shown in L002, Column B.)
On ADC PACKAGES use......................................... ALL FOR
ADC
On MIXED ADC PACKAGES use..................................... MIXED
ADC
On AADC PACKAGES use....................................... ALL FOR
AADC
On MIXED AADC PACKAGES use................................... MIXED
AADC
On RESIDUAL PACKAGES use........................................
WORKING
* * * * *
1.4 Rate Markings
At the mailer's option, the markings required by the standard for
the class of mail and rate claimed may be included in the OEL if the
OEL appears on each piece in the mailing and if it remains a single
line with the basic information (required by 1.1) at the right end
(e.g., on a carrier route package of Enhanced Carrier Route Saturation
Standard Mail: * * * * ECRWSS**C-001; on a Nonprofit Standard Mail SCF
package: * * * * NONPROFIT**SCF 750).
2.0 FORMAT
* * * * *
2.6 ZIP Code
Except for carrier route packages, ADC, AADC, mixed ADC, and mixed
AADC packages and AADC and (as applicable) working residual packages,
the optional endorsement line must include the appropriate ZIP Code
information. Mixed ADC bundles of bound printed matter must have facing
slips as specified in M630.
M014 Carrier Route Information Lines
1.0 BASIC INFORMATION
Packages made up to individual carrier routes, rural routes,
highway contract routes, post office box sections, or general delivery
units may be prepared without facing slips if prepared with optional
endorsement lines under M013 or with carrier route information lines
under 2.0. These standards apply to Automation First-Class, carrier
route and Level I/K Periodicals, Automation and Enhanced Carrier Route
Standard Mail, and carrier route bound printed matter mailings. Carrier
route information lines may be on all pieces in a carrier route mailing
regardless of their presort level.
2.0 FORMAT AND CONTENT
2.1 Route Information
Carrier route information consisting of a descriptive prefix (or
its abbreviation), plus a route number or numeric code, must be on the
top line of the address, either alone or with other information (e.g.,
addressee, account data). Alternatively, the carrier route information
may appear with the applicable carrier route endorsement on the line
above or two lines above the address if the carrier route rate marking
is in the address area when permitted by standard (see Exhibit 2.1).
**CARRIER ROUTE 011
RESIDENT
1300 WATERFORD DR
DISTRICT HEIGHTS MD 20747
**C 011
RESIDENT
1300 WATERFORD DR
ENDICOTT NY 13760
**RURAL ROUTE 005
RESIDENT
1602 COUNTRY LN
BURKE VA 22015
*R 15005
POSTAL CUSTOMER
**C 127
CAR-RT SORT
RESIDENT
2711 ORDWAY ST NW
WASHINGTON DC 20008
**C 011
AUTOCRRT
RESIDENT
1300 WATERFORD DR
DISTRICT HEIGHTS MD 20747
2.2 Descriptive Prefix
The descriptive prefix ``carrier route,'' ``rural route,''
``highway contract route,'' ``post office box section,'' or ``general
delivery unit'' must be spelled out or abbreviated as shown below:
Carrier Route.........................................................
C
General Delivery Unit.................................................
G
Highway Contract Route................................................
H
Post Office Box Section...............................................
B
Rural Route...........................................................
R
2.3 Route Code
These conditions apply to route codes:
a. The one-character descriptive prefix in 2.2 must be followed by
a 3-digit route or post office box section number.
b. On Periodicals and Standard Mail pieces bearing a simplified
address that does not include a ZIP Code, the descriptive prefix in 2.2
must be followed by a route code that begins with the last two digits
of the 5-digit ZIP Code and is followed by the route code in 2.3a.
c. The descriptive prefix and route code required for simplified
address mailings in 2.3b may also be used on mailings of any class that
contain a ZIP Code in the address.
[[Page 66662]]
2.4 Other Contents
Other elements of the carrier route information line include:
a. The carrier route information must be preceded by at least two
asterisks (**) or other distinctive nonalphabetic or nonnumeric
characters.
b. At least 10 spaces must be allowed for carrier route information
if included with other information on the top line.
c. Carrier route information lines may also contain the markings
required by standard for the class of mail and rate claimed if all the
information remains on a single line with the basic information
(required by 2.1) at the right end (e.g., on a carrier route package of
Enhanced Carrier Route Saturation rate mail):
* * * * * * * ECRWSS**C-001
POSTAL CUSTOMER
M020 Packages and Bundles
1.0 BASIC STANDARDS
[Relocate current 1.1, 1.4, 1.5, and 1.7 to M011; renumber current 1.2,
1.3, and 1.6 as 1.1, 1.2, and 1.3, respectively; revise renumbered 1.3,
and add new 1.4 as follows:]
* * * * *
1.3 Labeling
Unless excepted by standard, packages must be labeled using the
pressure-sensitive package labels specified in the standards for the
class and rate being prepared. On letter- and card-size mail, the label
must be placed in the lower left corner of the top piece in the
package. On flat-size mail, the label must be placed on the address
side of the top piece in the package. Optional endorsement lines may be
used in lieu of pressure-sensitive labels, subject to M013.
1.4 Palletization
Packages and bundles placed on pallets must be able to withstand
normal transit and handling without breakage or injury to USPS
employees. Heavy-gauge shrinkwrap over plastic banding, only
shrinkwrap, or only banding material is acceptable if the package or
bundle can stay together during normal processing. Packages and bundles
placed on BMC and mixed BMC pallets must be shrinkwrapped and
machinable on BMC parcel sorters; machinability is determined by the
USPS. If used, banding material must be applied at least once around
the length and once around the girth; wire and metal strapping are
prohibited.
1.5 Exception
Fewer than the minimum number of pieces required by the standards
for the rate claimed may be prepared as an individual package without
loss of rate eligibility in that regard under either of these
conditions:
a. A greater number of pieces would exceed the maximum physical
size for a package and the total number of pieces for that presort
destination meets the minimum volume standard (e.g., 30 pieces are
available to meet a 10-piece minimum, but a package of 8 pieces is 6
inches thick).
b. The pieces constitute the ``last package'' for a presort
destination and previously prepared packages met the applicable minimum
volume standard (e.g., 505 pieces prepared in ten 50-piece packages and
one 5-piece package).
2.0 ADDITIONAL STANDARDS--PREFERRED PERIODICALS AND NONPROFIT STANDARD
MAIL (A)
2.1 Nonautomation Rate Mailings
Nonautomation rate mailings are subject to these additional
standards:
a. The maximum thickness for packages of other than walk-sequence
rate letter-size mail is 6 inches. The maximum thickness for packages
of letter-size walk-sequence rate mail is 4 inches.
b. Packages of letter-size mail up to 1 inch thick must be secured
with appropriate banding applied around the girth. Thicker packages
must be secured with at least two bands, the first placed around the
length and the second around the girth so that the second band crosses
over the first.
c. When preparing mail bearing a simplified address, all pieces for
the same post office must be tied in packages of 50 whenever possible.
If packages of other quantities are produced, the actual number of
pieces must be shown on the facing slip that must be attached to show
distribution desired (e.g., rural route, city route, post office
boxholder).
2.2 Automation Rate Mailings
Automation rate mailings are subject to these additional standards:
a. The maximum thickness for packages of letter-size mail is 6
inches.
b. Packages must be prepared for mailings consisting entirely of
card-size pieces, and for mail placed in AADC trays (except for
residual AADC trays) and in mixed AADC trays (package-based mailings)
or overflow trays (tray-based mailings).
c. Packages must not be prepared in full trays in tray-based
mailings of larger than card-size pieces except in residual AADC and
mixed AADC trays and as permitted by standard for oversize pieces.
d. Packages must be secured with rubber bands, elastic strapping,
flat plastic strapping, or string placed once around the girth (narrow
dimension) on packages up to 1 inch thick. Thicker packages must be
tied twice, with the first rubber band or elastic strap placed around
the length and the second around the girth, crossing over the first.
Additional ties may be used if none lies along the outer 1 inch of any
package edge.
e. Elastic strapping must have a minimum strength of 15 pounds and
a minimum of 150% elongation prior to break. Minimum tension, when
applied to bundle, must be 50% breaking strength. Elastic strapping may
not be used unless approved by USPS Engineering. A mailer wanting to
have elastic strapping material tested for acceptability must provide
25 packages (five each: 6 inches, 4 inches, 2 inches, 1 inch, and 10
pieces) strapped with the tested material. The mailer must send the
material with a letter of request at least 6 weeks before the planned
date of mailing to USPS Engineering. The mailer is notified in writing
by the USPS. If the USPS approves the material, that letter (showing a
unique number) serves as evidence that the material meets USPS
standards. A copy of the letter must be attached to each mailing
statement provided for mailings that use the tested strapping material.
The mailer must be able to show when requested that the strapping
material on a mailing is the same as that tested.
f. Separator cards:
(1) May be used instead of packaging (except for card-size pieces)
to identify groups of pieces in 3-digit and SCF trays in package-based
mailings.
(2) May be prepared from any paper or card stock.
(3) Must be at least \1/4\ inch higher than the highest piece in
the mailing.
(4) Must be placed in front of the corresponding groups of mail.
g. Except in package-based mailings under M895, if groups of
presorted pieces are identified by separator cards, the required
pressure-sensitive package label must be placed on the separator card
or in the lower left-hand corner of the first piece behind it.
Alternatively, the words ``5-Digit'' or ``3-Digit,'' as appropriate for
the group, may appear on the separator card. The pressure-sensitive
label or the descriptive words (if placed on the separator card) must
be at the top of each in a position that can be easily read when the
card is in a tray.
[[Page 66663]]
h. In three-tier package-based Barcoded rate mailings under M895,
pieces in AADC overflow trays must be secured into 5-digit packages in
the 5-digit presort tier, and 3-digit packages in the 3-digit presort
tier. These packages require no labeling.
i. In tray-based mailings, pieces in 5-digit overflow trays must be
secured into and labeled as 5-digit packages. Pieces in 3-digit
overflow trays and SCF overflow trays must be secured into and labeled
as 3-digit packages.
3.0 ADDITIONAL STANDARDS--FIRST-CLASS MAIL AND OTHER PERIODICALS AND
STANDARD MAIL (A)
3.1 Cards and Letter-Size Pieces
Cards and letter-size pieces are subject to these specific
packaging standards:
a. The maximum thickness for packages of walk-sequence rate mail is
4 inches. The maximum thickness for other packages is 6 inches.
b. Card-size pieces must always be prepared in packages.
c. Packages must be prepared in all less-than-full trays, and for
nonupgradable Retail First-Class and Regular Standard Mail, and for
nonautomation-compatible Publications Service and other than Barcoded
rate Regular Periodicals.
d. Separator cards may be used instead of packaging for carrier
route groups in full Enhanced Carrier Route 5-digit carrier routes
trays. Separator cards must be used instead of packaging for carrier
route groups in full trays of Automation Carrier Route First-Class and
Standard Mail, and in full trays of Barcoded rate Regular Periodicals.
Separator cards must be prepared from paper or card stock, must be at
least \1/4\ inch higher than the highest piece in the mailing, and must
be placed in front of the corresponding groups of mail.
e. For card-size pieces and mail in less-than-full trays, packages
of letter-size pieces of Automation First-Class and Automation Standard
Mail, automation-compatible Publications Service and Barcoded rate
Regular Periodicals, and upgradable Retail First-Class and Regular
Standard Mail must be secured with rubber bands. Other packages of
letter-size pieces must be secured with rubber bands, elastic
strapping, flat plastic strapping, or string. (Elastic strapping must
have a minimum strength of 15 pounds and a minimum of 150% elongation
prior to breaking. Minimum tension, when applied to bundle, must be 50%
breaking strength. Elastic strapping may not be used unless approved by
USPS Engineering. If requested, the mailer must be able to show such
approval for the strapping material used for a mailing.)
3.2 Flat-Size Pieces
Flat-size pieces are subject to these specific packaging standards:
a. Though not subject to a specific thickness limit, packages of
flats must be secure and stable, and are subject to specific weight
limits if palletized.
b. Flat-size pieces must always be prepared in packages unless
excepted by standard.
3.3 All Pieces
All pieces are subject to these standards:
a. For mail prepared using a simplified address, all pieces for the
same post office must be tied in packages of 50 when possible. If
packages of other quantities are produced, the actual number of pieces
must be shown on the facing slip that must be attached to show
distribution desired (e.g., rural route, city route, post office
boxholder).
b. One package containing fewer than the otherwise applicable
minimum number of pieces may be prepared when it represents the last
package for a presort destination to which other packages (each
containing at least the minimum volume required) were previously
prepared in the same mailing.
c. Packages up to 1 inch thick must be secured with appropriate
banding placed once around the girth (narrow dimension). Thicker
packages must be secured with at least two bands, the first placed
around the length and the second around the girth so that the second
band crosses over the first. Additional ties may be used if none lies
along the outer 1 inch of any package edge.
* * * * *
[Delete current 5.0 and 6.0.]
M030 Container Preparation
M031 Labels
[In 1.7 and 4.13, replace ``second-class'' in the heading and text with
``Periodicals'' and replace ``2C'' with ``PERIOD''; in 2.1a, replace
``First-, third-, and fourth-class'' with ``First-Class and Standard
Mail'' and replace ``second-class'' with ``Periodicals''; in 3.2a,
replace ``First- and third-class'' with ``First-Class and Standard
Mail'' and replace ``second-class'' with ``Periodicals''; in 4.2,
replace ``second-class'' with ``Periodicals'' and replace ``third- or
fourth-class'' with ``Standard Mail''; in 4.8, insert ``(Preferred
Periodicals only)'' after ``optional city,'' replace ``second-class''
with ``Periodicals,'' and replace ``third-class'' with ``Standard
Mail''; in 4.14, replace ``second-class'' with ``Periodicals''; in 5.0,
replace ``First- and third-class'' with ``First-Class and Standard Mail
(A),'' replace ``second- or third-class'' with ``Periodicals or
Standard Mail (A),'' replace ``First-, second-, and third-class'' with
``First-Class, Periodicals, and Standard Mail (A),'' replace ``third-
class'' with ``Standard Mail (A),'' and replace ``[T]hird- and fourth-
class'' with ``Standard Mail''; no other change in text.]
M032 Barcoded Container Labels
1.0 BARCODED TRAY LABELS
1.1 Standards
Barcoded tray labels are required for Automation First-Class,
automation-compatible Publications Service Periodicals, and Automation
Standard Mail mailings of letter-size pieces, and Automation First-
Class mailings of flat-size pieces. Barcoded trays labels may be used
on any other mailing. Mailer-produced barcoded tray labels must meet
the standards below.
* * * * *
[In 1.2, replace ``First- and third-class mail'' with ``First-Class and
Standard Mail (A)'' and replace ``second-class'' with ``Periodicals.'']
* * * * *
Exhibit 1.3c, Contents Identifier Codes
[Replace ``2C'' with ``PERIOD''; replace ``3C'' with ``STD A''; and
replace ``4C'' with ``STD B.'']
* * * * *
2.0 BARCODED SACK LABELS
[Replace current 2.1 and 2.2 with new 2.1, below, and renumber current
2.3 through 2.5 as 2.2 through 2.4, respectively; in renumbered 2.2,
replace ``First-, third-, and fourth-class mail'' with ``First-Class
and Standard Mail'' and replace ``second-class'' with ``Periodicals'';
in renumbered 2.4e, change the reference from 2.5d to 2.4d; in
renumbered 2.4f, replace ``200 (2C)'' with ``200 (PERIOD).'']
2.1 Standards
Barcoded sack labels are required for Barcoded rate Regular and
automation-compatible Publications Service Periodicals and Automation
Standard Mail flat-size pieces prepared in sacks. Barcoded sack labels
may be used for other Periodicals and Standard Mail prepared in sacks.
Mailer-produced
[[Page 66664]]
barcoded tray labels must meet the standards below.
* * * * *
M033 Sacks and Trays
1.0 BASIC STANDARDS
1.1 Total Weight
The total weight of any tray or sack (mail plus tray or sack tare)
must not exceed 70 pounds.
1.2 Equipment
Palletization of trays or sacks, or of packages of flats outside of
sacks, is subject to M040. Preparation of bedloaded bundles of flats is
subject to the standards for the class and rate claimed. Other mailings
must be prepared in the container appropriate for the processing
category and rate of the mail:
a. First-Class, Regular and Publications Service Periodicals, and
Regular, Enhanced Carrier Route, and Automation Standard Mail (A)
letter-size pieces (including cards) must be prepared in USPS letter
trays with sleeves. Subject to equipment availability, 1- or 2-foot
regular (MM) or 2-foot extended (EMM) letter trays must be used as
appropriate for the size and volume of pieces. Letter trays may be used
for other letter-size mail, subject to the applicable preparation
standards.
b. First-Class flat-size pieces must be prepared in USPS flat trays
with covers.
c. First-Class parcels weighing less than 11 ounces must be
prepared in green USPS sacks.
d. Priority Mail must be prepared in orange USPS sacks.
e. Periodicals flat-size pieces, machinable and irregular parcels,
and letter-size pieces not placed in trays at the mailer's option must
be prepared in brown USPS sacks.
f. Standard Mail flat-size pieces, machinable and irregular
parcels, and Nonprofit Standard Mail letter-size pieces not placed in
trays at the mailer's option must be prepared in white canvas USPS
sacks.
1.3 Tray Sizes
Standard tray sizes to be used in applying mail preparation
standards are:
a. Letter trays: Inside bottom length:
(1) 2-foot MM and EMM trays: 21 inches.
(2) 1-foot trays: 10\1/2\ inches.
b. Flat trays:
(1) Inside bottom dimensions: 14\3/4\ inches long by 10\3/4\ inches
wide.
(2) Height: 8 inches to bottom of handhold, 11\1/4\ to top of tray.
1.4 Presort
Presort, presort levels, and standard preparation terms are defined
in M011, except for Preferred Periodicals and Nonprofit Standard Mail
(A), which are covered in 3.0 and 4.0.
1.5 Sleeving and Strapping
Except under 1.6, each letter tray must be sleeved, and each flat
tray must be covered by a lid, using USPS-provided sleeves or lids. All
bedloaded letter trays must also be secured by a plastic strap placed
tightly around the length of the tray without crushing the tray or
sleeve. Flat trays must be secured by two straps placed tightly around
the width of the tray (i.e., the shorter dimension).
1.6 Exception
Trays do not require sleeves/lids or strapping if their contents
are emptied and processed in the facility where deposited and that
facility's manager has given the mailer a written waiver of one or both
requirements. Strapping is not required on trays placed on 5-digit, 3-
digit, and SCF pallets.
[Renumber current 2.0 and 3.0 as 3.0 and 4.0, respectively, and revise
as shown below. Insert new 2.0 as follows:]
2.0 FIRST-CLASS, REGULAR AND PUBLICATIONS SERVICE PERIODICALS, AND
REGULAR, ENHANCED CARRIER ROUTE, AND AUTOMATION STANDARD MAIL
2.1 Letter Tray Preparation
Pieces must be prepared to result in the fewest practical number of
packages (where required) and trays to contain the mail presorted to a
destination. Letter tray preparation uses terms defined in M011 and is
subject to these further standards:
a. Pieces must be ``faced'' with all addresses in the same
direction and placed in trays to maintain their orientation.
b. Each tray must be filled before filling of the next tray is
begun, with the contents in multiple trays being relatively balanced. A
tray with less mail can be prepared only if allowed by the standards
for the rate claimed, subject to 2.1c. Subject to equipment
availability, 2-foot trays must be used whenever available with 1-foot
trays used for lesser volume or as overflow trays under 2.1c.
c. Subject to the standards for the rate claimed, pieces left over
after filling one or more trays for a presort destination are packaged
and placed in a less-than-full ``overflow'' tray. Where permitted,
preparation of overflow trays is required for required presort levels
and optional for optional levels. Only one overflow tray per
destination may be prepared in the same mailing. As a general
exception, an overflow tray may be prepared where otherwise not allowed
if the minimum number of pieces required by rate eligibility standards
for the corresponding presort level is available but exceeds the
capacity of a 2-foot tray (e.g., 150 pieces to a 5-digit destination
are available to qualify for a 5-digit rate).
d. Subject to availability, standard MM trays are used for all
letter-size mail, except that extended MM (EMM) trays must be used when
available for letter-size mail more than 4\1/2\ inches high or 10\1/2\
inches long. When EMM trays are not available, pieces higher or wider
than MM trays must be angled back and/or placed upright perpendicular
to the length of the tray in row(s), as necessary, in a manner that
preserves their orientation.
e. Each tray must bear the correct tray label.
f. Each tray must be sleeved and strapped under 1.4 and 1.5.
2.2 Flat Tray Preparation (First-Class Mail Only)
All flat tray preparation is subject to these standards:
a. Pieces must be ``faced'' with all addresses in the same
direction and placed in trays to maintain their orientation.
b. Once the required minimum volume is reached, additional pieces
must be placed in the same tray up to its capacity to minimize the
number of trays used. When possible, pieces must be placed in two
stacks to optimize tray use, but mail must not overfill the tray to
inhibit adequate closure or covering of the contents. The total weight
of a tray and its contents must not exceed 70 pounds.
c. Each tray must bear the correct tray label.
d. Each tray must be sleeved and strapped under 1.4 and 1.5.
2.3 Sack Preparation
All sack preparation is subject to these standards:
a. Each sack must bear the correct sack label.
b. The weight of a sack and its contents must not exceed 70 pounds.
3.0 NONAUTOMATION PREFERRED PERIODICALS AND NONPROFIT STANDARD MAIL
[Text of current 2.0.]
4.0 AUTOMATION RATE PREFERRED PERIODICALS AND NONPROFIT STANDARD MAIL
[Text of current 3.0.]
M040 Palletization
[M040 as shown below is revised based on a recently concluded separate
[[Page 66665]]
rulemaking, and reorganized to consolidate and replace current M042,
M043, M044, and M048 into new M045.]
M041 General Pallet Standards
1.0 PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS
1.1 Standards
All pallets presented to the USPS, whether USPS- or mailer-
provided, must meet the standards in 1.2 through 1.4. Mail on such
pallets must meet the standards applicable to the class and rate
claimed.
1.2 Construction
Pallets must be made of high-quality material that can hold loads
equal to a gross weight of 2,200 pounds. Pallets must measure 48 by 40
inches and must allow for four-way entry by fork trucks and two-way
entry by pallet jacks.
1.3 Securing
Except for pallet boxes under 4.3, loaded pallets of mail must be
secured either with at least two straps or bands or wrapped with
stretchable or shrinkable plastic strong enough to retain the integrity
of the pallets during transportation and handling.
1.4 Nonconforming Mailers
The USPS informs mailers or their agents who present palletized
mailings, including plant-verified drop shipment (PVDS), when their
pallets fail to meet basic pallet integrity and safety standards. After
July 1, 1996, once notified and allowed to make changes to improve load
integrity, if a mailer's methods, or those of the mailer's agent
presenting PVDS mailings, do not work, the mailer is considered
nonconforming. A nonconforming mailer is required to meet the
specifications for nonconforming mailers for top-cap use, stacking of
pallets, pallet box construction, and maximum height/tiers of trays in
2.0 through 4.0. After July 1, 1996, mailers will be suspended from the
pallet program if their pallets continue to fail to meet the minimum
load integrity levels.
2.0 TOP CAPS
2.1 Use
Top caps are used as follows:
a. Except under 2.1b and 2.1c, all pallets of sacks, letter mail
trays, parcels, packages or bundles of mail, or pallet boxes must be
top-capped if the pallets are double- or triple-stacked when presented
to the USPS for acceptance.
b. The top pallet need not be top-capped if the strapping or
banding securing the stacked pallets together neither damages the mail
on the top pallet nor allows the stack to shift.
c. Lower pallet(s) containing either parcels or packages or bundles
of mail, need not be top-capped if the top surface of each pallet load
provides a sturdy, flat surface, parallel to the pallet base, that
allows for safe and efficient stacking of pallets placed on top,
preventing sliding of the top pallet(s), damage to pieces, and crushing
of the load.
2.2 Construction
Any material may be used as a top cap if it provides a flat, level
surface horizontal to the base pallet, protects the integrity of the
mail below it while supporting a loaded pallet above it, and allows
easy entry of a forklift to remove the upper pallet(s). Flimsy paper or
fiberboard (e.g., the ends of paper rolls) or similar material is
inadequate and may not be used as a top cap.
2.3 Securing
A top cap must be secured to the pallet horizontal to the plane of
the base pallet, either by stretchwrap or by at least two crossed
straps or bands, so that the cap stays in place to protect the mail and
maintain the integrity of the pallet load.
2.4 Required Use by Nonconforming Mailers
Nonconforming mailers (see 1.4) must use top caps on all pallets of
sacks, letter mail trays, parcels, or packages or bundles of mail,
regardless of weight, or on pallets containing pallet boxes 60 inches
or less in height. Top caps must be approximately 48 by 40 inches and
meet one of these construction standards:
a. Five-wood boards, with uniform edges and nine-leg pallet contact
for stacking.
b. Fiberboard box end style, with a minimum 3-inch side and wall
material of at least double-wall corrugated fiberboard C and/or B
flute.
c. Fiberboard honeycomb covered on both sides with heavy linerboard
at least \1/2\ inch thick.
d. Corrugated fiberboard C flute sheet covering the entire top of
the load with standard pallet solid fiberboard corner edge protectors.
3.0 STACKING PALLETS
3.1 Double- or Triple-Stacking
Pallets may be double- or triple-stacked if:
a. The combined gross weight of the stacked pallets (pallets, caps,
and mail) does not exceed 2,200 pounds.
b. The heaviest pallet is on the bottom and the lightest on top.
c. The pallets are secured together with at least two straps or
bands of appropriate material to maintain their integrity during
transportation and handling (pallets must not be secured together with
stretchable or shrinkable plastic).
d. Each pallet is top-capped under 2.0.
e. The combined height of the stacked pallets and their loads does
not exceed 84 inches.
3.2 Nonconforming Mailers
Nonconforming mailers (see 1.4) who stack pallets are subject to
the conditions in 3.1, except that triple-stacking is allowed only for
pallets of parcels and the combined height of any stacked pallets may
not exceed 77 inches.
4.0 PALLET BOXES
4.1 Use
Mailers may use pallet boxes constructed of single-, double-, or
triple-wall corrugated fiberboard placed on pallets to hold sacks or
parcels prepared under M045. Single-wall corrugated fiberboard may be
used only for light loads (such as light-weight parcels) that do not
require transportation by the USPS beyond the entry office. The boxes
must protect the mail and maintain the integrity of the pallet loads
throughout transportation, handling, and processing. The base of the
boxes must measure approximately 40 by 48 inches.
4.2 Maximum Height
The combined height of the pallet, pallet box, and mail may not
exceed 77 inches, except that until July 1, 1996, the combined height
may not exceed 84 inches. The contents of the box may not extend above
the top rim of the box.
4.3 Securing
Pallet boxes must be secured to pallets with strapping, banding,
stretchable plastic, shrinkwrap, or other material that ensures that
the pallet can be safely unloaded from vehicles, transported, and
processed as a single unit to the point where the contents are
distributed with the load intact if:
a. The pallet and its contents are transported by the USPS from the
office where the mail is accepted to another postal facility where the
contents will be distributed.
b. The weight of the mail in the box is not sufficient to hold the
box in place on the pallet during transportation and processing, a
pallet box must be secured to the pallet base.
[[Page 66666]]
4.4 Nonconforming Mailers
Nonconforming mailers (see 1.4) may use pallet boxes only if
constructed of triple-wall corrugated fiberboard (C and/or B flute
material) with a maximum height of 77 inches.
5.0 PREPARATION
5.1 Presort
Pallet preparation and pallet sortation are subject to the specific
standards in M045. Pallet sortation is intended to presort the
palletized portion of a mailing to at least the finest extent required
for the corresponding class of mail and method of preparation.
Generally, pallet sortation is sequential from the lowest (finest)
level to the highest, and must be completed at each required level
before the next optional or required level is prepared. As applicable,
presort levels and standard preparation terms for pallets are defined
in M011 and M045. Mailers must prepare all required levels of pallets
before any working pallet is prepared for a mailing or job.
5.2 Required Preparation
Pallets are prepared as follows:
a. A pallet must be prepared to a required level of sortation when
there are 500 pounds of Periodicals or Standard Mail packages, sacks,
or parcels or six layers of Periodicals or Standard Mail (A) letter
trays.
b. Up to 10 percent of the total pallets in any mailing or job may
be working pallets labeled to the BMC (Standard Mail) or ADC
(Periodicals) serving the post office where mailings are accepted into
the mailstream. The processing and distribution manager of that
facility may issue a written authorization to the mailer to label
working pallets to the post office or processing and distribution
center serving the post office where mailings are entered. Working
pallets contain all mail remaining after required and optional pallets
are prepared.
5.3 Minimum Load
In a single mailing, the minimum load per pallet is 250 pounds of
Periodicals or Standard Mail packages, parcels, and sacks (or three
tiers/layers of letter trays of Periodicals or Standard Mail (A)),
except that the processing and distribution manager of the facility
where a mailing is entered may issue a written authorization to the
mailer allowing preparation of 5- or 3-digit pallets containing less
volume if the mail on those pallets is for that facility's service
area.
5.4 Maximum Load
The maximum weight (mail and pallet) is 2,200 pounds. The maximum
height of a single pallet (mail and pallet) is 77 inches for packages,
bundles, parcels, sacks, or pallet boxes or 12 layers of letter trays.
5.5 Mail on Pallets
Pieces in trays, packages, bundles, and sacks must be prepared
under the standards applicable to the class of mail and rate claimed.
When two or more Periodicals or Standard Mail (A) mailings are placed
together on pallets, the mailer must maintain records for each mailing
as required by standard. Automation rate and upgradable letter-size
pieces may not be placed on the same 5-digit pallet as pieces at other
rates. Trays always may be placed on pallets ``right-side-up'' with
heavier, more filled trays at the bottom of the load.
5.6 Sacked Mail
Mail that is not palletized must be prepared under the standards
applicable to the rate claimed. For Periodicals, mailers must
separately sack packages of each publication that are not palletized
under M045 or that are excluded from palletization. Trays that are not
palletized must be bedloaded. Sacks (including sacks of packages not
placed on pallets) containing packages remaining after all pallets are
prepared may be presented with the palletized mail (and reported on the
same mailing statement) if separated from the palletized portion of the
mailing.
5.7 Nonconforming Mailers
For nonconforming mailers (see 1.4) of letter-size mail in trays,
the combined height of a pallet and its load must not exceed six layers
of MM or EMM letter trays.
6.0 COPALLETIZED, COMBINED, OR MIXED-RATE LEVEL MAILINGS
6.1 General
Palletized mailings, including combined, copalletized, and mixed
rate level mailings, must be prepared according to the standards
applicable to the class of mail, subject to specific authorization by
the RCSC serving the mailing post office when required.
6.2 Application
The mailer (or publisher or agent) must submit a written request to
the RCSC serving the mailing post office to present the types of
pallets described in 6.1. A separate request is required for each type
of pallet at each location, but multiple, concurrent applications are
acceptable. A mailer who cannot meet the minimum palletization
standards without copalletizing, combining, or commingling mixed rate
mailings might still qualify if the total copalletized, combined, or
commingled mailing meets minimum pallet standards. The request must be
received at least 30 days before the first mailing and include the
names, addresses, and telephone numbers of the owner of the mail and of
the firm or person preparing the mail; a description of the mailing
(e.g., size, weight, class, rate, volume, mailing frequency, and
postage payment method); the type of authorization requested; and a
sample of the applicable documentation required in M045.
6.3 Periodicals Publications
To combine more than one Periodicals publication on pallets, the
mailer must merge and presort copies of all the publications into
common packages to achieve the finest level of presort for the mailing.
To copalletize different Periodicals flat-size publications, the mailer
must consolidate on pallets all independently presorted packages for
each publication to achieve the finest level of presort for the
mailing. Both combining and copalletizing publications must be
supported by the documentation required in M045. Preferred Periodicals
may not be combined with Regular or Publications Service Periodicals.
6.4 Standard Mail (A)
To combine mixed rate level Nonprofit Standard Mail (A) on pallets
(i.e., 3/5 and Carrier Route), the mailer must be an authorized plant
load mailer or an authorized plant-verified drop shipment (PVDS) mailer
with on-site postal verification; must attach to the written request to
the RCSC either a copy of an approved Form 3815 showing the mailer's
authority to plant load or the USPS authorization for PVDS with on-site
verification, as applicable; and must consolidate on pallets all
independently prepared packages to achieve the finest level of presort
for the mailing. To copalletize different Standard Mail (A) flat-size
mailings, the mailer must consolidate on pallets all independently
presorted packages from each mailing to achieve the finest level of
presort for the mailing, and must present computer-generated listings
at the time of mailing that include a summary list consolidating the
copalletized multiple mailings and a list of the contents of each
pallet by ZIP Code and presort level.
[[Page 66667]]
6.5 Cancellation
An authorization may be canceled by the USPS if the mailer does not
meet the standards for pallets or the rates claimed or the mailer does
not submit information on future mailings as requested by the RCSC.
Mailers may appeal canceled authorizations under G020.
M045 Preparing Mail on Pallets
1.0 BASIC USES
Mailers may prepare these types of mail on pallets:
a. Letter-size mail in trays.
b. Packages or bundles not prepared in sacks.
c. Packages or parcels in sacks.
d. Machinable or irregular parcels.
e. Copalletized multiple flat-size mailings (subject to M041).
f. Combined mailings of machinable parcels (Standard Mail (A) and
(B)) under M073.
g. Two or more Periodicals publications combined or copalletized
(subject to M041).
h. Combined mailings of Nonprofit Standard Mail mixed rate levels
(subject to M041).
i. Commingled zone-rated Standard Mail (subject to M630).
2.0 PACKAGES
2.1 Standards
Package presort and labeling must meet the applicable general
standards in M010 through M030, except as noted below. The palletized
portion of a mailing may not include packages sorted to foreign
destinations.
2.2 Size--Periodicals
Package size: Six-piece minimum, 20-pound maximum, except that:
a. Firm packages may contain as few as two copies of a publication
and do not have to be consolidated into bundles with other packages to
the same 5-digit destination. A firm ``package'' may be one piece for
presort (see M210 and M290).
b. All pieces for the same presort destination must be in one
package if they weigh less than 10 pounds. Ten pounds or more of mail
for a destination must be prepared in packages that weigh from 10 to 20
pounds each.
c. The last package to a presort destination may contain less than
10 pounds of mail.
d. All palletized packages of copalletized publications must
contain at least six pieces.
2.3 Size--Standard Mail (A)
Package size: 10-piece minimum, 20-pound maximum, except that:
a. All pieces for the same presort destination must be in one
package if they weigh less than 10 pounds. Ten pounds or more of mail
for a destination must be prepared in packages that weigh from 10 to 20
pounds each.
b. The last package to a presort destination may contain less than
10 pounds of mail.
2.4 Size--Standard Mail (B)
Package size: 10-pound or 1,000-cubic-inch minimum (whichever
occurs first), 40-pound maximum, except that:
a. All pieces for a presort destination must be in one package if
they weigh less than 10 pounds. Ten pounds or more of mail for a
destination must be prepared in packages that weigh from 10 to 40
pounds each.
b. The last package to a presort destination may contain less than
10 pounds of mail.
c. Packages must be prepared to carrier route sortations if the
carrier route bulk bound printed matter rate is claimed. Mail at other
rates must be sorted to 5- and 3-digit destinations.
d. Smaller size packages of any copies remaining may be prepared to
the levels noted in 2.4c after all required volume or larger packages
are prepared. These smaller packages must be properly labeled and
placed on an appropriate level pallet.
2.5 Labels
When pressure-sensitive labels are used, a red Label D must appear
on 5-digit packages if the copies in those packages show carrier route
information.
2.6 Residual
After all required and optional packages are prepared, remaining
copies may be made into a residual package, properly labeled and placed
on an appropriate level pallet.
3.0 OPTIONAL BUNDLES--PERIODICALS AND STANDARD MAIL (A)
3.1 Standards
Bundle presort and labeling must meet the applicable general
standards in M010 through M030, except as noted below. The palletized
portion of a mailing may not include bundles sorted to foreign
destinations.
3.2 Size
Bundle size: Two-package minimum, 20-pound maximum. Exception: For
copalletized publications or products, bundles may contain 40 pounds of
mail.
3.3 Sortation
Sortation is in the same sequence as sacks.
3.4 Labeling
Labeling of bundles is not required except for:
a. Bundles containing packages for levels of sortation finer than
the bundle destination. These bundles must have a facing slip with
Lines 1 and 2 prepared as required for sacks.
b. Bundles of Standard Mail (A) (other than carrier route and 5-
digit bundles) placed on BMC pallets. These bundles containing packages
for levels of sortation finer than the bundle destination must have a
facing slip with Lines 1 and 2 prepared as required for sacks. The
facing slip must completely cover the address and package label on the
top piece in the bundle.
4.0 PALLET PRESORT AND LABELING
4.1 Packages, Bundles, Sacks, or Trays
Presort sequence and labeling:
a. 5-digit (required for packages, bundles, and sacks, optional for
trays); use destination of contents for Line 1.
b. 3-digit (optional); use L002, Column A, for Line 1.
c. SCF (required); use L002, Column B, for Line 1.
d. As appropriate:
(1) Periodicals: ADC (required); use L004 for Line 1.
(2) Standard Mail: As appropriate, (a) Destination ASF (allowed and
required only if DBMC rate is claimed for mail deposited at ASF); use
L602 for Line 1; or (b) Destination BMC (required); use L601 (L602 if
DBMC rate claimed) for Line 1.
e. As appropriate:
(1) Periodicals: Mixed ADC (optional); use L004 for Line 1, based
on ZIP Code of entry office (in ``Destination ZIP Codes'' column)
(label to plant serving entry post office if authorized by processing
and distribution manager).
(2) Standard Mail: Mixed BMC (optional); use L601 for Line 1, based
on ZIP Code of entry office (in ``Destination ZIP Codes'' column)
(label to plant serving entry post office if authorized by processing
and distribution manager).
4.2 Machinable Parcels--Standard Mail
Presort sequence and labeling:
a. 5-digit (optional, but required for Standard Mail (A) \3/5\ rate
and Standard Mail (B) only); use destination of parcels for Line 1.
b. ASF (allowed and required only if DBMC rate is claimed for mail
deposited at ASF); use L602 for Line 1.
[[Page 66668]]
c. Destination BMC (required); use L601 (L602 if DBMC rate claimed)
for Line 1.
d. Mixed BMC (optional); use L601 for Line 1, based on ZIP Code of
entry office (in ``Destination ZIP Codes'' column).
4.3 Presorted Special Standard Mail
a. 5-digit (5-digit rate only; required); use destination of pieces
or packages for Line 1.
b. Destination BMC (BMC rate only; required); use L601 for Line 1.
4.4 Line 2
Line 2, class of mail (shown below, as appropriate), processing
category and mail type (e.g., LTRS BC), and any processing code
required by the applicable labeling list under 4.1 through 4.3:
a. Periodicals: PERIOD or NEWS (as appropriate).
b. Standard Mail (A): STD 3C.
c. Standard Mail (B): STD 4C.
5.0 PALLETS OF PACKAGES, BUNDLES, AND TRAYS OF LETTER-SIZE MAIL
5.1 Periodicals
When two or more letter-size publications are part of a combined
mailing, the mailer must keep records for each mailing (publication) as
required by standard. Preferred Periodicals may be combined with
Regular or Publications Service Periodicals only as permitted by
standard. Pieces claimed at delivery office rates do not require
separation from pieces claimed at other rates.
5.2 Standard Mail (A)
Nonprofit mail may be included in the same mailing or palletized on
the same pallet as other Standard Mail (A) only as permitted by
standard. Automation rate and upgradable letter-size pieces may not be
placed on the same 5-digit pallet as pieces at other rates. Pieces
claimed at destination delivery unit (DDU) rates do not require
separation from pieces claimed at other rates.
5.3 BMC Pallets
Packages and bundles placed on BMC pallets must be machinable on
BMC parcel sorting equipment. Line 2 on pallet labels must reflect the
processing category of the pieces. A BMC pallet may include pieces that
are eligible for the DBMC rate and others that are ineligible if the
mailer provides documentation showing the pieces that qualify for the
DBMC rate.
5.4 Commingled Zones
Pieces of Standard Mail (B) for different zones may be commingled
only under M630.
5.5 Securing Trays
Trays must be sleeved and strapped under M033, except that
strapping is not required for trays on 5-digit, 3-digit, and SCF
pallets, or on pallets whose loads are secured with stretchable or
shrinkable plastic wrap
6.0 PALLETS OF SACKS
All sacks remaining after all pallets are prepared may be presented
with the palletized mailing (on the same mailing statement), if the
sacks are segregated from the palletized portion of the mailing.
7.0 PALLETS OF COPALLETIZED PERIODICALS OR STANDARD MAIL (A) FLAT-SIZE
PIECES
7.1 Basic Standards
Copalletized flat-size mailings must meet the standards in M041 and
in 1.0 through 5.0, and those below. Any combination of automation rate
mailings and nonautomation rate mailings is subject to the restrictions
in 5.0. Packages in a copalletized mailing qualify for the appropriate
presort level rate, regardless of the pallet level on which they are
placed.
7.2 Periodicals
Additional standards apply to Periodicals:
a. Preferred Periodicals may be combined with Regular or
Publications Service Periodicals only as permitted by standard.
b. Documentation meeting the basic standard in P012 must be
provided with each mailing. Before copalletizing, the mailer must
obtain the written approval of the RCSC manager. Approval is based on
the mailer''s demonstrated ability to provide documentation meeting
these standards:
(1) Documentation by package and by publication and edition showing
the number of pieces and copies in each package and the per piece
presort rate claimed for each piece in each package, or a listing by
pallet showing (by presort level (rate) and destination) the number of
copies and pieces of each publication and edition.
(2) Documentation showing the number of copies and pieces claimed
at the intra-SCF rate.
(3) Documentation showing that packages of all publications and
editions are presorted to the appropriate finest level pallet in the
mailing.
(4) Documentation showing that 5-digit, optional 3-digit, SCF, and
ADC pallets are prepared when the applicable minimum volume is
developed in the copalletized mailing for these destinations.
(5) A listing showing the destination of pallets in the
copalletized mailing.
(6) If the sacked portion of the mailing is presented with the
copalletized portion, a report by sack showing the number of pieces
(and copies) of each publication or edition at each presort level
(rate).
7.3 Standard Mail (A)
Additional standards apply to Standard Mail (A):
a. Nonprofit Standard mailings may be copalletized with one another
but not with mailings at other rates unless permitted by standard.
b. Nonidentical-weight pieces may be copalletized only if the
correct postage is affixed to each piece or if otherwise authorized by
the RCSC.
c. All pieces in mailings to be copalletized must be subject to the
minimum per piece rate, or all subject to the per pound rate, unless
otherwise authorized by the RCSC.
d. All pieces must have postage paid with permit imprint, or all
pieces must have postage affixed.
e. When requested, the mailer must present pallets selected by USPS
employees for verification.
f. At the time of mailing, the mailer must provide a computer-
generated listing (in ZIP Code sequence and numbered to correspond to
the pallets) that shows:
(1) Mailer''s name and location, owner of the mail, mailing
segment, and entry post office.
(2) For each copalletized product, the number of pieces to each
carrier route by 5-digit ZIP Code, to each 5- and 3-digit ZIP Code at
the Basic and \3/5\ rates, in total for these categories for each
pallet and for the entire mailing. Barcoded rates must be identified,
where applicable.
g. The number relating the computer-generated list to each pallet
must be placed in the lower right corner of the pallet label in an
easily read print size.
h. At the time of mailing, the mailer must show how packages and
bundles are arranged on the pallets.
i. When preparing copalletized flat-size mailings of carrier route
rate (e.g., Enhanced Carrier Route), automation rate (e.g., 3/5
Barcoded), and regular rate (e.g., Regular Basic) pieces, mailers must
separately group the packages at each rate.
j. Pallets may be stretchwrapped or otherwise secured only after
USPS verification.
k. When top caps are used, the mailer must write the tare weight of
the top cap
[[Page 66669]]
on the pallet label or in another prominent location.
7.4 Line 2
Line 2 on pallet labels for copalletized mailings: Class (PERIOD or
NEWS, or STD, as applicable), FLTS, and contents (BC, and/or CR or ECR,
and/or PRESORT, as applicable).
7.5 Mailing Statement
Separate mailing statements are required:
a. For Periodicals, a separate mailing statement is required for
each publication and/or edition that is part of the copalletized
mailing. Mailers must note on or in an attachment to the mailing
statement the name and issue date of the publications with which each
publication and/or edition was copalletized.
b. For Standard Mail (A), a separate mailing statement must be
prepared for each mailing that is part of a single copalletized
shipment, except that copalletized Regular, Enhanced Carrier Route, and
Automation rate mailings produced as part of the same job may be
reported on the same mailing statement.
8.0 MIXED RATE LEVELS ON PALLETS''NONPROFIT STANDARD MAIL (A)
8.1 Standards
Nonprofit mixed rate level mailings must meet the standards in 4.0
and those below.
8.2 Authorizations
Mailers must be authorized to commingle either Nonprofit Carrier
Route, 3/5, and Basic rate mail on pallets or Nonprofit Carrier Route
and Barcoded rate flats in packages. Mailers do not need authorization
to commingle mixed rate level mailings when only mailings of barcoded
flats are presorted on pallets. Nonidentical-weight pieces may be
commingled only if the correct postage is affixed to each piece or if
otherwise authorized by the RCSC.
8.3 Endorsements
Carrier route presort endorsements may appear only on pieces that
qualify for that rate. Carrier route information, however, may appear
on each piece in the mailing.
8.4 Documentation
At the time of mailing, the mailer must provide a computer-
generated listing (in ZIP Code sequence and numbered to correspond to
the pallets) that describes the contents of each pallet. The mailer
must keep a copy of this listing for 90 days after the mailing is
dispatched. When requested, the mailer must present pallets selected by
USPS employees for verification by comparison with the listing. The
listing must show:
a. Mailer''s name and location, owner of the mail, mailing segment,
and entry post office.
b. Number of pieces to each carrier route by 5-digit ZIP Code, to
each 5- and 3-digit ZIP Code at the Basic and 3/5 rates, in total for
these categories for each pallet and for the entire mailing. Barcoded
rates must be identified, where applicable.
8.5 Additional Pallet Standards
Pallets must meet these additional preparation standards:
a. The number relating the computer-generated list to each pallet
must be placed in the lower right corner of the pallet label in an
easily read print size.
b. At the time of mailing, the mailer must show how packages and
bundles are arranged on the pallets.
c. When preparing copalletized Nonprofit Carrier Route and Barcoded
rate mailings of flat-size pieces, mailers must separately group the
packages at each rate.
d. Pallets may be stretchwrapped or otherwise secured only after
USPS verification.
e. When top caps are used, the mailer must write the tare weight of
the top cap on the pallet label or in another prominent location.
9.0 PALLETIZING MACHINABLE PARCELS
9.1 Standard Mail (A)
Pieces may be eligible for the 3/5 rate when prepared under 4.2a
through 4.2c. This eligibility includes pieces correctly presorted
under 4.2b and 4.2c to the service area of the entry ASF/BMC.
9.2 Standard Mail (B)
Mailers must sack by zone, using the applicable standards, any mail
that cannot be placed on 5-digit or BMC pallets. Sacks containing mail
remaining after all pallets are prepared may be presented with the
palletized mailing (on the same mailing statement), if the sacks are
segregated from the palletized portion of the mailing. Pieces for
different zones may be commingled only under M630.
9.3 DBMC Rate
If applicable, a BMC pallet may include pieces that are eligible
for the DBMC rate and others that are ineligible. The mailer must
provide documentation showing the pieces that qualify for the DBMC
rate.
9.4 Additional Standards
Pallets must meet these additional preparation standards:
a. Pallets may be stretchwrapped or otherwise secured only after
USPS verification.
b. When top caps are used, the mailer must write the tare weight of
the top cap on the pallet label or in another prominent location.
M050 Walk Sequence
* * * * *
3.0 DELIVERY SEQUENCE INFORMATION
3.1 With Simplified Addressing
Walk-sequence rate pieces prepared with a simplified address must
be based on delivery stop information obtained within 6 months before
the date of mailing (or within 90 days before the date of mailing for
Carrier Route Publications Service Periodicals or Enhanced Carrier
Route Standard Mail), either from the Delivery Statistics File or from
the postmaster.
3.2 Without Simplified Addressing
Walk-sequence rate pieces prepared with other than a simplified
address must be sequenced using USPS data from one of the above
sources, issued within 6 months before the date of mailing (or within
90 days before the date of mailing for Carrier Route Publications
Service Periodicals or Enhanced Carrier Route Standard Mail): * * *
* * * * *
3.4 Line of Travel
Line-of-travel sequence is an option for mailers who prepare
carrier route mailings other than high density/125-piece or saturation
mailings. Line-of-travel sequencing is required for Basic Enhanced
Carrier Route Standard Mail and for Carrier Route Publications Service
Periodicals (except automation-compatible letter-size pieces). Line-of-
travel sequence is not an exact walk sequence but a sequence of ZIP+4
codes arranged in the order that the route is served by a carrier.
(First the ZIP+4 groups are sequenced, then the addresses within each
are identified as being in ascending or descending order.) The USPS
Line-of-Travel (LOT) product provides a list of the ZIP+4 codes each
route serves, identifies the order in which they are delivered, and
provides an indicator specifying whether the addresses in each must be
sorted in ascending or descending order. LOT information must be
updated at the same frequency as carrier route codes,
[[Page 66670]]
i.e., within 90 days before the date of mailing.
* * * * *
4.0 DOCUMENTATION
* * * * *
4.2 High Density/125-Piece
For each carrier route to which 125-piece walk-sequence or high
density rate mail is addressed, the mailer must document the total
number of pieces to the route. If there are fewer than 125 pieces for a
route, the documentation must also show the number of possible
deliveries on the route.
* * * * *
M070 Mixed Classes
M071 Basic Information
[In 1.1, 1.2, and 1.3, replace ``[T]hird-[C]lass'' with ``Standard Mail
(A)''; in 1.2, replace ``second-class'' with ``Periodicals''; in 1.2c,
replace ``First- or third-class'' with ``First-Class or Standard Mail
(A)''; and in 1.3, replace ``third- or fourth-class'' with ``Standard
Mail''; no other change in text.]
M072 Express Mail and Priority Mail Drop Shipment
[In 2.1, replace ``Presorted First-Class and carrier route presort''
with ``Retail Presort and Automation''; delete current 2.2 and renumber
2.3 as 2.2; in the heading of 3.0, replace ``Second-Class'' with
``Periodicals''; in the title of 4.0, replace ``Third-Class'' with
``Standard Mail (A)''; in the title of 5.0, replace ``Fourth-Class''
with ``Standard Mail (B)''; no other change in text.]
M073 Combined Mailings of Standard Mail Machinable Parcels
1.0 BASIC STANDARDS
1.1 Description
Subject to authorization under 2.0, a mailer authorized plant load
or plant-verified drop shipment privileges may prepare a combined
mailing of Regular Standard Mail (A) and Standard Mail (B) machinable
parcels that have been merged and presorted together in sacks (under
3.0) or on pallets (under M045) to achieve the finest level of presort.
The combined mailing must meet the standards below and those that apply
to the rates claimed. Each parcel in a combined mailing is subject to
the applicable Standard Mail rate, based on the corresponding
standards. Required volume for bulk or presort rates is based solely on
the quantity of pieces eligible for each rate at the required presort
level. Pieces claimed at other rates in the same sack or on the same
pallet do not count.
1.2 Postage Payment
Postage for all pieces must be paid with permit imprint at the post
office serving the mailer''s plant under P710, P720, or P730. The
applicable agreement must include procedures for combined mailings
approved by the RCSC.
1.3 Documentation
Separate mailing statements must be prepared for the Standard Mail
(A) and (B) pieces. Within each group, combined forms may be prepared
where standards and the forms permit. All mailing statements must be
provided at the time of mailing, accompanied by a computer-generated
listing (in ZIP Code sequence and numbered to correspond to the sacks
or pallets) that describes the contents of each sack or pallet. The
mailer must keep a copy of this listing for 90 days after the mailing
is dispatched. This listing must show the mailer's name and location,
the name and owner of each product, and the entry post office. For each
product, the listing must detail the number of pieces at each rate by
5-digit ZIP Code and totals for each pallet or sack and for the entire
mailing. Additional documentation must be provided for all mailings of
nonidentical-weight pieces or in which basic and 3/5 presort rate
pieces are commingled and the mailer has not separated the sacks or
pallets containing the pieces at the respective rates. Such
documentation must be in one of these formats:
a. Segmented sequentially by level of sortation (e.g., 5-digit,
destination BMC) and, within each, listing a unique number or Line 1 of
each sack or pallet label. For each 5-digit or destination ASF/BMC
entry, the number of pieces at each rate must be shown by 5-digit ZIP
Code or 3-digit ZIP Code prefix, respectively. Destination ASF/BMC
sacks or pallets must show a total number of pieces in the sack or on
the pallet. The entries must be summarized for the whole mailing to
show total pieces at each rate, total pieces, and total postage (and
additional postage due, as applicable). The sacks or pallets do not
have to be presented to the USPS in any particular order.
b. Segmented sequentially by level of sortation and, by 5-digit ZIP
Code (for 5-digit sacks) or 3-digit ZIP Code prefix (for other sacks or
pallets), the number of pieces at each rate must be listed. The entries
must be totaled for the whole mailing to show total pieces at each
rate, total pieces, and total postage (or additional postage due, as
applicable). If different amounts of additional postage are due, the
summary must further detail the number of pieces at each postage amount
or at each amount of additional postage due. The sacks or pallets must
be separated by level of sortation when presented for acceptance.
2.0 AUTHORIZATION
* * * * *
2.3 Term
An authorization to combine Standard Mail (A) and (B) machinable
parcels expires at the same time as the applicable postage payment
system authorization and may not be for more than 2 years. A mailer may
terminate an authorization at any time by written notice to the
postmaster of the office serving the mailer's location. The USPS may
terminate an authorization, by written notice to the mailer explaining
the reasons for termination, if it finds that the mailer does not meet
the applicable standards.
3.0 SACK PREPARATION
3.1 Sack Size, Presort, and Labeling
Sack size, presort sequence, and labeling:
a. 5-digit: optional, but required for Standard Mail (A) Regular
and Nonprofit 3/5 rate eligibility (10 pieces/20 pounds/1,000 cubic
inches minimum, smaller volume not permitted); use 5-digit ZIP Code
destination of pieces for Line 1, preceded for military mail by the
correct prefixes under M031.
b. Destination ASF: allowed and required for DBMC rate only (10
pieces/20 pounds/1,000 cubic inches minimum, smaller volume not
permitted); use L602 for Line 1.
c. Destination BMC: required (10 pieces/20 pounds/1,000 cubic
inches minimum, smaller volume not permitted); use L602 if DBMC rate is
claimed; otherwise, use L601 for Line 1.
d. Mixed BMC: required (no minimum); use L601 to show entry BMC for
Line 1.
3.2 Line 2
Line 2:
a. 5-digit, ASF, and destination BMC sacks: STD 3C/4C MACH.
b. Mixed BMC sacks: STD 3C/4C MACH MIXED BMC.
c. As required by the applicable labeling list, Line 2 processing
code information must be right-justified under the ZIP Code on Line 1.
M074 Plant Load Mailings
[In 3.3b and 3.3c, replace ``SDC'' with ``ADC''; in 3.3 and 3.7b,
replace ``second-class'' with ``Periodicals''; and in 3.4 and 3.7c,
replace ``[T]hird- or
[[Page 66671]]
[F]ourth-[C]lass [M]ail'' with ``Standard Mail''; no other change in
text.]
M100 First-Class Mail
[Renumber current M101 as M120 with no change in text; replace current
M102 and M103 with new M130 as follows:]
M120 Priority Mail
* * * * *
M130 Retail Presort
1.0 BASIC STANDARDS
1.1 All Pieces
All Retail Presort mailings are subject to these general standards:
a. Each mailing must meet the applicable standards in E130 and M010
through M030.
b. All pieces must be in the same processing category unless
specifically excepted by standard.
c. All pieces must be presorted together and prepared under 2.0,
3.0, 4.0, or 5.0, as appropriate.
d. All pieces must be marked ``Presort'' and ``First-Class.''
e. Letter-size pieces (including cards) must be prepared in letter
trays; flat-size pieces must be prepared in flat trays; parcels must be
prepared in sacks.
1.2 Local Exception
Postmasters may authorize preparation of small volume mailings in
nonpostal containers if they consist primarily of packages for local
ZIP Codes, do not exceed 20 pounds, and do not require postal
transportation for processing.
2.0 BASIC PREPARATION--LETTER-SIZE PIECES
2.1 Package Size, Presort, and Labeling
Package size, presort sequence, and labeling:
a. 5-digit: required (10-piece minimum, fewer not permitted); red
Label D, facing slip, or optional endorsement line (OEL); labeling
optional.
b. 3-digit: required (10-piece minimum, fewer not permitted); green
Label 3, facing slip, or OEL.
c. ADC: required (10-piece minimum, fewer not permitted); pink
Label A, facing slip, or OEL.
d. Mixed ADC: required (no minimum); tan Label MS, facing slip, or
OEL.
2.2 Tray Size, Presort, and Labeling
Tray size, presort sequence, and labeling:
a. 5-digit: required (full trays); no overflow; use 5-digit ZIP
Code destination of packages for Line 1, preceded for military mail by
the correct prefixes under M031.
b. 3-digit: required (full trays); no overflow; use L002, Column A,
for Line 1.
c. Entry SCF 3-digit(s): required (no minimum); overflow allowed;
use L002, Column A, for Line 1.
d. ADC: required (full trays); no overflow; use L004 for Line 1.
e. Mixed ADC: required (no minimum); for Line 1, use MXD, followed
by the entry 3-digit facility city/state/ZIP shown in L002, Column A
(use lowest ZIP in range).
2.3 Line 2
Line 2: FCM LTRS NON-OCR and, as applicable:
a. Mixed ADC trays: WKG.
b. As required by the applicable labeling list, Line 2 processing
code information must be right-justified under the ZIP Code on Line 1.
3.0 OPTIONAL PREPARATION--UPGRADABLE LETTER-SIZE PIECES
3.1 Definition
Upgradable pieces are those that meet both the physical automation
compatibility standards in C810 and the standards in C830 for an OCR
clear zone, for reflectance, and for paper that can accept water-based
ink. Addresses on upgradable pieces must be machine printed in a
nonscript font. Upgradable pieces prepared under 3.0 are not packaged.
3.2 Tray Size, Presort, and Labeling
Tray size, presort sequence, and labeling:
a. 5-digit: optional (full trays); no overflow; use 5-digit ZIP
Code destination of packages for Line 1, preceded for military mail by
the correct prefixes under M031.
b. 3-digit: required (full trays); no overflow; use L002, Column A,
for Line 1.
c. Entry SCF 3-digit(s): required (no minimum); overflow allowed;
use L002, Column A, for Line 1.
d. AADC: required (full trays); no overflow; group pieces by 3-
digit ZIP Code prefix; use L804 for Line 1.
e. Mixed AADC: required (no minimum); group pieces by AADC and,
within each, by 3-digit ZIP Code prefix; for Line 1, use MXD, followed
by the entry 3-digit facility city/state/ZIP shown in L002, Column A
(use lowest ZIP in range).
3.3 Line 2
Line 2: FCM LTRS OCR and, as applicable:
a. Mixed AADC trays: WKG.
b. As required by the applicable labeling list, Line 2 processing
code information must be right-justified under the ZIP Code on Line 1.
4.0 PREPARATION OF FLAT-SIZE PIECES
4.1 Package Size, Presort, and Labeling
Package size, presort sequence, and labeling:
a. 5-digit: required (10-piece minimum, fewer not permitted); red
Label D, facing slip, or optional endorsement line (OEL).
b. 3-digit: required (10-piece minimum, fewer not permitted); green
Label 3, facing slip, or OEL.
c. ADC: required (10-piece minimum, fewer not permitted); pink
Label A, facing slip, or OEL.
d. Mixed ADC: required (no minimum); tan Label MS, facing slip, or
OEL.
4.2 Tray Size, Presort, and Labeling
Tray size, presort sequence, and labeling:
a. 5-digit: required (full trays), no overflow; use 5-digit ZIP
Code destination of packages for Line 1, preceded for military mail by
the correct prefixes under M031.
b. 3-digit: required (full trays), no overflow; use L002, Column A,
for Line 1.
c. Entry SCF 3-digit(s): required (no minimum); use L002, Column A,
for Line 1.
d. ADC: required (full trays), no overflow; use L004 for Line 1.
e. Mixed ADC: required (no minimum); group pieces by 3-digit ZIP
Code prefix; for Line 1, use MXD, followed by the entry 3-digit
facility city/state/ZIP shown in L002, Column A (use lowest ZIP in
range).
4.3 Line 2
Line 2: FCM FLTS and, on mixed ADC trays, WKG.
5.0 PREPARATION OF PARCELS
5.1 Standards
First-Class parcels weighing 11 ounces or less, except Priority
Mail, must be prepared under the standards below. All Priority Mail and
any parcels weighing more than 11 ounces must be prepared under the
applicable standards in M120.
5.2 Package Size, Presort, and Labeling
Packaging is not required for pieces \1/2\ inch thick or larger if
they are placed in a sack to the same destination as that to which they
would otherwise have been packaged. Package size, presort sequence, and
labeling:
[[Page 66672]]
a. 5-digit: required (10-piece minimum, fewer not permitted); red
Label D, facing slip, or optional endorsement line (OEL).
b. 3-digit: required (10-piece minimum, fewer not permitted); green
Label 3, facing slip, or OEL.
c. ADC: required (10-piece minimum, fewer not permitted); pink
Label A, facing slip, or OEL.
d. Mixed ADC: required (no minimum); tan Label MS, facing slip, or
OEL.
5.3 Sack Size, Presort, and Labeling
Sack size, presort sequence, and labeling:
a. 5-digit: required (10-pound minimum); use 5-digit ZIP Code
destination of packages for Line 1, preceded for military mail by the
correct prefixes under M031.
b. 3-digit: required (10-pound minimum); use L002, Column A, for
Line 1.
c. Entry SCF 3-digit(s): required (no minimum); use L002, Column A,
for Line 1.
d. ADC: required (10-pound minimum); use L004 for Line 1.
e. Mixed ADC: required (no minimum); use MXD, followed by the entry
3-digit facility city/state/ZIP shown in L002, Column A (use lowest ZIP
in range).
5.4 Line 2
Line 2: FCM IRREG and, on mixed ADC sacks, WKG.
6.0 DOCUMENTATION
Documentation meeting the standards in P012 must be submitted with
each mailing statement.
M200 Periodicals
M210 Regular and Publications Service Periodicals
1.0 BASIC STANDARDS
1.1 General Preparation
All pieces in each Regular or Publications Service mailing must be
in the same processing category and must be presorted together to the
finest extent required. Automation-compatible Publications Service
pieces and Barcoded rate Regular Periodicals must be prepared under
M800; other pieces under 2.0 and 3.0, 4.0, 5.0, or 6.0, as appropriate.
Letter-size pieces must be prepared in trays; flat-size pieces must be
prepared in sacks. Palletization of trays, sacks, or packages is as
permitted by M040. Postmasters may authorize preparation of small
volume mailings in nonpostal containers if they consist primarily of
packages for local ZIP Codes, do not exceed 20 pounds, and do not
require postal transportation for processing.
1.2 Carrier Route and Walk-Sequence
Preparation for carrier route rates is optional and is subject to
additional standards. Regular Periodicals for which a walk-sequence
discount is claimed and Publications Service Periodicals optionally
prepared in walk sequence must be prepared as a carrier route mailing
under this section and the walk-sequencing standards in M050; pieces
prepared with a simplified address must also meet the standards in
A040.
1.3 Firm Packages
A ``firm package'' is two or more copies for the same address
placed in one package. If each copy has a delivery address, each may be
claimed as a separate piece for presort and on the mailing statement.
The firm package may be claimed as one piece for presort and on the
mailing statement. If the copies are unaddressed, the firm package is
considered one piece. A firm package presorted and claimed as one piece
must be accompanied by (but must be physically separate from) five
other pieces packaged to the same destination to satisfy a six-piece
package requirement when applicable, regardless of the number of copies
in the firm package.
2.0 PACKAGE PREPARATION
2.1 General
Packaging preparation is subject to M020 and the specific standards
below.
2.2 Carrier Route Packages
Mailers may choose to prepare carrier route packages at a higher
level of route saturation (e.g., only if there are at least 15 pieces
per route). Under this option, smaller packages of six or more pieces
per carrier route not prepared for carrier route rates must be prepared
for and paid at another applicable rate.
2.3 Regular Periodicals
In addition to labeling under 2.4b, each package of Regular
Periodicals walk-sequence mail (or optionally prepared Publications
Service walk sequence mail) must be labeled to show that the mail is
walk sequenced. A facing slip with the phrase ``HIGH DENSITY WALK-
SEQUENCED CARRIER ROUTE MAIL'' or ``SATURATION WALK-SEQUENCED CARRIER
ROUTE MAIL'' (as applicable) may be placed on the top of each package
of walk-sequence mail. It may be an address label with the required
information placed on a sample mailpiece that is the top piece in the
package, or a separate piece of paper affixed to the top of the
package. If packages are prepared without facing slips, an optional
endorsement line or carrier route information line must be placed on
each piece in the package to provide the equivalent information.
2.4 Package Size, Presort, and Labeling
Package size, presort sequence, and labeling:
a. Firm: optional (two-piece minimum), blue Label F or optional
endorsement line (OEL).
b. Carrier route: optional but required for rate eligibility (six-
piece minimum, fewer not permitted); labeling required only if placed
in a 5-digit carrier routes tray or sack (purple Label CR, facing slip,
OEL, or CR information line).
c. 5-digit: required (six-piece minimum, fewer not permitted); red
Label D or OEL.
d. 3-digit: required (six-piece minimum, fewer not permitted);
green Label 3 or OEL.
e. ADC: required (six-piece minimum, fewer not permitted); pink
Label A or OEL.
f. Mixed ADC: required (no minimum); tan Label MS or OEL.
3.0 SACK PREPARATION (FLATS)--REGULAR PERIODICALS
3.1 Sack Size, Presort, and Labeling
Sack size, presort sequence, and labeling:
a. Carrier route: required for rate eligibility at 24 pieces,
optional with one six-piece package minimum; use 5-digit ZIP Code
destination of packages for Line 1, preceded for military mail by the
correct prefixes under M031.
b. 5-digit carrier routes (carrier route packages only): required
for rate eligibility (no minimum); use 5-digit ZIP Code destination of
packages for Line 1, preceded for military mail by the correct prefixes
under M031.
c. 5-digit: required at 24 pieces, optional with one six-piece
package minimum; use 5-digit ZIP Code destination of packages for Line
1, preceded for military mail by the correct prefixes under M031.
d. 3-digit: required at 24 pieces, optional with one six-piece
package minimum; use L002, Column A, for Line 1.
e. Entry SCF 3-digit(s): required (no minimum); use L002, Column A,
for Line 1.
f. ADC: required at 24 pieces, optional with one six-piece package
minimum; use L004 for Line 1.
g. Mixed ADC: required (no minimum); for Line 1, use MXD, followed
by the entry ADC facility city/state/ZIP shown in L004.
[[Page 66673]]
3.2 Line 2
Line 2: PERIOD or NEWS (as applicable), FLTS or IRREG (as
applicable), and:
a. Basic Carrier Route sacks: route type and number.
b. High Density sacks: WSH, route type and number.
c. Saturation sacks: WSS, route type and number.
d. 5-digit carrier routes sacks: CR-RTS.
e. Mixed ADC sacks: WKG.
f. As required by the applicable labeling list, Line 2 processing
code information must be right-justified under the ZIP Code on Line 1.
4.0 SACK PREPARATION (FLATS)--PUBLICATIONS SERVICE
4.1 Sack Size, Presort, and Labeling
Sack size, presort sequence, and labeling:
a. Carrier route: required for rate eligibility at 24 pieces,
optional with one six-piece package minimum; use 5-digit ZIP Code
destination of packages for Line 1, preceded for military mail by the
correct prefixes under M031.
b. 5-digit carrier routes (carrier route packages only): required
for rate eligibility (no minimum); use 5-digit ZIP Code destination of
packages for Line 1, preceded for military mail by the correct prefixes
under M031.
c. 5-digit: required at 24 pieces, optional with one six-piece
package minimum; use 5-digit ZIP Code destination of packages for Line
1, preceded for military mail by the correct prefixes under M031.
d. 3-digit: required at 24 pieces, optional with one six-piece
package minimum; use L002, Column A, for Line 1.
e. Entry SCF 3-digit(s): required (no minimum); use L002, Column A,
for Line 1.
f. ADC: required at 24 pieces, optional with one six-piece package
minimum; use L004 for Line 1.
g. Mixed ADC: required (no minimum); for Line 1, use MXD, followed
by the entry ADC facility city/state/ZIP shown in L004.
4.2 Line 2
Line 2: PERIOD or NEWS (as applicable), FLTS or IRREG (as
applicable), and:
a. Carrier Route sacks: LOT (or WSH or WSS if applicable), route
type and number.
b. 5-digit carrier routes sacks: CR-RTS.
c. Mixed ADC sacks: WKG.
d. As required by the applicable labeling list, Line 2 processing
code information must be right-justified under the ZIP Code on Line 1.
5.0 TRAY PREPARATION (LETTER-SIZE PIECES)--REGULAR PERIODICALS
5.1 Tray Size, Presort, and Labeling
Tray size, presort sequence, and labeling:
a. Carrier route: required for rate eligibility at 24 pieces,
optional with one six-piece package minimum; use 5-digit ZIP Code
destination of packages for Line 1, preceded for military mail by the
correct prefixes under M031.
b. 5-digit carrier routes (carrier route packages only): required
for rate eligibility (no minimum); use 5-digit ZIP Code destination of
packages for Line 1, preceded for military mail by the correct prefixes
under M031.
c. 5-digit: required at 24 pieces, optional with one six-piece
package minimum; use 5-digit ZIP Code destination of packages for Line
1, preceded for military mail by the correct prefixes under M031.
d. 3-digit: required at 24 pieces, optional with one six-piece
package minimum; use L002, Column A, for Line 1.
e. Entry SCF 3-digit(s): required (no minimum); use L002, Column A,
for Line 1.
f. ADC: required at 24 pieces, optional with one six-piece package
minimum; use L004 for Line 1.
g. Mixed ADC: required (no minimum); for Line 1, use MXD, followed
by the entry ADC facility city/state/ZIP shown in L004.
5.2 Line 2
Line 2: PERIOD or NEWS (as applicable), LTRS and:
a. Basic Carrier Route trays: route type and number.
b. High Density trays: WSH, route type and number.
c. Saturation trays: WSS, route type and number.
d. 5-digit carrier routes trays: CR-RTS.
e. Mixed ADC trays: WKG.
f. As required by the applicable labeling list, Line 2 processing
code information must be right-justified under the ZIP Code on Line 1.
6.0 TRAY PREPARATION (LETTER-SIZE PIECES)--PUBLICATIONS SERVICE
6.1 Tray Size, Presort, and Labeling
Tray size, presort sequence, and labeling:
a. Carrier route: optional, but required for rate eligibility if
full tray; no overflow; use 5-digit ZIP Code destination of packages
for Line 1, preceded for military mail by the correct prefixes under
M031.
b. 5-digit carrier routes (carrier route packages only): required
for rate eligibility (no minimum); use 5-digit ZIP Code destination of
packages for Line 1, preceded for military mail by the correct prefixes
under M031.
c. 5-digit: required (full trays); no overflow; use 5-digit ZIP
Code destination of packages for Line 1, preceded for military mail by
the correct prefixes under M031.
d. 3-digit: required (full trays); no overflow; use L002, Column A,
for Line 1.
e. Entry SCF 3-digit(s): required (no minimum); overflow allowed;
use L002, Column A, for Line 1.
f. ADC: required (full trays); no overflow; use L004 for Line 1.
g. Mixed ADC: required (no minimum); for Line 1, use MXD, followed
by the entry ADC facility city/state/ZIP shown in L004.
6.2 Line 2
Line 2: PERIOD or NEWS (as applicable), LTRS and:
a. Carrier route trays: LOT (or WSH or WSS if applicable), route
type and number.
b. 5-digit carrier routes trays: CR-RTS.
c. Mixed ADC trays: WKG.
d. As required by the applicable labeling list, Line 2 processing
code information must be right-justified under the ZIP Code on Line 1.
7.0 BEDLOADED BUNDLES (FLATS)
7.1. Authorization
The RCSC manager serving the post office where the mailing is to be
made may authorize preparation of flat-size Periodicals in bundles
outside of sacks, subject to these standards:
a. This preparation must benefit the USPS. Generally, authorization
is approved only when the number of bundles is not more than the number
of sacks that would otherwise be used in a mailing.
b. The publisher or agent must submit an application for each
publication, showing the name of the publication, the frequency of
mailing, the post offices to which shipments are to be made, and the
approximate numbers of copies and bundles to be deposited at each
office.
c. The RCSC manager rules on the application and informs the
applicant in writing. If an authorization is approved, the publisher or
agent must be prepared to provide information similar to that required
on the original application for future issues of the publication, if
[[Page 66674]]
requested by the RCSC manager. Authorization is approved for a specific
period, not to exceed 2 years.
d. Authorization to bundle instead of sack may be revoked when it
is determined that the preparation method no longer benefits the USPS.
7.2 Package Preparation
Packages must be presorted and labeled under 2.0 and meet the
applicable basic standards in M020 and these conditions:
a. Packages must contain at least six pieces but no more than 20
pounds of mail.
b. Firm packages may contain as few as two copies of a publication
and do not have to be consolidated into bundles with other packages to
the same 5-digit destination.
c. All pieces must be in one package if they weigh less than 10
pounds. Ten pounds or more of mail for a destination must be prepared
in packages weighing from 10 to 20 pounds each.
d. The last package to a destination may contain less than 10
pounds of mail.
e. All palletized packages of copalletized publications must
contain at least six pieces.
7.3 Bundle Preparation
Bundles must be presorted under 3.0 or 4.0 (as appropriate) and
meet the applicable standards in M020 and these conditions:
a. Bundle size for all required presort levels: required (20
pounds/1,000 cubic inches minimum, 40 pounds maximum; smaller bundles
not permitted).
b. Bundle size for all optional presort levels: optional (20
pounds/1,000 cubic inches minimum, 40 pounds maximum; smaller bundles
not permitted).
c. Bundles other than carrier route and 5-digit bundles must be
labeled with facing slips that have similar information to that
required for sack labels. A facing slip is not required on carrier
route bundles. Five-digit bundles must contain pieces with the correct
optional endorsement line or have a red Label D.
7.4 Physical Characteristics
Bundles must be machinable on USPS sack-sorting equipment, unless
they consist of publications for entry and delivery in the same SCF
service area. Machinability can be improved by cross-strapping and
using heavy-gauge shrinkwrap or stretchwrap on each bundle. Bundles
entered and delivered in the same SCF service area must be securely
bound to withstand normal handling without breakage or injury to USPS
employees or damage to mechanized sorting systems. Binding material
must be applied at least once around both the length and girth. Wire
and metal strapping are prohibited.
8.0 COMBINING MULTIPLE PUBLICATIONS OR EDITIONS
8.1 Basic Information
A combined mailing is a mailing in which individually addressed
copies of two or more Periodicals publications or editions are merged
into a single mailstream, during production or after finished copies
are produced, and all copies are presorted together to achieve the
finest presort possible for the combined mailing. This process is also
known as comailing. More than one publication, or edition of a
publication, may be combined to meet the volume standard per tray,
sack, or bundle, applicable to the presort rate claimed. Each piece
must meet all applicable standards for the specific rate claimed.
Nonprofit and classroom publications may be combined with Regular or
Publications Service publications only as permitted by standard.
Letter-size pieces of Regular and Publications Service mail may not be
combined.
8.2 Mailing Statements
A separate mailing statement must be prepared for the postage
computations for each publication or edition that is part of the
combined mailing. The name and issue date of the publications with
which each publication or edition was combined must be noted on, or
attached to, the mailing statements. To report postage for firm
packages for any combination not exclusively of Publications Service
publications, the per piece postage computation (and nonadvertising
adjustment, if applicable) for all copies included in firm packages
must be on the mailing statement for the publication (having copies in
those packages) that contains the higher (or highest) amount of
advertising.
9.0 DOCUMENTATION
The publisher must be prepared to support information on mailing
statements required with a Periodicals publication (e.g., the number of
pieces or weight of copies addressed or sorted to specific destinations
or zones, prepared at specific levels of presort, or prepared to
qualify for a particular rate or discount). Except for mailings
containing pieces at an automation rate, a destination entry rate, or a
walk-sequence rate, the publisher may meet this standard at the time of
mailing by separating sacks into groups based on the presort level for
which their contents qualify. In other situations, the publisher must
have available documentation meeting the standards in P012 that
describes the mailing in sufficient detail to allow verification of the
accompanying mailing's compliance with applicable preparation and
eligibility standards.
M290 Preferred Periodicals
[Text of current M201, M202, M203, and M205; M201.1.0, M202.1.0, and
M203.1.0 are combined into M290.1.0; the remainder of M201, M202, and
M203, and all of M205, are redesignated as M290.2.0, 3.0, 4.0, and 5.0,
respectively, with subsections renumbered accordingly; no changes in
text except to use correct class and rate names.]
1.0 BASIC STANDARDS
1.1 Presort
All pieces in a Preferred Periodicals mailing must be presorted.
All pieces must be in the same processing category unless specifically
excepted by standard. Except for automation rate mailings, presort must
at a minimum meet the standards in 2.0. Additional preparation might
qualify pieces for other presort rates or discounts. Automation rate
mailings must meet the presort standards in M800.
1.2 Single-Piece
Subject to the applicable presort standards, if presorting results
in a single piece remaining that cannot be included in a package
already prepared, that single piece may be sorted to a tray, sack, or
pallet, as appropriate, without being prepared as a ``package.''
1.3 Loose Packing
District managers may authorize loose packing of faced, unpackaged
flat-size mail if there are enough pieces to fill a No. 3 sack for the
same 5-digit ZIP Code destination.
1.4 Firm Packages
A ``firm package'' is two or more copies for the same address
placed in one package. If each copy has a delivery address, each may be
claimed as a separate piece for presort and on the mailing statement.
The firm package may be claimed as one piece for presort and on the
mailing statement. If the copies are unaddressed, the firm package is
considered one piece. A firm package presorted and claimed as one piece
must be accompanied by (but must be physically separate from) five
other pieces packaged to the same destination to satisfy a six-piece
package requirement when applicable, regardless
[[Page 66675]]
of the number of copies in the firm package.
1.5 Nonpostal Containers
Postmasters may authorize preparation of small volume mailings in
nonpostal containers if they consist primarily of packages for local
ZIP Codes, do not exceed 20 pounds, and are cost effective.
2.0 PREPARATION FOR LEVEL G/J RATES
2.1 Package Size, Presort, and Labeling
Package size, presort sequence, and labeling:
a. Firm: optional with at least two pieces; blue Label F or
optional endorsement line (OEL).
b. 5-digit: required at six pieces; smaller packages permitted; red
Label D or OEL; labeling optional.
c. City: optional with at least six pieces; yellow label C or OEL.
d. 3-digit: required at six pieces; smaller packages permitted;
green Label 3 or OEL.
e. SCF: optional at six pieces; smaller packages permitted; green
Label 3 or OEL.
f. ADC: required with at least six pieces; pink Label A or OEL.
g. Mixed ADC: required with no minimum; tan Label MS or OEL.
2.2 Sack Size, Presort, and Labeling
Sack size, presort sequence, and labeling:
a. 5-digit: required at four packages; fewer packages permitted;
use 5-digit ZIP Code destination of packages for Line 1, preceded for
military mail by the correct prefixes under M031.
b. City: optional with no minimum except as required for rate
eligibility; use lowest ZIP Code for destination from L001 for Line 1.
c. 3-digit: required at four packages; fewer packages permitted;
use L002, Column A, for Line 1.
d. SCF: optional with no minimum; use L002, Column B, for Line 1.
e. ADC: required at four packages; fewer packages permitted; use
L004 for Line 1.
f. Mixed ADC: required (no minimum); for Line 1, use MXD, followed
by the entry ADC facility city/state/ZIP shown in L004.
2.3 Line 2
Line 2: PERIOD or NEWS (as applicable), processing category, and:
a. City sacks: CITY, right-justified under the ZIP Code on Line 1.
b. Mixed ADC sacks: WKG.
c. As required by the applicable labeling list, Line 2 processing
code information must be right-justified under the ZIP Code on Line 1.
3.0 PREPARATION FOR LEVEL H RATES
3.1 Package Size, Presort, and Labeling
Package size, presort sequence, and labeling:
a. Firm: optional with at least two pieces, subject to 1.5; blue
Label F or optional endorsement line (OEL).
b. 5-digit: required at six pieces; smaller packages not permitted;
red Label D or OEL; labeling optional.
c. City: optional with at least six pieces; yellow Label C or OEL.
d. Unique 3-digit: required at six pieces; smaller packages not
permitted; green Label 3 or OEL.
3.2 Sack Size, Presort, and Labeling
Sack size, presort sequence, and labeling:
a. 5-digit: required at four packages; fewer packages permitted;
use 5-digit ZIP Code destination of packages for Line 1, preceded for
military mail by the correct prefixes under M031.
b. City: optional at one six-piece package, as required for rate
eligibility; use lowest ZIP Code for destination from L001 for Line 1.
c. 3-digit: required at four packages; fewer packages permitted;
use L002, Column A (cities identified with two bullets), for Line 1.
3.3 Line 2
Line 2: PERIOD or NEWS (as applicable) and processing category
(and, on city sacks, CITY right-justified under the ZIP Code on Line
1).
4.0 PREPARATION FOR LEVEL I/K RATES
4.1 Carrier Route
``Carrier route'' includes city carrier routes, rural routes,
highway contract routes, post office box sections, and general delivery
units.
4.2 Trays
Mailings of letter-size pieces may be prepared in letter trays
rather than sacks, subject to 3.1. Rate eligibility remains subject to
the applicable standards. Letter-size pieces prepared in trays must be
packaged under 2.0, except that packages are not required when there is
enough mail to fill a tray for the same carrier route.
4.3 Walk-Sequence Mail
Pieces for which a walk-sequence discount is claimed must be
prepared as a carrier route mailing under this section and the walk-
sequencing standards in M050. Pieces prepared with a simplified address
must also meet the corresponding standards. Walk-sequence letter- and
flat-size pieces must be prepared in packages. In addition to labeling
under 4.4 and 4.5, each package of walk-sequence mail must be labeled
to show that the mail is walk sequenced. A facing slip with the phrase
``WALK-SEQUENCED CARRIER ROUTE MAIL'' may be placed on the top of each
package of walk-sequence mail. It may be an address label with the
required information placed on a sample mailpiece that is the top piece
in the package, or a separate piece of paper affixed to the top of the
package. If packages are prepared without facing slips, ``WS'' must
immediately precede the carrier route information on a carrier route
information line on each piece in the package.
4.4 Package Size, Presort, and Labeling
Package size, presort sequence, and labeling:
a. Firm: optional with at least two pieces, subject to 1.5; blue
Label F or optional endorsement line (OEL).
b. Carrier route: required at six pieces, subject to 4.6; smaller
packages not permitted; label under 4.5.
4.5 Package Labels
Carrier route packages labels are based on the level of sack in
which placed:
a. No label is required if the package is placed in a correctly
labeled carrier route sack.
b. Packages in 5-digit carrier routes sacks must have a facing slip
unless the pieces in the package show a carrier route information line.
c. Optional endorsement lines may be used instead of carrier
information lines or facing slips.
4.6 Higher Level
Mailers may choose to prepare carrier route packages at a higher
level of route saturation than required in 4.4b (e.g., only when there
are at least 15 pieces per route). Under this option, smaller packages
(but with six or more pieces per carrier route) not prepared as
required for carrier route rates must be claimed at another rate and
prepared accordingly.
4.7 Tray or Sack Size, Presort, and Labeling
Tray presort is in the same sequence as for sacks; a tray must be
prepared for a required presort destination when the corresponding
pieces (or packages of pieces) fill a tray. Minimum volume per
[[Page 66676]]
tray is the same as for a comparable sack. The information placed on
tray labels is the same as on sack labels. Tray or sack size, presort
sequence, and labeling:
a. Carrier route: optional at one six-piece package minimum,
required for rate eligibility; use 5-digit ZIP Code destination of
packages for Line 1, preceded for military mail by the correct prefixes
under M031.
b. Carrier routes: optional at minimum of one six-piece package
each for two different routes in the same 5-digit ZIP Code area;
required for rate eligibility; use 5-digit ZIP Code destination of
packages for Line 1, preceded for military mail by the correct prefixes
under M031.
4.8 Line 2
Line 2: PERIOD or NEWS (as applicable), processing category, and:
a. Walk-sequence carrier route trays or sacks: WS, and route type
and number.
b. Carrier route trays or sacks: route type and number.
c. 5-digit carrier routes trays or sacks: CARRIER ROUTES.
5.0 BEDLOADED BUNDLES (FLATS)
5.1. Authorization
The RCSC manager serving the post office where the mailing is to be
made may authorize preparation of flat-size Periodicals in bundles
outside sacks, subject to these standards:
a. This preparation must benefit the USPS. Generally, authorization
is approved only when the number of bundles is not more than the number
of sacks that would otherwise be used in a mailing.
b. The publisher or agent must submit an application for each
publication, showing the name of the publication; the frequency of
mailing, the post offices to which shipments are to be made, and the
approximate numbers of copies and bundles to be deposited at each
office.
c. The RCSC manager rules on the application and informs the
applicant in writing. If an authorization is approved, the publisher or
agent must be prepared to provide information similar to that required
on the original application for future issues of the publication, if
requested by the RCSC manager. Authorization is approved for a specific
period, not to exceed 2 years.
d. Authorization to bundle instead of sack may be revoked when it
is determined that the preparation method no longer benefits the USPS.
5.2 Package Preparation
Packages must be presorted and labeled under 2.0 and meet the
applicable basic standards in M020 and these conditions:
a. Packages must contain at least six pieces but no more than 20
pounds of mail.
b. Firm packages may contain as few as two copies of a publication
and do not have to be consolidated into bundles with other packages to
the same 5-digit destination.
c. All pieces must be in one package if they weigh less than 10
pounds. Ten pounds or more of mail for a destination must be prepared
in packages weighing from 10 to 20 pounds each.
d. The last package to a destination may contain less than 10
pounds of mail.
e. All palletized packages of copalletized publications must
contain at least six pieces.
5.3 Bundle Preparation
Bundles must be presorted under 3.0 and meet the applicable
standards in M020 and these conditions:
a. Bundle size for all required presort levels: required (20
pounds/1,000 cubic inches minimum, 40 pounds maximum; smaller bundles
not permitted).
b. Bundle size for all optional presort levels: optional (20
pounds/1,000 cubic inches minimum, 40 pounds maximum; smaller bundles
not permitted).
c. Bundles other than carrier route and 5-digit bundles must be
labeled with facing slips that have similar information to that
required for sack labels. A facing slip is not required on carrier
route bundles. Five-digit bundles must contain pieces with the correct
optional endorsement line or have a red Label D.
5.4 Physical Characteristics
Bundles must be machinable on USPS sack-sorting equipment, unless
they consist of publications for entry and delivery in the same SCF
service area. Machinability can be improved by cross-strapping and
using heavy-gauge shrinkwrap or stretchwrap on each bundle. Bundles
entered and delivered in the same SCF service area must be securely
bound to withstand normal handling without breakage or injury to USPS
employees or damage to mechanized sorting systems. Binding material
must be applied at least once around both the length and girth. Wire
and metal strapping are prohibited.
6.0 COMBINING MULTIPLE PUBLICATIONS OR EDITIONS
6.1 Basic Information
A combined mailing is a mailing in which individually addressed
copies of two or more Periodicals publications or editions are merged
into a single mailstream, during production or after finished copies
are produced, and all copies are presorted together to achieve the
finest presort possible for the combined mailing. This process is also
known as comailing. More than one publication, or edition of a
publication, may be combined to meet the volume standard per tray,
sack, or bundle, applicable to the presort rate claimed. Each piece
must meet all applicable standards for the specific rate claimed.
Nonprofit and classroom publications may be combined with Regular or
Publications Service publications only as permitted by standard.
6.2 Mailing Statements
A separate mailing statement must be prepared for the postage
computations for each publication or edition that is part of the
combined mailing. The name and issue date of the publications with
which each publication or edition was combined must be noted on, or
attached to, the mailing statements. To report postage for firm
packages, the per piece postage computation (and nonadvertising
adjustment, if applicable) for all copies included in firm packages
must be on the mailing statement for the publication (having copies in
those packages) that contains the higher (or highest) amount of
advertising.
7.0 DOCUMENTATION
The publisher must be prepared to support information on mailing
statements required with a Periodicals publication (e.g., the number of
pieces or weight of copies addressed or sorted to specific destinations
or zones, prepared at specific levels of presort, or prepared to
qualify for a particular rate or discount). Except for mailings
containing pieces at an automation rate, a destination entry rate, or a
walk-sequence rate, the publisher may meet this standard at the time of
mailing by separating sacks into groups based on the presort level for
which their contents qualify. In other situations, the publisher must
have available documentation meeting the standards in P012 that
describes the mailing in sufficient detail to allow verification of the
accompanying mailing''s compliance with applicable preparation and
eligibility standards.
[Delete current M300 and M400; no change to M500.]
* * * * *
[[Page 66677]]
M600 Standard Mail
M610 Single-Piece and Regular Standard Mail (A)
1.0 SINGLE-PIECE RATES
Each piece must be legibly marked ``Standard'' or ``STD.'' Unmarked
pieces are treated as First-Class Mail and charged postage at the
applicable First-Class rate.
2.0 BASIC STANDARDS''REGULAR RATES
2.1 All Mailings
All Regular (Basic and 3/5) rate mailings are subject to these
general standards:
a. Each mailing must meet the applicable standards in E631 and M010
through M030.
b. All pieces must be in the same processing category unless
specifically excepted by standard.
c. All pieces must be presorted together and prepared under M610,
except under M045 for palletized mail.
d. Sortation determines rate eligibility; pieces not claimed at or
not eligible for the 3/5 rate must be claimed at the Basic rate.
e. All pieces must be marked ``STD'' (or ``Standard'') and
``Presort.''
f. Subject to 2.2, letter-size pieces must be prepared in trays
and, unless palletized, flat-size pieces must be prepared in sacks.
g. Postmasters may authorize preparation of small volume mailings
in nonpostal containers if they consist primarily of packages for local
ZIP Codes, do not exceed 20 pounds, and do not require postal
transportation for processing.
2.2 Preparation Category
Pieces of Standard Mail (A) that, by size, could qualify for an
Automation rate as either a letter or a flat, and that are prepared as
palletized flats at Automation rates for flats or at Enhanced Carrier
Route rates, may be prepared as palletized flats at Regular nonletter
rates as well if the number of Regular nonletter rate pieces does not
exceed 10% of the total number of pieces in the entire mailing job
(regardless of rate).
2.3 Documentation
Documentation meeting the standards in P012 must be provided for
all mailings paid by permit imprint, in which all pieces do not bear
the correct postage, or in which pieces are of nonidentical weight.
3.0 BASIC PREPARATION''REGULAR RATE LETTER-SIZE PIECES
3.1 Package Size, Presort, and Labeling
Package size, presort sequence, and labeling:
a. 5-digit: required (10-piece minimum, fewer not permitted); red
Label D, facing slip, or optional endorsement line (OEL); labeling
optional.
b. 3-digit: required (10-piece minimum, fewer not permitted); green
Label 3, facing slip, or OEL.
c. ADC: required (10-piece minimum, fewer not permitted); pink
Label A, facing slip, or OEL.
d. Mixed ADC: required (no minimum); tan Label MS, facing slip, or
OEL.
3.2 3/5 Rate
Only mail eligible for the 3/5 rate (i.e., 150 or more pieces in
total for the 3-digit area) can be prepared in 5- and 3-digit trays
3.3 Tray Size, Presort, and Labeling
Tray size, presort sequence, and labeling:
a. 5-digit: optional (full trays), subject to 3.2; no overflow; use
5-digit ZIP Code destination of packages for Line 1, preceded for
military mail by the correct prefixes under M031.
b. 3-digit: required (no minimum), subject to 3.2; use L002, Column
A, for Line 1.
c. Entry SCF 3-digit(s): required (no minimum); overflow allowed;
use L002, Column A, for Line 1.
d. ADC: required (full trays); no overflow; use L004 for Line 1.
e. Mixed ADC: required (no minimum); for Line 1, use MXD, followed
by the entry ADC facility city/state/ZIP shown in L004.
3.4 Line 2
Line 2: STD LTRS NON-OCR and, as applicable:
a. Mixed ADC trays: WKG.
b. As required by the applicable labeling list, Line 2 processing
code information must be right-justified under the ZIP Code on Line 1.
4.0 OPTIONAL PREPARATION--UPGRADABLE REGULAR RATE LETTER-SIZE PIECES
4.1 Definition
Upgradable pieces are those that meet both the physical automation
compatibility standards in C810 and the standards in C830 for an OCR
clear zone, for reflectance, and for paper that can accept water-based
ink. Addresses on upgradable pieces must be machine printed in a
nonscript font. Upgradable pieces prepared under 4.0 are not packaged.
4.2 3/5 Rate
Only mail eligible for the 3/5 rate (i.e., 150 or more pieces in
total for the 3-digit area) can be prepared in 5- and 3-digit trays
4.3 Tray Size, Presort, and Labeling
Tray size, presort sequence, and labeling:
a. 5-digit: optional (full trays), subject to 4.2; no overflow; use
5-digit ZIP Code destination of packages for Line 1, preceded for
military mail by the correct prefixes under M031.
b. 3-digit: required (no minimum), subject to 4.2; use L002, Column
A, for Line 1.
c. Entry SCF 3-digit(s): required (no minimum); overflow allowed;
use L002, Column A, for Line 1.
d. AADC: required (full trays); no overflow; group pieces by 3-
digit ZIP Code prefix; use L804 for Line 1.
e. Mixed AADC: required (no minimum); group pieces by AADC and,
within each, by 3-digit ZIP Code prefix; for Line 1, use L805 (mail
entered by the mailer at an ASF or BMC) or L806, as appropriate.
4.4 Line 2
Line 2: STD LTRS OCR and, as applicable:
a. Mixed AADC trays: WKG.
b. As required by the applicable labeling list, Line 2 processing
code information must be right-justified under the ZIP Code on Line 1.
5.0 PREPARATION--REGULAR RATE FLAT-SIZE PIECES AND IRREGULAR PARCELS
5.1 Commingling Irregular Parcel Mailings
RCSCs may authorize the commingling of several permit imprint
mailings of irregular parcels to achieve a finer presort, if adequate
means are available to ensure that proper postage is paid. When
authorizing commingling, RCSCs may waive minimum quantity standards for
preparation of 5-digit and 3-digit packages if doing so results in a
finer makeup of at least 50% of the mail.
5.2 Packaging Irregular Parcels
Irregular parcels are packaged under 5.3, except that:
a. Irregular parcels 1/2 inch or more thick need not be made up
into packages, if the packages would be placed in a sack for same
destination.
b. Items that are so large that 10 or fewer pieces fill a sack need
not be packaged.
[[Page 66678]]
c. Pieces in a 5-digit sack containing both machinable and
irregular parcels need not be packaged. (Sacks containing both
machinable and irregular parcels cannot be prepared to other presort
levels.)
5.3 Package Size, Presort, and Labeling
Package size, presort sequence, and labeling:
a. 5-digit: required (10-piece minimum, fewer not permitted); red
Label D, facing slip, or optional endorsement line (OEL).
b. 3-digit: required (10-piece minimum, fewer not permitted); green
Label 3, facing slip, or OEL.
c. ADC: required (10-piece minimum, fewer permitted); pink Label A,
facing slip, or OEL.
d. Mixed ADC: required (no minimum); tan Label MS, facing slip, or
OEL.
5.4 Loose Packing
District managers of customer services may authorize loose packing
of unpackaged pieces to fill No. 3 sacks if no material in a sack would
be more finely presorted if packaged. Pieces must be faced and packed
to remain oriented in transit. The total weight of pieces placed in one
sack must not exceed 70 pounds. Requests to loose-pack mail must be
made through the post office of mailing.
5.5 When to Sack
A sack must be prepared when the quantity of mail for a required
presort destination reaches either 125 pieces or 15 pounds of pieces,
whichever occurs first, subject to these conditions:
a. For identical-weight pieces, a single-piece weight of 1.92
ounces (0.12 pound) results in 125 pieces weighing 15 pounds.
Identical-weight pieces weighing 1.92 ounces (0.12 pound) or less must
be prepared using the 125-piece minimum, those that weigh more must be
prepared using the 15-pound minimum.
b. For nonidentical-weight pieces, mailers must either use the
minimum that applies to the average piece weight for the entire mailing
(divide the net weight of the mailing by the number of pieces; the
resulting average single-piece weight determines whether the 125-piece
or 15-pound minimum applies) or sack by the actual piece count or mail
weight for each sack, if documentation can be provided with the mailing
that shows (specifically for each sack) the number of pieces and their
total weight.
c. Mailers must note on the accompanying mailing statement whether
they applied the 125-piece (``PCS'') or 15-pound (``WT'') threshold or
if the method in 5.5b (``BOTH'') was used.
5.6 Drop Shipment
Mailers who use Priority Mail or Express Mail to drop ship Standard
Mail (A) may prepare sacks containing fewer than 125 pieces or less
than 15 pounds of mail.
5.7 Sack Size, Presort, and Labeling
Sack size (subject to 5.4 through 5.6), presort sequence, and
labeling:
a. 5-digit: As applicable:
(1) Flats or irregular parcels: required (125 pieces/15 pounds
minimum, smaller volume not permitted); use 5-digit ZIP Code
destination of packages for Line 1, preceded for military mail by the
correct prefixes under M031.
(2) Commingled machinable and irregular parcels: required at 10
pounds, smaller volume permitted; use 5-digit ZIP Code destination of
packages for Line 1, preceded for military mail by the correct prefixes
under M031.
b. 3-digit: required (125 pieces/15 pounds minimum, smaller volume
not permitted); use L002, Column A, for Line 1.
c. Entry SCF 3-digit(s): required (no minimum); use L002, Column A,
for Line 1.
d. ADC: required (125 pieces/15 pounds minimum, smaller volume not
permitted); use L004 for Line 1.
e. Mixed ADC: required (no minimum) ; for Line 1, use MXD, followed
by the entry ADC facility city/state/ZIP shown in L004.
5.8 Line 2
Line 2: STD and:
a. 5-digit sacks of machinable and irregular parcels: 3C MACH AND
IRREG.
b. Sacks of commingled irregular parcels: 3C COMM IRREG.
c. All other sacks: FLTS or 3C IRREG (as appropriate).
d. Mixed ADC sacks: WKG.
e. As required by the applicable labeling list, Line 2 processing
code information must be right-justified under the ZIP Code on Line 1.
6.0 REGULAR RATE MACHINABLE PARCELS
6.1 5-Digit Sacks
Five-digit sacks containing both machinable and irregular parcels
must be prepared under 5.0. Each possible 5-digit sack must be prepared
in any mailing including pieces claimed at the \3/5\ rate. If each
possible 5-digit sack is not prepared when there are 10 pounds or more
of mail for that destination, the \3/5\ rate may not be claimed for any
part of the mailing.
6.2 Sack Size, Presort, and Labeling
Sack size, presort sequence, and labeling:
a. 5-digit: optional at 10 pounds except under 6.1; use 5-digit ZIP
Code destination of pieces for Line 1, preceded for military mail by
the correct prefixes under M031.
b. Destination ASF: required for DBMC rate only (10 pounds minimum,
smaller volume not permitted); use L602 for Line 1.
c. Destination BMC: required (10 pounds minimum, smaller volume not
permitted); use L602 if DBMC rate is claimed; otherwise, use L601 for
Line 1.
d. Mixed BMC: required (no minimum); use L601 to show entry BMC for
Line 1.
6.3 Line 2
Line 2: STD 3C MACH and:
a. Mixed BMC sacks: MIXED BMC.
b. As required by the applicable labeling list, Line 2 processing
code information must be right-justified under the ZIP Code on Line 1.
7.0 BEDLOADED BUNDLES OF REGULAR RATE FLAT-SIZE PIECES
7.1 Authorization
The RCSC manager serving the post office where the mailing is to be
made may authorize preparation of Regular Standard Mail (A) in bundles
outside mail sacks if this preparation benefits the USPS. Generally,
authorization is approved only when the number of bundles is not more
than the number of sacks that would otherwise be used in a mailing. The
mailer or agent must submit an application for each product that states
the name of the mailer, the frequency of mailing, the post offices to
which shipments are to be made, and the approximate numbers of copies
and of bundles to be deposited at each office. The RCSC manager rules
on the application and informs the applicant in writing. If an
authorization is approved, the publisher or agent must be prepared to
provide information for future mailings, similar to that required in
the original application if requested by the RCSC manager.
Authorization is approved for a specific period, not to exceed 2 years.
Authorizations to bundle instead of sack may be revoked when it is
determined that the preparation method no longer benefits the USPS.
7.2 Documentation
Documentation must be provided under 2.3, applying those standards
to bundles rather than sacks.
[[Page 66679]]
7.3 Package Preparation
Package size for all presort levels: two-piece minimum, 20-pound
maximum. Presort sequence and labeling of packages are subject to 5.0.
7.4 Bundle Preparation
Bundle size for all presort levels: two packages/20 pounds/1,000
cubic inches minimum, 40 pounds maximum; smaller bundles not permitted.
Presort sequence is subject to 5.0. Five-digit bundles must contain
pieces with the correct optional endorsement line or have a red Label
D. Other bundles must be labeled with facing slips that have similar
information to that required for sack labels. Packages too large to be
placed in a bundle do not require a facing slip.
7.5 Physical Characteristics
Bundles must be machinable by USPS sack-sorting equipment, unless
they consist of pieces for entry and delivery in the same SCF service
area. Machinability might be improved by cross-strapping and using
heavy-gauge shrinkwrap or stretchwrap on each bundle. Bundles entered
and delivered in the same SCF service area must be securely bound to
withstand normal handling without breakage or injury to USPS employees
or damage to mechanized sorting systems. Binding material must be
applied at least once around both the length and girth. Wire and metal
strapping are prohibited.
M620 Enhanced Carrier Route Standard Mail (A)
1.0 BASIC STANDARDS
1.1 All Mailings
All Enhanced Carrier Route rate mailings are subject to these
general standards:
a. Each mailing must meet the applicable standards in E632 and M010
through M030.
b. All pieces must be in the same processing category.
c. All pieces must be presorted together and prepared under M620,
unless palletized under M045.
d. Sortation determines rate eligibility; pieces not claimed at or
not eligible for the High Density or Saturation rates must be claimed
at the Basic Carrier Route rate.
e. Subject to M012, all pieces must be marked ``STD'' (or
``Standard''), ``ECR'' (or ``Enhanced Carrier Route''). In addition,
Basic, High Density, and Saturation rate pieces must each be marked
``LOT,'' ``WSH,'' or ``WSS,'' respectively, after the ECR marking
(e.g., ``ECRWSS''), in the correct optional endorsement line under
M013, or in the correct carrier route information line under M014.
Pieces not claimed at the corresponding rate must not bear the ``LOT,''
``WSH,'' or ``WSS'' marking.
f. Subject to 1.2, letter-size pieces must be prepared in trays
and, unless palletized, flat-size pieces must be prepared in sacks.
g. Postmasters may authorize preparation of small volume mailings
in nonpostal containers if they consist primarily of packages for local
ZIP Codes, do not exceed 20 pounds, and do not require postal
transportation for processing.
1.2 Preparation Category
Pieces of Standard Mail (A) that, by size, could qualify for an
Automation rate as either a letter or a flat, and that are prepared as
palletized flats at Enhanced Carrier Route rates, may be prepared as
palletized flats at Regular nonletter rates as well if the number of
Regular nonletter rate pieces does not exceed 10% of the total number
of pieces in the entire mailing job (regardless of rate).
1.3 High Density and Saturation Rates
Mailpieces for which the High Density or Saturation rate is claimed
must be prepared as a carrier route mailing under this section and the
walk-sequencing standards in M050. Pieces prepared with a simplified
address must also meet the corresponding standards.
1.4 Documentation
Documentation is subject to the general standards in P012. At the
time a mailing is submitted for presort and postage verification, the
mailer must submit a list of the number of pieces qualifying for each
Enhanced Carrier Route rate claimed by 5-digit ZIP Code and, within
each, by carrier route. Additional documentation is required under M050
for the High Density and Saturation rates. After the first mailing, the
postmaster may authorize the mailer to keep the records and submit them
on request. The mailer must keep these records for 90 days after the
mailing date, or until any action pending on the recalculation of
postage is resolved to the USPS''s satisfaction.
2.0 PACKAGE PREPARATION
2.1 General
Only carrier route packages are prepared. ``Carrier route''
includes city carrier routes, rural routes, highway contract routes,
post office box sections, and general delivery units. Packages are not
required in full carrier route trays.
2.2 Package Size and Labeling
Package size: carrier route; required (10-piece minimum, fewer not
permitted). Carrier route package labels are based on the level of sack
or tray in which placed:
a. No label is required if the package is placed in a correctly
labeled carrier route tray or sack.
b. Packages in 5-digit carrier routes trays and sacks must have a
facing slip unless the pieces in the package show a carrier route
information line. Optional endorsement lines may be used instead of
carrier information lines or facing slips.
2.3 Walk-Sequence Mail
A facing slip with the phrase ``WALK-SEQUENCED CARRIER ROUTE MAIL''
may be placed on the top of each package of walk-sequence mail. It may
be an address label with the required information placed on a sample
mailpiece that is the top piece in the package, or a separate piece of
paper affixed to the top of the package. A facing slip does not satisfy
the marking on each piece required by 1.1e.
3.0 TRAY PREPARATION''LETTER-SIZE PIECES
3.1 Tray Size, Presort, and Labeling
Tray size, presort sequence, and labeling:
a. Carrier route: required full tray; no overflow; use 5-digit ZIP
Code destination of packages for Line 1, preceded for military mail by
the correct prefixes under M031.
b. 5-digit carrier routes: required (no minimum); use 5-digit ZIP
Code destination of packages for Line 1, preceded for military mail by
the correct prefixes under M031.
3.2 Line 2
Line 2: STD LTRS and:
a. Basic Carrier Route trays: ECRLOT, route type and number.
b. High Density trays: ECRWSH, route type and number.
c. Saturation trays: ECRWSS, route type and number.
d. 5-digit carrier routes trays: CR-RTS.
4.0 SACK PREPARATION--OTHER PIECES
4.1 When to Sack
A sack must be prepared when the quantity of mail for a required
presort destination reaches either 125 pieces or 15 pounds of pieces,
whichever occurs first, subject to these conditions:
a. For identical-weight pieces, a single-piece weight of 1.92
ounces (0.12 pound) results in 125 pieces weighing 15 pounds.
Identical-weight pieces
[[Page 66680]]
weighing 1.92 ounces (0.12 pound) or less must be prepared using the
125-piece minimum, those that weigh more must be prepared using the 15-
pound minimum.
b. For nonidentical-weight pieces, mailers must either use the
minimum that applies to the average piece weight for the entire mailing
(divide the net weight of the mailing by the number of pieces; the
resulting average single-piece weight determines whether the 125-piece
or 15-pound minimum applies) or sack by the actual piece count or mail
weight for each sack, if documentation can be provided with the mailing
that shows (specifically for each sack) the number of pieces and their
total weight.
c. Mailers must note on the accompanying mailing statement whether
they applied the 125-piece (``PCS'') or 15-pound (``WT'') threshold or
if the method in 4.1b (``BOTH'') was used.
4.2 Sack Size, Presort, and Labeling
Sack size, presort sequence, and labeling:
a. Carrier route: required (125 pieces/15 pound minimum, smaller
volume not permitted); use 5-digit ZIP Code destination of packages for
Line 1, preceded for military mail by the correct prefixes under M031.
b. 5-digit carrier routes: required (no minimum); use 5-digit ZIP
Code destination of packages for Line 1, preceded for military mail by
the correct prefixes under M031.
4.3 Line 2
Line 2: STD, FLTS or 3C IRREG (as appropriate), and:
a. Basic Carrier Route sacks: ECRLOT, route type and number.
b. High Density sacks: ECRWSH, route type and number.
c. Saturation sacks: ECRWSS, route type and number.
d. 5-digit carrier routes sacks: CR-RTS.
5.0 RESIDUAL MAIL
Pieces not presorted under 2.0 and either 3.0 or 4.0 must be
prepared as a separate mailing at Regular or Automation Standard Mail
rates.
6.0 BEDLOADED BUNDLES
6.1 Authorization
The RCSC manager serving the post office where the mailing is to be
made may authorize preparation of Enhanced Carrier Route Standard Mail
in bundles outside mail sacks if this preparation benefits the USPS.
Generally, authorization is approved only when the number of bundles is
not more than the number of sacks that would otherwise be used in a
mailing. The mailer or agent must submit an application for each
product that states the name of the mailer, the frequency of mailing,
the post offices to which shipments are to be made, and the approximate
numbers of copies and of bundles to be deposited at each office. The
RCSC manager rules on the application and informs the applicant in
writing. If an authorization is approved, the publisher or agent must
be prepared to provide information for future mailings, similar to that
required in the original application if requested by the RCSC manager.
Authorization is approved for a specific period, not to exceed 2 years.
Authorizations to bundle instead of sack may be revoked when it is
determined that the preparation method no longer benefits the USPS.
6.2 Documentation
Documentation meeting the standards in P012 must be provided for
all mailings paid with a permit imprint, in which all pieces do not
bear the correct postage, or in which pieces are of nonidentical
weight.
6.3 Package Preparation
Package size for all presort levels: two-piece minimum, 20-pound
maximum. Presort sequence and labeling of packages are subject to 2.0.
6.4 Bundle Preparation
Bundle size for all presort levels: two packages/20 pounds/1,000
cubic inches minimum, 40 pounds maximum; smaller bundles not permitted.
Presort sequence is subject to 4.0. Five-digit bundles must contain
pieces with the correct optional endorsement line or have a red Label
D. Packages too large to be placed in a bundle do not require a facing
slip.
6.5 Physical Characteristics
Bundles must be machinable by USPS sack-sorting equipment, unless
they consist of pieces for entry and delivery in the same SCF service
area. Machinability might be improved by cross-strapping and using
heavy-gauge shrinkwrap or stretchwrap on each bundle. Bundles entered
and delivered in the same SCF service area must be securely bound to
withstand normal handling without breakage or injury to USPS employees
or damage to mechanized sorting systems. Binding material must be
applied at least once around both the length and girth. Wire and metal
strapping are prohibited.
M630 Standard Mail (B)
1.0 PARCEL POST
1.1 Marking
Pieces mailed at the single-piece parcel post rates do not require
a marking. Each piece mailed at the bulk parcel post rates must be
marked ``Bulk Parcel Post'' or ``Bulk PP.'' Each piece mailed at the
DBMC parcel post rates must be marked ``DBMC Parcel Post'' or ``DBMC
PP.'' If postage for the piece is paid with a permit imprint and the
office of mailing is in a different 3-digit ZIP Code area from the post
office in the return address, the 5-digit ZIP Code or the 3-digit ZIP
Code prefix of the office of mailing must be included in the indicia or
incorporated in the required marking (e.g., ``DBMC PP 011'' or ``DBMC
Parcel Post Mailed From 01101''). Pieces not clearly marked as required
are treated as single-piece rate parcel post and subject to additional
postage as necessary.
1.2 Separation
DBMC and bulk parcel post pieces must be separated by zones when
presented unless either the correct postage is affixed to each piece or
the mailing is prepared under 8.0. For mailings prepared in sacks,
pieces for more than one zone may not be placed in the same sack, and
sacks must be separated by zone when presented to the USPS.
2.0 BOUND PRINTED MATTER
2.1 Basic Standards
There are no presort, sacking, or labeling requirements for single-
piece rate bound printed matter. All bulk rate bound printed matter
must be prepared under the standards in 2.5 and 2.6, except for carrier
route presort rate bound printed matter, machinable pieces, bedloaded
bundles, and palletized pieces and bundles subject to 3.0, 6.0, 7.0,
and M045, respectively.
2.2 Separation
Mailpieces must be separated by zones when presented unless either
the correct postage is affixed to each piece or the mailing is prepared
under 8.0. Pieces for more than one zone may not be placed in the same
bundle or sack, and bundles and sacks must be separated by zone when
presented.
2.3 Marking
Each piece claimed at single-piece bound printed matter rates must
be marked ``Bound Printed Matter.'' Each piece of bound printed matter
claimed at bulk bound printed matter rates must be marked ``Bound
Printed Matter'' and
[[Page 66681]]
``Bulk Rate'' or ``Blk. Rt.'' Pieces not clearly marked as required are
treated as single-piece rate parcel post and subject to additional
postage as necessary.
2.4 Catalogs
In addition to marking under 2.3, catalogs must be marked ``CATALOG
RATE'' or ``CATALOG.'' For this standard, a ``catalog'' is bound
printed matter consisting entirely of advertising. ``Advertising''
includes all material for the publication of which a valuable
consideration is paid, accepted, or promised, which calls attention to
something for getting people to buy it, seek it, sell it, or support
it. Public service advertisements for which no consideration is paid
are not advertising for postal purposes. Advertising includes:
a. Reading matter or other material, for the publication of which
an advertising rate is charged.
b. Articles, items, and notices that are reading matter inserted by
a custom or understanding that textual matter is to be inserted for the
advertiser or the advertiser''s products in the publication where a
display advertisement appears.
c. Material in a publication advertising its own services or
issues, or any other business (or products or services) of its
publisher, whether display advertising or editorial or reading matter.
2.5 Sack Size, Presort, and Labeling
Sack size, presort sequence, and labeling:
a. 5-digit: required at 10 pieces/20 pounds/1,000 cubic inches;
smaller volume permitted; use 5-digit ZIP Code destination of packages
for Line 1, preceded for military mail by the correct prefixes under
M031.
b. 3-digit: required at 10 pieces/20 pounds/1,000 cubic inches;
smaller volume permitted; use L002, Column A, for Line 1.
c. Entry SCF 3-digit(s): required (no minimum); use L002, Column A,
for Line 1.
d. SCF: optional (10 pieces/20 pounds/1,000 cubic inches minimum;
smaller volume not permitted); use L002, Column B, for Line 1.
e. ADC: optional (no minimum); use L004 for Line 1.
f. Mixed ADC: required (no minimum); for Line 1, use MXD followed
by the entry ADC facility city/state/ZIP shown in L004.
2.6 Line 2
Line 2: STD 4C, FLATS or IRREG (as applicable), and:
a. Mixed ADC sacks: WKG.
b. As required by the applicable labeling list, Line 2 processing
code information must be right-justified under the ZIP Code on Line 1.
3.0 CARRIER ROUTE BOUND PRINTED MATTER
3.1 Preparation
Carrier route rate bound printed matter must be prepared under the
standards in 3.5 through 3.8, unless prepared as machinable pieces,
bedloaded bundles, or palletized under 6.0, 7.0, and M045,
respectively.
3.2 Documentation
Documentation is subject to the general standards in P012. At the
time a mailing is submitted for presort and postage verification, the
mailer must submit a list of the number of qualifying and residual
pieces for each by 5-digit ZIP Code and, within each, by carrier route.
After the first mailing, the postmaster may authorize the mailer to
keep the records and submit them on request. The mailer must keep these
records for 90 days after the mailing date, or until any action pending
on the recalculation of postage is resolved to the USPS''s
satisfaction.
3.3 Marking
Each piece claimed at carrier route bulk bound printed matter rates
must be marked ``Bound Printed Matter Blk. Rt.'' and ``Carrier Route
Presort'' or ``CAR-RT SORT.'' In addition, catalogs must be marked
``CATALOG RATE'' or ``CATALOG.'' Catalog is defined in 2.4. Residual
pieces in a carrier route bulk bound printed matter mailing may have
the ``Carrier Route Presort'' or ``CAR-RT SORT'' marking if the number
of residual pieces to any single 5-digit ZIP Code area does not exceed
5% of the total qualifying carrier route rate pieces addressed to that
5-digit area. The residual pieces must be separated from the qualifying
pieces when presented to the USPS. Pieces not clearly marked as
required are treated as single-piece rate parcel post and subject to
additional postage as necessary.
3.4 Package Preparation
``Carrier route'' includes city carrier routes, rural routes,
highway contract routes, post office box sections, and general delivery
units. Packages must meet the applicable basic standards in M020.
3.5 Package Size, Presort, and Labeling
Package size, presort sequence, and labeling: Carrier route;
required (10 pieces/20 pounds/1,000 cubic inches minimum, smaller
packages not permitted); facing slip required unless the pieces in the
package show a carrier route information line.
3.6 Sack Size, Presort, and Labeling
Sack size, presort sequence, and labeling:
a. Carrier route: optional (10 pieces/20 pounds/1,000 cubic inches
minimum, smaller volume not permitted); use 5-digit destination of
packages for Line 1, preceded for military mail by the correct prefixes
under M031.
b. 5-digit carrier routes: required (no minimum); use 5-digit ZIP
Code destination of packages for Line 1, preceded for military mail by
the correct prefixes under M031.
3.7 Line 2
Line 2: STD 4C, FLTS or IRREG (as applicable), and:
a. Carrier route sacks: route type and number.
b. 5-digit carrier routes sacks: CARRIER ROUTES.
3.8 Residual Pieces
Residual mail not presorted under 3.5 through 3.7 may be prepared
in packages of fewer than 10 pieces each for individual carrier routes.
Residual pieces must be sacked under 2.0. Residual pieces may be
included in a carrier route presort rate mailing with the ``Carrier
Route Presort'' or ``CAR-RT SORT'' marking if postage is paid at the
applicable bulk bound printed matter rate. These pieces must be
separated from the qualifying carrier route rate pieces when presented
to the USPS. The number of residual pieces endorsed ``Carrier Route
Presort'' or ``CAR-RT SORT'' addressed to any single 5-digit ZIP Code
area must not exceed 5% of the total qualifying presorted carrier route
pieces addressed to that 5-digit area.
4.0 SPECIAL STANDARD MAIL
4.1 Basic Standards
There are no presort, sacking, or labeling requirements for single-
piece Special Standard Mail. Presorted Special Standard Mail matter
must be prepared subject to 4.3 through 4.5, unless prepared as
machinable pieces, bedloaded bundles, or palletized, subject to 6.0,
7.0, and M045, respectively. Mailings of nonmachinable (outside) pieces
eligible for the presort rates must be prepared to preserve the
required presort as instructed by the postmaster of the office of
mailing.
4.2 Marking
Each piece claimed at Special Standard Mail single-piece rates must
be marked ``Special Standard Mail.'' Each piece claimed at Presorted
Special
[[Page 66682]]
Standard Mail rates must be marked ``Presorted Special Standard Mail.''
Pieces not clearly marked as required are treated as single-piece
parcel post and subject to additional postage as necessary.
4.3 Sack or Bundle Preparation (5-Digit Rate)
Sack or bundle size, presort sequence, and labeling: 5-digit
(only); required (eight pieces/20 pounds/1,000 cubic inches minimum,
smaller volume not permitted); 20-pound maximum for bundles; no label
required on bundles; on sacks use 5-digit ZIP Code destination of
pieces for Line 1, preceded for military mail by the correct prefixes
under M031.
4.4 Sack Preparation (BMC Rate)
Sack size, presort sequence, and labeling: destination BMC (only);
required (four pieces/20 pounds/1,000 cubic inches minimum, smaller
volume not permitted); use L601 for Line 1.
4.5 Line 2
Line 2: STD 4C and processing category. As required by the labeling
list, Line 2 processing code information must be right-justified under
the ZIP Code on Line 1.
5.0 LIBRARY MAIL
5.1 Basic Standards
There are no presort, sacking, or labeling requirements for single-
piece Library Mail, except that, if 1,000 or more identical-weight
Library Mail pieces are mailed during a single day, they must be
presorted and sacked under 2.0 unless prepared as machinable parcels or
palletized subject to 6.0 or M045, respectively.
5.2 Marking
Each piece of Library Mail must be marked ``Library Rate'' or
``Library Mail.'' Pieces not clearly marked as required are treated as
single-piece parcel post and subject to additional postage as
necessary.
6.0 MACHINABLE PARCELS
6.1 Basic Standards
All Standard Mail (B) machinable parcels must be prepared in sacks
under 6.2 unless palletized under M045. Parcel post or bound printed
matter pieces must be separated by zones when presented unless either
the correct postage is affixed to each piece or the mailing is prepared
under 8.0. Pieces for more than one zone may not be placed in the same
bundle or sack, and bundles and sacks must be separated by zone when
presented.
6.2 Sack Size, Presort, and Labeling
Sack size, presort sequence, and labeling:
a. 5-digit: required (10 pieces/20 pounds/1,000 cubic inches
minimum, smaller volume not permitted); use 5-digit ZIP Code
destination of pieces for Line 1, preceded for military mail by the
correct prefixes under M031.
b. ASF: allowed and required only if DBMC rate is claimed for mail
deposited at ASF; 10 pieces/20 pounds/1,000 cubic inches minimum,
smaller volume not permitted; use L602 for Line 1.
c. Destination BMC: required (10 pieces/20 pounds/1,000 cubic
inches minimum, smaller volume not permitted); use L601 (L602 if DBMC
rate claimed) for Line 1.
d. Mixed BMC: required (no minimum); use L601 to show entry BMC for
Line 1.
6.3 Line 2
Line 2: STD 4C MACH and:
a. Mixed BMC sacks: MIXED BMC.
b. As required by the applicable labeling list, Line 2 processing
code information must be right-justified under the ZIP Code on Line 1.
7.0 BOUND PRINTED MATTER AS BEDLOADED BUNDLES
7.1 Authorization
The RCSC manager serving the post office where the mailing is to be
made may authorize preparation of bound printed matter meeting the
applicable standards in 2.0 or 3.0 in bundles outside mail sacks if
this preparation benefits the USPS. Generally, authorization is
approved only when the number of bundles is not more than the number of
sacks that would otherwise be used in a mailing. The mailer or agent
must submit an application for each product that states the name of the
mailer, the frequency of mailing, the post offices to which shipments
are to be made, and the approximate numbers of copies and bundles to be
deposited at each office. The RCSC manager rules on the application and
informs the applicant in writing. If an authorization is approved, the
publisher or agent must be prepared to provide information for future
mailings, similar to that required on the original application, if
requested by the RCSC manager. Authorization is approved for a specific
period, not to exceed 2 years. Authorizations to bundle instead of sack
can be revoked when it is determined that the preparation method no
longer benefits the USPS.
7.2 Separation
Unless prepared under 8.0, pieces for more than one zone may not be
placed in the same package or bundle, and packages and bundles must be
separated by zone when presented to the USPS.
7.3 Package Preparation
Packages must meet the applicable basic standards in M020. Package
size: two-piece minimum, 20-pound maximum. Presort sequence and
labeling of packages are subject to 2.0 or 3.0, as applicable for the
rate claimed.
7.4 Bundle Preparation
Bundles must meet the applicable basic standards in M020. Bundles
must be machinable by USPS sack-sorting equipment, unless they consist
of pieces for entry and delivery in the same SCF service area.
Machinability can be improved by cross-strapping and using heavy-gauge
shrinkwrap or stretchwrap on each bundle. Bundles entered and delivered
in the same SCF service area must be securely bound to withstand normal
handling without breakage or injury to USPS employees or damage to
mechanized sorting systems. Binding material must be applied at least
once around both the length and girth. Wire and metal strapping are
prohibited.
7.5 Bundle Size, Presort, and Labeling
Bundle size, presort sequence, and labeling: For all presort
levels: two packages/20 pounds/1,000 cubic inches minimum, 40 pounds
maximum; smaller bundles not permitted. Presort sequence is same as
sacks under 2.0 or 3.0, as applicable for the rate claimed. Bundles
other than carrier route and 5-digit bundles must be labeled with
facing slips that have similar information to that required for sack
labels. A facing slip is not required on carrier route bundles. The 5-
digit bundles must contain pieces with the correct optional endorsement
line or have a red Label D. Packages too large to be placed in a bundle
do not require a facing slip. Optional endorsement lines may be used
instead of facing slips on other than mixed states bundles, subject to
M013.
8.0 COMMINGLING ZONES
Zone-rated Standard Mail pieces need not be separated by zones when
presented other than as individual pieces or with full correct postage
affixed to each piece, subject to the applicable conditions of this
section. Nonidentical-weight pieces not bearing the full correct
postage may not be commingled unless authorized by the RCSC manager
serving the office of mailing. These provisions also apply to
[[Page 66683]]
bundles of bound printed matter regardless of whether the bundles are
bedloaded, sacked, or palletized. The mail must be prepared and
documented:
a. Under P710 or P730; or
b. Under all these conditions:
(1) A unique number is assigned to each sack/pallet in the mailing
and printed on a separate line at the top of the sack/pallet label
(above the Line 1 information on bound printed matter).
(2) For bound printed matter and all palletized mailings, Line 2 of
the sack/pallet label for each sack/pallet that contains mail for more
than one zone also shows ``MIXED ZONES'' and the zone numbers (e.g.,
``STD FLATS MIXED ZONES 2 & 3'').
(3) A detailed list accompanies each mailing or mailing segment,
sequenced numerically by the numbers assigned to sacks/pallets in the
mailing, that shows the post office where the mail is to be entered
(entry post office), a unique identifier for the mailing or mailing
segment that also appears on the corresponding mailing statement(s),
the name and address of the mailer, the permit number (if applicable),
the date of mailing, individual line entries for each sack/pallet, and
the total number of pieces to each zone and in the entire mailing or
mailing segment. Line entries for sacks/pallets containing mail for
only one zone must show the sack/pallet number, the level of sortation,
the zone for which the mail is destined, and the total number of pieces
for the sack/pallet. Entries for sacks/pallets containing mail for more
than one zone must also show (by zone) the number of pieces to each 3-
digit ZIP Code area and the total number of pieces for that zone for
the sack/pallet. Mailings are not accepted if there are discrepancies
between the information in the detailed listing or on the mailing
statement and the results of USPS random verification of piece counts
and postage.
M690 Nonprofit Standard Mail
M692 Basic and 3/5 Presort
[Text of current M302, except in 1.2 and 3.3, replace ``bulk third-
class'' with ``Nonprofit Standard Mail (A)''; delete 1.3 and 1.5, and
renumber succeeding sections accordingly; in renumbered 1.8a and 2.1,
delete ``or optional city,'' delete 2.2c, 2.3c, 3.4b, 3.5b, and 3.6b
and reletter succeeding sections accordingly; in 3.6, replace ``3C''
with ``STD''; and in 3.6a and 3.6b, insert ``3C'' before ``MACH.'' In
2.2f, 2.3f, 3.4e, 3.5e, and 3.5g, replace ``SDC'' with ``ADC''; in
2.3f, replace ``orange Label S'' with ``pink Label A''; in 3.5g,
replace ``L706 or L707, as applicable'' with ``use L004''; delete
current 3.6d, redesignate 3.6e and 3.6f as 3.6d and 3.6e, respectively,
and revise redesignated 3.6d to read ``Mixed ADC sacks: WKG''; delete
2.2g, 2.3g, 3.4f, and 3.5f; redesignate 2.2h, 2.3h, 3.4g, and 3.5g as
2.2g, 2.3g, 3.4f, and 3.5f, respectively, and replace ``Mixed states''
with ``Mixed ADC.'']
M693 Carrier Route
[Text of current M303, except in 1.2 and 3.3, replace ``bulk third-
class'' with ``Nonprofit Standard Mail (A)''; delete 1.3 and 1.5, and
renumber succeeding sections accordingly; and in 3.6, replace ``3C''
with ``STD.'']
M695 Machinable Parcels
[Text of current M305, except in 2.4, replace ``3C'' with ``STD 3C.'']
M696 Irregular Parcels
[Text of current M306, except in 1.5, replace ``bulk third-class'' with
``Nonprofit Standard Mail (A)''; and in 3.0, replace ``3C'' with ``STD
3C.'']
M697 Bedloaded Bundles
[Text of current M307, except in 1.2, replace ``third-class mail'' with
``Nonprofit Standard Mail (A).'']
M698 Combined Mailings of Nonprofit Standard Mail (A) and Standard
Mail (B) Machinable Parcels
[Text of current M073. In 1.1, replace ``third-class and fourth-class''
with ``Nonprofit Standard Mail (A) and Standard Mail (B)''; in 1.2,
replace ``third- or fourth-class'' with ``Nonprofit Standard Mail (A)
or Standard Mail (B)'' and delete ``class or''; in 1.6 and 1.7, replace
``class'' with ``category''; in 1.7, replace ``third- and fourth-
class'' with ``Nonprofit Standard Mail (A) and Standard Mail (B)
pieces''; in 1.7, replace ``third- and fourth-class'' with ``Nonprofit
Standard Mail (A) and Standard Mail (B)''; and in 3.3, replace ``3C/
4C'' with ``STD 3C/4C.'']
M800 Automation-Compatible Mail
[Move current M810-M820 contents to M890 and renumber and revise as
shown below to apply only to Preferred Periodicals and Nonprofit
Standard Mail (A). For Automation First-Class and Standard Mail (A) and
Barcoded rate Regular and automation-compatible Publications Service
Periodicals, add new M810 (replacing M814 through M816) and M820
(replacing M823), as follows; (M812, M813, M817, M818, M819, M825, and
M827 are deleted for these subclasses).]
M810 Letter-Size Mail--(Except Preferred Periodicals and Nonprofit
Standard Mail)
1.0 BASIC STANDARDS
1.1 Standards
Letter-size Automation First-Class, Barcoded rate Regular and
automation-compatible Publications Service Periodicals, and Automation
Standard Mail must be prepared under M810, subject to the basic
eligibility standards applicable to the rate claimed. Presort,
labeling, and package and tray preparation are subject to the general
standards in M010 through M030. All pieces in a mailing must be in the
same processing category and must be presorted together to the finest
extent required. Firm packages may not be included in mailings prepared
under M810.
1.2 Marking
First-Class pieces must be marked ``First-Class.'' Standard Mail
must be marked either ``STD'' or ``Standard.'' In addition, Carrier
Route rate pieces must be marked ``AUTOCR,'' and pieces at other rates
must be marked ``AUTO.'' No markings are required on Periodicals
pieces.
1.3 Grouping, Packaging, Labeling
Grouping, packaging, and labeling are not generally required, with
these exceptions:
a. Pieces must be packaged to preserve orientation in overflow and
less-than-full trays and in any mailing consisting entirely of card-
size pieces.
b. Pieces must be grouped as specified below in 5-digit carrier
routes, AADC, and mixed AADC trays, and for Regular Periodicals.
c. Package labels are required only for Regular Periodicals.
1.4 Heavy Letter Mail
Each tray of heavy letter mail (as defined in C810) must be
identified by a flag (similar to a separator card) clearly marked
``HEAVY LETTER MAIL'' and placed in front of the contents of the tray.
Each pallet, general purpose mail container, or other equipment used to
transport trays of heavy letter mail must be labeled ``HEAVY LETTER
MAIL,'' in letters not less than 1/2 inch high on white or light-
colored stock not smaller than 8 by 11 inches, on two adjacent sides of
the pallet or other equipment.
1.5 Mixed Rates
A single mailing (e.g., Automation First-Class) may include pieces
prepared at all available rate levels (e.g., Carrier Route, 5-Digit, 3-
Digit, and
[[Page 66684]]
Basic); all may be reported on the same mailing statement and
documentation. No other combinations are permitted.
1.6 Availability of Carrier Route Rates
Preparation of mail to qualify for Automation Carrier Route rates
is optional for Automation First-Class and Standard Mail (A) and
Publications Service pieces, subject to the availability limitations in
E140, E232, and E641.
1.7 Scheme Sortation--Availability and Use
Scheme sortation is an option available for Automation First-Class,
Automation Standard Mail (A), and Publications Service pieces only, and
only for those ZIP Code prefix groups listed in L003. Scheme sortation
may be performed for only selected available destinations and may
include only pieces that could not be prepared in full 3-digit trays.
Scheme trays are considered 3-digit separations for rate eligibility,
subject to a single minimum volume and the applicable standards for the
rate claimed.
2.0 PREPARATION--FIRST-CLASS AND STANDARD MAIL (A)
2.1 Packaging/Grouping
No packaging is required in full trays. Grouping is required for
Carrier Route rate pieces and pieces in AADC and mixed AADC trays.
2.2 Grouping--Carrier Route Pieces
Grouping size, presort sequence, and labeling: carrier route
(only); required (10-piece minimum; fewer not permitted); use OEL or
carrier route information line. Group pieces by carrier route (using
separator cards under M020, not packaging) in full 5-digit carrier
routes trays.
2.3 Tray Size, Presort, and Labeling
Tray size, presort sequence, and labeling:
a. Carrier route: optional, but required for rate eligibility (full
trays); no overflow; use 5-digit ZIP Code destination of pieces for
Line 1, preceded for military mail by the correct prefixes under M031.
b. 5-digit carrier routes (carrier route pieces only): optional,
but required for rate eligibility (no minimum); overflow allowed; use
5-digit ZIP Code destination of pieces for Line 1, preceded for
military mail by the correct prefixes under M031.
c. 5-digit: optional, but required for rate eligibility (150-piece
minimum); overflow allowed; use 5-digit ZIP Code destination of pieces
for Line 1, preceded for military mail by the correct prefixes under
M031.
d. 3-digit/scheme: required (150-piece minimum); overflow allowed;
for Line 1, use L002, Column A (3-digit trays), or L003 (scheme trays),
as appropriate.
e. Entry SCF 3-digit(s): required (no minimum); use L002, Column A,
for Line 1.
f. AADC: required (150-piece minimum); overflow allowed; group
pieces by 3-digit ZIP Code prefix; use L804 for Line 1.
g. Mixed AADC: required (no minimum); group by AADC and, within
each, by 3-digit ZIP Code prefix; for Line 1, for First-Class Mail, use
MXD, followed by the entry 3-digit facility city/state/ZIP shown in
L002, Column A (use lowest ZIP in range) or, for Standard Mail, use
L805 (mail entered by the mailer at an ASF or BMC) or L806, as
appropriate.
2.4 Line 2
Line 2: FCM or STD (as appropriate), LTRS BC, and:
a. Carrier route trays: route type and number.
b. 5-digit carrier routes trays: CR-RTS.
c. For scheme trays: SCHEME.
d. For mixed AADC trays: WKG.
3.0 PREPARATION--PUBLICATIONS SERVICE
3.1 Packaging/Grouping
No packaging is required in full trays. Grouping is required for
Carrier Route rate pieces and pieces in AADC and mixed AADC trays.
3.2 Grouping--Carrier Route Pieces
Grouping size, presort sequence, and labeling: carrier route
(only); required (six-piece minimum; fewer not permitted); no label
required. Group pieces by carrier route (using separator cards under
M020, not packaging) in full 5-digit carrier routes trays.
3.3 Tray Size, Presort, and Labeling
Tray size, presort sequence, and labeling:
a. Carrier route: optional, but required for rate eligibility (full
trays); no overflow; use 5-digit ZIP Code destination of pieces for
Line 1, preceded for military mail by the correct prefixes under M031.
b. 5-digit carrier routes: optional, but required for rate
eligibility (no minimum); overflow allowed; use 5-digit ZIP Code
destination of pieces for Line 1, preceded for military mail by the
correct prefixes under M031.
c. 5-digit: optional, but required for rate eligibility (150-piece
minimum); overflow allowed; use 5-digit ZIP Code destination of pieces
for Line 1, preceded for military mail by the correct prefixes under
M031.
d. 3-digit/scheme: required (150-piece minimum); overflow allowed;
for Line 1, use L002, Column A (3-digit trays), or L003 (scheme trays),
as appropriate.
e. Entry SCF 3-digit(s): required (no minimum); use L002, Column A,
for Line 1.
f. AADC: required (150-piece minimum); overflow allowed; group
pieces by 3-digit ZIP Code prefix; use L804 for Line 1.
g. Mixed AADC: required (no minimum); group pieces by AADC; for
Line 1, use L805 (mail entered by the mailer at an ASF or BMC) or L806,
as appropriate.
3.4 Line 2
Line 2: PERIOD or NEWS (as appropriate), LTRS BC, and:
a. Carrier route trays: route type and number.
b. 5-digit carrier routes trays: CR-RTS.
c. For scheme trays: SCHEME.
d. For mixed AADC trays: WKG.
4.0 PREPARATION--REGULAR PERIODICALS
4.1 Packaging/Grouping, Presort, and Labeling
Pieces are grouped with separator cards but not packaged in full
trays. Grouping size, presort sequence, and labeling:
a. 5-digit: required (10-piece minimum, fewer not permitted); red
Label D or optional endorsement line (OEL).
b. 3-digit: required (50-piece minimum, fewer not permitted); green
Label 3 or OEL.
c. AADC: required (10-piece minimum, fewer not permitted); pink
Label A or OEL.
d. Mixed AADC: required (no minimum); tan Label MS or OEL.
4.2 Tray Size, Presort, and Labeling
Tray size, presort sequence, and labeling:
a. 5-digit: required (full trays); no overflow; use 5-digit ZIP
Code destination of pieces for Line 1, preceded for military mail by
the correct prefixes under M031.
b. 3-digit: required (full trays); no overflow; for Line 1, use
L002, Column A (3-digit trays), or L003 (scheme trays), as appropriate.
c. Entry SCF 3-digit(s): required (no minimum); use L002, Column A,
for Line 1.
d. AADC: required (full trays); no overflow; use L804 for Line 1.
e. Mixed AADC: required (no minimum); for Line 1, use L805 (mail
entered by the mailer at an ASF or BMC) or L806, as appropriate.
[[Page 66685]]
4.3 Line 2
Line 2: PERIOD or NEWS (as appropriate), LTRS BC, and, on mixed
AADC trays: WKG.
5.0 DOCUMENTATION
The mailer must be prepared to support information on mailing
statements with documentation meeting the standards in P012 that
describes the mailing in sufficient detail to allow verification of the
accompanying mailing''s compliance with applicable preparation and
eligibility standards. Combined mailings of Periodicals publications
must also be documented under M210. A complete, signed mailing
statement, using the correct USPS form or an approved facsimile, must
accompany each mailing.
M820 Flat-Size Mail--(Except Preferred Periodicals and Nonprofit
Standard Mail)
1.0 BASIC STANDARDS
1.1 Standards
Flat-size Automation First-Class, Barcoded rate Regular and
automation-compatible Publications Service Periodicals, and Automation
Standard Mail must be prepared under M820, subject to the basic
eligibility standards applicable to the rate claimed. Presort,
labeling, and package, sack, and tray preparation are subject to the
general standards in M010 through M030. All pieces in a mailing must be
in the same processing category and must be presorted together to the
finest extent required.
1.2 Packages
All pieces must be prepared in packages. When the pieces for a
presort destination must be prepared in more than one package or in
packages each with fewer pieces than the minimum required (because of
size or total number of pieces), rate eligibility is not affected if
the total number of pieces for that destination exceeds the applicable
minimum. Firm packages are allowed only in Publications Service
mailings.
1.3 Standard Mail (A)
Pieces of Standard Mail (A) that, by size, could qualify for an
Automation rate as either a letter or a flat, and that are prepared as
palletized flats at Automation rates for flats or at Enhanced Carrier
Route rates, may be prepared as palletized flats at Regular nonletter
rates as well if the number of Regular nonletter rate pieces does not
exceed 10% of the total number of pieces in the entire mailing job
(regardless of rate).
1.4 Marking
First-Class pieces must be marked ''First-Class'' and ''AUTO.''
Standard Mail must be marked either ''STD'' or ''Standard'' and
''AUTO.'' No markings are required on Periodicals pieces.
1.5 Other Rates
A single mailing (e.g., Automation First-Class) may include pieces
prepared at all available rate levels (e.g., 3/5 and Basic); all may be
reported on the same mailing statement and documentation. Other
combinations are permitted only when allowed by standard.
2.0 PREPARATION--FIRST-CLASS MAIL
2.1 Package Size, Presort, and Labeling
Package size, presort sequence, and labeling:
a. 5-digit: required (10-piece minimum, fewer not permitted); use
red Label D or optional endorsement line (OEL).
b. 3-digit: required (10-piece minimum, fewer not permitted); use
green Label 3 or OEL.
c. ADC: required (10-piece minimum, fewer not permitted); use pink
Label A or OEL.
d. Mixed ADC: required (no minimum); use tan Label MS or OEL.
2.2 Tray Preparation
Tray size, presort sequence, and labeling:
a. 5-digit: required full trays, no overflow; use 5-digit ZIP Code
destination of packages for Line 1, preceded for military mail by the
correct prefixes under M031.
b. 3-digit: required full trays, no overflow; use L002, Column A,
for Line 1.
c. Entry SCF 3-digit(s): required (no minimum); use L002, Column A,
for Line 1.
d. ADC: required full trays, no overflow; use L004 for Line 1.
e. Mixed ADC: required (no minimum); use MXD, followed by the entry
3-digit facility city/state/ZIP shown in L002, Column A (use lowest ZIP
in range) for Line 1.
2.3 Line 2
Line 2: FCM FLTS BC, and:
a. Mixed ADC sacks: WKG.
b. As required by the applicable labeling list, Line 2 processing
code information must be right-justified under the ZIP Code on Line 1.
3.0 PREPARATION--REGULAR PERIODICALS
3.1 Package Size, Presort, and Labeling
Package size, presort sequence, and labeling:
a. 5-digit: required (six-piece minimum, fewer not permitted); use
red Label D or optional endorsement line (OEL).
b. 3-digit: required (six-piece minimum, fewer not permitted); use
green Label 3 or OEL.
c. ADC: required (six-piece minimum, fewer not permitted); use pink
Label A or OEL.
d. Mixed ADC: required (no minimum); use tan Label MS or OEL.
3.2 Sack Preparation
Sack size, presort sequence, and labeling:
a. 5-digit: required at 24 pieces, optional with one six-piece
package minimum; use 5-digit ZIP Code destination of packages for Line
1, preceded for military mail by the correct prefixes under M031.
b. 3-digit: required at 24 pieces, optional with one six-piece
package minimum; use L002, Column A, for Line 1.
c. Entry SCF 3-digit(s): required (no minimum); use L002, Column A,
for Line 1.
d. ADC: required at 24 pieces, optional with one six-piece package
minimum; use L004 for Line 1.
e. Mixed ADC: required (no minimum); for Line 1, use L805 (mail
entered by the mailer at an ASF or BMC) or use MXD, followed by the
entry ADC facility city/state/ZIP shown in L004, as appropriate.
3.3 Line 2
Line 2: PERIOD or NEWS (as appropriate), FLTS BC, and:
a. Mixed ADC sacks: WKG.
b. As required by the applicable labeling list, Line 2 processing
code information must be right-justified under the ZIP Code on Line 1.
4.0 PREPARATION--PUBLICATIONS SERVICE
4.1 Package Size, Presort, and Labeling
Package size, presort sequence, and labeling:
a. Firm: optional (two-piece minimum); use blue Label F or optional
endorsement line (OEL).
b. Carrier Route: optional (six-piece minimum, fewer not
permitted); use purple Label CR or OEL.
c. 5-digit: required (six-piece minimum, fewer not permitted); use
red Label D or OEL.
[[Page 66686]]
d. 3-digit: required (six-piece minimum, fewer not permitted); use
green Label 3 or OEL.
e. ADC: required (six-piece minimum, fewer not permitted); use pink
Label A or OEL.
f. Mixed ADC: required (no minimum); use tan Label MS or OEL.
4.2 Sack Preparation
Sack size, presort sequence, and labeling:
a. Carrier route: required for rate eligibility at 24 pieces,
optional with one six-piece package minimum; use 5-digit ZIP Code
destination of packages for Line 1, preceded for military mail by the
correct prefixes under M031.
b. 5-digit carrier routes: (carrier route packages only) required
for rate eligibility (no minimum); use 5-digit ZIP Code destination of
packages for Line 1, preceded for military mail by the correct prefixes
under M031.
c. 5-digit: required at 24 pieces, optional with one six-piece
package minimum; use 5-digit ZIP Code destination of packages for Line
1, preceded for military mail by the correct prefixes under M031.
d. 3-digit: required at 24 pieces, optional with one six-piece
package minimum; use L002, Column A, for Line 1.
e. Entry SCF 3-digit(s): required (no minimum); use L002, Column A,
for Line 1.
f. ADC: required at 24 pieces, optional with one six-piece package
minimum; use L004 for Line 1.
g. Mixed ADC: required (no minimum); for Line 1, use L805 (mail
entered by the mailer at an ASF or BMC) or use MXD, followed by the
entry ADC facility city/state/ZIP shown in L004, as appropriate.
4.3 Line 2
Line 2: PERIOD or NEWS (as appropriate), FLTS, and:
a. Carrier Route sacks: LOT (or WSH or WSS if applicable), route
type and number.
b. 5-digit carrier routes sacks: CR-RTS.
c. 5-digit, 3-digit, and ADC sacks: BC.
d. Mixed ADC sacks: BC WKG.
e. As required by the applicable labeling list, Line 2 processing
code information must be right-justified under the ZIP Code on Line 1.
5.0 PREPARATION--STANDARD MAIL
5.1 Package Size, Presort, and Labeling
Package size, presort sequence, and labeling:
a. 5-digit: required (10-piece minimum, fewer not permitted); use
red Label D or optional endorsement line (OEL).
b. 3-digit: required (10-piece minimum, fewer not permitted); use
green Label 3 or OEL.
c. ADC: required (10-piece minimum, fewer not permitted); use pink
Label A or OEL.
d. Mixed ADC: required (no minimum); use tan Label MS or OEL.
5.2 When to Sack
A sack must be prepared when the quantity of mail for a required
presort destination reaches either 125 pieces or 15 pounds of pieces,
whichever occurs first, subject to these conditions:
a. For identical-weight pieces, a single-piece weight of 1.92
ounces (0.12 pound) results in 125 pieces weighing 15 pounds.
Identical-weight pieces weighing 1.92 ounces (0.12 pound) or less must
be prepared using the 125-piece minimum, those that weigh more must be
prepared using the 15-pound minimum.
b. For nonidentical-weight pieces, mailers must either use the
minimum that applies to the average piece weight for the entire mailing
(divide the net weight of the mailing by the number of pieces; the
resulting average single-piece weight determines whether the 125-piece
or 15-pound minimum applies) or sack by the actual piece count or mail
weight for each sack, if documentation can be provided with the mailing
that shows (specifically for each sack) the number of pieces and their
total weight.
c. Mailers must note on the accompanying mailing statement whether
they applied the 125-piece (``PCS'') or 15-pound (``WT'') threshold or
if the method in 5.2b (``BOTH'') was used.
5.3 Sack Preparation
Sack size, presort sequence, and labeling:
a. 5-digit: required (125-piece/15-pound minimum, smaller volume
prohibited); use 5-digit ZIP Code destination of packages for Line 1,
preceded for military mail by the correct prefixes under M031.
b. 3-digit: required (125-piece/15-pound minimum, smaller volume
prohibited); use L002, Column A, for Line 1.
c. Entry SCF 3-digit(s): required (no minimum); use L002, Column A,
for Line 1.
d. ADC: required (125-piece/15-pound minimum, smaller volume
prohibited); use L004 for Line 1.
e. Mixed ADC: required (no minimum); for Line 1, use L805 (mail
entered by the mailer at an ASF or BMC) or use MXD, followed by the
entry ADC facility city/state/ZIP shown in L004, as appropriate.
5.4 Line 2
Line 2: STD FLTS BC and:
a. Mixed ADC sacks: WKG.
b. As required by the applicable labeling list, Line 2 processing
code information must be right-justified under the ZIP Code on Line 1.
6.0 DOCUMENTATION
The mailer must be prepared to support information on mailing
statements with documentation meeting the standards in P012 that
describes the mailing in sufficient detail to allow verification of the
accompanying mailing's compliance with applicable preparation and
eligibility standards. Combined mailings of Periodicals publications
must also be documented under M210. A complete, signed mailing
statement, using the correct USPS form or an approved facsimile, must
accompany each mailing.
M890 Preferred Periodicals and Nonprofit Standard Mail
M891 ZIP+4 Presort--Tray-Based Letter-Size Mailings
[Text of current M812, revised to apply only to Preferred Periodicals
publications and Nonprofit Standard Mail.]
1.0 BASIC STANDARDS
1.1 Standards
Preferred Periodicals and Nonprofit Standard Mail claimed at a
ZIP+4 presort rate must be prepared as a tray-based mailing under 1.2
through 1.7, 2.0, 4.0, and 5.0, or as a package-based mailing under
M892. Grouping, packaging, labeling, and traying are subject to M010
through M030.
1.2 Automated Sites
Mailings consisting entirely of pieces for the 3-digit areas listed
in L801 (``automated sites'') may be prepared under 3.0 rather than
2.0. Pieces for other ZIP Code areas must be prepared in a separate
mailing.
1.3 Grouping
Grouping is required for pieces for the same 3-digit ZIP Code
prefix in SCF trays and for pieces for the same AADC area in working
trays. Grouping by ZIP Code is not required in 5-digit, city, or 3-
digit trays.
1.4 Packaging
Packaging is required:
a. For mailings consisting entirely of pieces that qualify by size
for First-Class
[[Page 66687]]
card rates, regardless of the actual rate claimed or class of mail.
Package labels are required in less-than-full trays.
b. For mail in overflow AADC trays, in mixed AADC trays, and in a
less-than-full working tray. Appropriate package labels are required in
these trays.
1.5 No Packaging
Packaging may not be used for larger than card-size pieces, except
that:
a. Mail in overflow trays must be packaged and labeled correctly as
for the corresponding trays (mail in a less-than-full tray for the
entry SCF must be sorted and labeled as 3-digit packages).
b. Mail in AADC trays may be packaged, and mail in mixed AADC trays
must be packaged into AADC packages.
1.6 Marking
Standard Mail must be marked ``Nonprofit Organization'' or the
authorized abbreviation and may be marked ``ZIP+4'' or ``5-digit
ZIP+4'' (as appropriate). No marking is required on Periodicals.
1.7 Carrier Route
ZIP+4 rate mail and carrier route presort (or walk-sequence) rate
mail may not be included in the same mailing or reported on the same
mailing statement.
* * * * *
[In 2.2b and 2.3, replace ``second-class'' with ``Periodicals''; no
other change to 2.0 or 3.0. Revise succeeding sections as follows:]
4.0 RESIDUAL MAIL
Pieces remaining after packages and trays are prepared under 2.0 or
3.0 are residual (nonqualifying) mail. Residual Periodicals or Standard
Mail must be prepared as follows:
a. All pieces must be sorted by AADC area using L804 (or, for
automated site mailings, L803).
b. Quantities of 10 or more pieces for an AADC area must be
prepared as an AADC package (or, if possible, a full AADC tray).
Packaging is not required in full AADC trays. AADC packages of fewer
than 10 pieces are not permitted.
c. All AADC packages must be trayed in AADC or mixed AADC trays.
Pieces remaining after preparing full AADC trays and AADC packages must
be placed in separate working trays.
d. Pieces in less-than-full AADC overflow trays and in all mixed
AADC trays must be packaged and labeled as AADC packages using a pink
Label A or OEL. Separator cards are not permitted.
e. Pieces in working trays must be grouped by AADC area. Pieces in
a less-than-full working tray must be prepared in working packages up
to 6 inches thick making as few packages as possible without regard to
AADC breaks. Separator cards are not permitted. Label packages in less-
than-full working trays with either a facing slip marked ``WORKING'' or
``WKG'' or the optional endorsement line ``WORKING''.
f. A piece count listing must be provided for all residual pieces
that shows by tray level and AADC area (listed by numeric AADC code
from the labeling list in L804 or, for automated site mailings, L803)
the number of pieces eligible for each rate and the number of pieces
with and without a ZIP+4 code.
g. Tray size:
(1) AADC: required full trays; one less-than-full overflow tray
permitted per destination per mailing.
(2) Mixed AADC: required full trays; one less-than-full tray
permitted.
(3) Working: required full trays; one less-than-full tray
permitted.
h. Residual presort sequence and Line 1 labeling:
(1) AADC (required); use L804 (or, for automated site mailings,
L803) for Line 1.
(2) Mixed AADC (required); for Line 1 use MXD, followed by the
applicable entry SCF name, state, and SCF code from L002, Column A
(facilities identified with three bullets), or Column B, except use
L805 for mail entered by the mailer at an ASF or BMC.
(3) Working (required); for Line 1 use MXD, followed by the
applicable entry SCF name, state, and ZIP Code from L002, Column A
(facilities identified with three bullets), or Column B, except use
L805 for mail entered by the mailer at an ASF or BMC.
i. For Line 2: class (PERIOD or NEWS (as applicable), or STD),
followed by:
(1) For AADC trays: AADC ZIP+4 PRESORT.
(2) For mixed AADC trays: ZIP+4 PRESORT PKGS.
(3) For working trays: ZIP+4 WORKING or ZIP+4 WKG.
5.0 DOCUMENTATION
5.1 Mailing Statement
A complete, signed mailing statement, using the correct USPS form
or an approved facsimile, must accompany each mailing. The endorsement
``M891'' must be placed at the top and, as appropriate, ``Automated
Site'' (if prepared under 3.0).
* * * * *
5.4 Standards
Documentation must include residual pieces and meet the basic
standards in P012 and those below. Abbreviated documentation may be
provided under M896. Combined mailings of Periodicals publications must
also be documented under M210.
* * * * *
5.6 ZIP Code Option
Under the ZIP Code option, individual entries for each type of tray
destination must be listed sequentially by ZIP Code: by 5-digit ZIP
Code for 5-digit trays; by lowest assigned 5-digit ZIP Code for city
trays (Periodicals only); by 3-digit ZIP Code for 3-digit and SCF
trays; by the 3-digit AADC code (preceded by ``AADC'') in L804 (or L803
for automated sites) for AADC, mixed AADC, and working trays. Volume in
overflow trays must be included in the corresponding entry even though
there is a list of overflow trays.
5.7 Tray Label Option
Under the tray label option, individual entries for each tray must
be listed sequentially by the unique tray number on each label or by
Line 1 on the label. The contents of each overflow tray is reported as
an individual entry even though there is a list of overflow trays. Each
tray entry must be subdivided as needed to report volume sequentially
by ZIP Code in the tray: by 5-digit ZIP Code for 5-digit trays; by
lowest assigned 5-digit ZIP Code for city trays (Periodicals only); by
3-digit ZIP Code for 3-digit and SCF trays; by the 3-digit AADC code
(preceded by ``AADC'') in L804 (or L803 for automated sites) for AADC,
mixed AADC, and working trays.
5.8 Line Entries
Under either option, each entry must report ZIP+4 coded (including
delivery point barcoded) and uncoded pieces by each rate for which
specific numbers of pieces are eligible, and a cumulative total for the
segment through that entry. As applicable, data on each line must be
broken down further:
a. In Periodicals mailings, to separately report in-county and
outside-county pieces, and Level G/J1 and Level H/J3 rates.
b. In Standard Mail, to separately report pieces at each
destination entry rate.
5.9 Subtotals and Summaries
Each column of data must be subtotaled at the end of each segment
of the report and a summary must list data for the entire mailing,
including the residual. The summary must include:
a. The number of pieces with a ZIP+4 code or delivery point
barcode, the number without, the total number of
[[Page 66688]]
pieces in the mailing, and the percentage with ZIP+4 codes or delivery
point barcodes.
b. Each rate (or weight increment, combination of rate and
discount, or other variable in 5.8), the number of pieces at each rate,
the total postage at each rate, and the total postage for the mailing.
(For Periodicals mailings, postage rates and computed totals may be
omitted.)
c. A list of overflow trays.
d. For postage-affixed mailings, further detail must be added as
needed to account for the value of postage affixed, if less than the
applicable amount, and the net due, to yield the correct total postage.
M892 ZIP+4 Presort--Package-Based Letter-Size Mailings
[Text of current M813, revised to apply only to Barcoded Preferred
Periodicals publications and Nonprofit Standard Mail.]
1.0 BASIC STANDARDS
1.1 Standards
Preferred Periodicals and Nonprofit Standard Mail claimed at a
ZIP+4 presort rate must be prepared as a package-based mailing under
2.0, 3.0, 5.0, and 6.0, or as a tray-based mailing under M891.
Grouping, packaging, labeling, and traying are subject to M010 through
M030.
1.2 Automated Sites
Mailings consisting entirely of pieces for the 3-digit areas listed
in L801 (``automated sites'') may be prepared under 4.0 rather than
3.0. Pieces of Periodicals or Standard Mail for other ZIP Code areas
must be prepared in a separate mailing.
* * * * *
1.4 No Packaging
Packages or separator cards are not required for larger than card-
size pieces in full 5-digit trays, full AADC trays if the contents are
only residual AADC packages, and full working trays under 4.2 and 4.3.
* * * * *
1.6 Marking
Standard Mail must be marked ``Nonprofit Organization'' or the
authorized abbreviation, and may be marked ``ZIP+4'' or ''5-digit
ZIP+4'' (as appropriate). No marking is required on Periodicals.
* * * * *
[In 2.1b, 2.2b, 3.2b, 3.3b, and 3.4b, replace ``second-class'' with
``Periodicals''; no other change to 2.0, 3.0, or 4.0.]
5.0 RESIDUAL MAIL
5.1 Definition
Pieces remaining after packages and trays are prepared under 2.0
through 4.0 are residual (nonqualifying) mail. Residual Periodicals and
Standard Mail must be prepared under an option in 5.2 and 5.3. Residual
mail from automated site mailings under 4.0 is subject to specific
instructions where applicable. All residual mail must be presented
under 5.6.
5.2 Options
Residual Periodicals and Standard Mail must be prepared under one
of these options and in accordance with 5.3.
a. Separate AADC Preparation. Residual mail is trayed separately
from qualifying mail. Groups of 10 or more residual pieces to an AADC
area in L804 (or L803 or automated site preparation) are placed in AADC
trays and mixed AADC trays. AADC trays are required if there are enough
pieces to fill a tray, but less-than-full AADC trays are permitted.
Residual pieces in mixed AADC trays and in less-than-full AADC trays
must be prepared and labeled as AADC packages. Remaining groups of
fewer than 10 pieces to an AADC are placed in separate working trays.
Packages and trays must be prepared under 5.3.
b. Intermixed SCF/AADC Preparation. Some residual mail is trayed
with qualifying mail. Groups of 10 or more residual pieces to the same
AADC area in L804 (or L803 for automated site preparation) are packaged
by AADC and placed in AADC trays (with qualifying mail) and in mixed
AADC trays. AADC trays are required if there are enough pieces to fill
a tray, but less-than-full AADC trays are permitted. AADC trays
containing only residual AADC packages are allowed. Mixed AADC trays
are limited to residual AADC packages. At the mailer's option, residual
mail may be packaged by 3-digit ZIP Code and placed in SCF trays
(remaining pieces sorted by AADC). A less-than-full tray for the entry
SCF containing only residual packages is allowed. Remaining groups of
fewer than 10 pieces to an AADC are placed in separate working trays.
Packages and trays must be prepared under 5.3.
5.3 Required Preparation
Subject to 5.1 and 5.2, residual mail must be prepared as follows:
* * * * *
d. Tray presort sequence and Line 1 labeling:
[In 5.3d(4) and 5.3d(5), delete ``second- and third-class.'']
e. Line 2: class (PERIOD or NEWS (as applicable), or STD), followed
by:
(1) On 3-digit and SCF trays (option 5.2b only): ZIP+4 PRESORT.
(2) On AADC trays: AADC ZIP+4 PRESORT.
(3) On mixed AADC trays: ZIP+4 PRESORT PKGS.
(4) On working trays: ZIP+4 WORKING or ZIP+4 WKG.
[Delete current 5.4 and 5.5; renumber current 5.6 as 5.4, no change in
text.]
6.0 DOCUMENTATION
6.1 Mailing Statement
A complete, signed mailing statement, using the correct USPS form
or an approved facsimile, must accompany each mailing. The endorsement
``M892'' must be placed at the top and, as appropriate, ``Automated
Site'' (if prepared under 4.0).
6.2 When Not Required
Documentation under 6.3 through 6.8 is not required if each piece
in the mailing is correctly ZIP+4 coded or delivery point barcoded and
either has postage affixed at the exact rate for which it qualifies; or
is of identical weight, the pieces in each tray are subject to the same
rate, and the trays for each rate are segregated when presented to the
USPS.
6.3 Standards
Documentation must include residual pieces and must meet the basic
standards in P012 and those below. Abbreviated documentation may be
provided under M896. Combined mailings of Periodicals publications must
be documented under M210.
6.4 Segmentation, Labeling
Documentation must be segmented and labeled by qualification tier
(e.g., presort and residual). Each tier must be further segmented by
type of package/grouping (5-digit, 3-digit, AADC, as applicable) under
6.5, or have all represented 3- and 5-digit ZIP Codes (and AADC codes
for residual mail under 5.2 and 5.3) reported in a continuous
sequential list under 6.6 within each tier listing. Under either
option, data must be presented as shown in 6.7 and 6.8.
6.5 Type of Package Option
If the report is segmented by type of package, for each type,
individual entries for each destination must be ordered sequentially by
ZIP Code: by 5-digit ZIP Code for 5-digit packages, by lowest assigned
5-digit ZIP Code for city packages (Periodicals only), by 3-digit ZIP
Code for 3-digit packages, and, for
[[Page 66689]]
AADC packages and AADC groups (in working trays) under 5.2 and 5.3, by
the applicable 3-digit AADC code in L803 (for automated site mailings)
or L804 (AADC entries must be preceded by ``AADC'').
6.6 Sequential List Option
If the report is a sequential list, individual entries for each
destination must be ordered sequentially by ZIP Code within each tier,
regardless of package type: by 5-digit ZIP Code for 5-digit packages,
by lowest assigned 5-digit ZIP Code for city packages (Periodicals
only), by 3-digit ZIP Code for 3-digit packages, and, for AADC packages
and AADC groups (in working trays) under 5.2 and 5.3, by the applicable
3-digit AADC code in L803 (for automated site mailings) or L804. AADC
entries must be preceded by the prefix ``AADC.'' For Periodicals only,
listings for 5-digit, city, and 3-digit packages must be preceded by
the prefixes 5DG, CTY, and 3DG, respectively.
6.7 Line Entries
Under either option, each entry must separately report ZIP+4 coded
(including delivery point barcoded) and uncoded pieces by each rate for
which specific numbers of pieces are eligible; and a cumulative total
for the segment through that entry. As applicable, data on each line
must be broken down further:
a. In Periodicals mailings, to separately report in-county and
outside-county pieces, and Level G/J1 and Level H/J3 rates.
b. In Standard Mail, to separately report pieces at each
destination entry rate.
6.8 Subtotals and Summaries
Each column of data must be subtotaled at the end of each segment
of the report, and a summary must list data for the entire mailing,
including the residual. The summary must include:
a. The number of pieces with a ZIP+4 code or delivery point
barcode, the number without, the total number of pieces in the mailing,
and the percentage with ZIP+4 codes or delivery point barcodes.
b. Each rate (or weight increment, combination of rate and
discount, or other variable in 6.7), the number of pieces at each rate,
the total postage at each rate, and the total postage for the mailing.
(For Periodicals mailings, postage rates and computed totals may be
omitted.)
c. For postage-affixed mailings, further detail must be added as
needed to account for the value of postage affixed, if less than the
applicable amount and the net due, to yield the correct total postage.
M893 Barcoded Tray-Based Letter-Size Mailings
[Text of current M814, revised to apply only to Barcoded Preferred
Periodicals publications and Nonprofit Standard Mail.]
1.0 BASIC STANDARDS
1.1 Standards
Preferred Periodicals and Nonprofit Standard Mail claimed at a
Barcoded presort rate must be prepared as a tray-based mailing under
1.2 through 1.7, 2.0 through 4.0, or as a package-based mailing under
M894 or M895. Grouping, packaging, labeling, and traying are subject to
M010 through M030.
1.2 Grouping
Grouping is required for pieces for the same 3-digit ZIP Code
prefix in SCF trays, and for pieces for the same AADC area in working
trays under 3.0. Grouping by ZIP Code is not required in 5-digit, city,
or 3-digit trays.
1.3 Packaging
Packaging is required:
a. For mailings consisting entirely of pieces that qualify by size
for First-Class card rates, regardless of the actual rate claimed or
class of mail. Package labels are required in less-than-full trays.
b. For mail in overflow AADC trays, in mixed AADC trays, and in a
less-than-full working tray. Appropriate package labels are required.
1.4 No Packaging
Packaging may not be used for larger than card-size pieces, except
that:
a. Mail in overflow trays must be packaged and labeled correctly
(as for the corresponding full trays).
b. Mail in a less-than-full tray for the entry SCF must be sorted
and labeled as 3-digit packages.
c. Mail in AADC trays may be packaged and mail in mixed AADC trays
must be packaged into AADC packages.
d. Mail in a less-than-full working tray under 3.0 must be
packaged.
1.5 5-Digit Trays
Only pieces with correct DPBCs may be presorted to 5-digit trays.
Other pieces for the same ZIP Code must be sorted to successive trays
as appropriate. Preparation of 5-digit trays is required only for mail
claimed at the 5-digit Barcoded rate.
1.6 Marking
Standard Mail must be marked ''Nonprofit Organization'' or the
authorized abbreviation and may be marked ''Barcoded.'' No marking is
required on Periodicals.
1.7 Carrier Route
Barcoded rate mail and carrier route presort (or walk-sequence)
rate mail may not be included in the same mailing or reported on the
same mailing statement.
1.8 Heavy Letter Mail
Each tray of heavy letter mail (as defined in C810) must be
identified by a flag (similar to a separator card) clearly marked
``HEAVY LETTER MAIL'' and placed in front of the contents of the tray.
Each pallet, general purpose mail container, or other equipment used to
transport trays of heavy letter mail must be labeled ''HEAVY LETTER
MAIL,'' in letters not less than 1/2 inch high on white or light-
colored stock not smaller than 8 by 11 inches, on two adjacent sides of
the pallet or other equipment.
[In 2.2b, replace ''second-class'' with ''Periodicals''; no other
change to 2.0.]
* * * * *
3.0 RESIDUAL MAIL
Pieces remaining after packages and trays are prepared under 2.0
are residual (nonqualifying) mail.
Residual Periodicals or Standard Mail must be prepared as follows:
a. All pieces must be sorted by AADC area, using L804.
b. Quantities of 10 or more pieces for an AADC area must be
prepared as an AADC package (or, if possible, a full AADC tray).
Packaging is not required in full AADC trays. AADC packages of fewer
than 10 pieces are not permitted.
c. All AADC packages must be trayed in AADC or mixed AADC trays.
Pieces remaining after preparing full AADC trays and AADC packages must
be placed in separate working trays.
d. Pieces in less-than-full AADC overflow trays and in all mixed
AADC trays must be packaged and labeled as AADC packages using a pink
Label A or OEL. Separator cards are not permitted.
e. Pieces in working trays must be grouped by AADC area. Pieces in
a less-than-full working tray must be prepared in working packages up
to 6 inches thick making as few packages as possible without regard to
AADC breaks. Separator cards are not permitted. Label packages in less-
than-full working trays with either a facing slip marked ''WORKING'' or
''WKG'' or the optional endorsement line ''WORKING.''
f. A piece count listing must be provided for all residual pieces
that shows by tray level and AADC area
[[Page 66690]]
(listed by numeric AADC code from the labeling list in L804) the number
of pieces eligible for each rate and the number of pieces with a DPBC,
the number of pieces without a DPBC that qualify for ZIP+4 rates, and
the number of other pieces.
g. Tray size:
(1) AADC: required full trays; one less-than-full overflow tray
permitted per destination per mailing.
(2) Mixed AADC: required full trays; one less-than-full tray
permitted.
(3) Working: required full trays; one less-than-full tray
permitted.
h. Residual presort sequence and Line 1 labeling:
(1) AADC (required); use L804 for Line 1.
(2) Mixed AADC (required); for Line 1 use MXD, followed by the
applicable entry SCF name, state, and SCF code from L002, Column A
(facilities identified with three bullets), or Column B, except use
L805 for mail entered by the mailer at an ASF or BMC.
(3) Working (required); for Line 1 use MXD, followed by the
applicable entry SCF name, state, and ZIP Code from L002, Column A
(facilities identified with three bullets), or Column B, except use
L805 for mail entered by the mailer at an ASF or BMC.
i. For Line 2: class (PERIOD or NEWS (applicable), or STD),
followed by:
(1) For AADC trays: LTRS AADC BARCODED.
(2) For mixed AADC trays: LTRS BARCODED PKGS.
(3) For working trays: LTRS BARCODED WKG.
4.0 DOCUMENTATION
4.1 Mailing Statement
A complete, signed mailing statement, using the correct USPS form
or an approved facsimile, must accompany each mailing. The mailing
endorsement ``M893'' must be placed at the top, based on the
documentation method used, and ``ZIP Code Option''or ``Tray Label
Option.''
* * * * *
4.4 Standards
Documentation must include residual pieces and meet the basic
standards in P012 and those below. Abbreviated documentation may be
provided under M896. Combined mailings of Periodicals publications must
also be documented under M210.
* * * * *
4.6 Zip Code Option
Under the ZIP Code option, individual entries for each type of tray
destination must be listed sequentially by ZIP Code: by 5-digit ZIP
Code for 5-digit trays, by lowest assigned 5-digit ZIP Code for city
trays (Periodicals only), by 3-digit ZIP Code for 3-digit and SCF
trays, by the 3-digit AADC code (preceded by ``AADC'') in L804 for
AADC, mixed AADC, and working trays. Volume in overflow trays must be
included in the corresponding entry even though there is a list of
overflow trays.
4.7 Tray Label Option
Under the tray label option, individual entries for each tray must
be listed sequentially by the unique tray number on each label or by
Line 1 on the label. The contents of each overflow tray are reported as
an individual entry even though there is a list of overflow trays. Each
tray entry must be subdivided as needed to report volume sequentially
by ZIP Code in the tray: by 5-digit ZIP Code for 5-digit trays, by
lowest assigned 5-digit ZIP Code for city trays (Periodicals only, by
3-digit ZIP Code for 3-digit and SCF trays, by the 3-digit AADC code
(preceded by ``AADC'') in L804 for AADC, mixed AADC, and working trays.
4.8 Line Entries
Under either option, each entry must report DPBC mail, correctly
ZIP+4 coded non-DPBC mail (meeting the standards in C830), and other
pieces by each rate for which specific numbers of pieces are eligible,
and a cumulative total for the segment through that entry. As
applicable, data on each line must be subdivided further:
a. In Periodicals mailing, to separately report in-county and
outside-county pieces, and Level G/J1 and Level H/J3 rates.
b. In Standard Mail, to separately report pieces at each
destination entry rate.
4.9 Subtotals and Summaries
Each column of data must be subtotaled at the end of each segment
of the report and a summary must list data for the entire mailing,
including the residual. The summary must include:
a. The number of pieces with a DPBC, the number without, the total
number of pieces in the mailing, and the percentage with DPBCs.
b. Each rate (or weight increment, combination of rate and
discount, or other variable in 4.8), the number of pieces at each rate,
the total postage at each rate, and the total postage for the mailing.
(For Periodicals mailings, postage rates and computed totals may be
omitted.)
c. A list of overflow trays.
d. For postage-affixed mailings, further detail must be added as
needed to account for the value of postage affixed, if less than the
applicable amount and the net due, to yield the correct total postage.
M894 Barcoded Two-Tier Package--Based Letter-Size Mailings
[Text of current M815, revised to apply only to Barcoded Preferred
Periodicals publications and Nonprofit Standard Mail.]
1.0 BASIC STANDARDS
1.1 Standards
Preferred Periodicals and Nonprofit Standard Mail claimed at a
Barcoded presort rate must be prepared as a tray-based mailing under
M893, as a two-tier package based mailing under 1.2 through 1.6, 2.0
through 5.0, or as a three-tier package-based mailing under M895.
Grouping, packaging, labeling, and traying are subject to M010 through
M030.
* * * * *
1.3 No Packaging
Packages or separator cards are not required for larger than card-
size pieces in full 5-digit trays, full AADC trays if the contents are
only residual AADC packages, and full working trays under 4.2 and 4.3.
[Delete current 1.4 and replace with the following:]
1.4 Marking
Standard Mail must be marked ``Nonprofit Organization'' or the
authorized abbreviation and may be marked ``Barcoded.'' No marking is
required on Periodicals.
* * * * *
[In 2.1b, 2.2b, 3.2b, 3.3b, and 3.4b, replace ``second-class'' with
``Periodicals''; delete the parenthetical in 2.1c and 2.2c; no other
change to 2.0 or 3.0.]
4.0 RESIDUAL MAIL
4.1 Definition
Pieces remaining after packages and trays are prepared under 2.0
and 3.0 are residual (nonqualifying) mail. Residual Periodicals and
Standard Mail must be prepared under an option in 4.2 and 4.3. All
residual mail must be presented under 4.6.
4.2 Options
Residual Periodicals and Standard Mail must be prepared under one
of these options and in accordance with 4.3.
a. Separate AADC Preparation. Residual mail is trayed separately
from
[[Page 66691]]
qualifying mail. Groups of 10 or more residual pieces to an AADC area
in L804 are placed in AADC trays and mixed AADC trays. AADC trays are
required if there are enough pieces to fill a tray, but less-than-full
AADC trays are permitted. Residual pieces in mixed AADC trays and in
less-than-full AADC trays must be prepared and labeled as AADC
packages. Remaining groups of fewer than 10 pieces to an AADC are
placed in separate working trays. Packages and trays must be prepared
under 4.3.
b. Intermixed SCF/AADC Preparation. Some residual mail is trayed
with qualifying mail. Groups of 10 or more residual pieces to the same
AADC area in L804 are packaged by AADC and placed in AADC trays (with
qualifying mail) and in mixed AADC trays. AADC trays are required if
there are enough pieces to fill a tray, but less-than-full AADC trays
are permitted. AADC trays containing only residual AADC packages are
allowed. Mixed AADC trays are limited to residual AADC packages. At the
mailer's option, residual mail may be packaged by 3-digit ZIP Code and
placed in SCF trays (remaining pieces sorted by AADC). A less-than-full
tray for the entry SCF containing only residual packages is allowed.
Remaining groups of fewer than 10 pieces to an AADC are placed in
separate working trays. Packages and trays must be prepared under 4.3.
4.3 Required Preparation
Subject to 4.1 and 4.2, residual mail must be prepared as follows:
* * * * *
d. Tray presort sequence and Line 1 labeling:
[In 4.3d(4) and 4.3d(5), delete ``second- and third-class.'']
e. Line 2: class (PERIOD or NEWS (as applicable), or STD), followed
by:
(1) On 3-digit and SCF trays (option 5.2b only); ZIP+4 PRESORT.
(2) On AADC trays: AADC ZIP+4 PRESORT.
(3) On mixed AADC trays: ZIP+4 PRESORT PKGS.
(4) On working trays: ZIP+4 WORKING or ZIP+4 WKG.
[Delete current 4.4 and 4.5; renumber current 4.6 as 4.4, no change in
text.]
5.0 DOCUMENTATION
5.1 Mailing Statement
A complete, signed mailing statement, using the correct USPS form
or an approved facsimile, must accompany each mailing. The endorsement
``M894'' must be placed at the top.
5.2 Standards
Documentation must include residual pieces and must meet the basic
standards in P012 and those below. Abbreviated documentation may be
provided under M896. Combined mailings of Periodicals publications must
be documented under M210.
5.3 When Not Required
Documentation under 5.4 through 5.8 is not required if each piece
in the mailing is correctly delivery point barcoded and either has
postage affixed at the exact rate for which it qualifies; or is of
identical weight, the pieces in each tray are subject to the same rate,
and the trays for each rate are segregated when presented to the USPS.
5.4 Segmentation, Labeling
Documentation must be segmented and labeled by qualification tier
(e.g., presort and residual). Each tier must be further segmented by
type of package/grouping (5-digit, 3-digit, AADC, as applicable) under
5.5, or have all represented 3- and 5-digit ZIP Codes (and AADC codes
for residual mail under 4.2 and 4.3) reported in a continuous
sequential list under 5.6 within each tier listing. Under either
option, data must be presented as shown in 5.7 and 5.8.
5.5 Type of Package Option
If the report is segmented by type of package, for each type,
individual entries for each destination must be ordered sequentially by
ZIP Code: by 5-digit ZIP Code for 5-digit packages, by lowest assigned
5-digit ZIP Code for city packages (Periodicals only), by 3-digit ZIP
Code for 3-digit packages, and, for AADC packages and AADC groups (in
working trays) under 5.2 and 5.3, by the applicable 3-digit AADC code
in L804 (AADC entries must be preceded by ``AADC'').
5.6 Sequential List Option
If the report is a sequential list, individual entries for each
destination must be ordered sequentially by ZIP Code within each tier,
regardless of package type: 5-digit ZIP Code for 5-digit packages, by
lowest assigned 5-digit ZIP Code for city packages (Periodicals only),
by 3-digit ZIP Code for 3-digit packages, and, for AADC packages and
AADC groups (in working trays) under 4.2 and 4.3, by the applicable 3-
digit AADC code in L804. AADC entries must be preceded by the prefix
``AADC.'' For Periodicals only, listings for 5-digit, city, and 3-digit
packages must be preceded by the prefixes 5DG, CTY, and 3DG,
respectively.
5.7 Line Entries
Under either option, each entry must separately report DPBC pieces,
correctly ZIP+4 coded non-DPBC pieces (meeting the standards in C830),
and other pieces, by each rate for which specific numbers of pieces are
eligible; and a cumulative total for the segment through that entry. As
applicable, data on each line must be subdivided further.
a. In Periodicals mailings, to separately report in-county and
outside-county pieces, and Level G/J1 and Level H/J3 rates.
In Standard Mail, to separately report pieces at each destination
entry rate.
5.8 Subtotals and Summaries
Each column of data must be subtotaled at the end of each segment
of the report, and a summary must list data for the entire mailing,
including the residual. The summary must include:
a. The number of pieces with a DPBC, the number without, the total
number of pieces in the mailing, and the percentage with DPBCs.
b. Each rate (or weight increment, combination of rate and
discount, or other variable in 5.7), the number of pieces at each rate,
the total postage at each rate, and the total postage for the mailing.
(For Periodicals mailings, postage rates and computed totals may be
omitted.)
c. For postage-affixed mailings, further detail must be added as
needed to account for the value of postage affixed, if less than the
applicable amount, and the net due, to yield the correct total postage.
M895 Barcoded Three-Tier Package-Based Letter-Size Mailings [Text of
current M816, revised to apply only to Barcoded Preferred Periodicals
publications and Nonprofit Standard Mail.]
1.0 BASIC STANDARDS
1.1 Standards
Preferred Periodicals and Nonprofit Standards Mail claimed at a
Barcoded presort rate must be prepared as a tray-based mailing under
M893, as a two-tier package-based mailing under M894, or as a three-
tier package-based mailing under 2.0 through 7.0. Grouping, packaging,
labeling, and traying are subject to M010 through M030.
* * * * *
1.3 No Packaging
Packages or separator cards are not required for larger than card-
size pieces in full 5-digit trays in the 5-digit tier; nor in the 3-
digit tier in full city, full 3-digit, full SCF, and full AADC trays
[[Page 66692]]
containing only residual AADC packages; nor in full working trays under
6.2 and 6.3.
* * * * *
1.5 Marking
Standard Mail must be marked ``Nonprofit Organization'' or the
authorized abbreviation, and may be ``marked'' Barcoded.'' No marking
is required on Periodicals.
* * * * *
[In 4.1a, 4.2a, 5.2a, 5.3a, and 5.4b, replace ``second-class'' with
``Periodicals''; delete the parenthetical ``optional for . . . '' in
4.1b and 4.2b; no other change to 2.0 through 5.0.]
6.0 RESIDUAL MAIL
6.1 Definition
Pieces remaining after packages and trays are prepared under 2.0
through 5.0 are residual (nonqualifying) mail. Residual Periodicals and
Standard Mail must be prepared under an option in 6.2 and 6.3. All
residual mail must be presented under 6.6.
6.2 Options
Residual Periodicals and Standard mail must be prepared under one
of these options and in accordance with 6.3.
a. Separate AADC Preparation. Residual mail is trayed separately
from qualifying mail. Groups of 10 or more residual pieces to an AADC
area in L804 are placed in AADC trays and mixed AADC trays. AADC trays
are required if there are enough pieces to fill a tray, but less-than-
full AADC trays are permitted. Residual pieces in mixed AADC trays and
in less-than-full AADC trays must be prepared and labeled as AADC
packages. Remaining groups of fewer than 10 pieces to an AADC are
placed in separate working trays. Packages and trays must be prepared
under 6.3.
b. Intermixed SCF/AADC Preparation. Some residual mail is trayed
with qualifying mail. Groups of 10 or more residual pieces to the same
AADC area in L804 are packaged by AADC and placed in AADC trays (with
qualifying mail) and in mixed AADC trays. AADC trays are required if
there are enough pieces to fill a tray, but less-than-full AADC trays
are permitted. AADC trays containing only residual AADC packages are
allowed. Mixed AADC trays are limited to residual AADC packages. At the
mailer's option, residual mail may be packaged by 3-digit ZIP Code and
placed in SCF trays (remaining pieces sorted by AADC). A less-than-full
tray for the entry SCF containing only residual packages is allowed.
Remaining groups of fewer than 10 pieces to an AADC are placed in
separate working trays. Packages and trays must be prepared under 6.3.
6.3 Required Preparation
Subject to 6.1 and 6.2, residual mail must be prepared as follows:
* * * * *
d. Tray presort sequence and Line 1 labeling:
[In 6.3d(4) and 6.3(5), delete ``second- and third-class.'']
e. Line 2: class (PERIOD, NEWS, or STD), followed by:
(1) On 3-digit and SCF trays (option 6.2b only): ZIP+4 PRESORT.
(2) ON AADC trays: AADC ZIP+4 PRESORT.
(3) On mixed AADC trays: ZIP+4 PRESORT PKGS.
(4) On working trays: ZIP+4 WORKING of ZIP+4WKG.
[Delete current 6.4 and 6.5; renumber current 6.6 as 6.4, no change in
text.]
7.0 DOCUMENTATION
7.1 Mailing Statement
A complete, signed mailing statement, using the correct USPS form
or an approved facsimile, must accompany each mailing. The endorsement
``M895'' must be placed at the top.
7.2 Standards
Documentation must include residual pieces and must meet the basic
standards in P012 and those below. Abbreviated documentation may be
provided under M896. Combined mailings of Periodicals publications must
be documented under M210.
7.3 When Not Required
Documentation under 7.4 through 7.8 is not required if each piece
in the mailing is correctly delivery point barcoded and either has
postage affixed at the exact rate for which it qualifies; or is of
identical weight, the pieces in each tray are subject to the same rate,
and the trays for each rate are segregated when presented to the USPS.
7.4 Segmentation, Labeling
Documentation must be segmented and labeled by qualification tier
(e.g., presort and residual). Each tier must be further segmented by
type of package/grouping (5-digit, AADC, as applicable) under 7.5, or
have all represented 3- and 5-digit ZIP Codes (and AADC codes for
residual mail under 6.2 and 6.3) reported in a continuous sequential
list under 7.6 within each tier listing. Under either option, data must
be presented as shown in 7.7 and 7.8.
7.5 Type of Package Option
If the report is segmented by type of package, for each type,
individual entries for each destination must be ordered sequentially by
ZIP Code: by digit ZIP Code for 5-digit packages, by lowest assigned 5-
digit ZIP Code for city packages (Periodicals only), by 3-digit ZIP
code for 3-digit packages, and, for AADC packages and AADC groups (in
working trays), by the applicable 3-digit AADC code in L804 (AADC
entries must by preceded by ``AADC'').
7.6 Sequential List Option
If the report is a sequential list, individual entries for each
destination must be ordered sequentially by ZIP Code within each tier,
regardless of package type: by 5-digit ZIP Code for 5-digit packages,
by lowest assigned 5-digit ZIP Code for city packages (Periodicals
only), by 3-digit ZIP Code for 3-digit packages, and, for AADC packages
and AADC groups (in working trays) under 6.2 and 6.3, by the applicable
3-digit AADC code in L804. AADC entries must be preceded by the prefix
``AADC.'' For Periodicals only, listings for 5-digit, city, and 3-digit
packages must be preceded by the prefixes 5DG, CTY, and 3DG,
respectively.
7.7 Line Entries
Under either option, each entry must separately report DPBC pieces,
correctly ZIP+4 coded non-DPBC pieces (meeting the standards in C830),
and other pieces, by each rate for which specific numbers of pieces are
eligible; and a cumulative total for the segment through that entry. As
applicable, data on each line must be subdivided further.
a. In Periodicals mailings, to separately report in-county and
outside-county pieces, and Level G/J1 and Level H/J3 rates.
b. In Standard Mail, to separately report pieces at each
destination entry rate.
7.8 Subtotals and Summaries
Each column of data must be subtotaled at the end of each segment
of the report, and a summary must list data for the entire mailing,
including the residual. The summary must include:
a. The number of pieces with a DPBC, the number without, the total
number of pieces in the mailing, a and the percentage with DPBCs.
b. Each rate (or weight increment, combination of rate and
discount, or other variable in 7.7), the number of pieces at each rate,
the total postage at each rate, and the total postage for the mailing.
(For Periodicals mailings,
[[Page 66693]]
postage rates and computed totals may be omitted.)
c. For postage-affixed mailings, further detail must be added as
needed to account for the value of postage affixed, if less than the
applicable amount, and the net due, to yield the correct total postage.
M896 Elective Documentation for Letter-Size Mailings
[Text of current M817; in 1.1, 2.2, 2.4, 3.1c, and 4.8, replace ``M812
through M816'' with ``M891 through M895''; in 1.2, 4.7b, and 4.7d,
replace ``M817,'' ``M815,'' and ``M812 or M814'' with ``M896,''
``M894,'' and ``M891 or M893,'' respectively; no other change in text.]
[Delete current M818 and M819.]
M897 ZIP+4 Barcoded Flat-Size Mail
[Text of current M823, revised to apply only to Barcoded Preferred
Periodicals publications and Nonprofit Standard Mail.]
1.0 BASIC STANDARDS
1.1 Standards
Flat-size Preferred Periodicals and Nonprofit Standard Mail claimed
at a ZIP+4 Barcoded presort rate must be prepared as described below.
Packaging, labeling, a and sacking are subject to M010 through M030.
* * * * *
1.5 Marking
Standard Mail must be marked ``Nonprofit Organization'' or the
authorized abbreviation, and may be marked ``Barcoded.'' No marking is
required on Periodicals.
* * * * *
2.0 PACKAGE PREPARATION--MAILINGS SUBJECT TO 85% RULE
2.1 Package Size, Presort, and Labeling--Periodicals
Package size, presort sequence, and labeling for Periodicals:
a. 5-digit: required at six pieces; smaller packages permitted but
do not qualify for Level H rates; use red Label D or optional
endorsement line (OEL).
b. City: optional at six pieces; smaller packages permitted but do
not qualify for Level H rates; use yellow Label C or OEL.
c. 3-digit: required at six pieces; smaller packages permitted but
do not qualify for Level H rates; use green Label 3 or OEL.
d. SCF: required at six pieces; smaller packages permitted; use
green Label 3 or OEL.
2.2 Package Size, Presort, and Labeling--Standard Mail
Package size, presort sequence, and labeling for Standard Mail:
a. 5-digit: required at 10 pieces; smaller packages prohibited; use
red Label D or optional endorsement line (OEL).
b. 3-digit: required at 10 pieces; smaller packages prohibited; use
green Label 3 or OEL.
c. SCF: required at 10 pieces; smaller packages prohibited; use
green Label 3 or OEL.
3.0 PACKAGE PREPARATION--MAILINGS NOT SUBJECT TO 85% RULE
3.1 Package Size, Presort, and Labeling--Periodicals
Package size, presort sequence, and labeling for Periodicals:
a. 5-digit (ZIP+4 or DPBC pieces only; see 1.3): required at six
pieces; smaller packages prohibited; use red Label D or optional
endorsement line (OEL).
b. 5-digit (nonbarcoded pieces only; see 1.3): required at six
pieces; smaller packages prohibited; use red Label D or OEL.
c. City: optional at six pieces; smaller packages permitted but do
not qualify for Level H rates; use yellow Label C or OEL.
d. 3-digit: required at six pieces; smaller packages permitted but
do not qualify for Level H rates; use green Label 3 or OEL.
e. SCF: required at six pieces; smaller packages permitted; use
green Label 3 or OEL.
3.2 Package Size, Presort, and Labeling--Standard Mail
Package size, presort sequence, and labeling for Standard Mail:
a. 5-digit (ZIP+4 or DPBC pieces only; see 1.3): required at 10
pieces; smaller packages prohibited; use red Label D or optional
endorsement line (OEL).
b. 5-digit (nonbarcoded pieces only; see 1.3): required at 10
pieces; smaller packages prohibited; use red Label D or OEL.
c. 3-digit: required at 10 pieces; smaller packages prohibited; use
green Label 3 or OEL.
d. SCF: required at 10 pieces; smaller packages prohibited; use
green Label 3 or OEL.
4.0 SACK PREPARATION--QUALIFYING MAIL
4.1 Sack Size, Presort, and Labeling--Periodicals
Sack size, presort sequence, and labeling for Periodicals:.
a. 5-digit: required with four packages; smaller volume permitted;
use 5-digit ZIP Code destination of packages for Line 1, preceded for
military mail by the correct prefixes under M031.
b. City: optional with four packages; smaller volume permitted; use
lowest ZIP Code for destination from L001 for Line 1.
c. 3-digit: required with four packages; smaller volume permitted;
use L002, Column A, for Line 1.
d. SCF: required with four packages; smaller volume permitted; use
L002, Column B, for Line 1.
e. ADC: required with no minimum.
4.2 When to Sack--Standard Mail
For Standard Mail, a sack must be prepared when the quantity of
mail for a required presort destination reaches either 125 pieces or 15
pounds of pieces, whichever occurs first, subject to these conditions:
a. For identical-weight pieces, a single-piece weight of 1.92
ounces (0.12 pound) results in 125 pieces weighing 15 pounds.
Identical-weight pieces weighing 1.92 ounces (0.12 pound) or less must
be prepared using the 125-piece minimum, those that weigh more must be
prepared using the 15-pound minimum.
b. For nonidentical-weight pieces, mailers must either use the
minimum that applies to the average piece weight for the entire mailing
(divide the net weight of the mailing by the number of pieces; the
resulting average single-piece weight determines whether the 125-piece
or 15-pound minimum applies) or sack by the actual piece count or mail
weight for each sack, if documentation can be provided with the mailing
that shows (specifically for each sack) the number of pieces and their
total weight.
c. Mailers must note on the accompanying mailing statement whether
they applied the 125-piece (``PCS'') or 15-pound (``WT'') threshold or
if the method in 4.2b (``BOTH'') was used.
4.3 Sack Size, Presort, and Labeling--Standard Mail
Sack size, presort sequence, and labeling Standard Mail, subject to
4.2:
a. 5-digit: required at 125 pieces/15 pounds; smaller volume
prohibited; use 5-digit ZIP Code destination of packages for Line 1,
preceded for military mail by the correct prefixes under M031.
b. 3-digit: required at 125 pieces/15 pounds; smaller volume
prohibited; use L002, Column A, for Line 1.
c. SCF: required at 125 pieces/15 pounds; smaller volume
prohibited; use L002, Column B, for Line 1
[[Page 66694]]
d. ADC: required with no minimum; use L004 for Line 1
4.4 Line 2
Line 2: class of mail and FLATS BARCODED (and, on city sacks, CITY
right-justified under the ZIP Code for Line 1).
5.0 RESIDUAL MAIL
[In 5.4a, delete ``second- or third-class''; no other change in text in
5.0.]
6.0 DOCUMENTATION
[In 6.9c, replace ``second-class'' with Periodicals''; revise other
text as follows:]
* * * * *
6.7 Line Entries
Under either option, the mailer must identify 5-digit, city, 3-
digit, SCF,and residual packages by the prefixes 5DG, 3DG, SCF, and
WKG, respectively. Each entry must separately report ZIP+4 or DPBC
pieces, and 5-digit barcoded or nonbarcoded pieces, by each rate for
which specific numbers of pieces are eligible; and a cumulative total
for the segment through that entry. As applicable, data on each line
must be subdivided further in Periodicals mailings, to separately
report in-county and outside-county pieces, and Level G/J1 and Level H/
J3 rates.
6.8 Actual Piece Count
In Standard Mail for which the mailer used the actual piece count
and weight of the mail to prepare sacks (``BOTH''), a separate listing
must identify for each sack the total number of pieces it contains and
their combined weight.
* * * * *
M898 Elective Documentation for Flat-Size Mailings
[Text of current M825; in 1.1, 2.2, 2.3, 3.1c, 3.4, and 4.5, replace
``M823'' with ``M897''; in 1.2, replace ``M825'' with ``M898''; no
other change in text]
[Delete current M827.]
P POSTAGE AND PAYMENT METHODS
P000 Basic Information
P010 General Standards
P011 Payment
[In 1.5 and 2.3, replace ``third-class mail'' with ``Standard Mail
(A)''; in 2.3, replace ``fourth-class'' with ``Standard Mail (B)''; in
4.2 and 5.1, change the reference form ``E370'' to ``E670''; in 5.0 and
5.1, replace ``special [bulk] third-class'' with ``Nonprofit Standard
Mail''; no other change in text]
P012 Documentation
1.0 PURPOSE AND BASIC STANDARDS
* * * * *
1.6 When Required
In addition to the correct mailing statement under 3.0,
documentation is required for a First-Class or Standard Mail mailing in
which all pieces are not of identical weight and full postage at the
applicable rate is not affixed to each piece, for all mailings paid
with permit imprint in which pieces at different rates are not
separated when presented to the USPS. Documentation also must be
submitted when specified by the standards for the rate claimed.
* * * * *
2.0 BASIC CONTENT AND FORMAT
[Renumber current 2.1 through 2.6 as 2.2 through 2.7, respectively, and
add new 2.1 as follows:]
2.1 Standardized Documentation
Standardized documentation contains the elements described in 2.2
through 2.7, as applicable. Documentation produced by Presort Accuracy
Verification and Evaluation (PAVE) or Manifest Analysis and
Certification (MAC) software, appropriate for the accompanying class of
mail and rate claimed, is considered standardized documentation for
purposes of these standards.
2.2 Format and Content
Standardized documentation includes:* * *
* * * * *
3.0 MAILING STATEMENT
[Add to the end of the section:] * * * A facsimile mailing
statement produced by Presort Accuracy Verification and Evaluation
(PAVE) or Manifest Analysis and Certification (MAC) software,
appropriate for the accompanying class of mail and rate claimed, is
considered a USPS-approved form for purposes of these standards.
P013 Rate Application and Computation
1.0 BASIC STANDARDS
* * * * *
1.3 Determing Single-Piece Weight
To determine single-piece weight in any mailing at single-piece
rates, in a bulk rate mailing at Standard Mail parcel post or Special
Standard Mail rates, or in any bulk rate mailing of nonidentical-weight
pieces (except at Periodicals rates), weight each piece individually.
To determine single-piece weight in any other bulk or presort rate
mailing (except at Periodicals rates), compute the average weight of a
single piece by weighing a sample group of at least 10 randomly
selected pieces and dividing the total sample weight by the number of
pieces in the sample. Express all single-piece weights in decimal
pounds rounded off to four decimal places.
1.4 Affixing Postage--Single-Piece Rate Mailings
In a postage-affixed single-piece rate Express Mail, First-Class,
Priority Mail, or Standard Mail (A) mailing, or in any postage-affixed
Standard Mail (B) mailing, the mailer must affix to each piece a value
in adhesive stamps, precanceled stamps, or meter impressions equal to
at least the postage required for the piece. (In a Standard Mail bound
printed matter rate mailing, the postage affixed to each piece must be
at least the sum of the applicable per pound charge based on the weight
of the piece plus one unit of the applicable per piece charge.) Less
than the correct amount of postage may be affixed only when allowed by
standard or specific USPS authorization.
1.5 Affixing Postage--Other Than Single-Piece Rate Mailings
In a First-Class, Priority Mail, or Standard Mail postage-affixed
mailing at other than a single-piece rate, the mailer must affix to
each piece a value in precanceled stamps or meter impressions that
equals at least the full amount of postage at the applicable rate; or
a. For First-Class and Priority Mail, the applicable postage at the
lowest rate in the mailing (or a lesser amount if authorized under
P760) if all additional postage in paid at the time of mailing.
b. For Standard Mail (A), the minimum per piece charge, with the
pound rate charge paid with permit imprint under the applicable
standards; or the applicable postage at the lowest rate in the mailing
(or a lesser amount if authorized under P760) if all additional postage
is paid at the time of mailing.
c. For Standard Mail bound printed matter, the postage affixed to
each piece must be at least the sum of the applicable per pound charge
plus one unit of the applicable per piece charge.
* * * * *
3.0 RATE APPLICATION--PERIODICALS
3.1 Rate Elements
Postage for all Periodicals includes a pound rate charge, a piece
rate charge,
[[Page 66695]]
and any discounts and reductions for which the mail qualifies under the
corresponding standards.
3.2 Applying Pound Rate
Pound rates are applied to the weight of the mailpieces in the
mailing. Regular and preferred outside-county pound rates are based on
the weight of the advertising portion of the mail sent to each postal
zone (as computed from the office of entry) and the weight of the
nonadvertising portion without regard to zone. In-county pound rates
consist of a delivery office zone rate and a uniform (unzoned) rate for
all other eligible mailpieces delivered within the county of
publication. Publications Service pound rates are based on the weight
of the mail sent to each postal zone (as computed from the office of
entry) without regard to advertising content. The minimum pound rate
charge for any zone or other group for which a per pound charge is
computed is 1 unit (1 pound) of the pound rate charge. For example,
three 2-ounce pieces for a zone are subject to the minimum 1-pound
charge.
3.3 Computing Weight of Advertising Portion
Advertising content is a postage factor only for Regular and
Preferred Periodicals. The pound rate charge is the sum of the charges
for the computed weight of the advertising portion of copies to each
zone, plus an additional flat (unzoned) charge for the total weight of
the nonadvertising portion of all copies to all zones. For publications
containing advertising, the minimum pound rate charge for any zone to
which copies are mailed is 1 unit (pound) of the advertising pound rate
charge. The minimum pound rate charge for the nonadvertising portion is
that which applies to all weight not reported in the advertising
(zoned) portion. (Authorized nonprofit rate publications with an
advertising percentage that is 10% or less are considered 100%
nonadvertising. When computing the pound rates and the nonadvertising
adjustment, use ``0'' as the ``advertising percentage.'' Authorized
nonprofit rate publications claiming 0% advertising must pay the
nonadvertising pound rate for the entire weight of all copies to all
zones.)
* * * * *
4.0 RATE APPLICATION--STANDARD MAIL (A)
4.1 Single-Piece Rates
[In 4.1a, 4.1b, and 4.1c, replace ``third-class'' with ``Standard Mail
(A)'' and revise the opening of the section as follows:]
Single-piece rate postage is based on the rate that applies to the
weight (postage) increment of each piece. Single-piece rates are
applied differently depending on weight: * * *
* * * * *
4.3 Bulk Rates
Bulk rates are based on the weight of the pieces and are applied
differently to pieces weighing under or equal to a ``break point'' and
those weighing more:
a. Pieces weighing 0.2059 pound (3.2941 ounces) or less (Automation
or Enhanced Carrier Route rates), 0.2067 pound (3.3071 ounces) or less
(Regular rates), or 0.2149 pound (3.4383 ounces) or less (Nonprofit
rates), are subject to the minimum applicable rate per piece.
b. Pieces weighing more than 0.2059 pound (3.2941 ounces)
(Automation or Enhanced Carrier Route rates), 0.2067 pound (3.3071
ounces) (Regular rates), or 0.2149 pound (3.4383 ounces) (Nonprofit
rates), are subject to a per piece charge plus a per pound charge based
on the weight of the piece.
5.0 RATE APPLICATION--STANDARD MAIL (B)
* * * * *
5.4 Special Standard Mail
The Special Standard Mail rate is charged per pound or fraction
thereof; any fraction of a pound is considered a whole pound. (Rate
application is identical for the single-piece and presort rates.) For
example, if an item weighs 4.225 pounds, the weight (postage) increment
is 5 pounds. The minimum postage rate per piece is that for a piece
weighing 1 pound.
* * * * *
7.0 COMPUTING POSTAGE--PERIODICALS
* * * * *
7.4 Pound Rate
To compute the pound rate postage for Regular and Preferred
outside-county copies, multiply the weight of the advertising and
nonadvertising portions by the corresponding rates, add the unrounded
results, and subtract any applicable discounts. To compute the pound
rate postage for in-county and Publications Service copies, multiply
their total weight by the corresponding rate per pound.
* * * * *
7.6 Nonadvertising Adjustment
To compute the nonadvertising adjustment (where applicable),
subtract the advertising percentage from 100, multiply the remainder by
the nonadvertising adjustment per piece, multiply the unrounded product
by the number of pieces, and round off the product to four decimal
places.
* * * * *
8.0 COMPUTING POSTAGE--STANDARD MAIL (A)
* * * * *
9.0 COMPUTING POSTAGE--STANDARD MAIL (B)
[In 9.1b and 9.3, replace ``fourth-class'' with ``Standard Mail (B)'';
in 9.4, replace ``R400'' with ``R600''; combine current 9.5 and 9.6 and
revise as follows:]
9.5 Permit Imprint
In a permit imprint mailing:
a. At other than bulk bound printed matter rates, for each weight
increment multiply the number of pieces by the applicable rate per
piece, rounding off each product to four decimal places. Add the
products and round up the total postage to the nearest whole cent.
b. At bulk bound printed matter rates, for each zone multiply the
total unrounded weight of the pieces by the applicable rate per pound
(round off each product to four decimal places) and multiply the number
of pieces by the applicable rate per piece without rounding. Add the
pound and piece charges and round up the total postage to the nearest
whole cent.
P014 Refunds and Exchanges
[In 2.3, replace ``First-Class, third-class single-piece, and fourth-
class mail'' with ``First-Class Mail, single-piece rate Standard Mail
(A), or Standard Mail (B)''; in 4.1, replace ``First-Class or bulk
third-class'' with ``First-Class Mail or bulk rate Standard Mail (A)'';
in 4.12, replace ``Presorted First-Class, ZIP+4 Presort, or one of the
Barcoded'' with ``Automation''; in 4.13, replace ``[T]hird-[C]lass''
with ``Standard Mail (A)''; in 4.13c, replace ``3/5 presort, basic
ZIP+4, or one of the Barcoded minimum per-piece rates'' with
``Nonprofit 3/5 presort, Nonprofit Basic ZIP+4, or one of the Nonprofit
Barcoded minimum per piece rates for Nonprofit Standard Mail, or an
Automation minimum per piece rate for other Standard Mail (A)''; in
4.14d, replace ``First- or third-class'' with ``First-Class or Standard
Mail (A),'' delete 4.14e, redesignate 4.14f as 4.14e and replace
``third-class'' with ``Standard Class (A)''; delete 4.17c and
redesignate 4.17d and 4.17e as 4.17c and 4.17d, respectively; in
redesignated 4.17d, replace ``in (b) (and (c) and (d), as applicable)''
with ``in (b) (and (c) if applicable)''; no other change in text.]
[[Page 66696]]
P020 Postage Stamps and Stationery
P021 Stationery Bearing Postage
[In 1.1b, replace ``special bulk third-class'' with ``Nonprofit
Standard Mail''; in 2.5b, replace ``Express, First-, or third-class
mail'' with ``Express Mail, First-Class, or Standard Mail (A); in 2.5a,
2.5c, and 2.5d, replace ``third-class,'' ``THIRD-CLASS,'' and ``third-
class'' with ``Standard Mail (A),'' ``STANDARD MAIL,'' and ``Standard
Mail (A),'' respectively; no other change in text.]
* * * * *
P023 Precanceled Stamps
[In 1.2, replace ``third-class'' with ``Standard Mail (A)''; in 1.12,
replace ``Third-Class Mail'' with ``Standard Mail''; in 3.5a, replace
``third-class mail'' with ``Standard Mail''; no other change in text.]
P030 Postage Meters and Meter Stamps
[In 1.4, replace ``second-class'' with ``Periodicals''; in 1.5 and
1.5c, replace ``special fourth-class'' with ``Special Standard Mail'';
in 4.8 and 4.9, replace ``third- or fourth-class'' with ``Standard
Mail''; in 5.3a, replace ``First- or third-class mail'' with ``First-
Class or Standard Mail (A)''; no other change in text.]
P040 Permit Imprints
[In 2.5 and 3.5b, replace ``bulk third-class mail'' with ``bulk rate
Standard Mail (A)''; in 3.2, replace ``[S]econd-[C]lass Mail'' with
``Periodicals''; in 3.3, replace ``[T]hird- and [F]ourth [C]lass'' with
``Standard Mail''; in 3.5a, replace ``third- or fourth-class'' with
``Standard Mail''; in Exhibit 4.1a, replace ``Presorted,'' ``ZIP+4
Presort,'' ``Third-Class,'' ``Bulk Rate,'' ``Fourth-Class,'' and
``Special Fourth-Class'' with ``Presort,'' ``First-Class Mail Auto,''
``Standard Mail (A),'' ``Presort,'' ``Standard Mail (B),'' and
``Special Standard Mail,'' respectively; in Exhibit 4.1b, replace
``Presorted,'' ``Third- and Fourth-Class,'' ``Third-Class,'' ``Bulk
Rate,'' ``Bulk Rate Car-Rt Sort,'' ``Bulk Rate,'' ``Third-Class,''
``Fourth-Class,'' and ``Special Fourth-Class'' with ``Presort,''
``Standard Mail'' ``Standard Mail (A),'' ``Presort,'' ``Enhanced
Carrier Route,'' ``Presort,'' ``Standard Mail (A),'' ``Standard Mail
(B),'' and ``Special Standard Mail,'' respectively; no other change in
text.]
P070 Mixed Classes
[In 1.1, replace ``second-, third-, or fourth-class'' with
``Periodicals or Standard Mail''; in 1.1, 1.2, 2.1, 2.2, 2.4, 2.5,
2.5d, 2.6, 2.6d, 2.7, 2.9, 2.9b, and 3.2, replace ``First- or third
class'' with ``First-Class or Standard Mail (A)''; in 1.3, 2.7, and
2.8, replace ``third-class' with ``Standard Mail (A)''; in 2.0, 2.1,
2.2, 2.4, 2.5, 2.6, 2.7, 2.9, 2.9a, and 4.2, replace ``second-class''
with ``Periodicals''; in 3.0, replace ``third- and fourth-class'' with
``Standard Mail''; in 5.0 and 5.4, replace ``special fourth-class''
with ``Special Standard Mail''; no other change in text.]
P100 First-Class Mail
* * * * *
2.0 RETAIL SINGLE-PIECE RATES
[In 2.1, replace ``regular'' with ``Retail.'']
* * * * *
4.0 RETAIL PRESORT RATES
4.1 Payment Methods
Postage on mailings made at Retail Presort First-Class rates must
be paid with meter stamps, permit imprints, or precanceled postage,
subject to the corresponding standards. All pieces in a mailing must be
paid with the same method unless otherwise permitted by standard or
USPS authorization.
4.2 Postage Affixed, Generally
Unless permitted by other standards or authorized by the USPS, when
precanceled postage or meter stamps are used, each piece must bear the
correct postage at the Retail First-Class rate for which it qualifies.
[Delete current 4.3, 4.4, and 4.5, and renumber 4.6 as 4.3.]
* * * * *
5.0 AUTOMATION RATES
5.1 Payment Methods
Postage on mailings made at Automation rates must be paid with
meter stamps, permit imprints, or precanceled postage, subject to the
corresponding standards. All pieces in a mailing must be paid by the
same method unless otherwise permitted by standard or USPS
authorization. Permit imprints may be used for mailings of
nonidentical-weight pieces only if authorized by the RCSC serving the
mailing post office.
5.2 Postage Affixed, Generally
Unless permitted by other standards (e.g., 5.2c) or authorized by
the USPS, when precanceled postage or meter stamps are used, only one
payment method may be used in a mailing and each piece must bear the
correct postage at the rate for which it qualified. In a metered or
precanceled stamp mailing:
a. Each piece weighing more than 1 ounce must bear the correct
amount of additional postage to pay for the additional ounces.
b. Flat-size pieces must bear enough postage to include the
nonstandard surcharge if applicable.
c. Each piece may bear postage at the lowest rate applicable to
pieces in the mailing if all additional postage is paid at the time of
mailing by advance deposit account or by a meter strip affixed to the
required mailing statement.
d. Documentation meeting the standards in P012 must be presented
with the mailing statement to show the number of pieces at each rate
and the computation of the additional postage due for pieces not
bearing full postage at the applicable rate (i.e., the difference
between what the pieces bear and the correct postage at the rate for
which each qualifies).
* * * * *
P200 Periodicals
[In 1.3, 1.4, 1.9, 1.11, 1.12, 2.4, and 4.0, replace ``second-class''
with ``Periodicals''; in 1.9, replace ``third- or fourth-class'' with
``Standard Mail''; revise other sections as follows:]
* * * * *
2.0 MONTHLY MAILINGS STATEMENT
* * * * *
2.4 Waiving Advertising Rates
[Revise the first sentence to read:]
Instead of marking a copy of each issue to show the advertising and
nonadvertising portions, the publisher may pay postage at the
advertising zone rates on both portions of all issues or editions of a
Periodicals publication (except a requester or Publications Service
publication). * * *
[Delete current 3.0 (key rates were eliminated as of 11/1/95);
redesignate 4.0 as 3.0; delete current P300 and P400 but incorporate
text into new P600 as shown below; no change in P500.]
* * * * *
P600 Standard Mail
1.0 BASIC INFORMATION
1.1 Payment Method
Subject to the corresponding standards, postage for single-piece
rate Standard Mail may be paid by any method; postage for bulk rate
Standard Mail may be paid with meter or permit imprints. Postage for
bulk rate Standard Mail (A) may also be paid with precanceled stamps.
Postage-affixed pieces must bear the correct postage unless excepted by
standard. A permit imprint may be used for mailings of
[[Page 66697]]
nonidentical-weight pieces only if authorized by the RCSC serving the
office of mailing. The mailer is responsible for proper payment of
postage.
1.2 Mailing Statement
The mailer must submit a complete and signed mailing statement, as
specified in P012, with every Standard Mail mailing for which postage
is paid with a permit imprint or claimed at any bulk rate.
2.0 REGULAR, NONPROFIT, AND ENHANCED CARRIER ROUTE RATES
[Text of current P300.2.0, revised as follows:]
2.1 Identical-Weight Pieces
Bulk mailings of identical-weight pieces at 3/5 rates may have
postage affixed at the respective rate to each piece in the mailing
with additional postage for pieces subject to the basic presort rate
paid either by an advance deposit account or with a meter strip affixed
to the back of the accompanying mailing statement. The 3/5 presort rate
pieces and carrier route presort or walk-sequence rate pieces may not
be part of the same mailing nor (except under D600) reported on the
same mailing statement.
* * * * *
3.0 AUTOMATION RATES
[Text of current P300.3.0, revised as follows:]
3.1 Method
[Revise the first sentence to read:]
Postage on mailings made at all Automation and Nonprofit ZIP+4 and
Barcoded rates must be paid with meter stamps, permit imprints, or
precanceled postage, under applicable standards. * * *
* * * * *
P700 Special Postage Payment Systems
P710 Manifest Mailing System (MMS)
[In 1.0, replace ``second-class'' with ``Periodicals''; in 2.6 and 3.1,
replace ``First- or third-class'' with ``First-Class or Standard Mail
(A)''; in Exhibit 3.1, replace ``Third-Class'' with ``Standard Mail
(A)''; combine and revise current 3.3 and 3.4 as shown below and
renumber current 3.5 as 3.4; no other change in text.]
* * * * *
3.3 Rate Category Abbreviations--Letter-Size Mail
Keylines on letter-size First-Class Mail or bulk Standard Mail (A)
must use only the rate category abbreviations in 3.3a or 3.3b,
respectively. All mailpieces that qualify for more than one rate of
postage must show each rate category abbreviation, separated by a ``/''
(slash) (e.g., ZP/DS).
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Code Rate category
------------------------------------------------------------------------
a. First-Class Mail
------------------------------------------------------------------------
AC AUTOMATION CARRIER ROUTE
AV AUTOMATION 5-DIGIT [Letters]
AT AUTOMATION 3-DIGIT [Letters]
AF AUTOMATION 3/5 [Flats]
AB AUTOMATION BASIC
RP RETAIL PRESORT
------------------------------------------------------------------------
b. Standard Mail (A)
------------------------------------------------------------------------
AC AUTOMATION CARRIER ROUTE
AV AUTOMATION 5-DIGIT [Letters]
AT AUTOMATION 3-DIGIT [Letters]
AF AUTOMATION 3/5 [Flats]
AB AUTOMATION BASIC
RA REGULAR 3/5
RB REGULAR BASIC
EB ENHANCED CARRIER ROUTE BASIC
EH ENHANCED CARRIER ROUTE HIGH DENSITY
ES ENHANCED CARRIER ROUTE SATURATION
ZB NONPROFIT 5-DIGIT ZIP+4 BARCODED
TB NONPROFIT 3-DIGIT ZIP+4 BARCODED
BB NONPROFIT BASIC ZIP+4 BARCODED
ZP NONPROFIT 3/5 ZIP+4
ZN NONPROFIT BASIC ZIP+4
ST NONPROFIT SATURATION WALK SEQUENCE
HD NONPROFIT 125-PIECE WALK SEQUENCE
CP NONPROFIT CARRIER ROUTE
FD NONPROFIT 3/5 PRESORT
BA NONPROFIT BASIC PRESORT
DB DESTINATION BMC
DS DESTINATION SCF
DD DESTINATION DELIVERY UNIT
------------------------------------------------------------------------
* * * * *
P720 Optional Procedure (OP) Mailing System
[In 1.1, replace ``First-, third-, and fourth-class'' with ``First-
Class and Standard Mail''; no other change in text.]
* * * * *
P750 Plant-Verified Drop Shipment (PVDS)
[In 1.1, 1.2b, 1.3a, 2.4, 2.6, 2.12a, and 5.1, replace ``[S]econd-
class'' with ``Periodicals''; in 1.2c, 2.5, and 2.11, replace
``[T]hird- and [F]ourth-class''
[[Page 66698]]
with ``Standard Mail''; in 1.3b, 2.2e, and 2.5, replace ``third- or
fourth-class'' with ``Standard Mail''; in 2.7, 2.9, 2.12b, 5.2, and
6.0, replace [T]hird-[C]lass ``with ``Standard Mail (A)''; in 2.8,
2.12c, 5.3, 7.0, and 7.2, replace ``[F]ourth-[C]lass'' with ``Standard
Mail (B)''; no other change in text.]
P760 First-Class or Standard Mail Mailings With Different Postage
Payment Methods
[In 1.1 and 4.1, replace ``First- or third-class'' with ``First-Class
or Standard Mail (A)''; in 3.1e, 3.2, and 3.3a, replace ``third-class''
with ``Standard Mail (A)''; in 3.3a, replace ``Presorted First-Class''
with ``Retail Presort First-Class''; in Exhibit 4.6, replace ``First-
Class and Third-Class ZIP+4 Barcoded,'' ``ZIP+4 Barcoded,'' and ``3rd''
with ``First-Class and Standard Mail Automation and Barcoded'';
``Automation or Barcoded,'' and ``STD,'' respectively; revise 2.0 as
shown below; no other change in text.]
* * * * *
2.0 POSTAGE
2.1 Payment for Metered Pieces--First-Class
Metered pieces in a combined mailing must bear postage for the
first ounce at an Automation rate for which the pieces are eligible
and, if applicable, the full amount of postage due for additional
ounces. Additional postage due for metered pieces in a combined mailing
is deducted from the mailer's advance deposit account.
2.2 Payment for Metered Pieces--Standard Mail (A)
Metered pieces in a combined mailing must bear postage at an
Automation rate (or, in combined Nonprofit mailings only, at a
Nonprofit rate) for which the pieces are eligible. Additional postage
due for metered pieces in a combined mailing is deducted from the
mailer's advance deposit account.
2.3 Payment for Precanceled Pieces--First-Class
Pieces with precanceled stamps in a combined mailing must bear
postage for the first ounce in any denomination of precanceled stamp
permitted in an Automation rate mailing and the full applicable amount
of postage due for additional ounces. Additional postage due for
precanceled stamp pieces in a combined mailing is deducted from the
mailer's advance deposit account.
2.4 Payment for Precanceled Pieces--Standard Mail (A)
Pieces with precanceled stamps in a combined mailing must bear
postage in any denomination of precanceled stamp permitted in an
Automation rate or Nonprofit Barcoded rate mailing. Nonprofit postage
may appear only on pieces in a Nonprofit rate mailing that are eligible
for and claimed at a Nonprofit rate. Additional postage due for
precanceled stamp pieces in a combined mailing is deducted from the
mailer's advance deposit account.
2.5 Permit Imprint--First-Class and Standard Mail (A)
Pieces in a combined mailing may bear the permit imprint of the
mailer or the mailer's clients. Postage for the permit imprint part of
a combined mailing must be paid by the advance deposit account
maintained or combined mailings. Postage is deducted only from this
account, regardless of the permit numbers or company permit imprints on
pieces in a combined mailing.
R Rates and Fees
R000 Stamps and Stationery
1.0 PLAIN STAMPED ENVELOPES
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Quantity and price
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Denomination Each (less
Kind Size \1\ or value than 500) 500 1,000
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Regular......................... 6\3/4\ $0.32 $0.38 $168.20 $336.40
10 0.32 0.38 172.00 344.00
Single.......................... 6\3/4\ 0.32 0.38 169.00 338.00
Window.......................... 10 0.32 0.38 173.00 346.00
Special......................... 6\3/4\ 0.32 0.38 170.50 341.00
Regular \2\..................... 10 0.32 0.38 175.00 350.00
Bulk Rate:
Regular..................... 10 0.10 .............. 62.00 124.00
Nonprofit................... 6\3/4\ 0.05 .............. 33.20 66.40
Regular..................... 10 0.05 .............. 37.00 74.00
Nonprofit................... 6\3/4\ 0.05 .............. 34.00 68.00
Sngl. Wndw.................. 10 0.05 .............. 38.00 76.00
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
\1\ Size 10 includes all intermediate sizes through 10.
\2\ Envelopes with multicolor indicia such as a Love stamp or a hologram.
2.0 PERSONALIZED STAMPED ENVELOPES
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Quantity and price
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Denomination
Kind Size \1\ or value 50 500 1,000
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Regular......................... 6\3/4\ $0.32 $19.00 $172.60 $345.20
10 0.32 19.20 176.40 352.80
Single.......................... 6\3/4\ 0.32 19.10 173.40 346.80
Window.......................... 10 0.32 19.30 177.40 354.80
Special......................... 6\3/4\ 0.32 19.00 174.90 349.80
Regular \2\..................... 10 0.32 19.20 179.40 358.80
Bulk Rate:
Regular..................... 10 0.10 .............. 66.40 132.80
Nonprofit................... 6\3/4\ 0.05 .............. 37.60 75.20
[[Page 66699]]
Regular..................... 10 0.05 .............. 41.40 82.80
Nonprofit................... 6\3/4\ 0.05 .............. 38.40 76.80
Sngl. Wndw.................. 10 0.05 .............. 42.40 84.80
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
\1\ Size 10 includes all intermediate sizes through 10.
\2\ Envelopes with multicolor indicia such as a Love stamp or a hologram.
3.0 POSTAL CARDS
Postal cards in sheets, per sheet--$8.40.
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Denomination Description
------------------------------------------------------------------------
$0.21............................. Domestic regular or commemorative,
cut single card.
0.21.............................. Domestic regular, sheet of 40.
0.42.............................. Domestic regular, double reply-paid
card.
------------------------------------------------------------------------
4.0 POSTAL STAMPS
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Purpose Form Denomination
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Regular Postage........................... Panes of up to 100........................ $0.01, .02, .03, .04,
.05, .10, .20, .23,
.25, .29, .30, .32,
.35, .40, .45, .46,
.50, .52, .55, .60,
.75, .78, $1, $2, $3,
$5, $10.75.
Booklets.................................. $0.20 ($2.00 booklet),
$0.32 ($3.20 or $6.40
booklets).
Coils of 100 $0.20, .23 (additional oz.
postage), .32..
Coils of 500.............................. $0.01, .02, .03, .04,
.05, .10, .20, .23,
.32, $1.
Coils of 3,000, Coals of 10,000........... $0.01, .02, .03, .04,
.05, .10, .20, .23, .32
$0.05, .32.
Precanceled Postage--Bulk Rate First-Class Coil of 500, 3,000, and 10,000............ Various nondenominated;
and Standard Mail (A). available only to
permit holders.
Comemorative.............................. Panes of up to 50......................... $0.32 or other
denominations,
including international
rates, as announced.
20-Stamp Booklets......................... $0.32 ($6.40. booklets).
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
R100 First-Class Mail
1.0 RETAIL SINGLE-PIECE RATES
1.1 Cards
Single and double postal cards and postcards meeting the standards
in C100 and E110:
Single--$0.21 each
Double--0.42 ($0.21 each part)
1.2 Letters, Flats, and Parcels
Letters, flats, and parcels (i.e., matter not eligible for card
rates); surcharge might apply under 9.0:
First ounce or fraction of an ounce--$0.32
Each additional ounce or fraction of an ounce--0.23
2.0 RETAIL PRESORT RATES
2.1 Cards
Single and double postal cards and postcards meeting the standards
in C100 and E110: $0.190 each.
2.2 Letters, Flats, and Parcels
Letters, flats, and parcels (i.e., matter not eligible for card
rates); surcharge might apply under 9.0:
First ounce or fraction of an ounce:
(For pieces weighing not more than 2 ounces)--$0.300
(For pieces weighing more than 2 ounces)--0.254
Each additional ounce or fraction of an ounce--0.230
3.0 AUTOMATION BASIC RATES
3.1 Cards
Single and double postal cards and postcards meeting the standards
in C100 and E110: $0.175 each.
3.2 Letter-Size Pieces
Letter-size pieces other than cards:
First ounce or fraction of an ounce:
(For pieces weighing not more than 2 ounces)--$0.270
(For pieces weighing more than 2 ounces)--0.224
Each additional ounce or fraction of an ounce--0.230
3.3 Flat-Size Pieces
Surcharges might apply under 9.0:
First ounce or fraction of an ounce:
(For pieces weighing not more than 2 ounces)--$0.290
(For pieces weighing more than 2 ounces)--0.244
Each additional ounce or fraction of an ounce--0.230
4.0 AUTOMATION 3-DIGIT RATES
4.1 Cards
Single and double postal cards and postcards meeting the standards
in C100 and E110: $0.155 each.
4.2 Letter-Size Pieces
Letter-size pieces other than cards:
First ounce or fraction of an ounce:
(For pieces weighing not more than 2 ounces)--$0.250
(For pieces weighing more than 2 ounces)--0.204
Each additional ounce or fraction of an ounce--0.230
5.0 AUTOMATION 5-DIGIT RATES
5.1 Cards
Single and double postal cards and postcards meeting the standards
in C100 and E110: $0.140 each.
5.2 Letter-Size Pieces
Letter-size pieces other than cards:
First ounce or fraction of an ounce:
(For pieces weighing not more than 2 ounces)--$0.235
(For pieces weighing more than 2 ounces)--0.189
Each additional ounce or fraction of an ounce--0.230
[[Page 66700]]
6.0 AUTOMATION 3/5 RATES (FLAT-SIZE PIECES)
Surcharges might apply under 9.0:
First ounce or fraction of an ounce:
(For pieces weighing not more than 2 ounces)--$0.270
(For pieces weighing more than 2 ounces)--0.224
Each additional ounce or fraction of an ounce--0.230
7.0 AUTOMATION CARRIER ROUTE RATES
7.1 Cards
Single and double postal cards and postcards meeting the standards
in C100 and E110: $0.137 each.
7.2 Letter-Size Pieces
Letter-size pieces other than cards:
First ounce or fraction of an ounce:
(For pieces weighing not more than 2 ounces)--$0.232
(For pieces weighing more than 2 ounces)--0.186
Each additional ounce or fraction of an ounce--0.230
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Retail Automation
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Carrier
Single- Presort Basic 3-digit 5-digit route Basic 3/5
piece (letters) (letters) (letters) (letters) (flats) (flats)
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Letters, flats, and parcels weight not over (ounces):
1 \1\.............................................. $0.32 $0.300 $0.270 $0.250 $0.235 $0.232 $0.290 $0.270
2.................................................. 0.55 0.530 0.500 0.480 0.465 0.462 0.520 0.500
3.................................................. 0.78 0.714 0.684 0.664 0.649 0.646 0.704 0.684
4.................................................. 1.01 0.944 0.914 0.894 0.879 0.876 0.934 0.914
5.................................................. 1.24 1.175 (\5\) (\3\) (\3\) (\3\) 1.164 1.144
6.................................................. 1.47 1.404 (\3\) (\3\) (\3\) (\3\) 1.394 1.374
7.................................................. 1.70 1.634 (\3\) (\3\) (\3\) (\3\) 1.624 1.604
8.................................................. 1.93 1.864 (\3\) (\3\) (\3\) (\3\) 1.854 1.834
9.................................................. 2.16 2.094 (\3\) (\3\) (\3\) (\3\) 2.084 2.064
10................................................. 2.39 2.324 (\3\) (\3\) (\3\) (\3\) 2.314 2.294
11................................................. 2.62 2.554 (\3\) (\3\) (\3\) (\3\) 2.544 2.524
Postcards Postal Cards:
Single............................................. 0.21 0.190 0.175 0.155 0.140 0.137 .......... ..........
Double \2\......................................... 0.42 0.380
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
\1\ Surcharges might apply.
\2\ Rates shown apply to each single or double postcard when originally mailed; reply half of double postcards must bear full postage at applicable
rates when returned.
\3\ Weight not to exceed 3.4383 oz.
Summary of First-Class Rates
[Renumber current 10.0 as 8.0; no change in text.]
9.0 NONSTANDARD SURCHARGE
Retail single-piece rate pieces, each $0.11.
Retail Presort and Automation rate pieces, each: $0.05.
[Renumber current 12.0 through 14.0 as 10.0 through 12.0; no change in
text.]
R200 Periodicals
[Renumber current 1.0 through 7.0 as 2.0 through 8.0; insert new 1.0
and revise current text as shown below:]
1.0 PUBLICATIONS SERVICE RATES
1.1 Pound Rates
Pound rates, per pound or fraction:
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Zone Rate
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Delivery Office................................................ $0.108
SCF............................................................ 0.129
1 & 2.......................................................... 0.150
3, 4 & 5....................................................... 0.193
6, 7 & 8....................................................... 0.311
------------------------------------------------------------------------
1.2 Piece Rates
Per addressed piece:
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Presort level Rate
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Basic.......................................................... $0.147
Carrier Route.................................................. 0.083
------------------------------------------------------------------------
1.3 Delivery Office Zone Pieces
For each addressed piece claimed in the pound-rate portion at the
delivery office zone rate, the discount is $0.021.
1.4 SCF Zone Pieces
For each addressed piece claimed in the pound-rate portion at the
SCF zone rate, the discount is $0.011.
2.0 REGULAR RATES
2.1 Pound Rates
Pound rates are:
For the nonadvertising portion--$0.194 per pound or fraction.
For the advertising portion, per pound or fraction:
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Zone Rate
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Delivery Office................................................ $0.218
SCF............................................................ 0.239
1 & 2.......................................................... 0.259
3.............................................................. 0.268
4.............................................................. 0.294
5.............................................................. 0.332
6.............................................................. 0.372
7.............................................................. 0.420
8.............................................................. 0.462
------------------------------------------------------------------------
2.2 Piece Rates
Per addressed piece:
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Barcoded Barcoded
Presort level Regular (letter- (flat-
size) size)
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Basic...................................... $0.272 $0.226 $0.237
3/5........................................ 0.217 0.188 0.188
Carrier route.............................. 0.166
High density............................... 0.159
Saturation................................. 0.146
------------------------------------------------------------------------
2.3 Nonadvertising Adjustment
For each 1% of nonadvertising content, the nonadvertising
adjustment is $0.00066 per piece.
2.4 Delivery Office Zone Pieces
For each addressed piece claimed in the pound-rate portion at the
delivery office zone rate, the discount is $0.021.
2.5 SCF Zone Pieces
For each addressed piece claimed in the pound-rate portion at the
SCF zone rate, the discount is $0.011.
* * * * *
[[Page 66701]]
6.0 SCIENCE-OF-AGRICULTURE RATES
6.1 Pound Rates
Pound rates are:
For the nonadvertising portion--$0.194 per pound or fraction.
For the advertising portion, per pound or fraction:
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Zone Rate
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Delivery Office................................................ $0.135
SCF............................................................ 0.143
1&2............................................................ 0.159
3.............................................................. 0.268
4.............................................................. 0.294
5.............................................................. 0.332
6.............................................................. 0.372
7.............................................................. 0.420
8.............................................................. 0.462
------------------------------------------------------------------------
6.2 Piece Rates
Per addressed piece:
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Barcoded Barcoded
Presort level Regular (letter- (Flat-
size) Size)
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Basic...................................... $0.272 $0.226 $0.237
3/5........................................ 0.217 0.188 0.188
Carrier route.............................. 0.166
High density............................... 0.159
Saturation................................. 0.146
------------------------------------------------------------------------
6.3 Nonadvertising Adjustment
For each 1% of nonadvertising content, the nonadvertising
adjustment is $0.00066 per piece,
6.4 Delivery Office Zone Pieces
For each addressed piece claimed in the pound-rate portion at the
delviery office zone rate, the discount is $0.021.
6.5 SCF Zone Pieces
For each addressed piece claimed in the pound-rate portion at the
SCF zone rate, the discount is $0.011.
7.0 APPLICATION FEES
Original entry''$305.00.
Publications Service entry--$305.00
News agent registry''$50.00.
Additional entry''$85.00.
Reentry''$50.00.
[Delete current R300 and R400, revise and redesignate text of
current R300 and R400 as parts of new R600 as shown below; no
changes in R500.]
R600 Standard Mail
1.0 REGULAR STANDARD MAIL SINGLE-PIECE RATES
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Weight Rate
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Not exceeding 1 oz.............................................. $0.32
Over 1 oz., but not exceeding 2 oz.............................. 0.55
Over 2 oz., but not exceeding 3 oz.............................. 0.78
Over 3 oz., but not exceeding 4 oz.............................. 1.01
Over 4 oz., but not exceeding 5 oz.............................. 1.24
Over 5 oz., but not exceeding 6 oz.............................. 1.47
Over 6 oz., but not exceeding 7 oz.............................. 170
Over 7 oz., but not exceeding 8 oz.............................. 1.93
Over 8 oz., but not exceeding 9 oz.............................. 2.16
Over 9 oz., but not exceeding 10 oz............................. 2.39
Over 10 oz., but not exceeding 11 oz............................ 2.62
Over 11 oz., but not exceeding 13 oz............................ 2.90
Over 13 oz., but not less than 16 oz............................ 2.95
------------------------------------------------------------------------
2.0 KEYS AND IDENTIFICATION DEVICES
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Weight Rate
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Not exceeding 2 oz.............................................. $0.99
Over 2 oz., but not exceeding 4 oz.............................. 1.54
Over 4 oz., but not exceeding 6 oz.............................. 2.09
Over 6 oz., but not exceeding 8 oz.............................. 2.64
Over 8 oz., but not exceeding 10 oz............................. 3.19
Over 10 oz., but not exceeding 12 oz............................ 3.74
Over 12 oz., but not exceeding 14 oz............................ 4.29
Over 14 oz., but less than 16 oz................................ 4.84
------------------------------------------------------------------------
3.0 REGULAR STANDARD MAIL BULK RATES
3.1 Letter-Size Minimum Per Piece Rates--Pieces 0.2067 lb. (3.3071
oz.) or less
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Entry discount Basic 3/5
------------------------------------------------------------------------
None.................................................. $0.261 $0.219
BMC................................................... 0.248 0.206
SCF................................................... 0.244 0.202
------------------------------------------------------------------------
3.2 Nonletter-Size Minimum Per Piece Rates--Pieces 0.2067 lb.
(3.3071 oz.) or less
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Entry discount Basic 3/5
------------------------------------------------------------------------
None.................................................. $0.305 $0.237
BMC................................................... 0.292 0.0224
SCF................................................... 0.288 0.220
------------------------------------------------------------------------
3.3 Piece/Pound Rates--Pieces More Than 0.2067 lb. (3.3071 oz.)
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Basic 3/5
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Per Piece Rates*...................................... $0.163 $0.095
Per Pound Rates* (incl. entry discount if appl.): plus: plus:
None................................................ $0.687 $0.687
BMC................................................. 0.626 0.626
SCF................................................. 0.606 0.606
------------------------------------------------------------------------
*Each piece is subject to both a piece and a pound rate.
4.0 ENHANCED CARRIER ROUTE STANDARD MAIL BULK RATES
4.1 Minimum Per Pieces Rates--Pieces 0.2059 lb. (3.2941 oz.) or
less
------------------------------------------------------------------------
High
Entry discount Basic density Saturation
------------------------------------------------------------------------
None...................................... $0.155 $0.148 $0.135
BMC....................................... 0.142 0.135 0.122
SCF....................................... 0.137 0.130 0.177
Delivery Unit............................. 0.132 0.125 0.112
------------------------------------------------------------------------
4.2 Piece/Pound Rates--Pieces More Than 0.2059 lb. (3.2941 oz.)
------------------------------------------------------------------------
High
Basic density Saturation
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Per Piece Rates*.......................... $0.050 $0.043 $0.030
Per Pound Rates* (incl. entry discount if
appl.): plus plus plus
None.................................... 0.510 0.510 0.510
BMC..................................... 0.446 0.446 0.446
SCF..................................... 0.425 0.425 0.425
Delivery Unit........................... 0.399 0.399 0.399
------------------------------------------------------------------------
* Each piece is subject to both a piece and a pound rate.
5.0 AUTOMATION STANDARD MAIL BULK RATES
5.1 Letter-Size Minimum Per Piece Rates--Pieces 0.2059 lb. (3.2941
oz.) or Less
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Entry discount Basic 3-Digit 5-Digit Carrier route
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
None............................................ $0.175 $0.168 $0.510 $0.141
BMC............................................. 0.162 0.155 0.137 0.128
SCF............................................. 0.158 0.151 0.133 0.124
Delivery Unit................................... .............. .............. .............. 0.119
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
[[Page 66702]]
5.2 Flat-Size Minimum Per Piece Rates--Pieces 0.2059 lb. (3.2941
oz.) or Less
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Entry discount Basic 3/5
------------------------------------------------------------------------
None.................................................. $0.237 $0.190
BMC................................................... 0.224 0.177
SCF................................................... 0.220 0.173
------------------------------------------------------------------------
5.3 Flat-Size Piece/Pound Rates--Pieces More Than 0.2059 lb.
(3.2941 oz.)
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Basic 3/5
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Per Piece Rates *..................................... $0.132 $0.085
Per Pound Rates * incl. entry discount if appl.): plus plus
None................................................ 0.510 0.510
BMC................................................. 0.449 0.449
SCF................................................. 0.429 0.429
------------------------------------------------------------------------
* Each piece is subject to both a piece and a pound rate.
6.0 NONPROFIT STANDARD MAIL BULK RATES
6.1 Letter-Size Minimum Per Piece Rates--Pieces 0.2149 lb. (3.4383
oz.) or Less
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Nonautomation rates Automation rates
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Carrier Saturation Basic Basic 3-digit 5-digit
Entry discount Basic 3/5 route W-S ZIP+4 3/5 ZIP+4 barcoded barcoded barcoded
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
None................................................ $0.124 $0.111 $0.086 $0.083 $0.117 $0.107 $0.106 $0.101 $0.093
BMC................................................. 0.112 0.099 0.074 0.071 0.105 0.095 0.094 0.089 0.081
SCF................................................. 0.106 0.093 0.068 0.065 0.099 0.089 0.088 0.083 0.075
Delivery Unit....................................... ......... ......... 0.063 0.060 ......... ......... ......... ......... .........
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Note: See C810 for additional weight restrictions for automation rates.
6.2 Nonletter-Size Minimum Per Piece Rates--Pieces 0.2149 lb.
(3.4383 oz.) or Less
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Nonautomation rates Automation rates
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3/5-
Entry discount Basic 3/5 Carrier 125-PC W- Saturation Basic 3/5 Basic 3-digit digit
route S W-S ZIP+4 ZIP+4 barcoded barcoded barcoded
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
None.............................................. $0.175 $0.161 $0.128 $0.126 $0.121 ........ ........ $0.149 ........ $0.143
BMC............................................... 0.163 0.149 0.116 0.114 0.109 ........ ........ 0.137 ........ 0.131
SCF............................................... 0.157 0.143 0.110 0.108 0.103 ........ ........ 0.131 ........ 0.125
Delivery Unit..................................... ........ ........ 0.105 0.103 0.098 ........ ........ ........ ........ ........
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Note: Each piece is subject to both a piece and a pound rate. Automation rates are available only for automation-compatible flats (see C820).
6.3 Piece/Pound Rates--Pieces More Than 0.2149 lb. (3.4383 oz.)
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Nonautomation rates Automation rates
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3/5-
Basic 3/5 Carrier 125-PC W- Saturation Basic 3/5 Basic 3-Digit Digit
route S W-S ZIP+4 ZIP+4 barcoded barcoded barcoded
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Per Piece Rates*.................................. $0.074 $0.060 $0.027 $0.025 $0.020 ........ ........ $0.048 ........ $0.042
Per pound rates *(incl. entry discount if appl.): plus plus plus plus plu........ ........ plus ........ plus
None............................................ 0.470 0.470 0.470 0.470 0.470 ........ ........ 0.470 ........ 0.470
BMC............................................. 0.410 0.410 0.410 0.410 0.410 ........ ........ 0.410 ........ 0.410
SCF............................................. 0.386 0.386 0.386 0.386 0.386 ........ ........ 0.386 ........ 0.386
Delivery Unit................................... ........ ........ 0.362 0.362 0.362 ........ ........ ........ ........ ........
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
* Each piece subject to both a piece and a pound rate. Automation rates are available only for automation-compatible flats (see C820).
7.0 PARCEL POST
[Insert text and rates from current R400.1.0 with no change.]
8.0 BOUND PRINTED MATTER
8.1 Single-Piece Rates
[Insert text and rates from current R400.2.0 with no change.]
8.2 Bulk Rates
[Insert text and rates from current R400.3.0 with no change.]
8.3 Bulk Rate Computed Postage Amount With Postage Affixed
[Insert text and rates from current R400.4.0 with no change.]
9.0 SPECIAL STANDARD MAIL RATES
[Insert text and rates from current R400.5.0 with no change.]
10.0 LIBRARY RATES
[Insert text and rates from current R400.6.0 with no change.]
11.0 FEES
11.1 Per 12-Month Period
a. Regular, Enhanced Carrier Route, Automation, and Nonprofit Bulk
Rates--$85.00.
b. Parcel Post Destination BMC Rate--$85.00.
c. Presorted Special Standard Mail--$85.00.
11.2 Address Correction Service
Manual, per notice issued--$0.50.
Automated, per notice issued--$0.20.
[[Page 66703]]
11.3 Pickup
Parcel Post only, per occurrence--$4.95.
12.0 NONSTANDARD SURCHARGE
Applicable to Regular Single-Piece rate pieces only, each--$0.11.
S SPECIAL SERVICES
S000 Miscellaneous Services
* * * * *
S020 Money Orders and Other Services
[Retitle 1.0, 2.0, and 3.0 as ``Issuing Money Orders,'' ``Cashing Money
Orders,'' and ``Use of the Federal Reserves System,'' respectively; add
new 4.0, as shown below.]
4.0 NONPOSTAL SERVICES
4.1 Bird Stamps
Migratory-bird hunting and conservation stamps are required by
federal law for the hunting of migratory birds, such as ducks and
geese. As a convenience to the public, these stamps are sold at all
post offices in CAGs A-J and (based on demand) at designated offices in
CAGs K and L. These facilities act as agents of the federal government
for this function. Blocks composed of two or more attached unused
stamps, sold on consignment to any person but not resold, may be
redeemed at any time on or before the last day of the stamp year.
Stamps validated by signature or stamps that appear removed from a
hunting license or identification card are not accepted.
[Redesignate current S030.2.0, 3.0, and 4.0 as S020.4.2, 4.3, and 4.4,
respectively; no other changes in text; delete current S030.]
S070 Mixed Classes
[In 1.1, replace ``third- or fourth-class mail'' with ``Standard
Mail''; in 1.2, replace ``third- and fourth-class mail'' with
``Standard Mail''; no other change in text.]
S500 Special Services for Express Mail
[In 3.0, replace ``third- or fourth-class mail'' with ``Standard
Mail''; no other change in text.]
* * * * *
S913 Insured Mail
[In 1.2a, replace ``third- and fourth-class mail'' with ``Standard
Mail''; in 1.2b, replace ``third- or fourth-class mail,'' ``Third-Class
Mail,'' and ``Fourth-Class Mail'' with ``Standard Mail,'' ``Standard
Mail (A)'', and ``Standard Mail (B),'' respectively; no other change in
text.]
S914 Certificate of Mailing
[In 1.2, replace ``First-, third-, and fourth-class'' with ``First-
Class and Standard Mail''; in 1.6, replace ``third-class mail'' with
``Standard Mail (A)''; in 2.3, replace ``First- and third-class'' with
``First-Class and Standard Mail (A)''; no other change in text.]
* * * * *
S917 Return Receipt for Merchandise
[In 1.2, replace ``third-class'' and ``special fourth-class'' with
``Standard Mail (A)'' and ``Special Standard Mail,'' respectively; in
1.3, replace ``third-class'' and ``third-class and fourth-class'' with
``Standard Mail (A)'' and ``Standard Mail,'' respectively; no other
change in text.]
S921 Collect on Delivery (COD) Mail
[In 1.2, replace ``First-, third-, and fourth-class'' with ``First-
Class and Standard Mail''; no other change in text.]
* * * * *
S923 Merchandise Return Service
[In 1.1, replace ``third-class and fourth-class'' and ``special fourth-
class'' with ``and Standard Mail'' and ``Special Standard Mail,''
respectively; in 1.7, replace ``third-class, and fourth-class'' with
``and Standard Mail''; in 1.10, replace ``single-piece third-class or
fourth-class parcel post'' with ``Standard Mail single-piece Regular or
parcel post''; in 1.11, replace ``or third- or fourth-class'' and
``Special fourth-class'' with ``Standard Mail (A) or Standard Mail
(B)'' and ``Special Standard Mail,'' respectively; in 3.2, replace
``First-, third-, or fourth-class'' with ``First-Class or Standard
Mail''; in 4.0, replace ``third- or fourth-class,'' ``Third-Class
Mail,'' and ``Fourth-Class Mail'' with ``Standard Mail,'' ``Standard
Mail (A)'', and ``Standard Mail (B),'' respectively; in 4.7 and 5.6d,
replace ``third- or fourth-class'' with ``Standard Mail''; in 4.10,
replace ``third- and fourth-class'' with ``Standard Mail''; no other
change in text.]
S930 Handling
[In 2.2, replace ``third- and fourth-class mail'' with ``Standard
Mail''; in 3.2, replace ``both third-class mail and fourth-class mail''
with ``Standard Mail''; no other change in text.]
[FR Doc. 95-31040 Filed 12-18-95; 10:32 am]
BILLING CODE 7710-12-P
